Allen Bradley

Product Catalogues
Industrial Controls
Automation Systems
Sensors
The Motion Book
AC & DC Adjustable Speed Drives
Control-Matched Variable Speed AC & DC Motors
Safety Products
Rockwell Software
CENTERLINE
Motor Control Centers

Visit us at: http://www.ab.com/mcc
Visit our website at: http://www.ab.com/catalogs
Publication 2100-CA001C-EN-P August, 2005

Supersedes Publication 2100-CA001B-EN-P October, 2004
Copyright 2005 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
New Products in this Catalog

Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Reversing Starters (Bulletin 2106 and 2107) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starters (Bulletin 2112 and 2113) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
PowerFlex 70, 25-50HP at 380-480V (Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
PowerFlex 700, 200HP at 380-480V (Bulletin 2162R and 2163R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMC Flex, 5-85A (Bulletin 2154J and 2155J). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceNet Power Supply Unit, single and redundant design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Plus Overload Relays for Bulletin 2112 and 2113, Size 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 800F Pilot Devices (replaces Bulletin 800E Pilot Devices)
176
141
108
115
Quick Index
Bulletin
Page
Number
Number
2102 . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2103 . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2106 . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2106 Space Saving
NEMA-Rated . . . . . 40
2107 . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2107 Space Saving
NEMA-Rated . . . . . 40
2112 . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2112 Space Saving
NEMA-Rated . . . . . 46
2112 Vacuum. . . . . 42
2113 . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2113 Space Saving
NEMA-Rated . . . . . 46
2113 Vacuum. . . . . 42
2122E . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2122F . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Bulletin
Page
Number
Number
2123E . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2123F . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2126E . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2126F . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2126J . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2126K . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2127E . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2127F . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2127J . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2127K . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2154G . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2154H . . . . . . . . . . . 138
2154J . . . . . . . . . . . 141
2155G . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2155H . . . . . . . . . . . 138
2155J . . . . . . . . . . . 141
2160P . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2160R . . . . . . . . . . . 160
2162P . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Bulletin
Page
Number
Number
2162Q . . . . . . . . . . . 171
2162R . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2162T . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2163P . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2163Q . . . . . . . . . . . 171
2163R . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2163T . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2164Q . . . . . . . . . . . 186
2164R . . . . . . . . . . . 191
2165Q . . . . . . . . . . . 186
2165R . . . . . . . . . . . 191
2172 . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2173 . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2180E . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2180J . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2180L . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2181B . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2182E . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2182J . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Bulletin
Page
Number
Number
2182L. . . . . . . . . . . .209
2183E. . . . . . . . . . . .209
2183J. . . . . . . . . . . .209
2183L. . . . . . . . . . . .209
2190. . . . . . . . . . . . .61
2191F. . . . . . . . . . . .66
2191M . . . . . . . . . . .66
2192F. . . . . . . . . . . .73
2192M . . . . . . . . . . .73
2193F. . . . . . . . . . . .77
2193LE. . . . . . . . . . .86
2193M . . . . . . . . . . .77
2193PP . . . . . . . . . .88
2195. . . . . . . . . . . . .92
2196. . . . . . . . . . . . .92
2197. . . . . . . . . . . . .92
2196Z. . . . . . . . . . . .92
2197Z. . . . . . . . . . . .92
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Hardware Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Appendix
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Heater Element Selection Tables . . . . . 239
Full Load Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Interrupting Capacity Ratings . . . . . . . 246
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings. . . . . . 247
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Enclosed Assemblies from
Rockwell Automation . . . . . . . . Inside Back Cover
Table of Contents
General Information
Vertical Sections
Units
Contactor and Starter Units
Metering Units
Main and Feeder Units
Lighting and Power Panel Units
Transformer Units
Miscellaneous Units
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Contactors and Starters, Metering,

Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, Transformer and Miscellaneous Units
10
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Space Saving NEMA-Rated Starter

Units
11
Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units
12
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC)

Units
13
Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
14
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Variable Frequency

AC Motor Drive Units
15
Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling Panels
16
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Programmable Controllers and

Marshalling Panels
17
Configuration Tables
18
Hardware and Kits
19
Appendix
20
15
21
Index
i
General Information
Vertical Sections
Units
Metering Units
Transformer Units
Miscellaneous Units
10
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Contactors and Starters, Metering,

Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, Transformer and Miscellaneous Units
11
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Space Saving NEMA-Rated Starter

Units
12
13
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC)

Units
14
15
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Variable Frequency

16
17
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Programmable Controllers and Marshalling Panels
18
19
Hardware and Kits
20
15
21
Appendix
ii
Index
General Information
1
2
3
CENTERLINE Motor Control Center
ISO 9001 Certification
Publication Overview
Publication 2100-CA001C-EN-P is a catalog used for
configuration of CENTERLINE Bulletin 2100 Motor Control
Centers (MCCs).
Other Catalogs for CENTERLINE Motor

Control Centers
Publication
2400-CA001x-EN-P [1]
IntelliCENTER Motor Control Center
Title
CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Bulletin
2400 Application-Rated Units
[1] Publication numbers of this format contain a revision character (e.g.,

2100-CA001C-EN-P). This character will increase alphabetically with successive
revisions. Always order and use the latest revision available. The publication
numbers that appear in this publication use x, as a placeholder for the revision
letter. When referencing and/or ordering always use the latest revision available.
Footnotes
While using this publication, please read all footnotes
throughout the publication. Footnotes contain necessary
information about the configuration and limitations of sections,
units and options being offered.
UL/cUL/CSA Marking
CENTERLINE motor control centers (MCCs) are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (file number E49289) as
complying with Standard Safety UL 845 (UL) and either listed by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or certified by Canadian
Standards Association (CSA) as complying with standard C22-2,
No. 254.05 (cUL or CSA). CENTERLINE Motor Control
Centers also meet the requirements in Mexican standard for
MCCs, NMXJ-353-ANCE-2005. The MCC product, sections
and units will therefore carry the respective marking unless
otherwise indicated in the footnotes on the various pages in this
publication.
The facilities that develop and manufacture CENTERLINE

motor control centers are located in Milwaukee and Richland
Center, Wisconsin, Cambridge, Ontario, Canada and Tecate,
Mexico. All facilities have been certified since 1992 as in
conformance to the requirements of Quality Management
System ISO 9001. These facilities presently are certified by Det
Norske Veritas to ISO 9001: 2000, certificate number
CERT-09379-2001-AQ-HOU-RvA/RAB R3,
effective February 5, 2003.
CE Marking
The European Union (EU) has established a program whereby
products are tested and qualified to meet its harmonized
standards and to fulfill the EN Directives. Upon completion of
this testing and qualification, special documentation is required
so the products may bear CE marking. Included with this
program is the requirement for special instruction literature,
product labeling, quality programs, special design requirements,
etc. Generally, the Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE motor control
center product can fulfill these requirements, but due to the
customization that is required, the CE marking of the product is
available only on the Engineered delivery program. In case of
variable frequency drives (as well as other solid-state devices), the
EU deemed it necessary to add an EMC directive
(89/336/EEC). This directive requires more stringent RF
emission and immunity standards than normal. To meet these
requirements and carry the CE mark, the Bulletin 2100 drive
packages can be adapted with EMC tested RFI filters and
additional shielding hardware. These special packages may
require larger MCC enclosures. Note: The CE requirement is for
the European Union/Community and is not a mandate for other
parts of the world. For more information, visit
http://www.ab.com/certification/#cemark.
IEC 60439
The Bulletin 2100 structures, Bulletin 2400 units and many
Bulletin 2100 units fulfill IEC 60439 type tested assembly (TTA)
and unit requirements. Should custom designs and modifications
be required, these can be qualified to IEC 60439 as partially
pre-tested assembly (PTTA) and unit requirements.
General Information
Other Resource Publications for

CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers
Publication
2100-TD027x-EN-P
2100-SR003x-EN-P
2400-SR001x-EN-P
2100-4.2
2100-IN012x-EN-P
2100-6.0.2
2100-DD1
2100-TD005x-EN-P
2100-TD019x-EN-P
Title
CENTERLINE LV MCC Technical Data
CENTERLINE MCC Specification Checklist
IEC Specification Checklist
Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension
Bulletin 2100/2400 User Manual
Renewal Parts Publication
Dimension Drawings
DeviceNet Specification Guide
DeviceNet Hardware Manual
Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales

representative, Allen-Bradley distributor or
www.rockwellautomation.com/literature.
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)

CENTERLINE motor control centers have fulfilled the
requirements and are approved by the American Bureau of
Shipping (certificate 99-SB55875-X). CENTERLINE MCCs do
meet ABS shipping requirements, but due to required
customization, ABS maritime shipping is available only on the
Engineered program.
Seismic Applications
CENTERLINE MCCs meet the requirements for Uniform
Building Code (UBC) Zone 4 seismic applications. Rollout Drive
construction (Bulletins 2162P and 2163P) are not seismic rated.
NEMA Defined
NEMANational Electrical Manufacturers Association.
NEMA Class
The following is a description of Class I, as paraphrased from
NEMA standard ICS 18-2001: Class I motor control centers shall
consist of mechanical groupings of combination motor control
units, feeder tap units, other units and electrical devices arranged
in a convenient assembly. They include connections from the
common horizontal power bus to the units. They do not include
interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely mounted
devices, nor do they include control system engineering. Only
diagrams of the individual units are supplied.
NEMA Class II interwiring offers the addition of interlocking
and wiring between units as specifically described in overall
control system diagrams supplied by the purchaser. Contact your
local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for availability.
NEMA Type
Class I motor control centers can be provided in NEMA Type A
or B construction:
Type AUsers power and control connections are made
directly to the device within the unit.
Type BTerminal blocks are supplied for users control
termination within unit insert. On NEMA size 1 through 3
units, terminal blocks are also supplied for users load
terminations (NEMA Type B-T).
NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison

The following table is a comparison of Allen-Bradley Bulletin
2100 and 2400 NEMA enclosure type numbers to IEC Standard
60529, Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures. The
comparison is based on data from tests conducted on the Bulletin
2100 enclosures and the NEMA enclosure type test
requirements, which meet or exceed the IEC enclosure
classification designation test requirements (i.e., the comparison
is for Bulletin 2100 enclosures only).
NEMA Type 1 vented (with or without gasketed doors)
NEMA Type 1 vented with filters (with or without gasketed doors)
NEMA Type 1 non-vented (without gasketed doors)
NEMA Type 1 with drip hood = NEMA Type 2 (with or without
gasketed doors)
NEMA Type 3R
NEMA Type 12 without bottom plates
NEMA Type 12 with bottom plates
NEMA Type 4
IP20
IP30
IP40
IP41
IP44
IP53
IP54
IP65
NEMA Enclosure Type Descriptions

NEMA Type 1:
Type 1 units and sections are intended for indoor use,
primarily to provide a degree of protection against contact
with the enclosed equipment in locations where unusual
service conditions do not exist. The enclosures are designed
to meet the rod entry and rust resistance design tests. The
enclosure is sheet steel, treated to resist corrosion.
NEMA Type 1 with gasketed doors (sometimes referred to as 1G):
Type 1 with gasketed unit doors are completely gasketed
around the perimeter of the unit doors. All gasketing is
closed cell neoprene.
NEMA Type 3R:
Non-walk-in front mounted only. Door-within-a-door
construction. Type 3R units and sections are intended for
outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection
against falling rain and to avoid damage from the formation
of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet rod entry,
rain, external icing and rust resistance design tests. They are
not intended to provide protection against conditions such
as dust, internal condensation or internal icing.
NEMA Type 4:
Non-walk-in front mounted only. Door-within-a-door
construction. Type 4 units and sections are designed for
indoor and outdoor use, primarily to provide protection
against windblown dust and rain, splashing water and
hose-directed water. They are also designed to remain
undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They
are designed to meet hosedown, external icing, rod entry
and rust-resistance design tests. The enclosures are not
designed to protect against internal condensation or internal
icing.
NEMA Type 12 [1]:
Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily to
provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt and
non-corrosive dripping liquids. They are designed to meet
drip, dust and rust resistance tests. They are not intended to
provide protection against conditions such as internal
condensation.
[1] This publication refers to standard NEMA Type 12 design (i.e., standard sheet
steel). For stainless steel NEMA Type 12 enclosures, Contact your local Rockwell
Automation Sales Office.
General Information
Delivery Programs
Bulletin 2100 products are available on several quick
delivery programs and limited to equipment described in
this publication.
SC and PE:
Products indicating SC or PE delivery provide SC-I and PE-I delivery.
When options are added or specified for a section, time of delivery is
determined by the longest lead time.
SC-I:
This program offers stock-supported, individual plug-in units as well
as vertical sections with field installed plug-in units. This program
applies to all plug-in units and vertical sections unless they are labeled
SC-II. The SC-I program provides the quickest delivery.
SC-II:
This program offers stock-supported vertical sections, with
factory-installed units for a completely assembled MCC. This is either
SC or SC-II. Units specifically labeled SC-II must be factory installed
and are not for plug-in installation in the field.
PE-I and PE-II:
Shading indicates equipment that is offered on the PE-I or PE-II
program. These programs offer a broad range of pre-engineered units
and sections and a slightly longer lead time than our SC programs.
While PE-I units are available for plug-in installation in the field, units
specifically labeled PE-II must be factory installed.
Engineered:
Equipment or modifications not available on the above delivery
programs may be available on the Engineered program. This program
offers the complete line of assembled motor control equipment,
custom wired for the customers needs. Additionally, a wide range of
special control and bus options are offered, making this our most
versatile delivery program. Contact your local Rockwell Automation
Sales Office or Allen-Bradley distributor for more information.
Delivery Time will be based on the equipment with the longest lead
time. Quicker delivery is possible when equipment is separated and
ordered according to the delivery category. For example, if an order has
one engineered plug-in unit and the remaining units and sections are
SC-II - order the engineered unit as a separate item. The SC-II units and
sections will ship on the SC-II delivery program and only the engineered
unit will have a longer delivery time.
Delivery Program Indications

Delivery programs are indicated in the right column on all pages.
PE delivery program is indicated by shaded cells.
Catalog Number
Wiring Type BClass 1
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket
2112B-FA_-__
2112BB-GA_-__
Delivery
Program
SC
PE-II
Service and Storage Conditions

CENTERLINE MCCs conform to NEMA standard ICS 1-1993
for service and storage conditions. All MCCs should have an
ambient operating temperature above 0oC but shall not exceed
40oC with up to 95% non-condensing humidity. If the equipment
is stored, the ambient temperature shall be above -30oC but shall
not exceed 65oC. In addition, MCCs have an altitude class of
2km. The altitude class of 2 km designates equipment for
installation where the altitude does not exceed 2000 meters (6600
feet). For installation above 2000 meters, Contact your local
Rockwell Automation Sales Office for derating requirements.
DeviceNet Products DeviceNet
Look for the DeviceNet logo throughout this publication to find

units and options that are DeviceNet ready to use in the
IntelliCENTER or Bulletin 2100 DeviceNet MCCs. The
components used in these units are DeviceNet compatible and
ODVA certified. Also, the installation conforms to the rules and
guidelines of The Planning and Installation Manual for DeviceNet.
The Bulletin 2100 DeviceNet system (power supply unit, built-in
cabling system, unit cables, etc.) is UL and cUL listed and meets
the requirements of a class 1 power limited circuit (in Canada,
class 1 extra-low-voltage power circuit). Per NEC, this circuit is
supplied from a source that has a rated output of not more than
30 Volts and 1000 Volt-Amperes. The power supply unit has an
8A, 24V output and the DeviceNet cabling is rated 8A, 600V. See
NEC Article 725 for more detailed information.
Type 2 Protection
Short circuit coordination is defined in IEC 60947-4-1.
Type 2 protection (also referred to as Type 2 coordination) is
obtainable when the fuses are specified and sized according to
publication 100-2.8, Certified Type 2 Short Circuit Coordination with
Allen-Bradley Motor Starters. Only Type 1 coordination is available,
other than on specified fuses and circuit breaker units.
Motor Applications
The Motor Control Center Business has made engineering
evaluations for the protective device (circuit breaker or fuse)
selection, sizing and setting range based on the protection
rules/requirements and motor criteria as stipulated in NEC,
NEMA and UL standards (e.g., motor full load currents [FLCs],
X/R ratios, lock rotor currents, nominal utilization voltages, etc.).
Should the motor application have criteria that deviate from
those stated in the aforementioned standards, higher FLC and/or
motor inrush currents (greater than 1300% of the nominal FLC)
may be experienced (e.g., special motors, non-standard NEMA
motors, energy efficient motors, Design E motors, IEC Type N
motors, etc.). To address these cases, consult publications
2100-TD001x-EN-P and 2100-TD002x-EN-P (for circuit
breaker applications), publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P (for
power fuse applications) and the NEC for selection guidance. For
further assistance or information, contact your local Rockwell
Documentation
For assembled motor control centers, the customer is supplied
with a copy of the motor control center layout and specification
(Form 385) and publication 2100-IN012x-EN-P, Bulletin 2100
CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers User Manual. Publication
2100-IN040x-EN-P, Receiving, Handling and Storing Motor Control
Centers, is attached to the outside packaging of each shipping
block. Information on field termination and bus torquing
instructions are located on the inside of each vertical wireway
door. Documentation for individual units consists of a copy of
the unit wiring diagram and installation instructions. This
documentation may be located in a centralized wiring diagram
holder or other location depending on configuration. Manuals for
SMC units, AC drive units, PLC units, etc. are included in the
diagram pocket of each MCC containing these products.
Up to three electronic documentation CDs can be also be
provided for each motor control center. The CD contains the
following:
Equipment list (Elevation) drawings
One-line diagrams
Unit wiring diagrams
Spare parts list
User and installation manuals for Rockwell Automation
products, supplied in the specific motor control center
Test reporting
For other documentation, consult your local Rockwell
Automation sales representative.
1
2
3
1
2
3
General Information
Post Shipment Support

Field Complaints
Field Service
Technical Issues
Repair & Modifications
Warranty Issues
GMC Code 10
Authorization
Domestic and International Renewal Parts Order Services
CENTERLINE MCC:
Email: RAMCCSupport@ra.rockwell.com
Fax: 1-414-382-4045
Phone: 1-440-646-5800
Select Options 2, 5, 1 for Allen-Bradley Brand Products,
Motor Control Centers, Hardware Support
IntelliCENTER MCC:
Email: RAICTechSupport@ra.rockwell.com
Fax: 1-414-382-0505
Phone: 1-440-646-5800
Select Options 2, 5, 2 for Allen-Bradley Brand Products,
Motor Control Centers, IntelliCENTER Support
General Terms and Conditions of Sale

A copy of the general terms and conditions of sale for
CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers can be obtained at
www.rockwellautomation.com/termsofsale.
General Information
Serial Number and Series Letter Information
From 1980 to 1996, only numbers 600000 to 999999 were used.

Refer to Series Identification for the implementation date of series letters on sections and units.
The serial numbers of sections are on the serial plate on the wireway door, for special width sections, the nameplate is located on
the section door. On special width sections, the nameplate is located on the section door.
The serial numbers of units are on the nameplate on the bottom of the units.
SC-I sections or units will have a series letter after the unit or section catalog number.
In late 1995, some SC, SC-II and PE orders were entered on PASSPORT.
Year
1971
1972
1973
Factory Order No.

Start
End
704403
807499
807500
121409
121500
346999
1974
347000
539999
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
540000
719200
933200
268700
526200
748700
898050
719199
933199
268699
526199
748699
898049
661299
1982
661300
804249
1983
1984
1985
1986
804250
948441
693588
849070
1987
612264
1988
791332
Bulletin 2100
Serial Numbers
Start
End
959060
971209
971210
983266
983267
996532
996535
999946
A128502
A483339
A483344
B677442
B677452
C933199
D933200
D268699
E268700
E526199
F526200
F748699
G748700
G898049
H898050
H661299
Section
A
A
A
Unit
A
A
A
None
None
None
None
A
A-B
B
B
B-C
C
C-D
A
A-B
B
B
B-C
C
C-D-E
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
J804249 [1]
K948440
L693587
M849069
N612263
D-E
D-E-F-G
None
948440
693587
849069
612263
J661300 [1]
K804250
L948441
M693588
N849070
E-F
F
G
G-H-J
F-G
F-G-H-J
H-J
H-J-K
None
None
None
None
791331
P612264 [1]
P791331 [1]
None
991197
R791332 [1]
R991197 [1]
None
T834534 [1]
1989
991198
834534
T991198 [1]
None
1990
834535
704948
W834535 [1]
W704948 [1]
J-K
K-M
None
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
704949
995817
732349
773411
795560
818972
NPR624
824312
QBH321
RPH251
TDQ342
VZM603
XWY932
BDPW82
CBJD57
CYPJ48
995816
732348
773410
795559
818971
824311
QBH320
N/A
RPH250
TDQ341
VZM602
XWY931
BDPW81
CBJD56
CYMV52
X704949
Y995817
Z932349
A773411
B795560
C818972
CNPR624
D824312
DQBH321
ERPH251
FTDQ342
GVZM603
HXWY932
JBDPW82
KCBJD57
LCYPJ48
X995816
Y732348
Z773410
A795559
B818971
C824311
CQBH320
N/A
DRPH250
ETDQ341
FVZM602
GXWY931
HBDPW81
JCBJD56
KCYMV52
K
K
K
K
K
M
M
N
N-P
N-P
K-L
P-Q
A
A-B-C
A-C
A-C
A-C
A-C
D
L
L
L
M
M
M
M
M
R
R
T
U
U-V
U-V
U-V
X
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2
3
Bulletin 2400
Series Units
Series
[1] Prefix letters I, O, Q, S, U and V are not used.
1
2
General Information
Series Identification for Sections

This table gives a brief explanation of the series letter changes that have taken place since the original design of the CENTERLINE
Motor Control Center.
Sections
Series
Letter
Scope
A [1]
Original design
[1]
All
Changed terminal blocks
[1]
All
Elimination of external mounting channels
June 1979
[1]
All
Reverse fed 2192 and 2193
April 1981
[1]
All
Redesign gasketing
October 1982
F [1]
All
Modified top horizontal wireway pan to accept units with handle interlock in topmost
space factor
October 1983
G [1]
42K
42K bracingincorporates new bus support and cover
January 1985
[1]
G
H
65K
65K bracingincorporates new bus support and cover
All
All
K
L
M
All
All
All
New hinge design

Changed handle, operating mechanism and circuit breaker to Cutler-Hammer Series
C, 150A, 250A and 400A frame
Changed to new unit grounding system
Changed to new 600A-1200A circuit breaker operating mechanism
Changed to serpentine DeviceNet cabling system
Description of Change
Date Implemented in U.S.

February 1971
November 1976
July 1985
January 1986
October 1986
May 1990
May 1996
May 2001
[1] Replacement and renewal parts are no longer supported. Consult MCC Technical Support.
Complete new series units with comparable features and options can be retrofitted into any series of structures as shown in
the table on page 8.
Section Nameplate Data

When communicating with Rockwell Automation about a particular Allen-Bradley motor control center, the catalog number or serial
number and series letter are required to properly identify the equipment. Refer to publication 2100-IN012x-EN-P, CENTERLINE
Motor Control Centers User Manual, for more information.
Each vertical section has a nameplate (see the figure below) located on
the vertical wireway door. On special width sections, the nameplate is
located on the section door. Information on the section nameplate
includes:)
Catalog number (serial number
Series letter of the section
Maximum bus bar voltage and current rating
Section location number
Unit Label Data

When communicating with Rockwell Automation about a particular Allen-Bradley motor control center, the catalog number or serial
number and series letter are required to properly identify the equipment. Refer to publication 2100-IN012x-EN-P, CENTERLINE
Motor Control Centers User Manual, for more information.
Each unit has a unit label located inside the unit on the bottom plate. See the figure below. Information on the unit nameplate includes:
Serial number
Series letter
Factory order number
Catalog string number
Unit location
System voltage
General Information
Series Identification for Units

This table gives a brief explanation of the series letter changes that have taken place since the original design of the CENTERLINE
motor control center.
Units
Series
Letter
Scope
A [1]
Description of Change
Original design
[1]
All sizes
Changed terminal blocks
C [1]
All sizes
Changed handle mechanism to Cutler-Hammer MCPs
3
February 1971
November 1976
Size 5
Changed from ITE to A-B 400A disconnect
April 1981
[1]
All sizes
Changed from Bulletin 709 series K starters to Bul. 500 line starters
April 1981
F [1]
All sizes
Redesign of gasketing, wraparound and unit support pan for Bulletin 700 line
October 1982
[1]
All sizes
Redesign of gasketing, wraparound and unit support pan for Bulletin 500 line
October 1982
[1]
All sizes
Changed to new door, CB mechanism and control station
J [1]
April 1984
October 1984
Size 3
Changed to new PCP 100A disconnect
Size 6
Changed to Bulletin 500 series B starters
October 1988
Size 1-5 CB units and size 1-2

disc units
Changed handle, operating mechanism and circuit breaker to Cutler-Hammer Series C, 150A,
250A and 400A frame
October 1986
21A through 54A
Changed to Bulletin 100 line contactors in 21A, 30A and 45A SMC units and original design
24A, 35A and 54A SMC units
November 1989
All sizes
Changed to new unit grounding system and 600A, 800A and 1200A bolted pressure switch
May 1990
All sizes
Changed to PCP 200A and 400A disconnect, rerated vacuum Bulletin 2112 and 2113 and new
pilot device offerings
January 1993
0.5 SF CB units 2103L, 2113,

2193
April 1994
All sizes and ratings
New disconnect external auxiliary contacts and new 600A-1200A circuit breaker operating
mechanism
May 1996
SMC units
Redesign and upgrade of ratings for 24A-500A SMC-2 and SMC-PLUS units. Original design
of SMC Dialog Plus units.
August 1997
1200A 2193
Redesign of 1200A, 2193F and 2193M units
November 1997
800A 2193
Changed circuit breakers to MDL Frame
November 1998
225A 2193F
Changed circuit breakers from J Frame to F Frame

Changed to Flange Mounted Operating Handle
All sizes
All 1.5 space factor units
All except 2100-SD1

2100-SD1
Changed the Bulletin 800MR and Bul. 800T-PS pilot devices to Bulletin 800Es
Changed to new Bulletin 1497 control circuit transformer
Changed smoke detector head and base components
Redesign of 240-480V PowerFlex 70 and release of 600V PowerFlex 70
2162R, 2163R, 2164R, 2165R
Original release of PowerFlex 700
2154H, 2155H
Original release of SMC-3
2154J, 2155J
Original release of SMC-Flex
2162T, 2163T
2107, 2113, size 3
2162Q, 2163Q
All sizes
October 1999
November 2000
Changed unit bottom plate
2162Q, 2163Q, 2164Q, 2165Q
2112, sizes 3, 4 and 5
December 1988
External auxiliary on circuit breakers
2000A 2193
June 1979
Changed to Bulletin 500 series L
Redesign to reduced space factor with Class J fuse clip

Original release of PowerFlex 40
Reduced space factor
Reduced space factor, changed CCT with integral fuses
800F Pilot Devices
Date Implemented in U.S.
[1]
Size 5
July 2001
November 2001
April 2002
Beginning July 2002
Beginning November 2002
Beginning April 2004
April 2004
September 2004
April 2005
April 2005
August 2005
Complete new series units with comparable features and options can be retrofitted for any series of structures as shown in the table on page 8.
1
2
3
General Information
Series LetteringUnits and Sections

When using sections in conjunction with units of different series letters, consult the MCC Modifications for Unit and Structure
Compatibility table below. All sections in this publication are series letter L; all units are series letter Q and later.
In 1982, modifications were made to improve the integrity of the gasketing between the unit door and structure of NEMA Type 1 with
gasket and Type 12 sections. This has been accomplished by gasketing the structure instead of the unit door. The change applies to all
Bulletin 2100 units with series letter F and later and all sections series letter E and later. Also, when series H and later units are installed
in a series A through E section in the topmost unit location, a new top horizontal wireway pan is required.
MCC Modifications for Unit and Structure Compatibility
No
Requires
Additional Style
1 Unit
Parts
Support
Pan
Required
Plug-In Units
If Mounted in
this Type of
Section [1],[2]
Space
Factor
NEMA Type 1
Series A-D [5]
NEMA Type 1
Series K or later
NEMA Type 1 w/
gasket or Type 12
Series A-D
NEMA Type 1 w/
gasket or Type 12
Series E-J [8]
NEMA Type 1 w/
gasket or Type 12
Series K or later
A-E [5]
1.0 or larger
0.5 [2]
NEMA Type 1
Series E-J [5],[8]
Series
F-L
[5]
Requires
Style 3
Unit
Support
Pan
Requires
Requires
Requires
Style 3 Unit Alternate Top
Door
Support Pan
Horizontal Gasketing
w/ Bushing Wireway Pan
Kit
Requires Requires
Retrofit
Ground
Kit [3] Bus Kit [4]
2100H-NA4A1
2100H-UA1
2100H-NA4J1 2100-GJ10 2400H-R1 2400H-GS1
2100H-UAJ1 2100H-UJ1 2400H-USPA1
2100H-NA4A2 See page See page See page
See page 228 See page 2400H-USPJ1
See page 228 2100H-NA4J2
225
229
226
228
See page 225
[6]
[6]
M or later [7]
N or later
A-E [5]
[4]
1.0 or larger
F-L [5]
0.5 [2]
M or later [7]
N or later
A-L [5]
M or later
1.0 or larger
A-E [5]
1.0 or larger
0.5 [2]
F-L [5]
M or later
[6]
[6]
N or later
A-E
[5]
1.0 or larger
F-L [5]
M or later
N or later
0.5 [2]
A-L [5]
M or later
1.0 or larger
[4]
[4]
[4]
[1] When installing unit in topmost location in vertical section, care must be taken to comply with the National Electrical Code 6'7 (2.0 m) unit handle-to-floor height limitation. A
unit operating handle extender (2100H-NE1) is available which provides 3 (76.2 mm) added height flexibility. See page 225 for catalog number.
[2] When Bulletin 2100, 0.5 space factor units are ordered unassembled or ordered for existing sections, a centralized wiring diagram holder kit (2400H-WDH) should be ordered. See
page 226.
[3] Permits installation of 0.5 space factor plug-in units in existing series E through J Bulletin 2100 vertical sections. Refer to page 229 for information.
[4] A ground strap can be used to ground units rather than installing a ground bus. See publication 2100-IN014x-EN-P.
[6] Required only if series F or later 1.0 space factor or larger Bulletin 2100 unit is installed in topmost location of series A through E vertical sections.
[7] Consult MCC Technical Support for assistance with possible door hinge requirements.
[8] Series E-J sections cannot accommodate 0.5 space factor units in bottom-most unit location.
General Information
Circuit Breaker Suffix Letter Designation

Type of Circuit Breaker
Standard I.C. Instantaneous Trip Only

Standard I.C. Instantaneous Trip Only
High I.C. Instantaneous Trip Only
Instantaneous Trip Only with Current Limiter
High I.C. Instantaneous Trip with Current Limiter
Standard I.C. Inverse Time
(Thermal Magnetic or Solid-State)
Standard I.C. Inverse Time
Medium I.C. Inverse Time
High I.C. Inverse Time
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) with Current
Limiter
Extra High I.C. Inverse Time
Catalog
Number
Designation
Cutler-Hammer Frame Type

Series C
63A [1]
225A [1]
250A [1]
400A [1]
600A [2]
800A [2]
1200A [2]
2000A [2]
HMCP
HMCP
HMCP
FDB
FD/JD
JD
KD
LD
MDL
MDS
CB
FD
ND
CM
HFD
HFD/HJD
HJD
HKD
HLD
HMDL
HND
RD
WD
CD
FDB-LFD
CX
FDC
JDC
KDC
LDC
NDC
NDC
Old
New
W
WG
WC
CA
CC
WT
CT
WT,
CF
WB
150A [1]
GMCP
HMCP
HMCP-EL
1
2
3
[1] 63A-400A thermal magnetic circuit breakers, except GMCP and HMCP are instantaneous.
[2] 600A-2000A solid-state circuit breakers.
General Information
2
3
10
Vertical Sections
2
Parts Illustration
Typical 15 Deep Section Construction
Lift angle
Top horizontal wireway baffles
Removable top plate
Top horizontal wireway pan
5
Top horizontal wireway cover
Left hand top end closing plate

(Two on 20 deep sections)
Horizontal and vertical bus support
Right hand unit support assembly

(vertical wireway)
Bus splice access cover
Vertical power bus

Horizontal power bus
Section nameplate
Left hand center end closing plate
Vertical to horizontal bus
connection access cover
Vertical bus covers
(Three piece assembly)
Vertical plug-in steel ground bus
Vertical wireway door

Unit support pan
Left hand side plate assembly

Sealing strap
(top and bottom)
Horizontal ground bus,
top or bottom
Bottom support angle

Bottom horizontal wireway cover
Left hand bottom end

closing plate
(Two on 20 deep sections)
For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see page 23
11
Vertical Sections
Catalog Number Explanation for Vertical Sections

2
Maximum SC shipping block is three (3) vertical sections.

End closing plates are supplied on each of the shipping blocks containing incoming line or main breaker sections.
3
Position
First
2100 Bulletin
Number
Code
2100
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
06
Bus Bar
Bracing
Horizontal
Bus Bar
Material
Bus Bar
Plating
Bus Bar
Amperes
Type
CENTERLINE
Motor Control
Center
Code
T
Code
A [1]
B [1]
C
D
Bus Bar
Plating
Tin
Code
A
B
J
Sixth
Seventh
Eighth
Section
NEMA
Type
Section
Depth
Ground
Bus
Ninth
Section
NEMA Type
1
1 with gasket
12
Bus Bar
Material
Aluminum
Aluminum with
NO-OX-ID
Copper
Copper with
NO-OX-ID
Code
1
2
ABC
AAA
ANE
Section Location and Type
See page 13 for description of

Ninth Position
Section Depth
15
20
[1] Vertical bus will be

supplied as Tin plated
Copper
Code
A
B
C
D
E
F
12
Bus Bar Bracing

42 kA Bus Bar Bracing
with automatic shutters
with automatic shutters
with manual shutters
with manual shutters
Code
06
08
12
Code
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
K
N
P
S
T
Bus Bar Amperes

600
800
1200
Horizontal Ground Bus

Unplated copper 0.25 x 1
Vertical Plug-In Ground Bus

Zinc plated steel 0.188 x 0.75
Unplated copper 0.188 x 0.75
Tin plated copper 0.188 x 0.75
Unit Load Ground Bus

Vertical Sections
Catalog Number Explanation for Vertical Sections (SC)

The NINTH POSITION consists of three (3) groups of three (3) letters each.
Each group of three (3) letters represents one (1) section. Select one (1) letter from each column to specify one (1) section.
Separate each section with a dash (e.g., 2100-AAT06-A1B-ABC-AAA-ANE).
If only one (1) section is selected, only one (1) group of three (3) letters is needed.
If two (2) sections are selected, two (2) groups of three (3) letters are needed, separated by a dash.
If three (3) sections are selected, three (3) groups of three (3) letters are needed, with each group of letters separated by a dash.
2
3
Position
Ninth
continued from page 12
ABC
AAA
ANE
Section Location and Type
A 20 Wide Section
A 20 Wide Section
A Standard Section
Z 6.0 Space Factor, Full mounting plate, 8.5 working depth,
without vertical bus and without vertical wireway
B
C
D
E
F
G
A 20 Wide Section
H
J
K
L
M
N
B
7
25 Wide Section with 9 vertical wireway[1]

Corner Section (supplied as a single shipping block only)
A
X
A For plug-in units

X No plug-in units
J
A
B
C
Incoming Line Lugs - Top
D
Incoming Line Lugs - Bottom
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
Main FDS - Top, 600V
E
Main FDS - Bottom, 600V
F
Feeder FDS - Top, 600V
G
Feeder FDS - Bottom, 600V
H
J
K
L
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Main Circuit Breaker - Top
H
Main Circuit Breaker - Bottom
Feeder Circuit Breaker - Top
J
Feeder Circuit Breaker - Bottom
K
See Appendix for circuit breaker interrupting capacity
L
M
N
P
Q
R
S
A
B
Single
Phase, C
Bottom D
Mounted
E
Transformer - 480V Primary
Transformer - 600V Primary
F
J
Three
Phase, K
Bottom L
Mounted
M
Standard Section
A
No Modifications
X
300A, 1.0 Space Factor

600A, Top - in horizontal wireway with pullbox
800A, Top, 1.0 Space Factor with pullbox
1200A, Top - 1.0 Space Factor with pullbox
200A, R-Clips (Available as main only)
200A, J-Clips (Available as main only)
400A, R-Clips
400A, J-Clips
600A, R-Clips
600A, J-Clips
600A, Non-fused (Available as main only)
800A, L-Clips
800A, Non-fused (Available as main only)
1200A, L-Clips
1200A, L-Clips (Available as main only)
225A, JD (Available as main only)
225A, HJD (Available as main only)
225A, JDC (Available as main only)
400A, kD
400A, HKD
400A, KDC
600A, LD
600A, HLD
600A, LDC
800A, MDL
800A, MDLG (Available as main only)
800A, HMDL
800A, HMDLG (Available as main only)
1200A, ND
1200A, HND
1200A, NDG (Available as main only)
1200A, HNDG (Available as main only)
3 kVA (1.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120V Sec.
5 kVA (2.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
7.5 kVA (3.7 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
10 kVA (5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
15 kVA (7.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
25 kVA (12.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
10 kVA (5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/208V Sec.
15 kVA (7.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/208V Sec.
25 kVA (12.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/208V Sec.
30 kVA (15 kVA)[2],[3], 120/208V Sec.
For Plug-in Units
No Modifications
[1] Shipping block maximum is two (2) sections. Cannot ship 20 and 25 wide sections in the same shipping block.
[2] For NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with gasket applications 3kVA and larger, a vented door is provided.
[3] In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3kVA and larger transformers), to maximize the transformers life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded greater
than 50% of its nameplate rating.
13
Vertical Sections

2

POSITION
Description
SECOND
Bus Bar Bracing
THIRD, FOURTH
and FIFTH
Catalog
Number
Character
A
B
C
D
E
F
600A aluminum bus with tin plating [1]
BT06
600A aluminum bus with tin plating and NO-OX-ID [1]

600A copper bus with tin plating
600A copper bus with tin plating and NO-OX-ID
NEMA Type 1
NEMA Type 1 with gasket
NEMA Type 12
15 cabinet depth
NEMA
Enclosure Type
SEVENTH
Section Depth
Bus Bar
Material and
Plating
SIXTH
42kA bus bar bracing

65kA bus bar bracing
42kA bus bar bracing with automatic shutters
65kA bus bar bracing with automatic shutters
42kA bus bar bracing with manual shutters
65kA bus bar bracing with manual shutters
AT06
CT06
CT08
CT12
DT06
DT08
DT12
A
B
J
1
B
C
D
E
EIGHTH
Ground Bus
(Horizontal
ground bus is
mounted at the
bottom of vertical
section.)
H
K
N
P
S
T
SC
20 cabinet depth
Unplated copper horizontal ground bus and vertical plug-in steel ground bus
Unplated copper horizontal ground bus and vertical plug-in unplated copper ground bus
Unplated copper horizontal ground bus, unit load ground bus and vertical plug-in steel ground
bus. If required, select unit load ground connectors on plug-in units. See page 120.
0.25 1
0.25 2
0.25 1
0.25 2
0.25 1
0.25 2
Unplated copper horizontal ground bus, unit load ground bus and vertical plug-in unplated copper 0.25 1
ground bus. If required, select unit load ground connectors on plug-in units. See page 120.
0.25 2
Tin plated copper horizontal ground bus and vertical plug-in tin plated copper ground bus. Select
tin-plated unit ground stabs on all plug-in units. See page 120.
Tin plated copper horizontal ground bus, tin plated copper unit load ground bus and vertical
plug-in tin plated copper ground bus. Select tin plated unit ground stabs on all plug-in units. See
page 120. If required, select unit load ground connectors on plug-in units. See page 120.
NINTH POSITION (On next page)

[1] Vertical bus will be supplied as Tin plated copper
14
Delivery
Program
Description
0.25 1
0.25 2
0.25 1
0.25 2
Vertical Sections

POSITION
Description
Basic Section
Catalog Number
Character
Space
Delivery
Factors Program
Used
Description
AAA
20 wide section, for plug-in units
AZX
wide section, full mounting plate, 8.5 working depth, with
Supplied as a single 20
section block only. horizontal bus, no vertical bus and no vertical wireway
25 wide section with 9 wireway, for plug-in units. Maximum
BAA
shipping block is two sections.
Bottom
Top Entry
Entry
ACJ
300A
1.0
ABA
ACA
600A
1.0
Incoming Line Section
ABB
ACB
600A
1.5
AB_ (top entry)

or
AC_ (bottom entry)
ABC
600ATop entry with 12 pullbox with lug pad in horizontal

wireway (pullbox shipped separately)
0.0
ABD
ACD
800A
1.5
ABE
ACE
800A
2.0
ABF
800ATop entry with 12 pullbox (pullbox shipped separately)
1.0
ABG
ACG
1200A
2.0
ABH
1200ATop entry with 12 pullbox (pullbox shipped separately)
1.0
ADA
ADB
ADC
ADD
ADE
ADF
ADG
ADH
ADJ
ADK
ADL
AEA
AEB
AEC
AED
AEE
AEF
AEG
AEH
AEJ
AEK
AEL
200A
200A
400A
400A
600A
600A
600A
800A
800A
1200A
1200A
R-Clips
J-Clips
R-Clips
J-Clips
R-Clips
J-Clips
Non-fused
L-Clips
Non-fused
L-Clips
Non-fused
#6-4/0 AWG, 1/phase

#6-4/0 AWG, 1/phase
#1/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase
#2-600 kcmil, 2/phase
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
See page 227 for optional lug

selections. List lugs separately.
NINTH
Section
Location
and Type
Main Fusible Disconnect
Section 600V
AD_ (top entry)
or
AE_ (bottom entry)
See page 74 for short circuit withstand
ratings.
6.0
ABJ
AFC
AGC
400A
R-Clips
CU
2.5
Feeder Fusible Disconnect Section

600V
AFD
AGD
400A
J-Clips
CU
2.5
AF_ (top entry)

or
AG_ (bottom entry)
ratings.
AFE
AGE
600A
R-Clips
CU/AL
3.5
AFF
AGF
600A
J-Clips
CU/AL
3.5
AFH
AGH
800A
L-Clips
CU/AL
3.5
AFK
AGK
1200A
L-Clips
CU/AL
3.5
SC
NINTH POSITION (Continued on next page)
15
Vertical Sections

2
3

Ninth positioncontinued from previous page.

POSITION
Description
Main Circuit Breaker

Section
AH_ (top entry)
or
AJ_ (bottom entry)
See page 248 for
circuit breaker
interrupting capacity
NINTH
Section
Location
and Type
Feeder Circuit
Breaker Section
AK_ (top entry)
or
AL_ (bottom entry)
See page 248 for
circuit breaker
Catalog Number
Character
Bottom
Top Entry
Entry
AHA
AJA
AHB
AJB
AHC
AJC
AHD
AJD
AHE
AJE
AHF
AJF
AHG
AJG
AHH
AJH
AHJ
AJJ
AHK
AJK
225A
225A
225A
400A
400A
400A
600A
600A
600A
800A
JD
HJD
JDC
KD
HKD
KDC
LD
HLD
LDC
MDL
AHL
AJL
800A
MDLG
AHM
AJM
800A
HMDL
AHN
AJN
800A
HMDLG
AHP
AHQ
AJP
AJQ
1200A
1200A
ND
HND
AHR
AJR
1200A
NDG
AHS
AJS
1200A
HNDG
AKD
AKE
AKF
AKG
AKH
AKJ
AKK
AKM
AKP
AKQ
ALD
ALE
ALF
ALG
ALH
ALJ
ALK
ALM
ALP
ALQ
400A
400A
400A
600A
600A
600A
800A
800A
1200A
1200A
KD
HKD
KDC
LD
HLD
LDC
MDL
HMDL
ND
HND
NINTH POSITION
(Continued on next page)
16
Space
Factors
Used
Description

250-350 kcmil, 2/phase
#3/0-300 kcmil, 3/phase, with
ground fault
ground fault
ground fault
ground fault
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
CU
2.5
CU
2.5
CU
2.5
CU
CU
3.5
3.5
CU
3.5
CU
3.5
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
Delivery
Program
SC
Vertical Sections

Ninth positioncontinued from previous page

Position
Description
Transformer
Section [1],[2]
NINTH
Section
Location and
Type
AM_
(480V PRIMARY)
or
AN_
(600V PRIMARY)
Corner Section
Catalog Number
Character
480V
600V
Primary Primary
AMA
ANA
AMB
AMC
ANC
AMD
AND
AME
ANE
AMF
ANF
AMJ
ANJ
AMK
ANK
AML
ANL
AMM
ANM
7XX
3
Description
3kVA (1.5kVA), 120V sec. without tap (secondary fused to
120V)
5kVA (2.5kVA), 120/240V sec. without tap (secondary
fused to 240V)
Single 7.5kVA (3.7kVA), 120/240V sec. without tap (secondary
Phase fused to 240V)
Bottom 10kVA (5kVA), 120/240V sec. without tap (secondary
Mounted fused to 240V)
15kVA (7.5kVA), 120/240 sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN,
(4) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused for 240V)
25kVA (12.5kVA), 120/240 sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN,
(4) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused for 240V)
10kVA (5kVA), 120/208V sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN,
(2) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused to 208V)
15kVA
(7.5kVA), 120/208V sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN,
Three
Phase (2) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused to 208V)
Bottom 25kVA (12.5kVA), 120/208V sec. with (2) 2.5% taps
Mounted FCAN, (2) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused to 208V)
30kVA (15kVA), 120/208V sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN,
(2) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused to 208V)
Single section shipping split only. 15 or 20 deep enclosure without
lugs. See page 235 for dimensions.
Space
Factors
Used
Delivery
Program
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
SC
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
6.0
[1] For NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with gasket applications, a vented door is provided.
[2] In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3kVA and larger transformers), to maximize the transformers life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded to greater
than 50% of its nameplate rating.
17
Vertical Sections
Vertical Sections (SC) (Without Vertical Wireway)

2
3
Maximum SC shipping block is one (1) vertical section.

End closing plates are supplied.
Splice kits are not included.
Enclosures without horizontal bus are UL listed under the UL Standard for Safety UL 508 unless otherwise indicated.
Description
Working Depth
(Inches)
Section
Depth
Width
(Inches)
(Inches)
5
15
8.5
(with horizontal bus)
20
11.5
(with horizontal bus) [2]
14
(with horizontal bus) [2]
Vertical
Section
20
20
Includes full six (6.0) space factor

door and mounting plate.
No vertical
wireway.
11.5
15
(without horizontal bus)
14
19
15
20
NEMA Type 1
NEMA Type 12
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
20
2100-EKC1_1D-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC1_1D-_ _ [1]
25
2100-EKC1_2D-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC1_2D-_ _ [1]
30
2100-EKC1_3D-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC1_3D-_ _ [1]
35
2100-EKC1_4D-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC1_4D-_ _ [1]
20
2100-EKC2_1D-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_1D-_ _ [1]
25
2100-EKC2_2D-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_2D-_ _ [1]
30
2100-EKC2_3D-_ _
[1]
2100-EJC2_3D-_ _ [1]
35
2100-EKC2_4D-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_4D-_ _ [1]
20
2100-EKC2_1A-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_1A-_ _ [1]
25
2100-EKC2_2A-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_2A-_ _ [1]
30
2100-EKC2_3A-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_3A-_ _ [1]
35
2100-EKC2_4A-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_4A-_ _ [1]
20
2100-EKC2_1B-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_1B-_ _ [1]
25
2100-EKC2_2B-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_2B-_ _ [1]
30
2100-EKC2_3B-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_3B-_ _ [1]
35
2100-EKC2_4B-_ _ [1]
2100-EJC2_4B-_ _ [1]
20
2100-EKC1_1A [3]
2100-EJC1_1A [3]
25
2100-EKC1_2A [3]
2100-EJC1_2A [3]
30
2100-EKC1_3A [3]
2100-EJC1_3A [3]
35
2100-EKC1_4A [3]
2100-EJC1_4A [3]
40 [4]
2100-EKC1_5A [3]
2100-EJC1_5A [3]
20
2100-EKC1_1B [3]
2100-EJC1_1B [3]
25
2100-EKC1_2B [3]
2100-EJC1_2B [3]
30
2100-EKC1_3B [3]
2100-EJC1_3B [3]
35
2100-EKC1_4B [3]
2100-EJC1_4B [3]
40 [4]
2100-EKC1_5B [3]
2100-EJC1_5B [3]
20
2100-EKC2_1C [3]
2100-EJC2_1C [3]
25
2100-EKC2_2C [3]
2100-EJC2_2C [3]
30
2100-EKC2_3C [3]
2100-EJC2_3C [3]
35
2100-EKC2_4C [3]
2100-EJC2_4C [3]
40 [4]
2100-EKC2_5C [3]
2100-EJC2_5C [3]
[1] The catalog numbers listed are not complete:

Select ground bus option B, C, N, or D from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-EKC1B).
Select bus bar bracing, A or B, from table on 14 (horizontal bus is provided in vertical section; e.g., 2100-EKC1B1D-A).
Select bus bar material and plating from table on 14 (e.g., 2100-EKC1B1D-AAT06).
[2] Horizontal bus is 5 deeper than standard.
[3] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-EKC1B1A).
[4] 40 wide vertical section is a two-door section with a 3-point latch.
18
Delivery
Program
SC
Vertical Sections
Vertical Sections With Fusible Disconnect (SC) (Without Vertical Wireway)

Line side of disconnect is connected to horizontal bus for sections with horizontal bus.
Description
Working Depth
(Inches)
Section
Depth
Width
(Inches) (Inches)
20
25
15
Vertical
Section
Includes full six
(6.0) space factor
door and
mounting plate.
With
disconnecting
means.
No vertical
wireway.
See page 74 for
short circuit
withstand ratings.
Adding equipment
to these sections
may void UL and
C-UL/CSA
certification.
30
35
8.5
(with
horizontal bus)
20
25
20
30
35
Disconnect
Rating
NEMA Type 1
[1]
Catalog Number
(Amperes)
30, 60
100
200
400
30,60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
6405
30, 60
100
200
400
3
NEMA Type 12
[2]
Catalog Number
[2]
Delivery
Program
5
2100-FK_1_1D-_ _-_
2100-FJ_1_1D-_ _-_
2100-FK_1_2D-_ _-_
2100-FJ_1_2D-_ _-_
2100-FK_1_3D-_ _-_
2100-FJ_1_3D-_ _-_
2100-FK_1_4D-_ _-_
2100-FJ_1_4D-_ _-_
SC
2100-FK_2_1D-_ _-_
2100-FJ_2_1D-_ _-_
2100-FK_2_2D-_ _-_
2100-FJ_2_2D-_ _-_
2100-FK_2_3D-_ _-_
2100-FJ_2_3D-_ _-_
2100-FK_2_4D-_ _-_
2100-FJ_2_4D-_ _-_
[1] Disconnect rating must match fuse clip size. Oversizing or undersizing of fuse clips is not permitted.
Select voltage code from page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC).
Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-FKC1B).
Select bus bar bracing, A or B, from table on 14 (horizontal bus is provided in vertical section; e.g., 2100-FKC1B1D-A).
Select bus bar material and plating from table on 14 (e.g., 2100-FKC1B1D-AAT06).
Select fuse clip designator from page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC1B1D-AAT06-24J).
19
Vertical Sections

2
3

Enclosures without horizontal bus are UL listed to the UL Standard for Safety UL 508 unless otherwise indicated, short circuit
withstand rating marking do not apply.
Customer cables connect to line side of disconnect for sections without horizontal bus.
Description
Working
Depth
(Inches)
Section
Depth
Width
(Inches)
(Inches)
20
11.5
(with
horizontal bus)
25
20
[2]
30
35
Vertical
Section
Includes full six
(6.0) space factor
door and
mounting plate.
With
disconnecting
means.
No vertical
wireway.
See page 74 for
short circuit
withstand ratings.
Adding equipment
to these sections
may void UL and
C-UL/CSA
certification.
20
14
(with
horizontal
bus) [2]
25
20
30
35
20
25
11.5
(without
horizontal
bus)
15
30
35
Disconnect
Rating
(Amperes) [1]
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
NEMA Type 1
NEMA Type 12
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
2100-FK_2_1A-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FJ_2_1A-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FK_2_2A-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FJ_2_2A-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FK_2_3A-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FJ_2_3A-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FK_2_4A-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FJ_2_4A-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FK_2_1B-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FJ_2_1B-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FK_2_2B-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FJ_2-_2B-_ _ - _ [3]
SC
2100-FK_2_3B-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FJ_2_3B-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FK_2_4B-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FJ_2_4B-_ _ - _ [3]
2100-FK_1_1A-_ [4]
2100-FJ_1_1A-_ [4]
2100-FK_1_2A-_ [4]
2100-FJ_1_2A-_ [4]
2100-FK_1_3A-_ [4]
2100-FJ_1_3A-_ [4]
2100-FK_1_4A-_ [4]
2100-FJ_1_4A-_ [4]
Select voltage code on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC).
Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g. 2100-FKC2B).
Select bus bar bracing, A or B, from table on 14 (horizontal bus is provided in vertical section; e.g., 2100-FKC2B1B-A).
Select bus bar material and plating from table on 14 (e.g., 2100-FKC2B1B-AAT06).
Select fuse clip designator on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC2B1A-AAT06-24J).
Select voltage code on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC).
Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-FKC1B).
Select fuse clip designator from on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC1B1A-24J).
20
Delivery
Program
Vertical Sections

withstand rating marking does not apply.
Customer cables connect to line side of disconnect for sections without horizontal bus.
Description
Working
Depth
(Inches)
Section
Depth
Width
(Inches)
(Inches)
20
25
11.5 (without
horizontal bus)
20
30
35
Vertical Section
Includes full six
(6.0) space factor
door and
mounting plate.
With
disconnecting
14 (without
means.
horizontal bus)
No vertical
wireway.
20
25
15
30
Adding equipment
to these sections
may void UL and
C-UL/CSA
certification.
35
20
25
19 (without
horizontal
bus)
20
30
35
Disconnect
Rating
(Amperes) [1]
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
30, 60
100
200
400
NEMA Type 1
NEMA Type 12
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
[2]
[2]
Delivery
Program
5
2100-FK_2_1A-_
2100-FJ_2_1A-_
2100-FK_2_2A-_ [2]
2100-FJ_2_2A-_ [2]
2100-FK_2_3A-_ [2]
2100-FJ_2_3A-_ [2]
2100-FK_2_4A-_ [2]
2100-FJ_2_4A-_ [2]
2100-FK_1_1B-_ [2]
2100-FJ_1_1B-_ [2]
2100-FK_1_2B-_ [2]
2100-FJ_1_2B-_ [2]
SC
2100-FK_1_3B-_ [2]
2100-FJ_1_3B-_ [2]
2100-FK_1_4B-_ [2]
2100-FJ_1_4B-_ [2]
2100-FK_2_1C-_ [2]
2100-FJ_2_1C-_ [2]
2100-FK_2_2C-_ [2]
2100-FJ_2_2C-_ [2]
2100-FK_2_3C-_ [2]
2100-FJ_2_3C-_ [2]
2100-FK_2_4C-_ [2]
2100-FJ_2_4C-_ [2]
Select voltage code from on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC).
Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-FKC1B).
Select fuse clip designator from on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC1B1B-24J).
21
Vertical Sections
Vertical Sections With Circuit Breaker (SC) (Without Vertical Wireway)

2
3

interrupting capacity marking does not apply.
Line side of circuit breaker is connected to horizontal bus for sections with horizontal bus.
Customer cables connect to line side of circuit breaker for sections without horizontal bus.
Description
Working Depth
(Inches)
Section
Depth (Inches)
15
8.5
(with
horizontal bus)
20
11.5
(with
horizontal bus) [2]
20
Vertical Section
Includes full six (6.0)
space factor door and
mounting plate.
With disconnecting
means.
No vertical wireway.
See page 248 for
circuit breaker
Adding equipment to
these sections may
void UL and
C-UL/CSA
certification.
14
(with
horizontal bus) [2]
20
15
11.5
(without horizontal
bus)
20
14
(without
horizontal bus)
19
(without
horizontal bus)
15
20
NEMA Type 1
NEMA Type 12
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
20
2100-GKC1_1D-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC1_1D-_ _-_ _ [1]
25
2100-GKC1_2D-_ _-_ _
[1]
2100-GJC1_2D-_ _-_ _ [1]
30
2100-GKC1_3D-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC1_3D-_ _-_ _ [1]
35
2100-GKC1_4D-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC1_4D-_ _-_ _ [1]
20
2100-GKC2_1D-_ _-_ _
[1]
2100-GJC2_1D-_ _-_ _ [1]
25
2100-GKC2_2D-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC2_2D-_ _-_ _ [1]
30
2100-GKC2_3D-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC2_3D-_ _-_ _ [1]
35
2100-GKC2_4D-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC2_4D-_ _-_ _ [1]
20
2100-GKC2_1A-_ _-_ _
[1]
2100-GJC2_1A-_ _-_ _ [1]
25
2100-GKC2_2A-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC2_2A-_ _-_ _ [1]
30
2100-GKC2_3A-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC2_3A-_ _-_ _ [1]
35
2100-GKC2_4A-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC2_4A-_ _-_ _ [1]
20
2100-GKC2_1B-_ _-_ _
[1]
2100-GJC2_1B-_ _-_ _ [1]
25
2100-GKC2_2B-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC2_2B-_ _-_ _ [1]
30
2100-GKC2_3B-_ _-_ _
[1]
2100-GJC2_3B-_ _-_ _ [1]
35
2100-GKC2_4B-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC2_4B-_ _-_ _ [1]
Width (Inches)
20
2100-GKC1_1A-_ _
[3]
2100-GJC1_1A-_ _ [3]
25
2100-GKC1_2A-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC1_2A-_ _ [3]
30
2100-GKC1_3A-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC1_3A-_ _ [3]
35
2100-GKC1_4A-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC1_4A-_ _ [3]
20
2100-GKC2_1A-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC2_1A-_ _ [3]
25
2100-GKC2_2A-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC2_2A-_ _ [3]
30
2100-GKC2_3A-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC2_3A-_ _ [3]
35
2100-GKC2_4A-_ _
[3]
2100-GJC2_4A-_ _ [3]
20
2100-GKC1_1B-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC1_1B-_ _ [3]
25
2100-GKC1_2B-_ _
[3]
2100-GJC1_2B-_ _ [3]
30
2100-GKC1_3B-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC1_3B-_ _ [3]
35
2100-GKC1_4B-_ _
[3]
2100-GJC1_4B-_ _ [3]
20
2100-GKC2_1C-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC2_1C-_ _ [3]
25
2100-GKC2_2C-_ _
[3]
2100-GJC2_2C-_ _ [3]
30
2100-GKC2_3C-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC2_3C-_ _ [3]
35
2100-GKC2_4C-_ _ [3]
2100-GJC2_4C-_ _ [3]

Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-GKC1B).
Select bus bar bracing, A or B, from table on 14 (horizontal bus is provided in vertical sections; e.g., 2100-GKC1B1D-A).
Select bus bar material and plating from table on 14 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1D-AAT06).
Select trip current number from on page 23 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1D-AAT06-30).
Select circuit breaker type on page 23 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1D-AAT06-30CT).
Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-GKC1B).
Select trip current number from table on page 23 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1A-30).
Select circuit breaker type from table on page 23 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1A-30CT).
22
Delivery
Program
SC
Vertical Sections
SC and PE-I Section Modification

Option
Number
Option
Grounded
Unit Door
-79GD
-98
[2]
-98X [3]
Auxiliary
Contacts [1]
-99 [2]
-99X [3]
T-Handle
Shunt Trip
-111
-754
Export
Packing
Below Deck
for Sections
2100-E
Vertical
Section
Description
Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door. Unit door
hinge grounding strap required for IEC applications.
NORMALLY OPEN: One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (operated with movement of
external handle only)
NORMALLY OPEN: One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact mounted internally in circuit
breaker
NORMALLY CLOSED: One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (operates with movement of
external handle only)
NORMALLY CLOSED: One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact mounted internally in circuit
breaker
T-handle latch on unit door
For tripping circuit breaker from remote 120V, 60Hz source
Maximum 1-section shipping block. Shipping block is skid mounted and packaged
in clear plastic. Packing is not watertight or waterproof. Skid is 2 8
construction according to shipping block size. Top is 2 4 frame with 1 pine
boards. Ends and sides covered with 0.4375 chipboard with 2 4 cross
members. Two steel bands around outside of container. Extended storage may
require space heaters and other considerations.
2100-F Vertical
Section with
Disconnect
2100-G Vertical
Section with
Circuit Breaker
Delivery
program
SC
[4]
Available on all SC and PE-I vertical sections.
SC [5]
[1] Multiple auxiliary contacts must be group coded by adding the second and third digit of the special feature number to the base digit 9 (e.g., 90-91-98X-99, when group coded,
reads 9018X9).
[2] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with the movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected. Internal
auxiliary contacts (98X or 99X) are wired to a 3-point floating terminal block.
[3] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C. (form C) contacts on F-frame, J-frame, and K-frame circuit breakers.
[4] Not available in 40 wide sections.
[5] Additional time required for export packing of SC and PE sections.
Tables for Configuring Vertical Section Catalog Numbers

Voltage Code
Fuse Clip Voltage
250
600
Voltage Code
A
C
Fuse Clip Designator

Disconnect Rating and
Fuse Clip Size
(Amperes)
30
60
100
200
400
Trip Current
Fuse Clip Class
J
R
H
J
R
H
J
R
H
J
R
H
J
R
H
Short Circuit
Withstand Rating
through 600V
100 kA
100 kA
10 kA
100 kA
100 kA
10 kA
100 kA
100 kA
10 kA
100 kA
100 kA
10 kA
100 kA
100 kA
10 kA
Fuse Clip
Designator
Number
Trip Current (Amperes)
24J
24R
24
25J
25R
25
26J
26R
26
27J
27R
27
28J
28R
28
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Option*

Rating
(Amperes)
15-50
60-100
125-150
175-225
250-400
*
Standard Interrupting
Capacity
Suffix
Frame
CT
FDB
CT
FDB
CT
FDB
CT
JD
CT
KD
Capacity w/Current Limiter
Suffix
Frame
CD
FDB-LFD
CD
FDB-LFD
CD
FDB-LFD
Medium Interrupting
Capacity
Suffix
Frame
CB
FD
CB
FD
CB
FD
High Interrupting
Capacity
Suffix
Frame
CM
HFD
CM
HFD
CM
HFD
CM
HJD
CM
HKD
Refer to page 248 for circuit breaker interrupting capacity.
23
Vertical Sections
Basic Sections and Structure Features/Modifications (SC-II and PE-II)

2
3
Basic Sections
Basic 20 Wide
Section
25, 30, 35
Wide Section
25 Wide Section
with 9 Wireway
Back-to-Back
Section
Corner Section
10 Wide
Incoming Lug
Compartment
71 High Section
71 High
Back-to-Back
Section
Includes standard features indicated in the tables below and on following pages. Maximum three (3) 20 wide sections per shipping block.
These sections do not have a vertical wireway. These sections require individual shipping blocks.
Section width is 25. Section has a 9 wireway. Maximum of two (2) 25 wide sections with 9 wireway per shipping block. Maximum of one (1) 25
wide section with 9 wireway per shipping block with export packing.
There is no additional charge for assembling 15 or 20 deep sections back-to-back. Back-to-back construction consists of two (2) separate sections
mounted together, each with separate bus. Front and rear sections must be equal in width. Six (6) 20 wide sections per shipping block is maximum.
A front-to-rear horizontal bus link will be provided only when an incoming line lug compartment, main breaker, or main disconnect is selected. This
splice link will be located at the opposite end of the MCC from the incoming line section.
Inside corner configuration is either 15 deep by 25.125 wide or 20 deep by 30.125 wide and is designed to contain power bus rated 600A-2000A
only. There is no available space for the installation of units. See page 68 to select.
Corner sections may be selected with an incoming line lug provision (see Bul. 2191M or 2191F, page 66), but are not available in either NEMA Type
3R, Type 4, or back-to-back construction.
This section must be selected as part of a 2-section shipping block, shipped attached to a 20, 25 or 30 wide section. It cannot be selected as
free standing or attached to a section with 9 vertical wireway, any 35 wide drive unit, full-section programmable controller, 1600A and 2000A
2192M, or 2000A 2193M, and is not available in NEMA Type 3R, Type 4, or back-to-back construction.
This 70.48 high 15 or 20 deep section will accommodate standard plug-in units up to and including 4.5 space factors. Standard height bus (45
center point) and lower height bus (25.5 center point) are available.
Please note the following restrictions for 71 high sections:
If top incoming (unless a full section incoming main lug is used) or top frame mounted device is required, select lower height bus.
If bottom incoming (unless full section incoming main lug is used) or bottom frame mounted device is required, select standard bus height.
If frame mounted transformer is required, select standard bus height.
If frame mounted transformer with top incoming main lug is required, select standard height bus and use a full section incoming main lug.
Two frame mounted units cannot be used in a single section.
Top frame mounted units and bottom frame mounted units cannot be mixed in the same line up (e.g., Bulletin 2191, 2192, 2193, 2195, 2196,
and 2197 units).
Only the following incoming main lug compartments are available pre-engineered:
300A and 600A in 1.0 space factors, 800A in 1.5 space factors, 1200A in 2.0 space factors,
600A-2000A full section 4.5 space factors. See publication 2100-TD024x-EN-P for more information.
6.0 space factor, frame mounted units are not available.
There is no additional charge for assembling 15 or 20 deep sections back-to-back. Back-to-back construction consists of two (2) separate sections
mounted together, each with separate bus. Front and rear sections must be equal in width. Six (6) 20 wide sections per shipping block is maximum.
A front-to-rear horizontal bus link will be provided only when an incoming line lug compartment, main breaker or main disconnect is selected. This
splice link will be located at the opposite end of the MCC from the incoming line section.
Section Features/Modifications
Cabinet Depth
Enclosure Type
Bottom Closing
Plates
Drip Hood
24
Delivery
Program
15 deep
20 deep
NEMA Type 1
NEMA Type 1 with gasket (gasketed unit door areas)
NEMA Type 12 (totally gasketed enclosure with bottom closing plates)
NEMA Type 3R (non-walk-in) front mounted only. Available for internal sections, 30 wide maximum. The external dimension of each NEMA Type 3R
cabinet is 5 wider than its internal section and 30 deep (with 20 deep internal section). Not available in back-to-back construction. Refer to
publication 2100-TD025x-EN-P. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for solid-state equipment (i.e., variable frequency drives, SMCs
and PLCs).
NEMA Type 4 (non-walk-in) stainless steel, front mounted only. Available for internal sections, 30 wide maximum. The external dimension of each
NEMA Type 4 section is 5 wider than its internal section and 30 deep (with 20 deep internal section). Not available in back-to-back construction.
Refer to publication 2100-TD026x-EN-P. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for solid-state equipment (i.e., variable frequency
drives, SMCs and PLCs).
For NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket. Bottom closing plates are standard on NEMA Type 12.
For corner section NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket. Bottom closing plates are standard on NEMA Type 12.
Drip hood for NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket, and Type 12 only. (Not required for NEMA Type 3R or Type 4.) Drip hood is an overhang on
top of a section, providing protection from limited amounts of liquid or dirt dripping and/or running down the front of a section. Select one drip hood
per section.
SC-II
PE-II
SC-II
Delivery
Program
SC-II
PE-II
SC-II
Vertical Sections

0.125 4
0.188 4
0.125 3
0.125 4
0.250 4
0.500 4
0.625 4
0.125 3
0.125 4
0.250 4
0.500 4
0.625 4
Aluminum with tin plating [1]
Power Bus Rating and

Material [1]
(For 3-phase,
3-wire systems)
Copper with tin plating
Copper with silver plating
Delivery
Program
Section Features/Modifications, continued

600A
800A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
3
SC-II
5
PE-II
Aluminum with tin plating [1]
Power Bus Rating and
Material with Neutral Bus [1]
Copper with tin plating
(For 3-phase,
4-wire systems)
Neutral bus mounts above or
below main power bus.
Copper with silver plating
Half-Rated
Neutral
0.125 x 4
0.188 x 4
0.250 x 4
0.125 x 4
0.188 x 4
0.250 x 4
Full-Rated
Neutral
0.125 4
0.188 4
0.125 3
0.125 4
0.250 4
0.500 4
0.625 4
0.125 3
0.125 4
0.250 4
0.500 4
0.625 4
Main Power
Bus Rating
600A
800A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
Delivery
Program
PE-II
300A tin plated copper vertical bus0.75 O.D., 0.625 I.D. tube
600A tin plated copper vertical bus0.75 O.D. rod
Vertical Bus Rating
300A silver plated vertical bus0.75 O.D., 0.625 I.D. tube
600A silver plated vertical bus0.75 O.D. rod
Rated 200A (0.1875 0.75). For connection of
Tin plated copper bus. Mounted in and insulated from 9
control power neutral.
vertical wireway. Mechanically connected to horizontal
Vertical Neutral Bus [2]
neutral bus. Isolated from the rest of vertical wireway with
Rated 300A (0.25 1). For connection of neutral
loads.
Requires 25 wide section barriers. To be used for connecting neutral loads or can be
used for control voltages that require a connection to the
with 9 wireway
Rated 600A (0.25 1 qty. 2). For connection of
neutral.
neutral loads.
0.25 2 12 copper tin plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to
either top or bottom horizontal wireway.
0.25 2 12 copper tin plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to
[2]
[3] either top or bottom horizontal wireway. Cable connection provided to horizontal neutral bus.
Neutral Connection Plate
0.25 x 2 x 12 copper silver plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to
either top or bottom horizontal wireway.
0.25 x 2 x 12 copper silver plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to
either top or bottom horizontal wireway. Cable connection provided to horizontal neutral bus. [2]
Delivery
Program
SC-II
[1]
PE-II
SC-II
PE-II
[1] Plating of horizontal bus and vertical bus must be the same.
[2] Requires horizontal neutral bus. See Power Bus Rating and Material with Neutral Bus in table above.
[3] A neutral connection plate can be used only in sections with a vertical wireway. Not available in sections with full width frame mounted units, including all mains.
25
Vertical Sections

2
Bracing [1]
Delivery
Program
42kA (rms symmetrical)

65kA (rms symmetrical)
100k series coordinated. Provides 65kA (rms symmetrical) bracing in each section. Must be used in coordination with
600A-2000A horizontal bus and one of the following main incoming devices:
100, 200, 400, or 600A, 2192M with Type RK1 or J fusing
600, 800, 1200, 1600, or 2000A, 2192M with Type L fusing
JDC 250A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
KDC 400A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
LDC 600A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
NDC 800A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
Ground Bus
Unplated copper
Ground Bus
Tin Plated copper
Vertical Ground Bus
Horizontal
Power Bus
Splice Kit
All starters, feeder units, etc. must have a short circuit withstand rating capable of interrupting the available fault
current to the MCC.
0.25 1 horizontal ground bus
Two (2) 0.25 1 horizontal ground bus top and bottom (cable interconnected)
0.188 0.75 vertical plug-in steel ground bus
Steel
0.188 0.75 vertical plug-in ground bus
Unplated copper
0.188 0.75 vertical ground bus for grounding unit load
0.188 0.75 vertical plug-in ground bus
Tin plated copper
0.188 0.75 vertical ground bus for grounding unit load
600A
Aluminum tin
plated bus
800A
600A
800A
Copper tin plated 1200A
bus
Splice bars, hardware, and installation instructions for 3-phase splicing. One
1600A
(1) kit required per shipping split on front mounted lineups. Two (2) kits
2000A
required per shipping split for back-to-back construction.
600A
800A
Copper silver
1200A
plated bus
1600A
2000A
[1] Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office when specifying 100k series coordinated bracing for Add to existing sections.
26
SC-II
PE-II
Vertical Sections

Main Power Bus (Phase A, B, C) Rating
and Material
600A Aluminum with Tin Plating
800A Aluminum with Tin Plating
600A Copper with Tin Plating
Splice bar hardware (installation instructions included in power bus
splice kit). One (1) kit required per shipping split on front mounted 1600A Copper with Tin Plating
lineups. Two (2) kits required per shipping split for back-to-back
construction.
600A Copper with Silver Plating
Horizontal Neutral Bus

Splice Kit
Delivery
Program
2
3
5
PE-II
27
Vertical Sections

2
Delivery
Program
One (1)0.25 1 (unplated copper)

Two (2)0.25 1 (unplated copper)
Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit
One (1)0.25 1 (tin plated copper)

Two (2)0.25 1 (tin plated copper)
NO-OX-ID
Pullbox
[1]
Shutters
Protective Caps
Unit Isolating Barriers
DeviceNet Connector Covers
Wireway Tie Bars
Outgoing Equipment Ground Lug
T-Handle
Master Nameplates
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws
External Mounting Channel [2]
NEMA Type 3R Lifting Angle
For applications utilizing

ground bus mounted on
both top and bottom or
from back-to-back line ups,
two (2) ground bus splice
kits are required for joining
each shipping block.
NO-OX-ID compound on bus

12 high 15 deep or 20 deep (except corner sections)
For isolation of plug-in stab openingsautomatic
For isolation of plug-in stab openingsmanual
For unused plug-in stab openings
For closing the wire opening between unit and vertical wireway
For covering the unused DeviceNet connectors in the vertical wireway of a DeviceNet MCC
Five (5) cable tie bars in vertical wireway
One (1) #6-250 kcmil lug mounted on horizontal ground bus in addition to lug provided
T-handle latch on vertical wireway door
Located on top horizontal wireway cover of the second vertical section in lineup, 2 6
Stainless steel nameplate screws for master nameplate (2 per nameplate)
Two (2) 1.5 3 mounting channels
NOTE: Adding an external mounting channel will add 1.5 to height of section
Optional lifting angle for NEMA Type 3R cabinets only. This angle is not removable.
SC-II
PE-II
Space heater with thermostat in each section

For two-section shipping block, one space heater is supplied in each
section with a single thermostat control located in right-hand section
200 watt, 120 volt strip

heater.
Thermostat set at 21C
(70F).
For three-section shipping block, one space heater is supplied in each

section with a single thermostat control located in center section
Space Heaters and Thermostat
SC-II
Space heater with thermostat in each section
For two-section shipping block, one space heater is supplied in each
section with a single thermostat control located in right-hand section
200 watt, 240 volt strip

heater.
Thermostat set at 21C
(70F).
For three-section shipping block, one space heater is supplied in each

section with a single thermostat control located in center section
Export Packing Below Deck for
Sections
Maximum 3-section shipping block. Shipping block is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic.
Packing is not watertight or waterproof. Skid is 2 8 construction according to shipping block size.
Top is 2 4 frame with 0.438 orientated strand board (OSB). Ends and sides covered with 0.438
orientated strand board (OSB) with 2 4 cross members. Two steel bands around outside of container.
Extended storage may require space heaters and other considerations.
[1] Available on NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket and Type 12 sections only.
[2] External mounting channel is shipped attached to MCC section(s).
[3] Additional time required for export packing of SC-II and PE-II sections.
28
SC-II [3]
Vertical Sections
DeviceNetand IntelliCENTER
DeviceNet Motor Control Center DeviceNet
The DeviceNet motor control center consists of standard Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE motor control center sections with
integrated DeviceNet cabling and Bulletin 2100 and 2400 units with DeviceNet components. The DeviceNet cabling, consisting of
trunk line and drop lines, is routed through the sections and into the individual units, allowing the devices to communicate via
DeviceNet. A complete DeviceNet system includes cabling, power supply, scanner module and the necessary DeviceNet
components in the MCC units.
The trunk line is built in to the sections and routed behind barriers. The drop lines are routed from each unit to the DeviceNet
connectors in the vertical wireway of each vertical section. The DeviceNet cable is rated 8 amperes, 600 volts, Class 1. Six (6)
DeviceNet connectors built into the back of the vertical wireway of each standard section provide a convenient method for the
MCC units to connect to the trunk line (patents pending).
Units may communicate over DeviceNet via components such as an E3 solid-state overload relay, DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
(DSA) or DeviceNet communication module such as 2100-GK61, 1203-GK5 or 1203-GU6. These units are supplied with a
DeviceNet cable for connecting to a DeviceNet connector in the vertical wireway. DeviceNet nodes are addressed per factory
standards or per customer specified information. Electronic Data Sheets (EDS) files on CD are shipped with the MCC.
For more information on DeviceNet, refer to publication DNET-BR002x-EN-P, DeviceNet Brochure, publication
DNET-UM072x-EN-P, DeviceNet Cable System Planning and Installation Manual and publication 2100-TD019x-EN-P, DeviceNet Motor
Control Centers.
IntelliCENTER DeviceNet
The IntelliCENTER motor control center consists of integrated hardware, software and communication in one centralized
package. The IntelliCENTER offers the same construction and benefits as the DeviceNet motor control center. In
addition, the IntelliCENTER features software with pre-configured screens which provide real-time data, trending,
component history, wiring diagrams, user manuals and spare parts. See page 30 for selection.
DeviceNet Cabling Options

The DeviceNet cabling is rated 8.0 amperes, 600 volts for use with a Class 1 power limited circuit.
Section Features
DeviceNet MCC with
DeviceNet Cabling
IntelliCENTER
Description
Includes DeviceNet trunk line, drop cable from each unit to DeviceNet port in vertical wireway and plug-in
terminating resistor kit. Includes DeviceNet node addressing per factory standards or per customer specified
information.
Includes DeviceNet trunk line, drop cable from each unit to DeviceNet port in vertical wireway and plug-in
terminating resistor kit. Includes DeviceNet node addressing per factory standards or per customer specified
information.
Requires IntelliCENTER software. See description on page 30.
Delivery
Program
SC-II
SC-II
29
Vertical Sections
DeviceNet and IntelliCENTER

2
IntelliCENTER Software DeviceNet

NOTE: All IntelliCENTER software is copyright protected and for installation on one personal computer only.
Description
IntelliCENTER [1]
Full Version
Catalog Number:
2101A-INTLCNTR
Documentation CD [1]
Catalog Number:
2101A-INTLDOC
IntelliCENTER
ActiveX Only Version
Catalog Number:
2101A-INTLCNTR-X
Delivery
Program
The IntelliCENTER software replicates the MCC lineup on a computer screen, complete with nameplates and indicators on
each door to show status (on, off, warning, fault, communication failure). Graphical views of individual MCC units display
device data allowing users to quickly view critical amperes, time-to-trip, trip cause, ground fault amperes and on/off
status. Each screen is preconfigured to show the parameters typically of greatest interest, and users easily can customize
parameters. Many screens feature trending graphs and analog dials. The software also provides spare parts information,
AutoCAD documentation and event logging. Requires Documentation CD; see below.
The IntelliCENTER software also contains ActiveX controls. This allows key views of the software to be displayed inside
Human Machine Interfaces (HMIs) such as RSView.
Per MCC lineup
The Documentation CD is the second component of the IntelliCENTER software. The CD contains data
files specific to a particular MCC. This information includes unit nameplates, unit details, wiring
Per unit
diagrams, user manuals, spare parts and other details.
SC
The IntelliCENTER ActiveX Only Version software contains only the ActiveX controls necessary to include the
IntelliCENTER views (elevation, monitor, electronic documentation, CAD diagrams, event log and spreadsheet) within an
HMI.
Note: At least one copy of IntelliCENTER Full Version is required to perform maintenance tasks such as
moving units, adding units and changing units in the IntelliCENTER software.
[1] Must be ordered separately with IntelliCENTER MCC.
Minimum PC Requirements for Running IntelliCENTER Software:

Operating System: Windows NT (4.0 with Service Pack 6A), 2000, or XP
Processor: Pentium IV processor, 1.4 GHz minimum *
Video Resolution: 1024 x 768 resolution with 65,535 colors
CD-ROM drive: 4X (16X recommended)
Hard Disk space: 200 MB free disk space (250 MB needed for installation)
Mouse: Microsoft compatible
RAM: 256 MBWindows NT (4.0)/2000/XP (512 recommended)
Equipment Necessary for Connection of a Computer via DeviceNet, ControlNet or Ethernet:
DeviceNet
Laptop computer: 1784-PCD DeviceNet PC interface card and 1784-PCD1 cable
Desktop computer: 1784-PCIDS
RS-232 interface (reduced performance): 1770-KFD DeviceNet interface module
NOTE: 2100H-ICPC120 patch cable is necessary for connecting interface (laptop, desktop, RS-232) to IntelliCENTER
MCC wireway
ControlNet
Laptop computer: 1784-PCC ControlNet PC interface card and 1784-C1 cable
Desktop computer: 1784-PCIC ControlNet PC interface card and 1786-TPR ControlNet tap
NOTE: Consult publication CNET-IN002x-EN-P, ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide, for configuration
and installation of ControlNet cable
Ethernet
Laptop or desktop computer: consult local computer support personnel for Ethernet interface requirements
Recommended Additional Software
RSNetworx for DeviceNetused for configuring DeviceNet nodes, saving parameters, and communicating to all types of
DeviceNet components (sensors, non-Allen-Bradley products and other products not found in MCCs)
30
The IntelliCENTER software is a monitoring/communication software package requiring a very large amount of processor speed to function efficiently and quickly. The processor
speeds listed will allow the software to function correctly. However, for speed and efficiency, it is recommended to use the fastest Pentium IV class processor available.
Units
Please read this important information for ordering units
Select sections separately from units

Units having DeviceNet options ordered separately from vertical sections, will be supplied with a 48 DeviceNet drop cable for connecting
the DeviceNet device to a DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway of the existing DeviceNet/IntelliCENTER MCC
Wiring Type
Units are available with either Type A or Type B wiring. Catalog numbers are for Type B wiring. To order Type A wired units, substitute the
letter B in the catalog number with the letter A. For example, change 2103LB-BKBD-30CT to 2103LA-BKBD-30CT
Overload Relays
Starter units include a Bulletin 592 eutectic alloy overload relay as standard. See Options section for solid-state overload relays
Heater Elements
Heater elements are offered on pages 239 through 243.
Power Fuses
Where applicable, optional power fuses are available. See pages 219-220 for selection.
Delivery Programs
Delivery programs are listed in all tables under the column marked Delivery Program. See page 3 for more delivery program information
71 High Sections
71 high sections will accommodate 4.5 space factor (maximum) units. For 71 high section restrictions, see page 24.
Bulletin 2113, Size 1, with Control Transformer Shown
Starter or Contactor
Captive Latch
Diagram Pocket
Control Circuit
Fuses and
Fuse Block
Unit Stab Assembly
Unit Handle Interlock

Circuit Breaker (shown)
or Fusible Disconnect
Auxiliary
Contacts
Disconnect Handle
Overload
Control Transformer
Fusing and Fuse Block
Control Circuit Transformer
(not shown)
Power and Control
Terminal Blocks Unit Identification Nameplate
Defeater Mechanism
Short Circuit Rating Label
Captive Latch
UL Label
Control Station
Unit Nameplate
Handle Cutout
Unit Door
Pilot Devices
Unit Support Pan
Plastic Retaining Pin
31
Units
2
3
32

Bulletin 2102L and 2103L
Combination Full-Voltage Lighting Contactor Units (FVLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
These combination lighting contactor units are supplied with an Allen-Bradley
500L AC contactor and either a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker. They are
rated 30A through 300A. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit
with terminals mounted in the unit for connection to remote devices.
2
3
4
5
Bulletin 2106 and 2107

Combination Full Voltage Reversing Starter Units (FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
These combination full voltage reversing starter units are supplied with an
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 505 reversing starter and either a fusible disconnect or a
circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2106 and 2107 starters are rated for NEMA sizes 1
through 5 and are mechanically and electrically interlocked to avoid both
contactors being closed simultaneously. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I,
Type B-T unit with terminals mounted in the unit for connection to remote
devices. Full voltage reversing starter units are available with a eutectic alloy, E1
Plus, SMP or E3 overload relay.
Bulletin 2106 and 2107 Space Saving NEMA-Rated

Combination Full Voltage Reversing Starter Units (FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
These combination full voltage reversing starter units offer a space saving
alternative while utilizing an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 305 reversing starter and
either a fused disconnect or a circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2106 Space Saving
NEMA-Rated reversing starters are rated for NEMA Size 1 applications and the
Bulletin 2107 Space Saving NEMA-Rated reversing starters are rated for NEMA
Size 1-3 applications. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked
to avoid both contactors being closed simultaneously. Each unit is provided as a
NEMA Class I, Type B-D unit with terminals mounted in the unit for
connections to remote devices. These full voltage reversing units are available
with E1 Plus or E3/E3 Plus electronic overload relays.
Bulletin 2112, 2112 Vacuum, 2113 and 2113 Vacuum
Combination Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
These combination full voltage non-reversing starter units are supplied with an
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509 starter (Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum are supplied
with an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1100 contactor) and either a fusible disconnect or a
circuit breaker. The full voltage non-reversing starters are rated for NEMA sizes 1
through 6 and the full voltage non-reversing vacuum starters are rated at 200A,
350A and 450A. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit, with
terminals mounted in the unit for connection to remote devices. Full voltage
non-reversing starter units are available with a eutectic alloy, E1 Plus, SMP or E3
overload relay.
For more details on Bulletin 500 contactors and starters, see publication 500-BR010x-EN-P, NEMA Power Components, and
publication 500-SG004x-EN-P, NEMA Starter Selection Guide. For more details on Bulletin 300 starters, see publication
300-SG001x-EN-P, Bulletin 300 Starters Selection Guide.
For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 111-127
33

Bulletin 2112 and 2113 Space Saving NEMA-Rated
Combination Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
These combination full voltage non-reversing starter units offer a space saving
alternative while utilizing an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 309 starter and either a fused
disconnect or a circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2112 Space Saving NEMA-Rated
non-reversing starter units are rated for NEMA Size 1 applications and the
Bulletin 2113 Space Saving NEMA-Rated non-reversing starter units are rated for
NEMA Size 1-4 applications. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-D
unit with terminals mounted in the unit for connections to remote devices. These
full voltage non-reversing units are available with E1 Plus or E3/E3 Plus
electronic overload relays.
Bulletin 2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F
Combination 2-Speed Starter Units (TS2W and TS1W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
These combination two-speed starter units are supplied with an Allen-Bradley
Bulletin 520 starter and either a fusible disconnect or a circuit breaker. The 2122
and 2123 starter units are designed with separate windings or consequent pole
windings. The 2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F are rated for NEMA sizes 1
through 5. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit, with
terminals mounted in the unit for connection of remote devices. Two-speed
starter units are available with a eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or SMP overload relay.
2
3
4
5
Bulletin 2126E, 2127E, 2126F, 2127F, 2126J, 2127J, 2126K and 2127K
Combination 2-Speed Reversing Starter Units (TSR2W and TSR1W) . . . . . . . 52
These combination two-speed starter units are supplied with Allen-Bradley
Bulletin 505 and 520 starters and either a fusible disconnect or a circuit breaker.
The Bulletin 2126 and 2127 starter units are designed with separate windings or
consequent pole windings. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T
unit, with terminals mounted in the unit for connection of remote devices.
The 2126E and 2127E are two-speed reversing 2-winding starter units and are
rated for NEMA sizes 1 and 2.
The 2126F and 2127F are two-speed reversing 1-winding starter units and are
The 2126J and 2127J are two-speed reversing in low only 2-winding starter units
The 2126K and 2127K are two-speed reversing in low only 1-winding starter units
Two speed reversing starter units are available with a eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or
SMP overload relay.
Bulletin 2172 and 2173
Combination Closed Transition Autotransformers Starter Units (RVAT) . . . . . 57
These closed transition autotransformer starter units are supplied with an
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 570 autotransformer starter and either a fusible disconnect
or a circuit breaker. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit, with
terminals mounted in the unit for connection of remote devices. The Bulletin
2172 and 2173 are rated for NEMA sizes 2 through 6 and are available with a
eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or SMP overload relay.
For more details on Bulletin 500 contactors and starters, see publication 500-BR010x-EN-P, NEMA Power Components, and
publication 500-SG004x-EN-P, NEMA Starter Selection Guide. For more details on Bulletin 300 starters, see publication
300-SG001x-EN-P, Bulletin 300 Starters Selection Guide.
34
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2102L and 2103L
Full Voltage Lighting Contactors (FVLC)

Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500L AC contactor with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
Rated 30A - 300A
NEMA Class I, Type B with terminals mounted on the unit
3
4
5
2102L
2103L
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
2102L
2103L
Type
Full Voltage Lighting
Contactor (FVLC) with
Fusible Disconnect
Full Voltage Lighting
Contactor (FVLC) with
Circuit Breaker
Code
A
B
Wiring Type
Type A
Type B
B
B
K
K
B
B
Rating Amperes
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Code
Z
B
C
D
E
F
Rating Amperes
30A (0.5 Space Factor)
30A
60A
100A
200A
300A
24J
30CT
Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or Trip
Current and Circuit Breaker Type
Code Control Voltage Type

See Table on page 217.
Code NEMA Enclosure Type

NEMA Type 1 or Type 1
K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
6P
6P
Option
Code Option
See Options section
beginning on page 111.
Fuse Clip Ratings and

Class or Trip Current
Code
Circuit Breaker Type
Clip Rating and Class.
2102L - 24J Fuse
Trip Current and Circuit
Type.
2103L - 30CT Breaker
See Table on page 221 and
table on page 222.
For Options, Modifications, and Accessories, see pages 111127
35

2
3
4
Bulletin 2102L
Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVLC)
See page 33 for product description.

For unit sizing, select unit rating based on 125% of actual load amperes.
NOTE: In order to address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, it may be necessary to oversize the field
conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers and oversize the lighting contactor units (increase by 50%); for high
harmonic load applications, Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
Fuse Clip
Transformer Primary Switching kVA [2]
Rating
(Amperes)
30 [4]
[1]
208V
240V
380V- 415V
480V
600V
1.2
3.6
2.4
4.3
2.8
7.1
4.9
8.5
6.2
11
(See Appendix for

short circuit
Space
withstand ratings.) Factor
Rating
(Amperes)
CC, J
0.5
2102LB-ZK_-__
2102LB-ZJ_-__
1.0
2102LB-BK_-__
2102LB-BJ_-__
1.0
2102LB-CK_-__
2102LB-CJ_-__
2.5
2102LB-DK_-__
2102LB-DJ_-__
3.0
2102LB-EK_-__
2102LB-EJ_-__
4.0
2102LB-FK_-__
2102LB-FJ_-__
3.6
2.4
4.3
2.8
7.1
4.9
8.5
6.2
11
30
60
2.1
6.3
4.1
7.2
6.8
11.8
8.3
14
10
18
100
4.1
12
8.1
14
13.3 23.3
16
28
20
35
30
60
60
100
100
200
200
400
20
14
23
22.5
39
27
47
34
59
300
14
41
27
47
45
78.3
54
94
68
117
NEMA Type 12
CC, J,
R, H
1.2
6.8
NEMA Type 1
and Type 1 w/
gasket
30
30
200
Class
Catalog Number [3]

Wiring Type BClass I
Delivery
Program
SC
J, R, H
PE
[1] Ampere ratings apply to non-motor loads such as fluorescent ballasts, mercury vapor lamps and resistive heating. Tungsten lamp current ratings are limited to applications 480
volts line-to-line (277 volts line-to-neutral) maximum.
[2] Ratings are based on the contactor being used to switch transformers having an inrush of not more than 20 times their rated full load current, regardless of the nature of the
secondary load. Ratings do not apply to transformers used in resistance welder service.
Select control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2102LB-BKBD).
Refer to table above to select fuse clip. Then select designator from table on page 220 (e.g., 2102LB-BKBD-24J).
To select optional power fuse, select from table on page 220 (e.g., 2102LB-BKBD-24J-607G).
For fuse rating, based on disconnect rating see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
[4] Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect switch, up to four (4)
Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one (1) 10-pt. pull-apart control terminal block with #16 AWG control wire only. One (1) 3-pole power terminal block is supplied as standard.
36 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 111127
Bulletin 2103L
Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVLC)

For unit sizing, select unit rating based on 125% of actual load amperes.
NOTE: In order to address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, it may be necessary to oversize the field
conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers and oversize the lighting contactor units (increase by 50%).
Rating
(Amperes)
[1]
208V
1
30 [4]
30
DUAL
30 [5]
60
DUAL
60 [5]
100
200
300
Transformer Primary Switching kVA [2]

240V
380V415V
480V
600V
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [3]

NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
4
Delivery
Program
NEMA Type 12
1.2
3.6
2.4
4.3
2.8
7.1
4.9
8.5
6.2
11
0.5
2103LB-ZK_-__
2103LB-ZJ_-__
1.2
3.6
2.4
4.3
2.8
7.1
4.9
8.5
6.2
11
1.0
2103LB-BK_-__
2103LB-BJ_-__
1.2
3.6
2.4
4.3
2.8
7.1
4.9
8.5
6.2
11
1.5
2103LB-BK_-__[6]
2103LB-BJ_-__ [6]
2.1
6.3
4.1
7.2
6.8
11.8
8.3
14
10
18
1.0
2103LB-CK_-__
2103LB-CJ_-__
2.1
6.3
4.1
7.2
6.8
11.8
8.3
14
10
18
1.5
2103LB-CK_-__ [6]
2103LB-CJ_-__ [6]
4.1
6.8
14
12
20
41
8.1
14
27
14
23
47
13.3
22.5
45
23.3
39
78.3
16
27
54
28
47
94
20
34
68
35
59
117
1.5
2.5
3.5
2103LB-DK_-__
2103LB-EK_-__
2103LB-FK_-__
2103LB-DJ_-__
2103LB-EJ_-__
2103LB-FJ_-__
SC
PE
[1] Ampere ratings apply to non-motor loads such as fluorescent ballasts, mercury vapor lamps and resistive heating. Tungsten lamp current ratings are limited to applications 480
volts line-to-line (277 volts line-to-neutral) maximum.
[2] Ratings are based on the contactor being used to switch transformers having an inrush of not more than 20 times their rated full load current, regardless of the nature of the
secondary load. Ratings do not apply to transformers used in resistance welder service.
Select control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD).
Select trip current from table on page 221 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD-30).
Select circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 222 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD-30CT).
[4] Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal handles, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one (1) 10-pt.
pull-apart control terminal block with #16 AWG control wire only. One (1) 3-pole power terminal block is supplied as standard.
[5] Dual mounted unit supplied without power terminal blocks.
[6] To dual mount combination lighting contactors in one unit:
Select two trip current numbers from table on page 221 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD-3032).
Then select circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 222 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD-3032CT).
For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 111127
37

2
3
4
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2106 and 2107

Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR)
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 505 reversing starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
NEMA Sizes 1-5
NEMA Class I, Type B wiring with terminals mounted in the unit
Available with eutectic alloy, E1 Plus, SMP or E3 overload relays
5
2106
2107
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
2106
2107
Type
Full Voltage Reversing
(FVR) with Fusible
Disconnect
(FVR)) with Circuit
Breaker
Code
A
B
B
B
A
A
B
B
NEMA Size
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Code
B
C
D
E
F
NEMA Size
1
2
3
4
5
41-24J
41CA
Horsepower and
Disconnecting Means

Wiring Type
Type A
Type B

NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
A
gasket with external reset
button
K
gasket without external reset
button
NEMA Type 12 with external
D
reset button
NEMA Type 12 without
J
external reset button
6P
6P
Options
Code Options
See Options section

Current Circuit Breaker Type
41 Horsepower Code. See Horsepower
on page 218.
2106 - 41-24J Table
24J Fuse Clip Rating and Class
See Fuse Clip Designator table on page 219.
41_ Horsepower Code. See Horsepower
Table on page 218.
2107 - 41CA
_CA Circuit Breaker Type. See Table on
Circuit Breaker Type Table on page 223.
Code
Bulletin 2106
Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVR)

Horsepower
NEMA
Size
208V
0.125-7.5
240V
380V415V
0.125-7.5
10
480V/600V
0.125-10
10-15
0.125-10
15-25
15-25
1.5
60
CC, J, R, H,
HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
30 [2]
60
100
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
1.5
100
R, H, HRCII-C
2.0 [3]
30
Catalog Number [1]
Fuse Clip
(See Appendix for short
circuit withstand ratings.) Space
Factor
Rating
Class
(Amperes)

NEMA Type 1
and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12
gasket
2106B-BA_-__
2106B-BD_-__
2106B-CA_-__
2106B-CD_-__
Delivery
Program
SC
15-25
20-30
30-50
30-50
60 [2]
100
200
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
3.0
2106B-DA_-__
2106B-DD_-__
30-40
40-50
60-75
60-100
100 [2]
200
400
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
4.0
2106B-EA_-__
2106B-ED_-__
50-75
60-100
100-150
125-200
200 [2]
400
600
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
6.0 [4]
2106B-FA_-__
2106B-FD_-__
PE-II

Select control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2106B-BABD).
Select horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2106B-BABD-31GT-20J).
For fuse rating based on load horsepower, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter A with the
letter K (e.g., 2106B-BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2106B-BJ_-___).
[2] Available on 480V and 600V applications only.
[3] For 208V and 240V applications with Class R or H fuses, unit only requires 1.5 space factors.
[4] Frame mounted section without vertical wireway.
Bulletin 2107
Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVR)
NEMA
Size
Horsepower
Space
Factor
208V
240V
380V415V
480V/600V
1
2
3
4
0.125-7.5
10
15-25
30-40
0.125-7.5
10-15
20-30
40-50
0.125-10
15-25
30-50
60-75
0.125-10
15-25
30-50
60-100
1.5
1.5
2.5
4.0
50-75
60-100
100-150
125-200
6.0 [2]
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
2107B-BA_-__
2107B-BD_-__
2107B-CA_-__
2107B-CD_-__
2107B-DA_-__
2107B-DD_-__
2107B-EA_-__
2107B-ED_-__
2107B-FA_-__
Delivery
Program
2107B-FD_-__
SC
PE-II

Select circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2107B-BABD-30CA).
For circuit breaker size based on load horsepower, refer to publications 2100-TD001x-EN-P and 2100-TD002x-EN-P.
The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, substitute the letter A with the
39

2
3
4
Catalog Number Explanation - Space Saving NEMA-Rated Bulletin 2106 and 2107
Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR)
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 305 starter with fused disconnect or circuit breaker

NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminals mounted in unit
Available with E1 Plus or E3/E3 Plus electronic overload relay
Space saving alternative to traditional NEMA starter units
5
2106
2107
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
2106
2107
Type
(FVR) with Fused
Disconnect
(FVR) with Circuit
Breaker
Code
B
Wiring Type
Type B-D
3B
3B
A
A
B
B
NEMA Size
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Code
3B
3C
3D
NEMA Size
1
2
38-24J
38CA
Horsepower and
Disconnecting Means

**
**
Option
Code Option
See Options section
3 [1]
[1] Availability TBD

A
gasket with external reset button
K
button
NEMA Type 12 with external reset
D
button
NEMA Type 12 without external
J
reset button
Code
2106 - 38-24J
2107 - 38CA
Horsepower Code and

Disconnecting Means
38 Horsepower Code. See Table on
page 218.
24J Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See
Table on page 219.
38_ Horsepower Code. See Table
on page 218.
_CA Circuit Breaker Type. See
Table on page 223.
Bulletin 2106
Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVR)

Units are cUL US listed, unless otherwise indicated.
Horsepower
NEMA Size
480V
600V
0.5 - 10
0.75 - 10
Fuse Clip
(See Appendix for short circuit
withstand ratings.)
Rating
(Amperes)
30
Space
Factor
Class
CC, J, HRCII-C
0.5[2]
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
w/ gasket
NEMA Type 12
2106B-3BA_-__
2106B-3BD_-__
Delivery
Program
SC

Select control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2106B-3BABD).
Select horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2106B-3BABD-38).
Select fuse class from above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2106B-3BABD-38-24J).
The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, substitute the letter A with
the letter K (e.g. 2106B-3BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2106B-3BJ_-__)
[2] These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control
terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B units). See CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Catalog, 2100-CA001x-EN-P for information on installation into series E-J sections.
Bulletin 2107
Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVR)

Units are cUL US listed, unless otherwise indicated.
Horsepower
NEMA Size
1
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/
NEMA Type 12
gasket
480V
600V
0.5 - 10
0.75 - 10
0.5[2]
2107B-3BA_-__
2107B-3BD_-__
2107B-3CA_-__
2107B-3CD_-__
2107B-3DA_-__
2107B-3DD_-__
15 - 25
15 - 25
1.0[3]
30 - 50
30 - 50
1.5[3]
Delivery
Program
SC
Availability TBD

Select circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2107B-3BABD-38CA).
the letter K (e.g. 2107B-3BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2107B-3BJ_-__).
[2] These units have horizontal operating handles, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in
Type B units). See CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Catalog, 2100-CA001x-EN-P for information on installation into series E-J sections.
[3] These units have horizontal operating handles, up to six (6) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B
units). See CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Catalog, 2100-CA001x-EN-P for information on installation into series E-J sections.
41

2
3
4
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2112, 2112 Vacuum, 2113 and

2113 Vacuum
Combination Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units (FVNR)
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509 starter (Bulletin 2112 and 2113 Vacuum use Bulletin 1100 contactor)
with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
NEMA Class I, Type B unit with terminals mounted in the unit
Available with eutectic alloy, E1 Plus, SMP or E3 overload relays.
5
2112
2113
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
2112
2113
Type
Full Voltage
Non-Reversing (FVNR)
with Fusible Disconnect
Full Voltage
Non-Reversing (FVNR))
with Circuit Breaker
Code
A
B
B
B
A
A
B
B
NEMA Size
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Code NEMA Size

Z
1 (0.5 Space Factor)
B
1
C
2
D
3
E
4
F
5
G
6
Vacuum Ratings
2L
200A
2N
350A
2P
450A
41-24J
41CA
Horsepower and
Disconnecting Means

Wiring Type
Type A
Type B
A
button
K
button
D
reset button
J
6P
6P
Options
Code Options
See Options section

218.
2112 - 41-24J page
Fuse Clip Designator table on page 219.
Horsepower Code. See Table on page
218.
2113 - 41CA
_CA Circuit Breaker Type. See Circuit
Breaker Type Table on page 223.
For circuit breaker type for vacuum, see Circuit Breaker
Types table on page 222.
Code
Bulletin 2112
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVNR)

Fuse Clip
Factor
Rating
380V415V 480V/600V (Amperes)
Class
Horsepower
NEMA
Size
208V
240V
1 [2]
0.125-5
0.125-5
0.125-10
0.125-10
0.125-7.5
0.125-7.5
0.125-10
0.125-10
10
10-15
15-25
15-25
0.5
2112B-ZA_-__
2112B-ZD_-__
30
CC, J, R, H,
HRCII-C,
J, R, H, HRCII-C
1.0
2112B-BA_-__
2112B-BD_-__
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, HRCII-C
1.0
2112B-CA_-__
2112B-CD_-__
R, H
1.5
100
200
J
J
J
2.0
60 [3]
100
200
R, H, HRCII-C
R, H, HRCII-C
R, H, HRCII-C
2112B-DA_-__
2112B-DD_-__
2.5
100 [3]
200
400
J, HRCII-C
J, HRCII-C
J
2.5
100 [3]
200
R, H
R, H
3.0
200 [3]
400
600
J
J
J
3.5
[3]
R, H, HRCII-C
R, H, HRCII-C
4.0
400 [3]
600
800
R, H
J, R, HRCII-C
L
400 [3]
600
800
R, H
J, R, HRCII-C
L
30 [3]
60
100
100
15-25
30-40
50-75
20-30
40-50
60-100
30-50
60-75
100-150
30-50
60-100
125-200
200
400
[4]
100-150
125-200
200-300
250-400
3
Delivery
Program
SC
2112B-EA_-__
2112B-ED_-__
2112B-FA_-__
2112B-FD_-__
2112BB-GA_-__
2112BB-GD_-__
6.0 [5]
25 W
PE-II
2112BT-GA_-__
NEMA Type 12
CC, J, HRCII-C
60 [3]
3
NEMA Type 1
and Type 1 w/
gasket
30
60
2
Catalog Number [1]

Wiring Type BClass
2112BT-GD_-__

If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2112B-BABD-31-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2112B-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2112B-BABD-31GT-20J).
[2] Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect switch, up to four
(4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one (1) 10-pt. pull-apart control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B units), with #16 AWG control wire only. See page 8 for information on
installation into series E-J sections.
[3] Available on 480 and 600 Volt applications only.
[4] For NEMA size 6, select either top cable entry (2112BT-) or bottom cable entry (2112BB-).
43

2
3
Bulletin 2112 Vacuum

Full Voltage Non-Reversing Vacuum Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVNR)

Starters are supplied with two (2) normally open and two (2) normally closed auxiliary contacts as standard. Additional auxiliary
contacts (two [2] normally open and two [2] normally closed) can be added (option 202). Refer to Options section on page 124.
Units are NOT UL listed.
Fuse Clip
circuit withstand
ratings.)
Horsepower
Rating
(Amperes)
208V
200
40-50
240V
40-60
380V-415V
60-100
480V
60-125
600V
Rating
Class
(Amperes)
J, R, H, HRCII-C
60-150
100 [2]
200
400
J, R, H, HRCII-C
350
60-100
75-100
125-200
150-200
200-300
200 [2]
400
600
450
125
125-150
250
250-350
350-400
400 [2]
600
Space
Factor
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
R, H
J, HRCII-C
3.5
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1
and Type 1 w/
gasket
2112B-2LA_-__
Delivery
Program
NEMA Type 12
2112B-2LD_-__
PE
4.0
2112B-2NA_-__
2112B-2ND_-__
6.0 [3]
2112B-2PA_-__
2112B-2PD_-__
PE-II

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2112B-21LABD).
Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2112B-2LABD-51).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2112B-2LABD-51-26J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2112B-2LABD-51__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2112B-2LABD-51GT-20J).
letter K (e.g., 2112B-2LK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2112B-2LJ_-___).
Bulletin 2113
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR)

Horsepower
NEMA Size
208V
1 [2]
1
240V
380V415V
480V/600V
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
0.125-5
0.125-5
0.125-10
0.125-10
0.5
2113B-ZA_-__
2113B-ZD_-__
0.125-7.5
0.125-7.5
0.125-10
0.125-10
1.0
2113B-BA_-__
2113B-BD_-__
DUAL 1 [3]
2
0.125-7.5
0.125-7.5
0.125-10
0.125-10
1.5
10
10-15
15-25
15-25
1.0
2113B-BA_-__ [4]
2113B-CA_-__
2113B-BD_-__ [4]
2113B-CD_-__
DUAL 2 [3]
10
10-15
15-25
15-25
1.5
3
4
5
15-25
30-40
50-75
20-30
40-50
60-100
30-50
60-75
100-150
30-50
60-100
125-200
1.5
2.0
3.5
6 [5]
100-150
125-200
200-300
250-400
6.0 [6]
25 W
2113B-CA_-__ [4]
2113B-DA_-__
2113B-EA_-__
2113B-FA_-__
2113BT-GA_-__
2113BB-GA_-__
2113B-CD_-__ [4]
2113B-DD_-__
2113B-ED_-__
2113B-FD_-__
2113BT-GD_-__
2113BB-GD_-__
3
Delivery
Program
5
SC
PE-II

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2113B-BABD).
Select circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2113B-BABD-30CA).
[2] Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal operating handles, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one
(1) 10-pt. pull-apart control terminal block (Type BD only in Type B units), with #16 AWG control wire only. See page 8 for information on installation into series E-J sections.
[3] Dual mounted units supplied without power terminal blocks.
[4] Dual mounting of combination starters in one unit. Add two numbers from table on page 218 to identify the horsepower and add the suffix letter from table on page 223 to
identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2113B-BABD-3941CA).
[5] For 200HP at 240V or 400HP at 480V, suffix letter identifying circuit breaker must be CT or CM only. For NEMA size 6, select either top cable entry (2113BT-) or bottom entry
(2113BB-).
Bulletin 2113 Vacuum

Full Voltage Non-Reversing Vacuum Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR)

Starters are supplied with two (2) normally open and two (2) normally closed auxiliary contacts as standard. Additional auxiliary
contacts (two [2] normally open and two [2] normally closed) can be added (option 202). Refer to Options section on 124.
Units are NOT UL listed.
Horsepower
Rating
(Amperes)
200
350
450
Space
Factor
208V
240V
380V-415V
480V
600V
40
50
60-75
100
40-50
60
75-100
60-75
100
125-150
200
60-100
125
150-200
60-100
125-150
200
250-300
3.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
125
125-150
250
250-350
350-400
6.0 [2]
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
2113B-2LA_-__
2113B-2LD_-__
2113B-2NA_-__
2113B-2ND_-__
2113B-2PA_-__
2113B-2PD_-__
Delivery
Program
PE
PE-II

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2113B-2NABD).
Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2113B-2NABD-54).
Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2113B-2NABD-54CA).
letter K (e.g., 2113B-2NK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2113B-2NJ_-___).
45

2
3
4
Catalog Number Explanation - Space Saving NEMA-Rated Bulletin 2112 and 2113
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starters (FVNR)
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 309 starter with fused disconnect or circuit breaker

NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminals mounted in unit
Available with E1 Plus or E3/E3 Plus electronic overload relay
Space saving alternative to traditional NEMA starter units
5
2112
2113
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
2112
2113
Type
Full Voltage
with Fused Disconnect
Full Voltage
Code
B
Wiring Type
Type B-D
3B
3B
A
A
B
B
NEMA Size
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Code
3B
3C
3D
NEMA Size
1
2
3E
4[1]
38-24J
38CA
Horsepower and
Disconnecting Means

**
**
Option
Code Option
See Options section
3[1]
[1] Availability TBD

A
K
button
NEMA Type 12 with external reset
D
button
J
reset button
Code
2112 - 38-24J
2113 - 38CA
Horsepower Code and

Disconnecting Means
page 218.
Table on page 219.
38_ Horsepower Code. See Table
on page 218
_CA Circuit Breaker Type. See
Table on page 222.
Bulletin 2112
Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVNR)

Units are cUL US listed unless otherwise indicated.
NEMA
Size
1
Horsepower
480V
600V
0.5 - 10
0.75 - 10
Fuse Clip
(See Appendix for short circuit
withstand ratings.)
Rating
(Amperes)
30
Space
Factor
Class
CC, J, HRCII-C
0.5[2]
Catalog Number [1]

w/ gasket
NEMA Type 12
2112B-3BA_-__
2112B-3BD_-__
Delivery
Program
SC

Select fuse class from above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2112B-3BABD-38-24J)
[2] These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control
terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B units). See CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Catalog, 2100-CA001x-EN-P for information on installation into series E-J sections.
Bulletin 2113
Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR)

Units are cUL US listed unless otherwise indicated.
Horsepower
NEMA Size
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
gasket
480V
600V
0.5 - 10
0.75 - 10
0.5[2]
2113B-3BA_-__
2113B-3BD_-__
15 - 25
15 - 25
0.5[2],[3]
2113B-3CA_-__
2113B-3CD_-__
30 - 50
30 - 50
1.0[4]
2113B-3DA_-__
2113B-3DD_-__
60 - 100
1.5[4]
2113B-3EA_-__
2113B-3ED_-__
60 - 100
Delivery
Program
SC
Availability TBD

Select circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2113B-3BABD-38CA)
[2] These units have horizontal operating handles, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type
B units). See CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Catalog, 2100-CA001x-EN-P for information on installation into series E-J sections.
[3] 1.0 space factor require for Size 2, Bulletin 2113 units with pilot devices and external reset button for overload relay.
[4] These units have horizontal operating handles, up to six (6) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B
units). See CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Catalog, 2100-CA001x-EN-P for information on installation into series E-J sections.
47

2
3
4
5
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F

Combination 2-Speed Starter Units (TS2W and TS1W)
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 520 starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker

Designed with separate windings or consequent pole windings
Two-Speed units available with eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or SMP overload relays
NEMA Sizes 1 - 5
2122E
2123F
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
2122E
2123E
2122F
2123F
Type
Two-Speed,
2-Winding Starter
(TS2W) with Fusible
Disconnect
Two-Speed,
2-Winding (TS2W)
Two-Speed,
1-Winding Starter
(TS1W) with Fusible
Disconnect
Two-Speed,
1-Winding (TS1W)
Code
A
B
Wiring Type
Type A
Type B
B
B
A
A
B
B
NEMA Size
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Code
B
C
D
E
F
NEMA Size
1
2
3
4
5
41-24J
41CA
Horsepower and
Disconnecting Means


A
button
K
button
D
reset button
J
6P
6P
Option
Code Option
See Options section

41 Horsepower Code. See Table on page
2122 - 41-24J 218.
Fuse Clip Designator table on page 219.
Horsepower Code. See Table on page 218.
2123 - 41CA
_CA Circuit Breaker Type. See Circuit
Breaker Type Table on page 223.
Code
Bulletin 2122E
Two Speed 2-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS2W)
NOTE: A two-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors. A two-speed
1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole contactors. Consult your local
Rockwell Automation Sales Office for application assistance.
Constant or Variable Torque
Horsepower
NEMA
Size
Fuse Clip
Catalog Number [1]
Wiring
Type BClass I
Space
circuit withstand ratings.)
Factor
NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
Rating
480V/600V (Amperes)
Class
Type 1 w/ gasket
CC,
J,
R,
H,
30
HRCII-C
2122EB-BD_-__
0.125-10
2.0 2122EB-BA_-__
60
J, R, H, HRCII-C
3
4
Delivery
Program
208V
240V
380V415V
0.125-7.5
0.125- 7.5
0.125-10
10
10-15
15-25
15-25
30 [2]
60
100
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
2.0
2122EB-CA_-__
2122EB-CD_-__
15-25
20-30
30-50
30-50
60 [2]
100
200
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
3.0
2122EB-DA_-__
2122EB-DD_-__
30-40
40-50
60-75
60-100
100 [2]
200
400
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
4.5
2122EB-EA_-__
2122EB-ED_-__
PE
5 [3]
50-75
60-100
100-150
125-200
200 [2]
400
600
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
6.0 [4] 2122EB-FA_-__
2122EB-FD_-__
PE-II
SC

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2122EB-BABD).
Select horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2122EB-BABD-31).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2122EB-BABD-31-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2122EB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2122EB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter K (e.g., 2122EB-BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2112EB-BJ_-___).
[3] If low speed full load current is below 77A, a special starter is required. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
49

2
Bulletin 2122F
Two Speed 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS1W)
NOTE: A two-speed 1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole contactors. A
two-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors. Consult your local
4
5
NEMA
Size
Fuse Clip
Factor
Rating
380V- 415V 480V/600V (Amperes)
Class

Horsepower
208V
240V
0.125-7.5
0.125-7.5
0.125-10
0.125-10
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1
and Type 1 w/
gasket
NEMA Type 12
2.0
2122FB-BA_-__
2122FB-BD_-__
60
CC, J, R, H,
HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
30
Delivery
Program
10
10-15
15-25
15-25
30 [2]
60
100
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
2.0
2122FB-CA_-__
2122FB-CD_-__
15-25
20-30
30-50
30-50
60 [2]
100
200
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
4.0
2122FB-DA_-__
2122FB-DD_-__
30-40
40-50
60-75
60-100
100 [2]
200
400
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
4.5
2122FB-EA_-__
2122FB-ED_-__
PE
5 [3]
50-75
60-100
100-150
125-200
200 [2]
400
600
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
6.0 [4] 2122FB-FA_-__

25 W
2122FB-FD_-__
PE-II
SC

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2122FB-BABD).
Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2122FB-BABD-31).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2122FB-BABD-31-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2122FB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2122FB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter K (e.g., 2122FB-BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2122FB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2123E
Two Speed 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TS2W)

NEMA
Size
1
2
3
4
5 [2]

Horsepower
Space
Factor
208V
240V
380V-415V
480V/600V
0.125-7.5
10
15-25
30-40
0.125-7.5
10-15
20-30
40-50
0.125-10
15-25
30-50
60-75
0.125-10
15-25
30-50
60-100
2.0
2.0
3.0
4.5
125-200
6.0 [3]
50-75
60-100
100-150
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
2123EB-BA_-__
2123EB-BD_-__
2123EB-CA_-__
2123EB-CD_-__
2123EB-DA_-__
2123EB-DD_-__
2123EB-EA_-__
2123EB-ED_-__
2123EB-FA_-__
2123EB-FD_-__
4
Delivery
Program
SC
PE
PE-II

Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2123EB-BABD-30).
Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2123EB-BABD-30CA).
Bulletin 2123F
Two Speed 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TS1W)
NOTE: A two-speed 1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole contactors. A
two-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors. Consult your local
NEMA
Size
1
2
3
4
5 [2]

Horsepower
Space
Factor
208V
240V
380V-415V
480V/600V
0.125-7.5
10
15-25
30-40
0.125-7.5
10-15
20-30
40-50
0.125-10
15-25
30-50
60-75
0.125-10
15-25
30-50
60-100
2.0
2.0
3.5
4.5
125-200
6.0 [3]
50-75
60-100
100-150
25 W
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
2123FB-BA_-__
2123FB-BD_-__
2123FB-CA_-__
2123FB-CD_-__
2123FB-DA_-__
2123FB-DD_-__
2123FB-EA_-__
2123FB-ED_-__
2123FB-FA_-__
2123FB-FD_-__
Delivery
Program
SC
PE
PE-II

Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2123FB-BABD-30CA).
51

2
3
4
5
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2126E, 2127E, 2126F, 2127F, 2126J,

2127J, 2126K and 2127K
Combination 2-Speed Reversing Starter Units (TSR2W and TSR1W)
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 505, Reversing and Bulletin 520, 2-speed starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit
breaker
Designed with separate windings or consequent pole windings
NEMA sizes 1 and 2
Two-Speed, Reversing units available with eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or SMP overload relays
2126E
2127E
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
A
B
Wiring Type
Type A
Type B
B
B
A
A
B
A
NEMA Size
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Code NEMA Size

B
1
C
2
41-24J
41CA
Horsepower and
Disconnecting Means

Code
Code
2126E
2127E
2126F
2127F
2126J
2127J
2126K
2127K
Type
Two-Speed, Reversing 2-Winding Starter
(TSR2W) with Fusible Disconnect
(TSR2W) with Circuit Breaker
(TSR1W) with Fusible Disconnect
(TSR1W) with Circuit Breaker
Two-Speed, Reversing in Low Speed Only
2-Winding Starter (TSR2W) with Fusible
Disconnect
2-Winding Starter (TSR2W) with Circuit
Breaker
1-Winding Starter (TSR1W) with Fusible
Disconnect
1-Winding Starter (TSR1W) with Circuit
Breaker
2126 - 41-24J
2127 - 41CA

A
K
button
D
reset button
J
reset button
6P
6P
Option
Code Option
See Options section
Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or
Trip Current Circuit Breaker Type
41Horsepower Code. See
Horsepower Table on page 218.
24J Fuse Clip Rating and Class.
See Fuse Clip Designator table on
page 219.
41_ Horsepower Code.
See Horsepower Table on page 218.
_CA Circuit Breaker Type.
See Circuit Breaker Type Table on
page 223.
Bulletin 2126E
Two Speed Reversing 2-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR2W)
Fuse Clip
Catalog Number [1]
Wiring
Type BClass I
Space
Factor
Rating
380V415V 480V/600V (Amperes)
Class
Type 1 w/ gasket
CC,
J,
R,
H,
30
HRCII-C
2126EB-BD_-__
0.125-10
0.125-10
3.0 2126EB-BA_-__
60
J, R, H, HRCII-C

Horsepower
NEMA
Size
208V
240V
0.125-7.5
0.125-7.5
10
10-15
15-25
15-25
30 [2]
60
100
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, HRCII-C
3.0
2126EB-CA_-__
4
Delivery
Program
PE
2126EB-CD_-__

Select control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2126EB-BABD).
Select horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2126EB-BABD-31).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2126EB-BABD-31-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2126EB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2126EB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter K (e.g., 2126EB-BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J(e.g., 2126EB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2126F
Two Speed Reversing 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR1W)
NOTE: A two-speed 2-winding motor (TSR2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors. A two-speed
1-winding motor (TSR1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole contactors. Consult your local
NEMA
Size
Fuse Clip
Catalog Number [1]
Factor
Rating
380V- 415V 480V/600V (Amperes)
Class
Type 1 w/ gasket
CC,
J,
R,
H,
30
HRCII-C,
2126FB-BD_-__
0.125-10
0.125-10
3.0 2126FB-BA_-__
60
J, R, H, HRCII-C

Horsepower
208V
240V
0.125-7.5
0.125- 7.5
10
10-15
15-25
15-25
30 [2]
60
100
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, HRCII-C
3.0
2126FB-CA_-__
Delivery
Program
PE
2126FB-CD_-__

If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2126FB-BABD-31-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2126FB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2126FB-BABD-31GT-20J).
53

2
Bulletin 2126J
Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 2-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR2W)
4
5
NEMA
Size
Fuse Clip
circuit withstand
ratings.)

Horsepower
208V
240V
0.125-7.5
0.125-7.5
10
10-15
380V- 415V 480V/600V

0.125-10
15-25
0.125-10
15-25
Rating
Space
Factor
NEMA Type 1 and

Type 1 w/ gasket
Class
(Amperes)
Catalog Number [1]

30
60
CC, J, R, H,
HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
3.0
30 [2]
60
100
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, HRCII-C
3.0
2126JB-BA_-__
Delivery
Program
NEMA Type 12
2126JB-BD_-__
PE
2126JB-CA_-__
2126JB-CD_-__

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2126JB-BABD).
Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2126JB-BABD-31).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2126JB-BABD-31-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2126JB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2126JB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter K (e.g., 2126JB-BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2126JB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2126K
Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR1W)
NEMA
Size
Fuse Clip
Catalog Number [1]
circuit withstand
Space
ratings.)
Factor
NEMA Type 1 and
Rating
380V-415V 480V/600V (Amperes)
Class
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
CC, J, R, H,
30
HRCII-C
2126KB-BD_-__
0.125-10
0.125-10
3.0 2126KB-BA_-__
60
J, R, H, HRCII-C

Horsepower
208V
240V
0.125-7.5
0.125-7.5
10
10-15
15-25
15-25
30 [2]
60
100
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, HRCII-C
3.0
2126KB-CA_-__
Delivery
Program
PE
2126KB-CD_-__

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2126KB-BABD).
Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2126KB-BABD-31).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2126KB-BABD-31-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2126KB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2126KB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter K (e.g., 2126KB-BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2126KB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2127E
Two Speed Reversing 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR2W)

NEMA
Size
1
2

Horsepower
208V
240V
380V-415V
480V/600V
0.125- 7.5
10
0.125-7.5
10-15
0.125-10
15-25
0.125-10
15-25
Space
Factor
3.0
3.0
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and Type
NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
2127EB-BA_-__
2127EB-BD_-__
2127EB-CA_-__
2127EB-CD_-__
4
Delivery
Program
PE

Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2127EB-BABD- 31).
Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2127EB-BABD-31CA).
Bulletin 2127F
Two Speed Reversing 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR1W)
NEMA
Size
1
2

Horsepower
208V
240V
380V-415V
480V/600V
0.125-7.5
10
0.125-7.5
10-15
0.125-10
15-25
0.125-10
15-25
Space
Factor
3.0
3.0
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
2127FB-BA_-__
2127FB-BD_-__
2127FB-CA_-__
2127FB-CD_-__
Delivery
Program
PE

Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2127FB-BABD-30CA).
55

2
Bulletin 2127J
Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR2W)
4
5
NEMA
Size
1
2

Horsepower
208V
240V
380V-415V
480V/600V
0.125-7.5
10
0.125- 7.5
10-15
0.125-10
15-25
0.125-10
15-25
Space
Factor
3.0
3.0
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
2127JB-BA_-__
2127JB-BD_-__
2127JB-CA_-__
2127JB-CD_-__
Delivery
Program
PE

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2127JB-BABD).
Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2127JB-BABD-30).
Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2127JB-BABD-30CA).
letter K (e.g., 2127JB-BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2127JB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2127K
Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR1W)
NEMA
Size
1
2

Horsepower
208V
240V
380V-415V
480V/600V
0.125-7.5
10
0.125-7.5
10-15
0.125-10
15-25
0.125-10
15-25
Space
Factor
3.0
3.0
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
2127KB-BA_-__
2127KB-BD_-__
2127KB-CA_-__
2127KB-CD_-__
Delivery
Program
PE

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2127KB-BABD).
Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2127KB-BABD-30).
Select the circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 223 (e.g., 2127KB-BABD-30CA).
letter K (e.g., 2127KB-BK_-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2127KB-BJ_-___).
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2172 and 2173
Combination Closed Transition Autotransformers Starter Units (RVAT)
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 570 autotransformer starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
NEMA sizes 2 - 6
Available with eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or SMP overload relay
3
4
5
2172
2173
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
2172
2173
Type
Reduced Voltage
Autotransformer
Starter (RVAT) with
Fusible Disconnect
Reduced Voltage
Autotransformer
Starter (RVAT) with
Circuit Breaker
Code
A
B
Wiring Type
Type A
Type B
C
C
A
A
B
B
NEMA Size
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Code
C
D
E
F
G
NEMA Size
2
3
4
5
6
42-25J
42CA
Horsepower and
Disconnecting Means

Code
2172 - 42-25J

A
button
K
button
D
reset button
J
2173 - 42CA
6P
6P
Option
Code Option
See Options section

42 Horsepower Code. See Horsepower
Table on page 218.
24J Fuse Clip Rating and Class.
See Fuse Clip Designator table on page 219.
42_ Horsepower Code. See Horsepower
Table on page 218.
_CA Circuit Breaker Type.
See Circuit Breaker Type Table on page 223.
57

2
3
4
Bulletin 2172
Closed Transition Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Type Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (RVAT)

Autotransformers ( 200 HP) allow a starting time of 10, 15 or 25 seconds (at 80%, 65% or 50% TAPS, respectively) out of each
four minutes for one hour, followed by a rest period of two hours. Autotransformers > 200HP allow a starting time of 20, 30 or 50
seconds (at 80%, 65% or 50% TAPS, respectively). This is followed by an off time of 30 seconds for a maximum of three starts,
followed by a rest period of one hour. If starting times are excessive, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. Duty
cycle may be changed or components may have to be changed or added. See NEC Article 430. Both interposing relay and
incomplete starting sequence protection are provided as standard. Standard factory settings are underlined.
5
NEMA
Size
Horsepower
Fuse Clip
Rating
240V
480V/600V[2]
10-15
15-25
30 [3]
60
100
20-30
30-50
60 [3]
100
200
60-100
100 [3]
200
400
[4]
5 [4]
6 [4],[6]
40-50
60-100
125-200
125-200
250-400
Class
(Amperes)
200 [3]
400
600
400 [3]
600
800
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [1]

Type B WiringClass I
1 w/ gasket
NEMA Type 12
4.0
2172B-CA_-__-_
2172B-CD_-__-_
4.5
2172B-DA_-__-_
2172B-DD_-__-_
6.0
2172B-EA_-__-_
2172B-ED_-__-_
6.0 [5]
25 W
2172B-FA_-__-_
2172B-FD_-__-_
6.0
35 W 2172B-GA_-__-_
20 D [7]
2172B-GD_-__-_
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J
J, R, H, HRCII-C
J, R, HRCII-C
L
Delivery
Program
PE-II

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2172B-EABD).
Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2172B-EABD-49).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2172B-EABD-49-27J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2172B-EABD-49__-27J). Then select power fuse from table on page 219 (e.g.,
2172B-EABD-49GT-20J).
[2] Delivery program is PE-II in United States and SC-II in Canada for 600V and SC-II in United States and PE-II in Canada for 480V.
[3] Available on 480 and 600 volt applications only.
[4] Available with Type B wiring only.
[6] Vertical section contains horizontal power bus that is mounted 5 deeper than standard. A special bus splice kit is provided when a NEMA size 6 starter is selected adjacent to a
standard 20 deep vertical section. Not available on NEMA Type 3R, Type 4 or back-to-back construction.
[7] Frame mounted 20 deep section without vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5 deeper than standard.
Bulletin 2173
Closed Transition Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Type Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (RVAT)

Autotransformers ( 200 HP) allow a starting time of 10, 15 or 25 seconds (at 80%, 65% or 50% TAPS, respectively) out of each
four minutes for one hour, followed by a rest period of two hours. Autotransformers > 200HP allow a starting time of 20, 30 or 50
seconds (at 80%, 65% or 50% TAPS, respectively). This is followed by an off time of 30 seconds for a maximum of three starts,
followed by a rest period of one hour. If starting times are excessive, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. Duty
cycle may be changed or components may have to be changed or added. See NEC Article 430. Both interposing relay and
incomplete starting sequence protection are provided as standard. Standard factory settings are underlined.
NEMA
Size
Horsepower
240V
480V/600V [2]
2
3
10-15
20-30
15-25
30-50
4 [3]
40-50
60-100
[3]
6 [3],[5],[6]
60-100
125-200
125-200
250-400
3.5
4.5
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
gasket
2173B-CA_-__
2173B-CD_-__
2173B-DA_-__
2173B-DD_-__
6.0
2173B-EA_-__
2173B-ED_-__
2173B-FA_-__
2173B-FD_-__
6.0 , 35 W, 20 D [7] 2173B-GA_-__
2173B-GD_-__
Space
Factor
6.0
[4]
25 W
3
4
5
Delivery
Program
PE-II

Select the control voltage type from table on page 217 (e.g., 2173B-EABD).
Select the horsepower from table on page 218 (e.g., 2173B-EABD-48).
Select the circuit breaker type from table on page 223 (e.g., 2173B-EABD-48CA).
The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter A for the
[2] Delivery program is PE-II in United States and SC-II in Canada for 600V and SC-II in United States and PE-II in Canada for 480V.
[3] Available with Type B wiring only.
[5] Vertical section contains horizontal power bus that is mounted 5 deeper than standard. A special bus splice kit is provided when a NEMA size 6 starter is selected adjacent to
a standard 20 deep vertical section. Not available in NEMA Type 3R, Type 4 or back-to-back construction.
[6] For 200HP at 240V or 400HP at 480V, suffix letter identifying circuit breaker must be CT or CM only.
59

2
3
4
5
60
Metering Units
Bulletin 2190
Metering Compartments (METER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Bulletin 2190 metering compartments are used for power management of
three-phase systems and include analog ammeter and voltmeter, Powermonitor II,
and Powermonitor 3000. The ammeter, voltmeter, digital meter and
Powermoniter 3000 include a 30A fused disconnect switch.
2
3
4
5
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2190

Metering Compartments (METER)
Analog Voltmeter and/or Ammeter or Digital Metering
System
Current Transformers (CTs) shipped loose for field mounting
Potential transformers (PTs) included as needed
Field mountable in 0.5 or 1.0 space factor location
Control Transformers included as needed
2190
Bulletin Number
Code
2190
Space Factor
Enclosure Type
Line Voltage
Type
Metering Unit (METER)
Code
A
B
Space Factor
0.5 Space Factor
1.0 Space Factor
Code Enclose Type

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
Code
H
P
A
N
KN
I
B
C
Line Voltage
208V
220 - 230V
240V
380V
400V
415V
480V
600V
54M
Ammeter Scale
Code
48M
50M
52M
54M
56M
58M
60M
Ammeter Scale
300A
400A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
Code
85AAXX
85BBXX
85BCXX
85EBB_
85ECB_
86UDX_
86TDX_
86VCX_
86UCCXB
Meter Designation
**
Options
Code Options
See Options section
beginning on Page 111.
Meter Designation
Analog ammeter
Analog ammeter with ammeter switch (2 CTs)
Analog ammeter with ammeter switch (3 CTs)
Analog ammeter and voltmeter with switches (2 CTs)
Analog ammeter and voltmeter with switches (3 CTs)
Bulletin 1405-M5 Powermonitor 3000
Bulletin 1405-M6 Powermonitor 3000
Bulletin 1405-M610 Digital Volt/Ammeter
61
Metering Units
2
Bulletin 2190
Metering Compartments (METER)
3
4
5
Ammeter:
Panel type (not switchboard type) with 5A movement, 3.5 scale, 102 deflection, and 2% of full scale accuracy.
Voltmeter:
Phase-to-phase voltage measurement only. Panel type (not switchboard type) with 120V movement, 3.5 scale, 102 deflection, and
2% of full scale accuracy.
Powermonitor 3000, Bulletin 1404-M5:
1404-DM highly visible LED display. The monitor can display 64 real-time parameters, including current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, I3) avg, 0.2%
full-scale accuracy, voltage (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca 0.2% full-scale accuracy), current, and voltage imbalance. There are four (4)
forms of power (real, reactive, apparent, and true, 0.4% full-scale accuracy), kWh, KVARh, kVAHnet, true RMS to the 45th
harmonic, frequency (0.05%), and power factor (0.4%). The Powermonitor 3000 includes min./max, event logs, trend log (up to
45,867 data points), and distortion analysis with THD, crest factor (I, V), and distortion power factor. Every Powermonitor 3000
includes RS-485 communications as standard and has options for RS-232, DeviceNet, and Remote I/O. Also included are two
form-C relays. The 1404-M5 can be flash upgraded to M6, and M8 PM3000 master modules. See your local Rockwell Automation
representative for details.
Powermonitor 3000, Bulletin 1404-M6:
Same functionality as the Bulletin 1404-M5 except for the addition of harmonic analysis with TIF, Crest Factor, IEEE 519, and %
THD and multiple channel and cycle oscillographic recordings. In addition, the same communication platforms are available.
Digital Volt/Ammeter, Bulletin 1405-M610:
The 1405-M610 measures and displays line-neutral and line-line voltages and the instantaneous, 15 minute averaged peak values of
the measured phase currents are displayed sequentially. The features of the M610 include a 3-line display simultaneously showing all
3 phases, peak value storage and display, automatic sequencing of displayed parameters. The M610 also includes 35 pre-programmed
standard current transformer ratios. A disconnect and current transformers are included in all 2190 metering units.
62 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 111-127
Metering Units
Analog Metering Compartments
Meter Type
Analog
Ammeter
Analog
Ammeter
with
Ammeter
Switch
Line
Voltage
(Volts)
Description
One (1) current transformer and panel

type ammeter.
Current transformers
shipped loose with
Two (2) current transformers, panel hardware and mounting
type ammeter, and ammeter switch. instructions. Metering
Use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems only. mounted in door, no
Three (3) current transformers, panel disconnect means, no unit
type ammeter, and ammeter switch. insert.
Use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems only.
Two (2) current transformers, panel

type ammeter with ammeter switch,
two (2) fused potential transformers,
and panel type Voltmeter with
Voltmeter switch. Use on 3-phase,
3-wire systems only.
Three (3) current transformers, panel

type ammeter with ammeter switch,
two (2) fused potential transformers,
and panel type Voltmeter with
Voltmeter switch. Use on 3-phase,
Catalog Number [1]

Wiring Type A OnlyClass I
w/ gasket
NEMA Type 12
0.5
2190-AKC-__-85AAXX
2190-AJC-__-85AAXX
1.0
2190-BKC-__-85AAXX
2190-BJC-__-85AAXX
0.5
2190-AKC-__-85BBXX
2190-AJC-__-85BBXX
1.0
2190-BKC-__-85BBXX
2190-BJC-__-85BBXX
0.5
2190-AKC-__-85BCXX
2190-AJC-__-85BCXX
1.0
2190-BKC-__-85BCXX
2190-BJC-__-85BCXX
208
2190-BKH-__-85EBBH
2190-BJH-__-85EBBH
220/230
2190-BKP-__-85EBBP
2190-BJP-__-85EBBP
240
2190-BKA-__-85EBBA
2190-BJA-__-85EBBA
380
2190-BKN-__-85EBBN
2190-BJN-__-85EBBN
2190-BKKN-__-85EBBKN
2190-BJKN-__-85EBBKN
415
2190-BKI-__-85EBBI
2190-BJI-__-85EBBI
480
2190-BKB-__-85EBBB
2190-BJB-__-85EBBB
600
2190-BKC-__-85EBBC
2190-BJC-__-85EBBC
208
2190-BKH-__-85ECBH
2190-BJH-__-85ECBH
220/230
2190-BKP-__-85ECBP
2190-BJP-__-85ECBP
240
2190-BKA-__-85ECBA
2190-BJA-__-85ECBA
380
2190-BKN-__-85ECBN
2190-BJN-__-85ECBN
2190-BKKN-__-85ECBKN
2190-BJKN-__-85ECBKN
415
2190-BKI-__-85ECBI
2190-BJI-__-85ECBI
480
2190-BKB-__-85ECBB
2190-BJB-__-85ECBB
600
2190-BKC-__-85ECBC
2190-BJC-__-85ECBC
400
Plug-in metering units with
disconnect and fuses.
Current transformers
shipped loose with
hardware and mounting
instructions.
Analog
Ammeter and
Voltmeter
with
Switches
600 Max.
Space
Factor
400
1.0
1.0
2
Delivery
Program
4
5
SC
[1] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate catalog string number from table on page 64 to identify the ammeter scale and current transformer primary
ratio (e.g., 2190-AKC-52M-85AAXX).
63
Metering Units
2
Bulletin 2190
Metering Compartments (METER), continued
Digital Metering Compartments
Catalog Number [1]

Meter Type
Description
4
5
Bulletin 1404-M5 [2]

Powermonitor 3000 with
RS-485 Communications
Bulletin 1404-M6 [2]
Powermonitor 3000 with
RS-485 Communication
Bulletin 1405-M610
Digital Volt/Ammeter
Plug-in unit with disconnect, fuses, and control circuit

transformer. For 3-phase, 3-wire systems, three (3) current
transformers are shipped loose with hardware and
mounting instructions. For 3-phase, 4-wire systems, four
(4) current transformers are shipped loose with hardware
and mounting instructions.
Fused potential transformers are self-contained in the
meters power module.
For use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems only. Plug-in metering
unit with disconnect and fuses. Current transformers
shipped loose with hardware and mounting instructions.
Potential transformers are internal to the device.
Space
Factor
1.0

gasket
2190-BK__-__-86U_ _X_
NEMA Type 12
2190-BJ__-__-86U_ _X_
SC
1.0
2190-BK__-__-86T_ _X_
2190-BJ__-__-86T_ _X_
0.5
2190-AK__-__-86VCX_
2190-AJ__-__-86VCX_

Select the appropriate voltage code from Line Voltage table to identify the line voltage code. The voltage code must be in two places in the catalog string (e.g.,
2190-BKB-54M-86RCXB).
Select the appropriate catalog string number from Ammeter Scales table to identify the current transformer primary ratio (e.g., 2190-BKB-54M-86RCXB).
Select the appropriate letter from System Wiring table to identify the system wiring (e.g., 2190-BKB-54M-86RCXB).
For Powermonitor 3000 units, select the appropriate letter from Powermonitor 3000 Communication Options table to identify the communication platform (e.g.,
2190-BKB-54M-86UCCXB).
[2] For 3-wire power systems where L1-N, L1-G, L2-N or L2-G may exceed 347V, consult factory.
Line Voltage
Line Voltage
208
220/230
240
380
400
415
480
600
System Wiring
Voltage Code
H
P
A
N
KN
I
B
C
System Wiring
3-phase, 3-wire
3-phase, 4-wire
Catalog String
48M
50M
52M
54M
56M
58M
60M
Letter Code
C
D
Powermonitor 3000 Communication Options
Ammeter Scales
Ammeter Scale
300A
400A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
Delivery
Program
Platform
RS-485
Letter Code
A
RS-232 [1]
DeviceNet [1]
Remote I/O [1]
Ethernet [1]
[1] These communication platforms are in addition to the

native RS-485.
SC

Bulletin 2191F and 2191M
Outgoing Feeder Lug Compartment (FLUG) and Incoming Main Lug
Compartment (MLUG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
The Bulletin 2191M and 2191F are line lug compartments that provide a lug
connection for incoming lines (2191M) to distribute power to the motor control
center or for outgoing cables (2191F) to feed power from the MCC to an external
load. These line lug compartments are available with ratings from 300 to 2000A.
Optional mechanical or crimp lugs can be supplied with the lug compartments.
2
3
5
6

Feeder and Main Fusible Disconnect Switch Units (FDS, MFDS). . . . . . . . . . . 73
Bulletin 2192M and 2192F are fusible disconnect switches. These switches are
available with ratings from 30A to 2000A. The 2192F is a plug-in unit for ratings
up to 200A and frame mounted for ratings 400A and above. The 2192M is frame
mounted (rigidly mounted and hardwired) in the structure for all ratings. The
bolted pressure switch design is used for 2192 units rated 600A through 2000A.

Feeder and Main Circuit Breaker Units (FCB, MCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Bulletin 2193M and 2193F are circuit breaker units with trip ratings available from
15A to 2000A. These units are available with thermal magnetic trips up to 400A
and electronic trips 600A and above. The 2193F is a plug-in unit for ratings up to
225A and is a frame mounted unit for ratings 400A and above. The 2193M is
frame mounted for all ratings.
65

2
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2191F and 2191M

Incoming and Outgoing Lug Compartment Units
Line Lug Compartments
Rated from 300 - 2000A
Mechanical or crimp lugs are available
5
6
2191M
Bulletin Number
Mounting
Code
Type
Feeder Lug
2191F Outgoing
Compartment (FLUG)
Incoming Main Lug
2191M Compartment
(MLUG)
Code
T
B
66
Mounting
Top
Bottom
Space Factor Enclosure Type
Code Space Factor

0 (mounted in top
A
horizontal wireway)
B
1.0
C
1.5
D
2.0
J
4.5 (71 High Sections)
M
6.0
N
6.0 (Corner Section)
P
6.0 (10 Wide Section)
C
Line Voltage
54
- 83D500-864CCXB -
**
Amperes
Lug and Meter Options
Options
Lug and Meter

Options
See tables on page 68-70.
Code Line Voltage

C
600V

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
Code
48
52
54
56
58
60
Code
Amperes
300A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
Code Options
See Options section
Bulletin 2191M and 2191F

Lug CompartmentsProvisions for Basic Sections/Incoming Lines (MLUG) and Outgoing Feeders (FLUG)

All lugs compartments are frame mounted and must be located at top or bottom of section.
For metering options, refer to page 70.
For 4-wire applications. Incoming neutral bus (see page 121) or neutral connection plates (see pages 25, 109, 121 and 226) are
available for Bulletins 2191MT and 2191MB.
For 71 high sections, see restrictions on page 24.
2191FTTop mounted feeder
2191FBBottom mounted feeder
2191MTTop mounted main
2191MBBottom mounted main
Top- and bottom-mounted mains are designed with adequate space to route cables to lugs. Special consideration may need to be
given to the mounting of the CTs for a metering device. Addition of a pull box might be considered.
Refer to Appendix for wire size conversion table.
Cable Provisions
Maximum Number Per Phase
and Maximum Cable Size [1]
Rating
(Amperes)
Mechanical Type Lugs

Single Cable Lug
Multiple Cable Lug
Space
Factor
Crimp Type Lugs
Catalog Number [2]

1 w/ gasket
Delivery
Program
NEMA Type 12
PROVISIONS FOR BASIC SECTIONS

300
(2) 400 kcmil

(2) 400 kcmil
600
800 [10]
800
1200
[10]
1200
1600
2000
(4) 250 kcmil
(2) 350 kcmil

(2) 350 kcmil
1.0 [5],[3]
2191F_-BKC-48
2191F_-BJC-48
1.0 [5],[7]
2191M_-BKC-48
2191M_-BJC-48
[4],[5]
2191F_-BKC-52
2191F_-BJC-52
1.0
2191M_-BKC-52
2191M_-BJC-52
2191MT-AKC-52
2191MT-AJC-52
2191M_-CKC-52
2191M_-CJC-52
1.0
(1) 500 kcmil
(2) 300 kcmil
(2) 350 kcmil
In top, horizontal
wireway [6],[7]
(2) 750 kcmil
(4) 500 kcmil
(1) 750 kcmil

(2) 500 kcmil
1.5
(4) 800 kcmil
(4) 750 kcmil
(2) 800 kcmil

(4) 600 kcmil
(2) 750 kcmil

(4) 500 kcmil
(1) 750 kcmil

(2) 600 kcmil
(4) 500 kcmil
(3) 500 kcmil

(4) 350 kcmil
(1) 800 kcmil

(2) 750 kcmil
(4) 600 kcmil
(4) 800 kcmil
6.0
[8],[9]
2191_ _-MKC-52
2191_ _-MJC-52
1.0
[5],[6]
2191_ T-BKC-54
2191_ T-BJC-54
1.5 [5]
2191_ _-CKC-54
2191_ _-CJC-54
(2) 750 kcmil

(4) 500 kcmil
2.0 [5]
2191_ _-DKC-54
2191_ _-DJC-54
(4) 750 kcmil
6.0 [8],[9]
2191_ _-MKC-54
2191_ _-MJC-54
(2) 800 kcmil

(4) 600 kcmil
(2) 750 kcmil

(4) 500 kcmil
1.0 [5],[6]
2191_ T-BKC-56
2191_ T-BJC-56
(1) 800 kcmil

(2) 750 kcmil
(4) 600 kcmil
(2) 750 kcmil

(4) 500 kcmil
2.0 [5]
2191_ _-DKC-56
2191_ _-DJC-56
2191_ _-MKC-56
2191_ _-MJC-56
2191_ _-MKC-58
2191_ _-MJC-58
2191_ _-MKC-60
2191_ _-MJC-60
(4) 800 kcmil

(6) 800 kcmil
(4) 750 kcmil

(6) 750 kcmil
6.0
[8],[9]
SC-II
[1] Using a larger wire/lug size than is listed violates bend radius guidelines as listed in NEC/UL/cUL wire bending tables and voids UL/cUL listing and CSA certification.
If required, insert M for main or F for feeder (e.g., 2191M or 2191F).
If required, insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (e.g., 2191MT or 2191MB).
If using optional lugs, select from table on page 69. Then add catalog string number to base catalog number (e.g., 2191MT-CKC-52-82B500).
[3] The maximum possible rating of this unit is 300A. The rating of this unit can be determined by subtracting the current requirements of the units in the 3.0 space factors above or
below this unit. Review NEC/CEC for further information.
[4] The maximum possible rating of this unit is 600A. The rating of this unit can be determined by subtracting the current requirements of the units in the 3.0 space factors above or
below this unit. Review NEC/CEC for further information.
[5] Cannot be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units (transformer units excluded). Unit compartments 1.0 through 2.0 space factors must be located at top or
bottom of vertical section.
[6] Pullbox required. Must be mounted at top of vertical section.
[7] Not available with incoming neutral bus.
[8] Shipped in single shipping split only.
[9] Unit is 4.5 space factors in a 71 high section. The catalog number must be changed from 2191_ _ - M to 2191_ _-J (e.g., 2191MT-JKC-52).
[10] Main and feeder rating must match horizontal bus rating. Full-rated neutral bus for 1200A, 2191M units requires a 6.0 space factor lug compartment.
67
2
3
5
6

2
3
Lug Compartments
Provisions for Inside Corner, 10 Wide Sections, and Neutrals/Incoming Line and Outgoing Feeders
Metering options not available.


2191FTTop mounted feeder
2191FBBottom mounted feeder
2191MTTop mounted main
2191MBBottom mounted main
600
800
1200
1600
2000
Cable Provisions [1]

Catalog Number [2]
Maximum Number Per Phase and Maximum
Wiring
Type AClass I
Space
Cable Size
Factor
Mechanical Type Lugs
Crimp Type Lugs
NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
Single Cable Lug
PROVISIONS FOR INSIDE CORNER SECTION
2191_ _-NKC-52
2191_ _-NJC-52
2191_ _-NKC-54
2191_ _-NJC-54
[3]
(4) 800 kcmil
(4) 750 kcmil
2191_
_-NKC-56
2191_ _-NJC-56
6.0
2191_ _-NKC-58
2191_ _-NJC-58
2191_ _-NKC-60
2191_ _-NJC-60
600
800
1200
PROVISIONS FOR 10 WIDE SECTION [4]

2191_ _-PKC-52
(2) 750 kcmil
[3]
2191_ _-PKC-54
6.0
(4) 500 kcmil
2191_ _-PKC-56
Rating
(Amperes)
Not Applicable
2191_ _-PJC-52
2191_ _-PJC-54
2191_ _-PJC-56
Delivery
Program
PE-II
PE-II
[1] Using a larger wire/lug size than is listed violates bend radius guidelines as listed in NEC/UL/cUL wire bending tables and voids UL/cUL listing and CSA certification.
Insert M for main or F for feeder (e.g., 2191M or 2191F).
Insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (e.g., 2191MT or 2191MB).
If optional lugs will be selected, select from Lug Selection table on page 69. Then add catalog string number to base catalog number (e.g., 2191MT-CKC-52-82B500).
[3] Not available in 71 high sections, NEMA Type 3R, or Type 4.
[4] This section must be selected as part of a 2-section shipping block and shipped attached to a 20, 25, or 30 wide section. It cannot be selected as free standing or attached to
a section with a 9 vertical wireway, any 35 wide drive unit, a full-section programmable controller, a 1600A or 2000A 2192M, or a 2000A 2193M. It is not available in NEMA
Type 3R, Type 4, or back-to-back construction.
Lug Dimensions for Bulletin 2191F and 2191M

Number of
Cables Per Lug Dimension A
MECHANICAL TYPE LUGS
1
2.13 (54 mm)
Lug Size
#6-350 kcmil
#4/0-600 kcmil
350-800 kcmil
#6-350 kcmil
[2]
[3]
#4/0-600 kcmil
250 kcmil
350 kcmil
500 kcmil
750 kcmil
250 kcmil
350 kcmil
500 kcmil
750 kcmil
[1]
[3]
Refer to
Figure
1
2.31 (59 mm)
2.25 (57 mm)
2.13 (54 mm)
2.13 (54 mm)
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Panduit Type LCC)

2.94 (75 mm)
3.38 (86 mm)
1
3.78 (96 mm)
4.63 (118 mm)
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Burndy YA-A Series)
2.91 (74 mm)
3.69 (94 mm)
1
4.44 (113 mm)
4.94 (125 mm)
[1] Recommended lug for 1600A and 2000A lug compartments.

[2] Two (2) lugs per phase only when used on 1200A lug compartment.
[3] Used in a wireway when more than 2 cables per phase are specified in a 1.0 or
1.5 space factor 600A lug compartment.
68
Lug Compartments, continued
Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE motor control centers are rated for use with 75C wire. Wire must be sized using the 75C column
in NEC/UL/cUL. The actual temperature rating of the lug is not relevant.
Refer to the Appendix for a wire size conversion table.
Lug Selection
Wire/Cable Size
Catalog
String No. [1]
5
6
[1] Catalog string numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate letter
from Lug Quantity table to identify the number of cables per phase desired (e.g.,
2191MT-AAC-52-80B4X0). When optional neutral incoming bus is desired,
optional neutral lugs will be the same type as those for 3-phase cable. Only one
option code is needed.
[2] Mechanical lugs are available for use with 42kA bus bracing. For applications
requiring over 42kA bus bracing, use crimp type lugs only.
Lug Quantity
A
B
C
D
E
F
Wire Range
MECHANICAL TYPE LUGS FOR ALUMINUM/COPPER WIRE [2]

#6 AWG
-80_006
#4 AWG
-80_004
#2 AWG
-80_002
#1 AWG
-80_001
#1/0 AWG
-80_1X0
#6-350 kcmil
#2/0 AWG
-80_2X0
#3/0 AWG
-80_3X0
#4/0 AWG
-80_4X0
250 kcmil
-80_250
300 kcmil
-80_300
350 kcmil
-80_350
400 kcmil
-80_400
500 kcmil
-80_500
#4/0-600 kcmil
600 kcmil
-80_600
700 kcmil
-80_700
750 kcmil
-80_750
350-800 kcmil
800 kcmil
-80_800
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Panduit Type LCC) FOR COPPER WIRE
250 kcmil
-82_250
350 kcmil
-82_350
500 kcmil
-82_500
750 kcmil
-82_750
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Burndy YA-A Series) FOR ALUMINUM or
COPPER WIRE
250 kcmil
-83_250
350 kcmil
-83_350
500 kcmil
-83_500
750 kcmil
-83_750
Letter
Number of Cables per Phase [1]

1
2
3
4
5
6
[1] If optional full-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 121) is specified, the quantity and size/type
of the lug(s) on neutral lug pad will be the same as the 3-phase lugs. When optional half-rated
incoming neutral bus (see page 121) is specified and (1) or (2) lugs per phase are specified, (1) lug
will be provided on the half-rated neutral riser. When (3) or (4) lugs are specified, (2) lugs will be
provided. When (5) or (6) lugs are specified, (3) lugs will be provided on half-rated neutral riser.
69

2
Bulletin 2191M
Lug Compartments/Incoming Lines Metering Options
Metering options may not be used on units specified with ground detection
lights. See page 120.
Metering options on 6.0 space factor bottom entry units will be mounted 22
(554 mm) from the floor. A separate metering unit may be preferred.
Meter Type [1]
Includes one (1) current

transformer and panel type
ammeter
Current
Includes two (2) current
transformers
transformers, panel type ammeter, shipped loose
and ammeter switch. Use on
with hardware
3-phase, 3-wire systems only.
Analog Ammeter with
and mounting
Ammeter Switch
Includes three (3) current
instructions
transformers, panel type ammeter,
and ammeter switch. Use on
3-phase, 3-wire systems only.
Includes one (1) fused potential transformer (mounted
Analog Voltmeter
in compartment) and panel type Voltmeter
Includes two (2) fused potential transformers
Analog Voltmeter with
(mounted in compartment), panel type Voltmeter, and
Voltmeter Switch
Voltmeter switch. For 3-phase,
Two (2) current transformers,
panel type ammeter with ammeter Current
transformers
switch, two (2) fused potential
shipped loose
transformers, and panel type
Voltmeter with Voltmeter switch with hardware
Analog Ammeter and
and mounting
Voltmeter with Switches Three (3) current transformers,
instructions. Use
panel type ammeter with ammeter on 3-phase,
switch, two (2) fused potential
3-wire systems
transformers, and panel type
only.
Voltmeter with Voltmeter switch
Bul. 1404-M5
Display module mounted on door. Includes control
Powermonitor 3000 with circuit transformer. For 3-phase, 3-wire systems, three
RS-485 Communication [3] (3) current transformers ship loose with hardware and
mounting instructions. For 3-phase, 4-wire systems,
Bul. 1404-M6
four (4) current transformers ship loose with hardware
Powermonitor 3000 with and mounting instructions. Disconnect switch is not
RS-485 Communication included.
For use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems only. Plug-in
metering unit with disconnect and fuses. Current
Bulletin 1405-M610
transformers shipped loose with hardware and
Digital Volt/Ammeter
mounting instructions. Potential transformers are
internal to the device.
Analog Ammeter
Top- and bottom-mounted mains are designed with adequate space to route
cables to lugs. Special consideration may need to be given to the mounting of the
CTs for a metering device. Addition of a pull box might be considered.
See page 61 for meter specifications.
Catalog String Number for Metering Option

Line Voltage [2]
240V
380V
400V
415V
Description
208V
220/230V
480V
600V
-_-85AAXX
-_-85AAXX
-_-85AAXX
-_-85AAXX
-_-85AAXX
-_-85AAXX -_-85AAXX
-_-85AAXX
-_-85BBXX
-_-85BBXX
-_-85BBXX
-_-85BBXX
-_-85BBXX
-_-85BBXX
-_-85BBXX
-_-85BBXX
-_-85BCXX
-_-85BCXX
-_-85BCXX
-_-85BCXX
-_-85BCXX
-_-85BCXX
-_-85BCXX
-_-85BCXX
-_-85CXAH
-_-85CXAP
-_-85CXAA
-_-85CXAN
-_-85CXAKN
-_-85CXAI
-_-85CXAB
-_-85CXAC
-_-85HXBH
-_-85HXBP
-_-85HXBA
-85HXBN
-85HXBKN
-85HXBI
-_-85HXBB
-_-85HXBC
-_-85EBBH
-_-85EBBP
-_-85EBBA
-_-85EBBN
-_-85EBBKN
-_-85EBBI
-_-85EBBB
-_-85EBBC
-_-85ECBH
-_-85ECBP
-_-85ECBA
-_-85ECBN
-_-85ECBKN
-_-85ECBI
-_-85ECBB
-_-85ECBC
Delivery
Program
SC-II
-_-86U_ _XH -_-86U_ _XP -_-86U_ _XA -_-86U_ _XN -_-86U_ _XKN -_-86U_ _XI -_-86U_ _XB -_-86U_ _XC
SC-II
-_-86T_ _XH -_-86T_ _XP -_-86T_ _XA -_-86T_ _XN -_-86T_ _XKN -_-86T_ _XI -_-86T_ _XB -_-86T_ _XC
-_-86VCXH
-_-86VCXP
-_-86VCXA
-_-86VCXN
-_-86VCXKN
-_-86VCXI
-_-86VCXB
-_-86VCXC
[1] Metering not available in 2191M 600A main lugs in horizontal wireway.
[2]
The option numbers listed are not complete:
Select the appropriate catalog string number from Ammeter Scale and Current Transformer Primary Ratio table to identify the current transformer primary ratio (e.g.,
-54M-86UCCXB).
Where applicable, select the appropriate letter from System Wiring table to identify the system wiring (e.g., 2190-BJB-54M-86UCCXB).
Select the appropriate letter from the Powermonitor 3000 Communication Options table to identify the communication platform for Powermonitor 3000 units (e.g.,
-54M-86UCCXB).
[3] For 3-wire power systems where L1-N, L1-G, L2-N or L2-G may exceed 347V, consult factory.
Ammeter Scale and Current Transformer Primary Ratio

Amperes
300A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000
System Wiring
Catalog String Number

48M
52M
54M
56M
58M
60M
Powermonitor 3000 Communication Options

Platform
RS-485
RS-232 [1]
Letter Code
A
B
DeviceNet [1]
Remote I/O [1]
Ethernet [1]
[1] These communication platforms are in addition to the native

RS-485.
70
System
3-phase, 3-wire
3 phase, 4 wire
Cat. String
C
D
SC-II
Bulletin 2191M
Lug Compartments/Incoming LineDimensions
Lug pads shown on page 72 are drilled for 2-hole NEMA 1.75 spacing.
Compartment
Size
(Space Factor)
(Amperes)
600
1.0
1.0
300
600
800
1200
600
2
2
800
1.0
(pullbox required)
1.5
[2]
6.0
(20 wide)
6.0
(corner section)
6.0
(10 wide)
2000
600
800
1200
L2
L3
Total Available
Space with
Pullbox
13.19 (335 mm)
12.81 (325 mm)

12.81 (325 mm)
12.81 (325 mm)

12.81 (325 mm)
Maximum
No. of
Cables per
Phase
Single
Cable
Double
Cable
24.81 (630 mm)

24.81 (630 mm)
2
4
2
2
21.56 (548 mm)
N/A
4
4
2
4
19.31 (490 mm)

15.75 (400 mm)
19.31 (490 mm)

15.75 (400 mm)
31.31 (795 mm)

27.75 (705 mm)
16.63 (422 mm) [3]

20.00 (508 mm)
16.63 (422 mm) [3]

20.00 (508 mm)
16.63 (422 mm) [3]

20.00 (508 mm)
28.63 (727 mm)
32.00 (813 mm)
20.88 (530 mm) [3]
20.88 (530 mm) [3]
20.88 (530 mm) [3]
32.88 (835 mm)
37.63 (956 mm)
44.13 (1121 mm)
50.63 (1286 mm)
37.63 (956 mm)
44.13 (1121 mm)
50.63 (1286 mm)
37.63 (956 mm)
44.13 (1121 mm)
50.63 (1286 mm)
35.88 (911 mm)
42.38 (1076 mm)
48.88 (1242 mm)
N/A
[1] See page 72 for figures.

[2] Depending on wire size and wires per phase, pullbox may be required to meet wire bending radius as specified by NEC/UL/cUL.
[3] When cable size selected limits the user to two (2) single lugs per phase, Dimension A is measured from center set of holes in lug pad. See Figure 3 on page 72.
Compartment
Size
(Space Factor)
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
Bottom
Entry
6.0
(20 wide)
6.0
(corner section)
6.0
(10 wide)
Ratings
(Amperes)
[1]
300
600
600
2
2
2
800
800
1200
600
800
1200
1600
2000
600
800
1200
1600
2000
600
800
1200
Dimensions A
Refer to
Figure
L1
L2
12.81 (325 mm)

12.81 (325 mm)
19.31 (490 mm)
15.75 (400 mm)
16.63 (422 mm)
20.00 (508 mm)
[2]
20.88 (530 mm)
[2]
L3
Maximum No. of
Cables per Phase
Maximum
Number of Lugs
per Phase
19.31 (490 mm)

15.75 (400 mm)
600
800
1200
1600
2000
600
800
1200
1600
L1
12.81 (325 mm)

12.81 (325 mm)
800
1200
2.0
Dimension B
[1]
In horiz. WW
(pullbox required)
Top
Entry
Dimensions A
Refer to
Ratings Figure
Maximum Number of
Lugs per Phase
Single
Double
Cable
Cable
2
N/A
2
2
2
2
4
12.81 (325 mm)

12.81 (325 mm)
19.31 (490 mm)
15.75 (400 mm)
12.81 (325 mm)

12.81 (325 mm)
19.31 (490 mm)
15.75 (400 mm)
2
4
4
4
16.63 (422 mm) [2]

20.00 (508 mm)
16.63 (422 mm) [2]

20.00 (508 mm)
20.88 (530 mm) [2]
20.88 (530 mm) [2]
50.63 (1286 mm)
44.13 (1121 mm)
37.63 (956 mm)
50.63 (1286 mm)
44.13 (1121 mm)
37.63 (956 mm)
50.63 (1286 mm)
44.13 (1121 mm)
37.63 (956 mm)
48.88 (1242 mm)
42.38 (1076 mm)
35.88 (911 mm)
N/A
[1] See page 72 for figures.

[2] When cable size selected limits the user to two (2) single lugs per phase, Dimension A is measured from center set of holes in lug pad. See Figure 3 on page 72.
71
5
6

2
Bulletin 2191M
Lug Compartments/Incoming LineDimensions
Dimensions for drawings are provided on page 71.
3
"B"
"B"
"B"
"A1"
"A"
"A"
FIGURE 1
FIGURE 3
FIGURE 2
Phase A vertical bus on top incoming

2.0 space factors and Phase C vertical
bus on bottom incoming 2.0 space
factors are not required or supplied
"A"
(L1)
"A"
(L3)
"A"
(L3)
"A"
(L3)
"A"
(L2)
"A"
(L2)
"A"
(L2)
"A"
(L1)
FIGURE 4
FIGURE 5
NOTE: All lug pads shown accept NEMA standard 2-hole lugs 1.75 on center using .5 hardware.
72
"A"
(L1)
FIGURE 6
Fusible Disconnect Feeders and Mains

30 - 200A Feeders are available as Plug-in Units
400 - 1200A Feeders and all Mains are Frame Mounted
600 - 2000A units have Visual Blade Bolted Pressure Switches
5
6
2192F
Bulletin Number
Mounting
Code
Type
Disconnect
2192F Fusible
Switch Feeder (FDS)
Main Fusible
2192M Disconnect Switch
(MFDS)
Code
T [1]
B [1]
Z
Mounting
Top
Bottom
0.5 Space Factor
[1] A T or B is required for all

2192M units and only 400A and
above 2192F units.
Maximum Trip Ratings NEMA Enclosure Type
Code
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
Maximum Trip
Ratings
30A
60A
100A
200A
400A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
Line Voltage
Code
P
A
N
KN
I
B
C
Line Voltage
220/230V
250V
380V
400V
415V
480V
600V
24J
Fuse, Clip Rating and Class
**
Options
Fuse, Clip Rating

Code and Class
See Fuse Clip Sizes/Type
on page 74.
Code Options
See 2192M metering
options on page 75.
See Options section

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
73

2
3
Bulletin 2192F
Fusible Disconnect SwitchFeeders (FDS)

Select disconnect switch rating based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/CEC.
2192FZPlug-in unit, 0.5 space factor, 30A only.
2192FPlug-in unit, 30A-200A.
2192FTTop-mounted feeder, 400A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
2192FTTop-mounted feeder, 600A-1200A are reverse-fed, connect load to top of switch.
2192FBBottom-mounted feeder, 400A-1200A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
Refer to Appendix for horsepower ratings.
Fuse Clip
Switch Rating
(Amperes)
Rating
(Amperes)
Class
Cables/
Phase
Cable/Wire
Size Range
Wire
Type
30
CC, J
#14-#8 AWG
CU
30
CC, J, R,
H
These units have horizontal operating handles and

Bulletin 194R fused disconnect switch. See 8 for
information on installation into series E-J sections.
Wired to pull-apart terminal blocks as standard. For
unit without power terminal blocks, add 110 to the
catalog number string (N/C). Unit will then be supplied
with a separately mounted disconnect switch and fuse
block.
30
30
60
[2]
Dual 30
Dual
60/30 [2]
[2]
Dual 60
Dual
100/30 [2]
Dual
100/60 [2]
Dual disconnects use Cutler-Hammer fusible switches.

Duals must have identical fuse clip types. Only 30A
and 60A disconnects with 600V Class H and R fuse
clips are wired to pull-apart terminal blocks.
Dual units require two (2) sets of fuses. The fuse size
code must correspond to the respective fuse clip
designator code. The fuse manufacturer for both fuses
must be the same (e.g., 2192F-CAC-2524J-609602G).
Larger switch must be mounted on the left side.
2192FZ-BK_-__
2192FZ-BJC_-__
1.0
2192F-BK_-__
2192F-BJ_-__
60
2192F-CK_-__
2192F-CJ_-__
30
2192F-BK_-2424__
2192F-BJ_-2424__
60/30
2192F-CK_-2524__
2192F-CJ_-2524__
60
2192F-CK_-2525__
2192F-CJ_-2525__
2192F-DK_-2624__
2192F-DJ_-2624__
2192F-DK_-2625__
2192F-DJ_-2625__
2192F-DJ_-2626__
2192F-DJ_-__
2192F-EJ_-__
2192F_-FJ_-__
J, R, H
100
100
200
400
600
800
1200
1200
J, R, H, L
L
#14-#4 AWG
CU
1.0
#14-1/0 AWG
#1-#4 AWG
CU
1
1
1
2
#14-1/0 AWG
#8-1/0 AWG
#6-4/0 AWG
#1/0-250 kcmil
CU
CU
CU
CU
2.5 [3]
2192F-DK_-2626__
2192F-DK_-__
2192F-EK_-__
2192F_-FK_-__
3.5 [4]
2192F_-GK_-__
2192F_-GJ_-__
CU/AL
3.5 [4]
2192F_-HKC-__
2192F_-HJC-__
3.5 [4]
2192F_-JKC-__
2192F_-JJC-__
100/60
Bolted pressure contact switch. No vertical wireway.

Viewing window on door for visual verification of
disconnect blades.
800
Catalog Number [1]

Space
Factor NEMA Type 1 or Type 1
NEMA Type 12
w/ gasket
0.5
100/30
Dual 100 [2]

100
200
400
600
Load Lugs Provided
#2-600 kcmil
#6-350 kcmil
#6-350 kcmil
1.5
2.0
Delivery
Program
SC
SC-II

For 400-1200 Amperes, insert T for Top mounted or B for Bottom mounted (e.g., 2192FT- or 2192FB-).
Unless already selected, select the voltage from Fuse Clip Voltage table (e.g., 2192F-BKC).
Select the fuse clip designator from Fuse Clip Sizes/Types table (e.g., 2192F-BKC-24J). For duals, add letter suffix onlynumbers are already supplied in catalog number
(e.g.,2192F-CKA-2525J).
If power fuse will be selected, select from table on page 220 (e.g., 2192F-BKC-24J-603G). Double code number for duals (e.g., 603603G).
For fuse rating, based on disconnect rating, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
If optional load lugs will be selected, select from table on page 76. Add option number to base catalog number (e.g., 2192F-GKC-29R-603G-82B500).
[2] Not available with DSA (options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3).
[3] Frame mounted. Must be located at top or bottom of section.
[4] Frame mounted. Must be located at top or bottom of section. May not be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units.
Fuse Clip Voltage
Fuse Clip Sizes/Types and UL Listed Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Fusible Disconnect Switch Units (2192FT, 2192FB, 2192MT, 2192MB)
Fuse Clip
Voltage
Voltage
Code
Fuse Clip
Type
220-230
P [2]
30A
24J
60A
25J
100A
26J
200A
27J
Fuse Clip Designator

(Amperes)
400A 600A
800A
28J
29J
240
A [2]
24R
25R
26R
27R
28R
250
A [1]
24
25
26
27
28
29
10kA
380
N [2]
24L
25L
26L
27L
100kA
100kA
00N
00N
00N
00N
100kA [5]
29R
400
KN [2]
CC
24C
23L [3]
415
I [2]
Non-Fused [4]
00N
480
600
B [2]
C
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
1200A
1600A
2000A
Available Short
Circuit Amperes
(rms symmetrical) through 600V
100kA
100kA
Not available for 1600A or 2000A 2192M.

These voltage codes are to be used only when ground fault protection (option 88GF) is selected on 1600A-2000A 2192M units.
For 600A, 100% rated, Class L fuses are the only valid option. 23L indicates provision for a 601A, Class L.
Available on mains (2192MT, 2192MB) only. This is 100% rated and can be supplied in NEMA 1, 1 with gasket, and 12. Not available as standard with 100kA series coordinated
bus bracing, consult factory.
[5] Short circuit withstand is 100kA only when protected upstream with Class L fuses that are sized in accordance with particular switch (e.g., 800A upstream fuses are to be used
with 800A switch or 2000A upstream fuses are to be used with 2000A switch).
74
Bulletin 2192M
Fusible Disconnect SwitchMains (MFDS)

Select disconnect switch rating based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/UL/cUL.
Mains are suitable for use as service entrance per NEC (UL) and CEC (CSA). If application is a four-wire system, a neutral
connection plate rated for 280A is available. Select on pages 25, 109, 121 and 226. If a Neutral connection greater then 280A is
required, refer to page 25 and page 121 or contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
Mains rated 1000A and above may require ground fault protection. For 1000-1200A applications that require ground fault
protection, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. For 1600-2000A applications that require ground fault
protection, see option 88GF on page 120.
Non-fused mains are available in 600A through 2000A. See Fuse Clip Sizes/Types table on page 74.
2192MTTop-mounted main, 30A-2000A are top-fed.
2192MBBottom-mounted main, 30A-400A are top-fed.
2192MBBottom-mounted main, 600A-2000A are reverse-fed.
Switch Rating
(Amperes)
Fuse Clip
Rating
(Amperes)
30
60
100
200
30
60
100
200
400
400
600
[4],[5]
600
Catalog Number [1]
Line Lugs Provided
Class
J, R, H
J, R, H, L
Cables/
Phase
1
1
1
1
Cable/Wire Size
Range [2]
#14-#8 AWG
#14-#6 AWG
#8-1/0 AWG
#6-4/0 AWG
Wire
Type
CU
CU
CU
CU
1/0-250 kcmil
CU
#2-600 kcmil
CU/AL
800 [4],[6]
800
#6-350 kcmil
CU/AL
[4] [6]
1200
#6-350 kcmil
CU/AL
1200 ,
[4] [6] [7]
1600 , ,
1600
2000 [4],[6],[7]
2000
#2-600 kcmil
CU/AL
#2-600 kcmil
CU/AL
2.0 [3]

NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
2192M_-BK_-__
2192M_-BJ_-__
2192M_-CK_-__
2192M_-CJ_-__
2192M_-DK_-__
2192M_-DJ_-__
2192M_-EK_-__
2192M_-EJ_-__
2.5 [3]
2192M_-FK_-__
2192M_-FJ_-__
2192M_-GK_-__
2192M_-GJ_-__
2192M_-HKC-__
2192M_-HJC-__
2192M_-JKC-__
2192M_-JJC-__
2192M_-KK_-__
2192M_-KJ_-__
2192M_-LK_-__
2192M_-LJ_-__
Space
Factor
1.5 [3]
3.5 [5]
6.0
20 D 35 W [8]
Delivery
Program
SC-II

Insert T for Top mounted or B for Bottom mounted (e.g., 2192MT- or 2192MB-).
Unless already selected, select the voltage code from table on page 74 (e.g., 2192MT-GKC).
Then select the appropriate fuse clip designator from Fuse Clip Sizes/Types on page 74 (e.g., 2192MT-GKC-29J).
If power fuse will be selected, select from table on page 220 (e.g., 2192MT-GKC-29J-629G).
For fuse rating, based on disconnect rating, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
If optional line lugs will be selected, select from Optional Crimp Lugs for Bulletins 2192FT, 2192FB, 2192MT and 2192MB table below (e.g., 2192MT-GKC-29J-629G-82B500).
[2] If optional full-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 121) is specified, the quantity and size/type of the lug(s) on neutral lug pad will be the same as the 3-phase lugs. When
optional half-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 121) is specified and (1) or (2) lugs per phase are specified, (1) lug will be provided on the half-rated neutral riser. When (3) or
(4) lugs are specified, (2) lugs will be provided. When (5) or (6) lugs are specified, (3) lugs will be provided on half-rated neutral riser.
[3] Frame mounted. Must be located at top or bottom of section.
[4] Fusible disconnect switch is a bolted pressure switch. No vertical wireway. Not available in NEMA Type 3R or Type 4 for 1600A and 2000A. 600A through 1200A units have
viewing window on door for visual verification of disconnect blades.
[5] Frame mounted. Must be located at top or bottom of section. May not be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units.
[6] Units having 100% ratings are available for these fusible disconnect switches for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only. Non-fused switches are 100% rated and available
in NEMA 1, 1 with gasket, and 12. See options on page 126 to select. For 100% rated 1600A and 2000A units, no top or bottom wireway is present above or below the unit and
the unit must be located at either end of the motor control center lineup.
[7] When used with a 3-phase, 4-wire power system, horizontal neutral bus and incoming neutral bus is required.
75
2
3
5
6

Optional Crimp Lugs for Bulletins 2192FT, 2192FB, 2192MT and 2192MB
2
3
Switch Size
Type of Lug
200A
Mechanical Only
Panduit Type LCC
400A
Burndy YA-A Series
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
Cables/ Cable/Wire Size or

Phase
Range
1
#6-250 kcmil
2
250 kcmil
[2],[3]
500 kcmil
1
2
250 kcmil
500 kcmil
1 [2],[3]
CU
CU
CU
CU/AL
CU/AL
Option
Number [1]
81A250
82B250
82A500
83B250
83A500
82B500
Wire Type
Panduit Type LCC
2 [3]
CU
Burndy YA-A Series
2 [3]
CU/AL
83B500
Panduit Type LCC
3 [3]
CU
82C500
Burndy YA-A Series
3 [3]
CU/AL
83C500
Panduit Type LCC
4 [3]
CU
82D500
Burndy YA-A Series
4 [3]
CU/AL
83D500
Panduit Type LCC
5 [3]
CU
82E500
Burndy YA-A Series
5 [3]
CU/AL
83E500
[3]
CU
82F500
[3]
CU/AL
83F500
Panduit Type LCC

Burndy YA-A Series
500 kcmil
2192FT
2192FB
2192MT
2192MB
[2] For top entry of incoming cables only. Requires pullbox. Select on page 28.
[3] Disconnect supplied with lug pad assembly, reference page 227 for additional lugs.
76
Circuit Breaker Feeders and Mains

15-225A Trip Feeders are Plug-In Units
400-2000A Frame Feeders and all Mains are Frame Mounted
Mains 600-2000A available with Built in Ground Fault
5
2193F
Bulletin Number
Mounting
Code
Type
Breaker
2193F Circuit
Feeder (FCB)
Circuit Breaker
2193M Main
(MCB)
Code
T [1]
B [1]
Z
Mounting
Top
Bottom
0.5 Space Factor
Switch Rating
NEMA Enclosure Type
Line Voltage
Code
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
Switch Rating
100A
150A
225A
400A
600A
800A
1200A
1600A
2000A
30CT
Circuit Breaker Trip Size and Type
Code Line Voltage

C
600V

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
**
Options
Circuit Breaker
Code Trip Size and Type
See table on page 80.
Code Options
See 2193M metering
options on page 81.
See Options section
[1] A T or B is required for all

2193M units and only 400A and
above 2193F units.
77

2
3
Bulletin 2193F
3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB)

See Appendix for circuit breaker characteristics.
Continuous current rating based on 40C ambient.
Select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/CEC. Contact your local
Rockwell Automation Sales Office if 100% rated circuit breakers are required.
Two (2) circuit breakers can be dual mounted in one plug-in unit for FDB, FD, FDC, and HFD 150A frames. FDB circuit breakers
with LFD current limiters also can be dual mounted but are limited to a 100A trip maximum on each circuit breaker. To specify
dual mounted units, add two numbers from table on page 80 to base catalog number (e.g., 2193F-AJC-3031CT). Half space factor
units cannot be dual-mounted.
2193FPlug-in unit, 15A-225A.
2193FZPlug-in unit, 0.5 space factor, 15A-225A.
2193FTTop-mounted feeder, 400A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
2193FTTop-mounted feeder, 600A-1200A are reverse-fed, connect load to top of switch.
2193FBBottom-mounted feeder, 400A-1200A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
5
6
Frame
Rating
(Amperes)
Type
FDB
FD
HFD
FDC [4]
FDB-LFD
FDB
FD
HFD
150 [2]
FDC [4]
FDB-LFD
FDB
FD
HFD
Range of
Available
Trips
(Amperes)
208V
240V
15-100
18k
65k
100k
380V
400V
415V
480V
14k
35k
65k
100k
15-50
60-100
15-50
60-100
125-150
Catalog Number [1]

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

(rms symmetrical amperes)
600V
Space
Factor
NEMA Type 1 and

Type 1 w/ gasket
NEMA Type 12
14k
18k
25k
2193FZ-AKC-_CT
2193FZ-AKC-_CB
2193FZ-AKC-_CM
2193FZ-AJC-_CT
2193FZ-AJC-_CB
2193FZ-AJC-_CM
100k
35k
2193FZ-AKC-_CX
2193FZ-AJC-_CX
100k
100k
100k
2193FZ-AKC-_CD
2193FZ-AJC-_CD
18k
65k
100k
14k
35k
65k
14k
18k
25k
2193FZ-BKC-_CT
2193FZ-BKC-_CB
2193FZ-BKC-_CM
2193FZ-BJC-_CT
2193FZ-BJC-_CB
2193FZ-BJC-_CM
0.5 [3]
100k
100k
35k
2193FZ-BKC-_CX
2193FZ-BJC-_CX
100k
18k
65k
100k
100k
14k
35k
65k
100k
14k
18k
25k
2193FZ-BKC-_CD
2193F-AKC-_CT
2193F-AKC-_CB
2193F-AKC-_CM
2193FZ-BJC-_CD
2193F-AJC-_CT
2193F-AJC-_CB
2193F-AJC-_CM
FDC [4]
15-50
60-100
100k
100k
35k
2193F-AKC-_CX
2193F-AJC-_CX
FDB-LFD
15-50 [5]
60-100
100k
100k
100k
2193F-AKC-_CD
2193F-AJC-_CD
18k
65k
100k
14k
35k
65k
14k
18k
25k
2193F-BKC-_CT
2193F-BKC-_CB
2193F-BKC-_CM
2193F-BJC-_CT
2193F-BJC-_CB
2193F-BJC-_CM
100k
100k
35k
2193F-BKC-_CX
2193F-BJC-_CX
100k
100k
100k
2193F-BKC-_CD
2193F-BJC-_CD
FDB
FD
HFD
FDC [4]
FDB-LFD
15-100
125-150 [6]
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.5
Delivery
Program

Select the trip current from table on page 80 (e.g., 2193F-AKC-40CT).
If optional load lugs will be selected, select from table on page 80 (e.g., 2193F-AKC-40CT-80A350).
[2] Non-interchangeable trip breakers.
[3] These units have horizontal operating handles.
[4] Available in Canada only. Available in U.S. as an engineered option. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for availability.
[5] Not available with DSA (options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3).
[6] When selecting a 125A or 150A dual circuit breaker unit with a 15A through 100A trip, use catalog number configuration 2193F-B_C-____ (e.g., 2193F-BKC-4130CT).
78
SC
Bulletin 2193F
3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB), continued

Continuous current rating based on 40C ambient.
For circuit breaker sizing, select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/CEC.
Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office if 100% rated circuit breakers are required.
Frame
Rating
(Amperes)
Type
Range of
Available
Trips
(Amperes)
JD [2]
HJD
225A [1]
JDC [4]
[2]
JD
HJD
600
1200
2193FZ-CKC-_CX
2193FZ-CJC-_CX
35k
18k
2193F-CKC-_CT
2193F-CJC-_CT
100k
65k
25k
2193F-CKC-_CM
2193F-CJC-_CM
100k
100k
35k
2193F-CKC-_CX
2193F-CJC-_CX
100k
100k
90-225
65k
25k
65k
35k
100k
100k
65k
100k
35k
65k
LDC [4]
100k
100k
MDL
HMDL
65k
100k
50k
65k
NDC [4]
100k
100k
ND
HND
65k
100k
50k
65k
100k
100k
50k
[5],[6],[7]
[5],[7],[8]
35k
70
35k
KDC [4]
LD
HLD
800 [5],[6],[7]
2193FZ-CJC-_CT
65k
HKD
NDC [4]
125-400
300-600
400-800
600-1200
NEMA Type 12
2193FZ-CJC-_CM
18k
25k
100k
[5],[6]
NEMA Type 1 and

Type 1 w/ gasket
2193FZ-CKC-_CT
35k
65k
KD [2]
Space
Factor
Catalog Number
2193FZ-CKC-_CM
65k
100k
JDC [4]
400

380V 400V
208V
415V
600V
240V
480V
0.5
[3]
1.5
2193F_-DKC-_CT
2193F_-DJC-_CT
2193F_-DKC-_CM
2193F_-DJC-_CM
50k
2193F_-DKC-_CX
2193F_-DJC-_CX
25k
35k
2193F_-EKC-_CT
2193F_-EKC-_CM
2193F_-EJC-_CT
2193F_-EJC-_CM
50k
2193F_-EKC-_CX
2193F_-EJC-_CX
25k
35k
2.5
2193F_-FKC-_CT
2193F_-FKC-_CM
2193F_-FJC-_CT
2193F_-FJC-_CM
50k
2193F_-FKC-_CX
2193F_-FJC-_CX
25k
35k
3.5
2193F_-GKC-_CT
2193F_-GKC-_CM
2193F_-GJC-_CT
2193F_-GJC-_CM
2193F_-GKC-_CX
2193F_-GJC-_CX
2.0
2.0
Delivery
Program
5
6
SC
SC-II

Select the trip current from table on page 80 (e.g., 2193F-CKC-44CT).
If optional load lugs will be selected, select from table on page 80.
Then add option number to the base catalog number (e.g., 2193F-CKC-44CT-80A350).
[3] These units have horizontal operating handles.
Insert T for Top mounted or B for Bottom mounted (e.g., 2193FT- or 2193FB-).
Select the trip current from table on page 80 (e.g., 2193FT-DKC-50CT).
If optional load lugs will be selected, select from table on page 80.
Then add option number to the base catalog number (e.g. 2193FT-EKC-44CT-80A350).
[6] Frame mount with vertical wireway.
[7] Sealed breaker and Digitrip RMS 310 electronic trip with interchangeable trip plugs.
[8] Frame mounted. No vertical wireway. May not be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units.
79

2
Bulletin 2193F
3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB), continued
Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE motor control centers are rated for use with 75C wires. Wire must be sized using the 75C column
in NEC Table 310-16. The actual temperature rating of the lug is not relevant.
Trip Current
Number
Trip Current
00 [1]
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
5
6
Number
Trip Current
(No breaker)
43
175
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
125
150
44
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
200
225
250
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
1000
1200
(Amperes)
Standard Mechanical Lugs Supplied [1]
(Amperes)
Frame Type
Rating
Trip
Current
(Amperes)
FDB, FD, HFD,

FDC
150A
FDB-LFD [2]
150A
JD, HJD, JDC
225A
KD, HKD, KDC
400A
LD, HLD, LDC
600A
MDL
[1] Provision for Field Mounting

Single or dual mounted plug-in feeder units may be selected without the circuit
breaker in the 150A frame size only. Add the number 00 from Trip Current table
above to the base catalog number (e.g., 2193F-AKC-3500CB or
2193F-BKC-4100CB). Mounting hardware, space, and operating mechanism will be
provided for future mounting of circuit breaker(s).
NDC
800A
ND, HND, NDC
1200A
Cable/Wire
Size Range
#14-#1/0 AWG
#4-#4/0 AWG
#14-#2 AWG
#1-#4/0 AWG
#4-350 kcmil
#3-350 kcmil
250-500 kcmil
#3/0-250 kcmil
250-350 kcmil
Wire
Type
15-100
125-150
15-70
80-150
70-225
125-225
250-350
400
300-600
400-600
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
#2/0-500 kcmil
CU
700-800
400-700
800
600-700
800-1000
1100-1200
3
2
3
2
3
4
#3/0-300 kcmil
#2-500 kcmil
#3/0-500 kcmil
#2/0-500 kcmil
#3/0-500 kcmil
#4/0-400 kcmil
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
800A
HMDL
Cables/
Phase
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU
CU
CU
CU
[1] Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. Standard crimp or mechanical lugs
cannot be used without special lug pad assembly.
[2] No optional lugs available for FDB frame with current limiters.
Optional Mechanical Lugs [1]

Rating
Trip Current
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC

JD, HJD, JDC
150A
225A
KD, HKD, KDC
400A
15-100
70-225
125-225, 400
125-225
125-350
Frame Type
(Amperes)
125-400
LD, HLD, LDC
600A
300-600
400-600
MDL
HMDL
800A
NDC
800A
ND, HND, NDC
1200A
400- 800
400-700
400-800
600-700
600-1000
600-1200
Cables/
Phase
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
2 [2]
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
Cable/Wire Size
Range
#4-#4/0 AWG
#4-350 kcmil
250-500 kcmil
#3-350 kcmil
#3/0-250 kcmil
250-500 kcmil
#3/0-250 kcmil
250-350 kcmil
400-500 kcmil
#1-500 kcmil
#3/0-300 kcmil
500-750 kcmil
#3/0-400 kcmil
#1-500 kcmil
#3/0-400 kcmil
#1-500 kcmil
#3/0-400 kcmil
#4/0-500 kcmil
500-750 kcmil
Wire Type
Option Number
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU
CU/AL
CU
-80A4X0
-80A350
-81A500
-80A350
-81B250
-80A500
-80B250
-80B350
-80B500
-80B500
-81C300
-80B750
-80C400
-80B500
-80C400
-80B500
-80C400
-80D500
-80C750
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
[1] Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. Standard crimp or mechanical lugs cannot be used without special lug pad assembly.
[2] Requires top entry and pullbox for 600-750 kcmil cables in order to meet UL and NEC/UL/cUL wire bending requirements. Select pullbox on page 28.
80
Bulletin 2193M
3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB)

Select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Continuous current rating based on 40 C
ambient. Refer to NEC/CEC.
Mains are suitable for use as service entrance per NEC (UL) and CEC (CSA). If application is a four-wire system, a neutral plate
rated for 280A is available, refer to page 25, 109, 121 and 226. If a neutral greater then 280A is required, see page 25 or 121 or
contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. Mains rated 1000A and above may require ground fault protection. Refer to
NEC/UL/cUL.
Main Breakers supplied with internal ground fault (Breaker Code CTG, CMG or CXG) are supplied with a field mountable neutral
CT for use on a 3 Phase, 4 Wire System Grounded WYE System. Ground Fault Breakers are not designed for use on a Delta
System, Ungrounded WYE System or Hi-Resistance Grounded WYE System.
Mains units are frame mounted. They must be located at the top or bottom of the section.
2193MTTop-mounted main, 150A-2000A are top-fed.
2193MBBottom-mounted main, 150A-400A are top-fed.
2193MBBottom-mounted main, 600A-2000A are reverse-fed.
Range of
Available
Trips
Frame
Rating
Type
(Ampere)
FDB
FD
HFD
15-100
FDC [2]
150A
(Amperes)
FDB-LFD
FDB
FD
HFD
15-50
60-100
15-50
60-100
125-150
FDC [2]
FDB-LFD
225A
600A
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
w/ gasket
2193M_-AKC-_CT
2193M_-AJC-_CT
2193M_-AKC-_CB
2193M_-AJC-_CB
2193M_-AKC-_CM
2193M_-AJC-_CM
100k
100k
35k
2193M_-AKC-_CX
2193M_-AJC-_CX
100k
100k
100k
2193M_-AKC-_CD
2193M_-AJC-_CD
18k
65k
100k
14k
35k
65k
14k
18k
25k
2193M_-BKC-_CT
2193M_-BKC-_CB
2193M_-BKC-_CM
2193M_-BJC-_CT
2193M_-BJC-_CB
2193M_-BJC-_CM
1.5
100k
100k
35k
2193M_-BKC-_CX
2193M_-BJC-_CX
100k
100k
100k
2193M_-BKC-_CD
2193M_-BJC-_CD
65k
35k
18k
2193M_-CKC-_CT
2193M_-CJC-_CT
100k
65k
25k
2193M_-CKC-_CM
2193M_-CJC-_CM
100k
100k
35k
2193M_-CKC-_CX
2193M_-CJC-_CX
65k
35k
25k
2193M_-DKC-_CT
2193M_-DJC-_CT
100k
65k
35k
2193M_-DKC-_CM
2193M_-DJC-_CM
KDC [2]
100k
100k
50k
2193M_-DKC-_CX
2193M_-DJC-_CX
LD [4]
65k
35k
25k
2193M_-EKC-_CT
2193M_-EJC-_CT
65k
35k
25k
2193M_-EKC-_CTG
2193M_-EJC-_CTG
JD [3]
HJD
JDC [2]
400A
Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
380V/400V
208V/240V 415V/480V
600V
18k
14k
14k
65k
35k
18k
100k
65k
25k
KD [3]
HKD
125- 400
LDG
[4],[6]
HLD
[4]
HLDG [4],[6]
LDC
70,
90-225
300-600 [5]
[2],[4]
LDCG
[2],[4],[6]
LD HI-MAG [7]
600
2.0
100k
65k
35k
2193M_-EKC-_CM
2193M_-EJC-_CM
100k
65k
35k
2193M_-EKC-_CMG
2193M_-EJC-_CMG
100k
100k
50k
2193M_-EKC-_CX
2193M_-EJC-_CX
100k
100k
50k
2193M_-EKC-_CXG
2193M_-EJC-_CXG
65k
35k
25k
2193M_-EKC-52CN
2193M_-EJC-52CN
Delivery
Program
SC-II

Insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (e.g., 2193MT- or 2193MB-).
Select trip current from table on page 83 (e.g., 2193MB-AKC-40CT).
If optional line lugs will be selected, select from Optional Mechanical and Crimp Lugs tables on page 84.
Then add option number to base catalog number (e.g., 2193MB-AKC-45CT-80A350).
[4] Units having 100% rating are available for these circuit breakers for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only. See options on page 126 to select.
[6] Ground fault protection system is suited for solidly grounded system. Ground fault trip range is adjustable from 0.2 to 1 times the trip current rating of the circuit breaker rating
plug. Time delay setting can be adjusted from 0.05 to 0.5 seconds. Neutral current transformer shipped loose.
[7] NOT UL listed. Internal auxiliary contacts (98X, 99X) are not available on this breaker. Unit supplied with molded case switch with fixed high magnetic trip. Requires upstream
current limiting branch protection. See molded case switch markings for proper selection of this protection. Ratings listed are the maximum fault currents that can be
applied to the devices.
81
2
3
5
6

2
Bulletin 2193M
3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB), continued
Select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Continuous current rating based on 40C
ambient. Refer to NEC/UL/cUL.
Mains are suitable for use as service entrance per NEC (UL) and CEC (CSA). If application is a four-wire system, a neutral
connection plate is available. Select on pages 25, 109, 121 and 226. Mains rated 1000A and above may require ground fault
protection. Refer to NEC/UL/cUL.
Mains units are frame mounted. They must be located at the top or bottom of the section.
Frame
Rating (Amperes)
Range of
Available
Trips
(Amperes)
Type
MDL [2]
800A
600V
240V
380V, 400V,
415V, 480V
Space
Factor
NEMA Type 1 and

Type 1 w/ gasket
NEMA Type 12
65k
50k
25k
2193M_-FKC-_CT
2193M_-FJC-_CT
50k
25k
2193M_-FKC-_CTG
2193M_-FJC-_CTG
100k
65k
35k
2193M_-FKC-_CM
2193M_-FJC-_CM
100k
65k
35k
2193M_-FKC-_CMG
2193M_-FJC-_CMG
100k
100k
50k
2193M_-FKC-_CX
2193M_-FJC-_CX
100k
100k
50k
2193M_-FKC-_CXG
2193M_-FJC-_CXG
42k
35k
22k
2193M_-FKC-54CN
2193M_-FJC-54CN
ND [2]
65k
50k
25k
2193M_-GKC-_CT
2193M_-GJC-_CT
NDG [2],[4]
65k
50k
25k
2193M_-GKC-_CTG
2193M_-GJC-_CTG
100k
65k
35k
2193M_-GKC-_CM
2193M_-GJC-_CM
100k
65k
35k
100k
100k
50k
2193M_-GKC-_CX
2193M_-GJC-_CX
100k
100k
50k
2193M_-GKC-_CXG
2193M_-GJC-_CXG
MDLG
HMDL
[2]
HMDLG
[2],[4]
[2],[4],[5]
MDL HI-MAG
[6]
HND
400-800 [3]
[2],[5]
NDCG
800
[2]
600-1200 [3]
HNDG [2],[4]
NDC [2],[5]
NDCG
[2],[4],[5]
ND HI-MAG
2000A
208V
Catalog Number [1]

Wiring Type AClass I
65k
[2],[4]
NDC
1200A

Due to MCC design

RD [2]
and bus short circuit
withstand limitations,
these units only can be
used on systems of
65kA available or less.
RDG [2],[4]
If 100kA is required,
contact your local
Rockwell Automation
Sales Office.
[6]
1200
1200-2000 [3]
2.5
3.5 [7]
65k
50k
25k
2193M_-GKC-56CN
2193M_-GJC-56CN
65k
50k
2193M_-JKC-_CM
2193M_-JJC-_CM
65k
50k
SC-II
2193M_-GKC-_CMG 2193M_-GJC-_CMG
100k
100k
Delivery
Program
6.0
30 W
20 D [8] 2193M_-JKC-_CMG
2193M_-JJC-_CMG

Insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (e.g., 2193MT or 2193MB).
Select trip current from table on page 83 (e.g., 2193MT-AKC-40CT).
If optional line lugs will be selected, select Optional Mechanical and Crimp Lugs tables on page 84. Then add option number to the base catalog number (e.g.,
2193MB-AKC-45CT-80A350).
[2] Units having 100% rating are available for these circuit breakers for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only. See options on page 126 to select.
[4] The ground fault protection system is suited for solidly grounded system. Ground fault trip range is adjustable from 0.2 to 1 times the trip current rating of the circuit breaker
rating plug. The time delay setting can be adjusted from 0.05 to 0.5 seconds. Neutral current transformer supplied loose. Circuit breaker is supplied with one (1) N.O. and one (1)
N.C. internal auxiliary contact, except for 800A ratings with circuit breaker designators CTG and CMG. Additional internal auxiliaries are not available.
[5] Available in Canada only.
[6] NOT UL listed. Internal auxiliary contacts (98X, 99X) are not available on this breaker. Unit supplied with molded case switch with fixed high magnetic trip. Requires upstream
current limiting branch protection. See molded case switch markings for proper selection of this protection. Unfused withstand rating is 35,000A.
[7] No vertical wireway. May not be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units.
[8] No vertical wireway. Supplied with flange-mounted operating handle.
82
Bulletin 2193M
Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE motor control centers are rated for use with 75C wire. Wire must be sized using the 75C column
in NEC/UL/cUL. The actual temperature rating of the lug is not relevant.
Trip Current
Number
Trip Current
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
125
150
175
200
(Amperes)
Number
Trip Current
45
46
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
60
225
250
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
1000
1200
1600
2000
(Amperes)
Standard Mechanical Lugs Supplied [1]

Frame Type
Rating
(Amperes)
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC,

FDB-LFD
JD, HJD, JDC
225A
KD, HKD, KDC
400A
LD, HLD, LDC, LDG, HLDG, LDCG

LD HI-MAG
MDL, MDLG
HMDL, HMDLG
MDL HI-MAG
600A
600A
800A
NDC, NDCG
800A
ND HI-MAG
1200A
ND, HND, NDC, NDG, HNDG, NDCG
1200A
RD, RDG
2000A
ND, HND, NDC, NDG, HNDG, NDCG100% rated
1200A
150A
800A
Trip
Current
(Amperes)
Cables/
Phase [2]
15-100
125-150
70-225
125-225
250-350
400
300-600
600
400-600
700-800
800
400-700
800
1200
600-700
800-1000
1200
1200-1600
2000
600-1200
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
3
4
2
3
4
4
6
4
Cable/Wire
Size Range
#14-#1/0 AWG
#4- #4/0 AWG
#4-350 kcmil
#3-350 kcmil
250-500 kcmil
#3/0-250 kcmil
250-350 kcmil
250-350 kcmil
#2/0-500 kcmil
#3/0-300 kcmil
#3/0-300 kcmil
#2/0-500 kcmil
#3/0-500 kcmil
#3/0-400 kcmil
#2/0-500 kcmil
#3/0-500 kcmil
#3/0-400 kcmil
#1-600 kcmil
#2-600 kcmil
#4/0-600 kcmil
Wire Type
CU/AL
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU/AL
CU/AL
[1] Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. See page 84 for additional lugs.
83

2
Bulletin 2193M
Optional Mechanical and Crimp Lugs
3
Frame Type
Rating
(Amperes)
Cable/Wire Size
Range
Wire Type
Option Number [2]
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
150A
15-100
#4-#4/0 AWG
CU/AL
80A4X0
JD, HJD, JDC
225A
70-225
#4-350 kcmil
CU/AL
80A350
125-225, 400
250-500 kcmil
CU
81A500
125-225
#3-350 kcmil
CU/AL
80A350
125-350
#3-250 kcmil
CU
250-500 kcmil
#3/0-250 kcmil
5
6
MECHANICAL LUGS [1]

Cables/
Trip Current
(Amperes)
Phase
KD, HKD, KDC
400A
125-400
LD, HLD, LDC
LDG, HLDG, LDCG
600A
300-600
400-600
MDL, MDLG
HMDL, HMDLG
NDC, NDCG
ND, HND, NDC,

NDG, HNDG, NDCG
800A
1200A
3 [3]
[4]
ND, HND, NDC,

NDG, HNDG, NDCG100% rated
#1-500 kcmil
#3/0-300 kcmil
CU/AL
80B250
80B350
80B500
CU/AL
80B500
CU
81C300
500-750 kcmil
#3/0-400 kcmil
400-700
#1-500 kcmil
400-800
#3/0-400 kcmil
600-700
2 [3]
#1-500 kcmil
600-1000
3 [3]
#3/0-400 kcmil
#4/0-500 kcmil
500-750 kcmil
80C750
500-1000 kcmil
80D01K
#2-600 kcmil
3 [6]
350-800 kcmil
CU/AL
80C800
250 kcmil
CU [9]
82B250
CU [9]
82A500
600-1200
RD, RDG
[3]
400-500 kcmil
CU/AL
400-800
400-800
800A
250-350 kcmil
81B250
80A500
2000A [5]
1200-1600
1200A
600-1200
CU/AL
CU/AL
80B750
80C400
80B500
80C400
80B500
CU/AL
80C400
80D500
CU/AL
80F600
CRIMP LUGS [7]

125-400
KD, HKD, KDC [8]
400A
125-400
500 kcmil
125-400
250 kcmil
CU/AL
[9]
83B250
500 kcmil
CU/AL [9]
83A500
125-400
LD, HLD, LDC
LDG, HLDG, LDCG [8]
MDL, MDLG
HMDL, HMDLG [8]
NDC, NDCG [8]
ND, HND, NDC, NDG, HNDG, NDCG
RD, RDG
600A
800A
800A
1200A
2000A
300-600
400-800
400-800
600-1200
1200-2000
1
2
CU
[9]
82B500
CU/AL [9]
83B500
CU [9]
82C500
CU/AL [9]
83C500
CU [9]
82C500
500 kcmil
CU/AL
[9]
83C500
CU [9]
82D500
CU/AL [9]
83D500
CU [9]
82F500
CU/AL [9]
83F500
[1] Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. Standard crimp or mechanical lugs cannot be used without optional lug pad assembly.
[3] Cannot be used on the HI-MAG frames.
[4] Requires top entry and pullbox for 600-750 kcmil cables in order to meet UL and NEC/UL/cUL wire bending requirements. Select on page 28.
[5] Optional lug -80D01K not valid with 2000A 2193MT Units with options 100% rated circuit breaker.
[6] For top entry of incoming cables only. Requires pullbox for 750-800 kcmil cables in order to meet UL and NEC/UL/cUL cable bending requirements. Select on page 28.
[7] Breaker supplied with a lug pad assembly, reference page 227 for additional lugs.
[8] For top entry of incoming cables only. Requires pullbox. Select on page 28.
[9] CU crimp lugs are Panduit type LCC Series. CU/AL crimp lugs are Burndy YA-A Series.
84

Bulletin 2193LE
Lighting Panel (LPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Bulletin 2193LE is a frame mounted lighting panel with either a main lug or main
circuit breaker. The lighting panels are rated for 100A or 225A with up to 42
branch circuits. One, two, and three pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers are
available with ratings from 15A to 100A.
2
3
5
6
Bulletin 2193PP
Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Bulletin 2193PP is a plug-in unit panel board with main circuit breaker. The panel
boards are rated for 100A, 150A, or 225A with up to 42 branch circuits. One, two,
and three pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers are available with ratings from 15A
to 100A.
85

2
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193LE

Lighting Panel (LPAN)
Frame mounted lighting panel that is designed for field installation

When ordered as a SC-I Unit, supplied with lighting panel, door, hardware and instructions
Rated for 100A or 225A with a maximum 42 branch circuits
1, 2 or 3 pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers are available with ratings from 15 - 100A
Reference page 231 for additional bolt-on breakers
6
7
2193LE Bulletin Number
Maximum Rating
NEMA
Type of Main
of Main Bus
Enclosure Type
18
System
Phases
1-Pole Branch
Breakers Positions
00WT
Code System Phases

Code
1
3
Type
Lightning Panels
2193LE with Bolt-on Branch
Breakers (LPAN)
Code
Max. Rating
of Main Bus
A
C
100A
225A
K
J

gasket
NEMA Type 12
30A18
Branch Breakers
Main Breaker
Trip Rating and
Code Type Rating
00WT Lug Only
40WT 100A
45WT 225A
Main Lug Only

86
Single Phase
Three Phase
Code Type of Main

L
B
Main Breaker Trip

Rating and Type Rating
Code
1-Pole Branch
Breakers Positions
15
16
18
27
30
42
15
16
18
27
30
42
Code
Branch Breakers
See Factory - Installed Bolt-On

Branch Breaker table on Page 87
Bulletin 2193LE
Frame Mounted Lighting Panel for Bolt-on Branch Circuit Breakers (LPAN)

Units are NOT wired. Units have NO plug-in stabs.
Load terminal blocks are NOT furnished.
Lighting panel bus is aluminum with tin plating. Directory card is supplied.
Panel Bus and

Main Lug Ampere
Rating
Type
Single Phase
3-Wire 120/240 Volts
AC 10kA
IC rms Sym.
Three Phase
AC 10kA
IC rms Sym.
100
225
100
225
Catalog Number
(Catalog numbers do not include branch breakers. Refer
Max. Number of
Space
to Factory-Installed Bolt-On Branch Circuit Breakers
1-pole
table below for catalog string numbers.)
Circuit Breakers Factor
NEMA Type 12
gasket
WITH MAIN LUG ONLY (MLO)
2193LE-AKL118-00WT
2193LE-AJL118-00WT
18
2.0
30
2.5
2193LE-CKL130-00WT
2193LE-CJL130-00WT
42
3.0
2193LE-CKL142-00WT
2193LE-CJL142-00WT
18
2.0
2193LE-AKL318-00WT
2193LE-AJL318-00WT
2193LE-AKL330-00WT
2193LE-AJL330-00WT
30
2.5
42
3.0
2193LE-CKL342-00WT
2193LE-CJL342-00WT
Delivery
Program
Three Phase 4-Wire

120/208 Volts AC.
100 [1]
225
100 [1]
225
16
2.0
2193LE-AKB116-40WT
2193LE-AJB116-40WT
30
42
15
27
42
3.5
4.0
2.0
2.5
4.0
2193LE-CKB130-45WT
2193LE-CKB142-45WT
2193LE-AKB315-40WT
2193LE-AKB327-40WT
2193LE-CKB342-45WT
2193LE-CJB130-45WT
2193LE-CJB142-45WT
2193LE-AJB315-40WT
2193LE-AJB327-40WT
2193LE-CJB342-45WT
7
SC
SC
[1] The 100A main circuit breaker in a 100A lighting panel is a reverse-fed branch lighting panel circuit breaker.
*
Factory-Installed Bolt-On Branch Circuit Breakers

1-Pole Thermal Magnetic 120V AC
Circuit Breaker 10kA IC Sym
2-Pole Thermal Magnetic 120/240V AC

3-Pole Thermal Magnetic 120/240V AC

(for use on three phase lighting panels only)
Catalog String
Trip Rating @ 40C
(Amperes)
Number [1]
15A
30C__
20A
31C__
30A
32C__
Catalog String
Number [1]
30A__
31A__
32A__
Trip Rating @ 40C

15A
20A
30A
Catalog String
Number [1]
30B__
31B__
32B__
15A w/ grd flt [2]
30D__
50A
35B__
50A
35C__
[2]
31D__
100A
40B__
100A
40C__
00A__
Trip Rating @ 40C

(Amperes)
15A
20A
30A
20A w/ grd flt
Filler Plate
(Amperes)

Select the number of branch breakers (e.g., 32A18).
Add two digits to specify the number of branch breakers desired. Two digits are required for quantities less than ten (e.g., 03 for quantity three).
When selecting multiple branch breakers with different trip ratings, add additional string numbers to the end of the catalog number (e.g.,
2193LE-AKL118-00WT-30A08-31B02-30C02).
Locations of the branch breakers are determined by the factory.
The maximum amperes connected to any one connector cannot exceed 200A on bolt-on branch breakers. All branch breakers are Type BAB.
[2] Ground fault interrupting circuit breakers provide 5mA personnel protection.
Refer to page 231 for catalog numbers for field installed branch breakers. When breakers are to be factory-installed, specify filler plates for all remaining blank spaces in panel.
5
6
WITH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB) [1]

100A Main Circuit Breaker is Cutler-Hammer BAB type series rating 10kA.
225A Main Circuit Breaker is Cutler-Hammer ED type series rating 65kA.
Single Phase
AC.
87

2
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193PP

Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN)
Plug-in unit panel board

Rated for 100A, 150A, or 225A with up to 42 branch circuits
1, 2 or 3 pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers available with ratings from 15A - 100A
Reference page 231 for additional bolt-on breakers
5
6
2193PP Bulletin
Number
Code
Type
Panel
2193PP Plug-in
Board (PPAN)
Code
C
Maximum
NEMA
Rating of Main
Enclosure Type
Bus
Max. Rating
of Main Bus
225A
B
Type of Main
NEMA Enclosure
Code Type
K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
Code Type of Main
B
18
40
CT
Main
Breaker Trip
Rating
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Code
Code System Phases

5
Three Phase
CT
CB
Code
18
30
42
1-Pole Branch
Breakers Positions
18
30
42
Code
40
42
45
88
1-Pole Branch
System Phases
Breakers
Positions
Main Breaker
Trip Rating
100A
150A
225A
CM
30A18
Branch
Breakers

Capacity
Medium Interrupting
Capacity
High Interrupting
Capacity
Code Branch Breakers

See Factory - Installed
Bolt-On Branch Breaker
table on Page 89.
Bulletin 2193PP
Plug-in Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN)

Unit plugs into the MCC vertical bus.
The panel board bus is aluminum with tin plating.
The panel board is series rated. The interrupting capacity rating shown can be applied to all branch circuit breakers.
Bulletin 2193PP plug-in panel board can also be used with 3 4-wire systems rated 120V/208V, 220V/380V, 230V/400V or
240V/415V. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
Max.
Main
Main
Breaker Number of Circuit
1-pole
Trip
Breaker
Circuit
Rating
Type
(Amperes) Breakers
100
Space
Factor
18
FD
HFD
2.5
30
FDC [2]
FD
HFD
3.0
[2]
150
42
FDC
FD
HFD
3.5
FDC [2]
225
18
30
42
JD [3]
3.5
3.5
4.0
IC Rating at 480Y/277V
Catalog Number [1]
(rms Sym.)
(This rating can be
applied to all branch
NEMA Type 12
gasket
circuit breakers.)
WITH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB)
25kA
2193PP-CKB518-40CB-__
2193PP-CJB518-40CB-__
65kA
2193PP-CKB518-40CM-__
2193PP-CJB518-40CM-__
100kA
2193PP-CKB518-40CX-__
2193PP-CJB518-40CX-__
25kA
2193PP-CKB530-42CB-__
2193PP-CJB530-42CB-__
2193PP-CKB530-42CM-__
2193PP-CJB530-42CM-__
65kA
100kA
2193PP-CKB530-42CX-__
2193PP-CJB530-42CX-__
2193PP-CKB542-42CB-__
2193PP-CJB542-42CB-__
25kA
65kA
2193PP-CKB542-42CM-__
2193PP-CJB542-42CM-__
100kA
2193PP-CKB542-42CX-__
2193PP-CJB542-42CX-__
25kA
2193PP-CKB518-45CT-__
2193PP-CJB518-45CT-__
25kA
2193PP-CKB530-45CT-__
2193PP-CJB530-45CT-__
25kA
2193PP-CKB542-45CT-__
2193PP-CJB542-45CT-__
Delivery
Program
PE
Factory-Installed Bolt-On Branch Breaker *
2-Pole Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic)

480Y/277VAC
Circuit Breaker 14kA I.C. SYM
Catalog String
Trip Rating @ 40C
(Amperes)
Number
15
30B__
20
31B__
25
61B__
30
32B__
35
33B__
40
34B__
50
35B__
60
36B__
70
37B__
80
38B__
90
39B__
100
40B__

480Y/277VAC
Catalog String
Trip Rating @ 40C
(Amperes)
Number
15
30C__
20
31C__
25
61C__
30
32C__
35
33C__
40
34C__
50
35C__
60
36C__
70
37C__
80
38C__
90
39C__
100
40C__
5
6

Select the appropriate catalog string number from Factory-Installed Bolt-On Branch Breaker table below to identify the branch breaker trip rating.
Add two digits to specify the number of branch breakers desired. Two digits are also required for quantities less than ten (e.g., 03 for quantity three
2193PP-CKB530-42CX-32A03).
When selecting multiple branch breakers with different trip ratings, add additional string numbers to the end of the catalog number (e.g.,
2193PP-CKB518-40CB-30A08-31B02-30C02).
Locations of the branch breakers are determined by the factory.
[2] Available in Canada only.

277VAC
Catalog String
Trip Rating @ 40C
(Amperes)
Number
30A__
15
20
31A__
61A__
25
30
32A__
35
33A__
34A__
40
50
35A__
60
36A__
70
37A__
80
38A__
39A__
90
100
40A__
Filler Plate
00A__
Delivery
Program
PE
SC
All branch breakers are Type GHB. Refer to page 231 for catalog number of field installed branch breakers. Specify filler plates for all blank spaces in panel. The maximum
amperes connected to any one connector cannot exceed 200A. The 14kA interrupting capacity rating applies to the individual branch breaker. When used in the 2193PP, the I.C.
rating of the main breaker can be applied to all branch breakers.
89

2
3
5
6
7
90
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2195, 2196, 2197
Control and Lighting Transformers (XFMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Bulletins 2195, 2196, and 2197 are control and lighting transformer units. The
transformer units are available with ratings from 0.5 kVA through 50 kVA for
single-phase and 10 kVA through 45 kVA for three-phase. Secondary fuses are
provided with each transformer unit. Primary fusing is optional on the 2196
transformer unit.
2
3
5
6
7
8
91
Transformer Units
2
3
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2195, 2196 and 2197

Transformer Units
Control and lighting transformers
Rated from 0.5 kVA - 50 kVA, single-phase and 10 kVA - 45 kVA, three-phase
Secondary protection provided
2195
2196
2197
6
7
8
Bulletin Number
A
A
A
K
K
K
BD
BD
BD
Transformer Size
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Line Voltage
Code
Type
Control and Lighting Transformer
2195
without Disconnecting Means
(XFMR)
and Lighting Transformer
2196(Z) Control
with Fusible Disconnect (XFMR)
Control and Lighting Transformer
2197(Z) with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
NEMA Enclosure
Code Type
K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
24J
30CT
Fuse, Clip Rating and Class or
Circuit Breaker Trip and Type
Code
2195
2196
2197
Note: The (Z) denotes that the disconnect

portion of the unit is 0.5 space factor.
Transformer
Code Size
Single Phase
A
0.5 kVA
B
0.75 kVA
C
1.0 kVA
Z
1.6 kVA
E
2.0 kVA
F
3.0 kVA
G
5.0 kVA
H
7.5 kVA
J
10 kVA
K
15 kVA
M
25 kVA
X
37.5 kVA
Y
50 kVA
Three Phase
P
10 kVA
Q
15 kVA
S
25 kVA
T
30 kVA
V
37.5 kVA
W
45 kVA
Line Voltage
Single Phase
Code Primary
AD
240V
BD
480V
CD
600V
AA
240V
BA
480V
CA
600V
NS
380V
KNS 400V
IS
415V
NP
380V
KNP 400V
IP
415V
IT
415V
Three Phase
Code Primary
AH
240V
BH
480V
CH
600V
Secondary
120V, (1) Fuse
120V, (1) Fuse
120V, (1) Fuse
240/120V, (2) Fuses
240/120V, (2) Fuses
240/120V, (2) Fuses
110/115V, (1) 1-pole CB
110/115V, (1) 1-pole CB
110/115V, (1) 1-pole CB
110V, (2) 1-pole CB
115V, (2) 1-pole CB
220V, (2) 1-pole CB
240V, (2) 1-pole CB
Secondary
208/120V, (3) Fuses
208/120V, (3) Fuses
208/120V, (3) Fuses
**
**
**
Options
Fuse, Clip Rating and Class

or Circuit Breaker Trip and
Type
Not Applicable
24J Fuse Clip Rating and
Class. See table on Page 221
30CT Circuit Breaker Trip and
Type. See table on Page 221 and
223
Code
Options
See Options Section
beginning on Page 111
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2195
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR)
See 91 for product description.
NOTE: Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units may cause drive to trip.
NOTE: In order to address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, it may be
necessary to oversize the field conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers, and oversize the
lighting contactor units (increase by 50%). Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
NOTE: Tap arrangement for 15-50kVA single phase transformers is (2) 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, (4) 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
Tap arrangements for 10-45 kVA three phase transformers is (2) 2-1/ 2% Taps FCBN.
NOTE: Transformers have Class 180C insulation, 80C rise.
Rating
kVA [1]
0.5
0.75
1
1.6
2
Catalog Number [2]

Space
NEMA Type 1 with
Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type
filters and Type 1 w/
600V
[3]
1 w/ gasket
gasket and filters [4]
SINGLE PHASE120 Volt secondary with one (1) secondary fuse
2195-AK_D
1.0
2195-BK_D
2195-CK_D
1.5
2195-ZK_D
15
2.0
2195-EK_D
Recommended Primary
Protection (Amperes)
240V
15
480V
15
NEMA Type 12
2195-AJ_D
2195-BJ_D
2195-CJ_D
2195-ZJ_D
2195-EJ_D
1.0 [6]
2195-FK_D
2195-FK_D-16A
2195-FJ_D
5 (2.5)
1.5 [6]
2195-GK_D
2195-GK_D-16A
2195-GJ_D
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
15 (7.5)
25 (12.5)
37.5 (18.5)
50 (25)
30
40
50
70
125
200
300
10 (5)
15 (7.5)
25 (12.5)
30 (15)
37.5 (18.5)
45 (22.5)
5
6
7
8
3 (1.5)
[1]
Delivery
Program
SINGLE PHASE120/240 Volt secondary with two (2) secondary fuses

Transformer secondary wired and protected for 240V phase to phase/120V phase to center tap neutral.
2195-GK_A
2195-GK_A-16A
2195-GJ_A
15
[6]
20
20
2195-HK_A
2195-HK_A-16A
2195-HJ_A
1.5
30
20
2195-JK_A
2195-JK_A-16A
2195-JJ_A
2195-KK_A
2195-KK_A-16A
2195-KJ_A
40
30
2.0 [8]
2195-MK_A
2195-MK_A-16A
2195-MJ_A
70
60
100
70
2195-XK_A
2195-XK_A-16A
2195-XJ_A
2.0
20 D [8] 2195-YK_A
2195-YK_A-16A
2195-YJ_A
150
100
THREE PHASE120/208 Volt secondary with three (3) secondary fuses
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 208 phase to phase/120V phase to WYE neutral.
2195-PK_H
2195-PK_H-16A
2195-PJ_H
20
15
20
15
2195-QK_H
2195-QK_H-16A
2195-QJ_H
2.0 [8]
2195-SK_H
2195-SK_H-16A
2195-SJ_H
40
30
2195-TK_H
2195-TK_H-16A
2195-TJ_H
50
40
60
50
2195-VK_H
2195-VK_H-16A
2195-VJ_H
2.0
20 D [8] 2195-WK_H
2195-WK_H-16A
2195-WJ_H
70
60
[5]
[7]
[7]
[7]
than 50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented and
filtered doors) may be sufficient.
[2] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the primary voltage code from table on page 217 to identify the transformer primary voltage desired (e.g., 2195-FKBD).
[3] For ratings 3kVA and larger, vented door is provided.
[4] For ratings 3kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still will be NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket
and filters.
[5] 240V and 480V are SC in U.S. and Canada. 600V is PE in U.S. and SC in Canada.
[6] Must be frame mounted in bottom of vertical section.
[7] 240V and 480V are SC-II in U.S. and Canada. 600V is PE-II in U.S. and SC-II in Canada.
[8] Must be frame mounted in bottom of vertical section. No vertical wireway.
93
Transformer Units
2
Bulletin 2195
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR), continued
Recommended Primary
Protection
(Amperes)
Rating
kVA [1]
380V
400V
Space
Factor
415V
Catalog Number
w/ gasket [2]
Delivery
Program
NEMA Type 1 with

NEMA Type 12 [1]
SINGLE PHASE110/115 Volt secondary with one (1) 1-pole circuit breaker [4]
0.5 [4]
1.0
0.75 [4]
1 [4]
2195-AJ_S [5]
[5]
2195-BJ_S [5]
2195-CK_S [5]
2195-CJ_S [5]
2195-ZK_S [5]
2195-ZJ_S [5]
[5]
2195-EJ_S [5]
2195-FK_S-16A [5]
2195-FJ_S [5]
2195-BK_S
15
1.6 [4]
2195-AK_S [5]
15
15
1.5
2.0
2 [4]
2195-EK_S
3 [4] (1.5)
1.5 [6]
2195-FK_S [5]
PE
PE-II
SINGLE PHASE110 Volt secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers [7]
Over-current protected for two separate source loads (phase to neutral with a grounded center tap)
5 (2.5) [4]
20
7.5 (3.7) [4]
20
10 (5) [4]
30
15 (7.5)
50
1.5 [6]
2.0 [8]
2195-GKNP
2195-GKNP-16A
2195-GJNP
2195-HKNP
2195-HKNP-16A
2195-HJNP
2195-JKNP
2195-JKNP-16A
2195-JJNP
2195-KKNP
2195-KKNP-16A
2195-KJNP
PE-II
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
2195-GKKNP
2195-GKKNP-16A
2195-GJKNP
20
20
2195-HKKNP-16A
2195-HJKNP
1.5 [6] 2195-HKKNP
2195-JKKNP
2195-JKKNP-16A
2195-JJKNP
30
PE-II
5 (2.5) [4]
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
[4]
[4]
15 (7.5) [10]
20
20
30
50
1.5
[6]
2.0 [8]
2195-GKIT
2195-GKIT-16A
2195-GJIT
2195-HKIT
2195-HKIT-16A
2195-HJIT
2195-JKIT
2195-JKIT-16A
2195-JJIT
2195-KKIP
2195-KKIP-16A
2195-KJIP
PE-II
and filters.
[4] Incorporates primary taps for future conversion to new global IEC voltage standards (e.g., 400V/115V/230V). Allows conversion without the need to replace transformers.
[5] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the primary voltage code from table on page 217 to identify the transformer primary voltage desired (e.g., 2195-FKNS).
[7] Use for two separate feeds with center tap grounded.
[9] The 15kVA transformer has a single phase 220 Volt secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers.
[10] Tap arrangement is (2) 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, (4) 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2196
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR)
Tap arrangements for 10-45 kVA three phase transformers is (2) 2-1/ 2% Taps FCBN.
NOTE: 3 through 50 kVA consists of two (2) compartmentsa fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer
compartment wired and interlocked together.
Rating
kVA [1]
Catalog Number [2]

Space Factor
NEMA Type 1 with
NEMA Type 1 and Type filters
and Type 1 w/
480V
600V
NEMA Type 12 [1]
[3]
1 w/ gasket
2196-AK_D-__
2196-AJ_D-__
1.0
2196-BK_D-__
2196-BJ_D-__
2196-CK_D-__
2196-CJ_D-__
1.5
30
30
2196-ZK_D-__
2196-ZJ_D-__
2.0
2196-EK_D-__
2196-EJ_D-__
2196-FK_D-__
2196-FK_D-__-16A
2196-FJ_D-__
2.5 [6]
[6]
30
2196-GK_D-__
2196-GK_D-__-16A
2196-GJ_D-__
2.5
2196-GK_A-__
2196-GK_A-__-16A
2196-GJ_A-__
30
30
30
2196-HK_A-__
2196-HK_A-__-16A
2196-HJ_A-__
2.5 [6]
30
30
2196-JK_A-__
2196-JK_A-__-16A
2196-JJ_A-__
60
60
2196-KK_A-__
2196-KK_A-__-16A
2196-KJ_A-__
3.0 [8],[9]
[8],[9]
2196-MK_A-__
2196-MK_A-__-16A
2196-MJ_A-__
60
60
3.0
[8],[9]
2196-XK_A-__
2196-XK_A-__-16A
2196-XJ_A-__
100
100
3.5 20 D
200
100
2196-YK_A-__-16A
2196-YJ_A-__
3.5, 20 D [9],[10] 2196-YK_A-__
30
30
2196-PK_H-__
2196-PK_H-__-16A
2196-PJ_H-__
30
30
2196-QK_H-__
2196-QK_H-__-16A
2196-QJ_H-__
3.0 [9]
2196-SK_H-__
2196-SK_H-__-16A
2196-SJ_H-__
60
60
60
60
2196-TK_H-__
2196-TK_H-__-16A
2196-TJ_H-__
[9]
2196-VK_H-__
2196-VK_H-__-16A
2196-VJ_H-__
60
60
3.0 20 D
[9],[10]
2196-WK_H-__
2196-WK_H-__-16A
2196-WJ_H-__
100
60
3.0 20 D
Fuse Clip Rating

(Amperes)
240V
0.5
0.75
1
1.6
2
3 (1.5)
5 (2.5)
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
15 (7.5)
25 (12.5)
37.5 (18.5)
50 (25)
30
60
60
100
200
200
10 (5)
15 (7.5)
25 (12.5)
30 (15)
37.5 (18.5)
45 (22.5)
30
2
3
5
6
7
Delivery
Program
[5]
[7]
[7]
[7]
[2] The catalog numbers listed are not complete.
Select the voltage code from table on page 217 (e.g., 2196-FKBD).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip designator from table on page 221 (e.g., 2196-FKBD-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, select the fuse clip designator AND the manufacturer from table on page 221 (e.g., 2196-FKBD-24JG).
For fuse rating, based on transformer rating, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
and filters.
[7] 240V and 480V are SC-II in U.S. and PE-II in Canada. 600V is PE-II in U.S. and SC-II in Canada.
[8] For transformers with 240 volt primary, add 0.5 space factor.
95
Transformer Units
2
3
5
6
Bulletin 2196Z*
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR)
Tap arrangements for 10-45 kVA three phase transformers is (2) 2 1/ 2% Taps FCBN.
NOTE: Unit consists of two (2) compartmentsa fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer compartment wired
and interlocked together. The fusible disconnect compartment has a horizontal operating handle.
Rating
kVA [1]
Catalog Number [2]

Space Factor
NEMA Type 1 with
NEMA Type 1 and Type filters
and Type 1 w/
480V
600V
NEMA Type 12 [1]
[3]
1 w/ gasket
2196Z-FK_D-__
2196Z-FK_D-__-16A
2196Z-FJ_D-__
30
30
2.0 [5]
30
2196Z-GK_D-__
2196Z-GK_D-__-16A
2196Z-GJ_D-__
2.0 [5]
30
2196Z-GK_A-__
2196Z-GK_A-__-16A
2196Z-GJ_A-__
30
30
2196Z-HK_A-__
2196Z-HK_A-__-16A
2196Z-HJ_A-__
2.0 [5]
30
30
2196Z-JK_A-__
2196Z-JK_A-__-16A
2196Z-JJ_A-__
30
30
2196Z-PK_H-__
2196Z-PK_H-__-16A
2196Z-PJ_H-__
2.5 [7]
30
30
2196Z-QK_H-__
2196Z-QK_H-__-16A
2196Z-QJ_H-__
Fuse Clip Rating

(Amperes)
240V
3 (1.5)
5 (2.5)
30
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
30
10 (5)
15 (7.5)
Delivery
Program
[6]
[6]
[6]
Select the voltage code from table on page 217 (e.g., 2196Z-FKBD).
If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip designator from table on page 221 (e.g., 2196Z-FKBD-24J).
If power fuse WILL be selected, select the fuse clip designator AND the manufacturer from table on page 221 (e.g., 2196Z-FKBD-24JG).
For fuse rating, based on transformer rating, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
and filters.
The (Z) denotes that the disconnect portion of the unit is 0.5 space factor.
96 For Options, Modifications, and Accessories, see pages 111127
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2196
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR), continued
NOTE: 3 through 50kVA consists of two (2) compartmentsa fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer
compartment wired and interlocked together.
Fuse Clip Rating
Rating
kVA [1]
(Amperes)
380V
400V
415V
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [2]

Type 1 with filters
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA
and Type 1 w/ gasket
[3]
w/ gasket
and filters [4]
NEMA Type 12 [1]
Delivery
Program
1.0
0.75 [5]
1 [5]
1.6
2
[5]
30
30
30
1.5
2.0
[5]
3 (1.5) [5]
2.5 [6]
2196-AK_S-__
2196-AJ_S-__
2196-BK_S-__
2196-BJ_S-__
2196-CK_S-__
2196-CJ_S-__
2196-ZK_S-__
2196-ZJ_S-__
2196-EK_S-__
2196-EJ_S-__
2196-FK_S-__
2196-FK_S-__-16A
2196-FJ_S-__
PE
PE-II
(2.5) [5]
30
30
10 (5) [5]
30
15 (7.5) [8]
60
7.5
(3.7) [5]
2.5 [6]
3.0 [9]
2196-GKNP-__
2196-GKNP-__-16A
2196-GJNP-__
2196-HKNP-__
2196-HKNP-__-16A
2196-HJNP-__
2196-JKNP-__
2196-JKNP-__-16A
2196-JJNP-__
2196-KKNP-__
2196-KKNP-__-16A
2196-KJNP-__
PE-II
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
2196-GKKNP-__
2196-GKKNP-__-16A
2196-GJKNP-__
30
2196-HKKNP-__-16A
2196-HJKNP-__
30
2.5 [6] 2196-HKKNP-__

2196-JKKNP-__
2196-JKKNP-__-16A
2196-JJKNP-__
30
PE-II
5 (2.5) [5]
7.5
(3.7) [5]
10 (5)
[5]
15 (7.5) [8]
30
30
30
60
2.5 [6]
3.0 [9]
2196-GKIT-__
2196-GKIT-__-16A
2196-GJIT-__
2196-HKIT-__
2196-HKIT-__-16A
2196-HJIT-__
2196-JKIT-__
2196-JKIT-__-16A
2196-JJIT-__
2196-KKIP-__
2196-KKIP-__-16A
2196-KJIP__
PE-II
Select the voltage code from table on page 217 (e.g., 2196-FKNS).
Select the fuse clip designator from table on page 221 (e.g., 2196-FKNS-24J). No power fuses available.
[4] For ratings 3kVA and larger, vented door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still will be NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and filters.
[8] Tap arrangement is (2) 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, (4) 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
[10] The 15kVA transformer has a single phase 220 volt secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers.
5
6
7
8
0.5 [5]
97
Transformer Units
2
3
5
6
Bulletin 2196Z*
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR), continued
NOTE: Unit consists of two (2) compartmentsa fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer compartment wired
and interlocked together.The fusible disconnect compartment has a horizontal operating handle.
Fuse Clip Rating
Rating
kVA [1]
(Amperes)
380V
400V
415V
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [2]

Type 1 with filters
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA
and Type 1 w/ gasket
[3]
w/ gasket
and filters [4]
NEMA Type 12 [1]
Delivery
Program
3 (1.5) [5]
30
30
30
2.0 [6]
2196Z-FK_S-__
2196Z-FK_S-__-16A
2196Z-FJ_S-__
PE-II
5
(2.5) [5]
7.5
(3.7) [5]
10 (5) [5]
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
30
30
30
2196Z-GKKNP-__
2196Z-GKKNP-__-16A
2196Z-GJKNP-__
30
30
2196Z-HKKNP-__-16A
2196Z-HJKNP-__
2.0 [6] 2196Z-HKKNP-__
2196Z-JKKNP-__
2196Z-JKKNP-__-16A
2196Z-JJKNP-__
30
2.0
[6]
2196Z-GKNP-__
2196Z-GKNP-__-16A
2196Z-GJNP-__
2196Z-HKNP-__
2196Z-HKNP-__-16A
2196Z-HJNP-__
2196Z-JKNP-__
2196Z-JKNP-__-16A
2196Z-JJNP-__
PE-II
PE-II
5 (2.5) [5]
7.5
(3.7) [5]
10 (5)
[5]
30
30
30
2.0
[6]
2196Z-GKIT-__
2196Z-GKIT-__-16A
2196Z-GJIT-__
2196Z-HKIT-__
2196Z-HKIT-__-16A
2196Z-HJIT-__
2196Z-JKIT-__
2196Z-JKIT-__-16A
2196Z-JJIT-__
PE-II
Select the voltage code from table on page 217 (e.g., 2196Z-FKNS).
Select the fuse clip designator from table on page 221 (e.g., 2196Z-FKNS-24J). No power fuses available.
[4] For ratings 3kVA and larger, vented door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still will be NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and filters.
98 For Options, Modifications, and Accessories, see pages 111127
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2197
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
NOTE: 3 through 50kVA consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked
together.
Catalog Number [2]
Space
NEMA Type 1 with
Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
480V
600V
NEMA Type 12 [1]
[3]
w/ gasket
2197-AK_D-__
2197-AJ_D-__
1.0
2197-BK_D-__
2197-BJ_D-__
2197-CK_D-__
2197-CJ_D-__
1.5
[5]
15
15
2197-ZK_D-__
2197-ZJ_D-__
2.0
2197-EK_D-__
2197-EJ_D-__
2197-FK_D-__-16A
2197-FJ_D-__
2.5 [7] 2197-FK_D-__
[6]
15
2197-GK_D-__
2197-GK-D__-16A
2197-GJ_D-__
2.5
2197-GK_A-__
2197-GK_A-__-16A
2197-GJ_A-__
15
20
20
2197-HK_A-__-16A
2197-HJ_A-__
2.5 [7] 2197-HK_A-__
2197-JK_A-__
2197-JK_A-__-16A
2197-JJ_A-__
30
20
2197-KK_A-__
2197-KK_A-__-16A
2197-KJ_A-__
40
30
[9]
3.0
2197-MK_A-__
2197-MK_A-__-16A
2197-MJ_A-__
70
60
2197-XK_A-__
2197-XK_A-__-16A
2197-XJ_A-__
100
70
3.0
20 D
150
100
2197-YK_A-__
2197-YK_A-__-16A
2197-YJ_A-__
[9],[10]
240V
0.5
0.75
1
1.6
2
3 (1.5)
5 (2.5)
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
15 (7.5)
25 (12.5)
37.5 (18.5)
30
40
50
70
125
200
50 (25)
10 (5)
15 (7.5)
25 (12.5)
30 (15)
37.5 (18.5)
45 (22.5)
15
5
6
7
Size of Primary Protection

Rating
kVA [1]
Delivery
Program

2197-PK_H-__
2197-PK_H-__-16A
2197-PJ_H-__
20
15
20
20
2197-QK_H-__
2197-QK_H-__-16A
2197-QJ_H-__
3.0 [9] 2197-SK_H-__
2197-SK_H-__-16A
2197-SJ_H-__
40
30
2197-TK_H-__
2197-TK_H-__-16A
2197-TJ_H-__
50
40
2197-VK_H-__
2197-VK_H-__-16A
2197-VJ_H-__
60
50
3.0
70
60
2197-WK_H-__-16A
2197-WJ_H-__
20 D [9] 2197-WK_H-__
[6]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[1] In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3kVA and larger transformers), to maximize transformer life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded to greater than
50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented and filtered
door) may be sufficient.
Select the primary voltage code from table on page 217 (e.g., 2197-EKBD).
Select the trip current from table on page 221 (e.g., 2197-EKBD-30).
Select the circuit breaker from table on page 223 (e.g., 2197-EKBD-30CT).
and filters.
[5] Transformer secondary wired and protected for 240V phase to phase/120V phase to center tap neutral.
99
Transformer Units
2
3
5
6
Bulletin 2197Z*
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
NOTE: Units consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked together.
This circuit breaker compartment has a horizontal operating handle.
Catalog Number [2]

Space
NEMA Type 1 with
Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
480V
600V
NEMA Type 12 [1]
[3]
w/ gasket
15
15
2197Z-FK_D-__-16A
2197Z-FJ_D-__
2.0 [5] 2197Z-FK_D-__
15
2197Z-GK-D__-16A
2197Z-GJ_D-__
2.0 [5] 2197Z-GK_D-__
2197Z-GK_A-__
2197Z-GK_A-__-16A
2197Z-GJ_A-__
15
20
20
2197Z-HK_A-__-16A
2197Z-HJ_A-__
2.0 [5] 2197Z-HK_A-__
2197Z-JK_A-__
2197Z-JK_A-__-16A
2197Z-JJ_A-__
30
20
2197Z-KK_A-__
2197Z-KK_A-__-16A
2197Z-KJ_A-__
40
30
[7]
2.5
2197Z-MK_A-__
2197Z-MK_A-__-16A
2197Z-MJ_A-__
70
60
2197Z-XK_A-__
2197Z-XK_A-__-16A
2197Z-XJ_A-__
100
70
2.5
150
100
2197Z-YK_A-__-16A
2197Z-YJ_A-__
20 D [7] 2197Z-YK_A-__
2197Z-PK_H-__
2197Z-PK_H-__-16A
2197Z-PJ_H-__
20
15
20
20
2197Z-QK_H-__
2197Z-QK_H-__-16A
2197Z-QJ_H-__
[7]
2.5
2197Z-SK_H-__
2197Z-SK_H-__-16A
2197Z-SJ_H-__
40
30
2197Z-TK_H-__
2197Z-TK_H-__-16A
2197Z-TJ_H-__
50
40
2197Z-VK_H-__
2197Z-VK_H-__-16A
2197Z-VJ_H-__
60
50
2.5
70
60
2197Z-WK_H-__-16A
2197Z-WJ_H-__
20 D [7] 2197Z-WK_H-__

Rating
kVA [1]
240V
3 (1.5)
5 (2.5)
15
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
15 (7.5)
25 (12.5)
37.5 (18.5)
50 (25)
30
40
50
70
125
200
10 (5)
15 (7.5)
25 (12.5)
30 (15)
37.5 (18.5)
45 (22.5)
Delivery
Program
[6]
[6]
[6]
[1] In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3kVA and larger transformers), to maximize transformer life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded to greater than
50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented and filtered
door) may be sufficient.
Select the primary voltage code from table on page 217 (e.g., 2197Z-FKBD).
Select the trip current from table on page 221 (e.g., 2197Z-FKBD-30).
Select the circuit breaker from table on page 223 (e.g., 2197Z-FKBD-30CT).
and filters.
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2197
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR), continued
NOTE: 3 through 50kVA consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked
together.
Catalog Number [2]

Space
NEMA Type 1 with
Factor
NEMA Type 1 and
400V
415V
NEMA Type 12 [1]
[3]
Type 1 w/ gasket
SINGLE PHASE110/115 secondary with one (1) 1-pole circuit breaker [5]
2197-AK_S-__
2197-AK_S-__-16A
2197-AJ_S-__
1.0
2197-BK_S-__
2197-BK_S-__-16A
2197-BJ_S-__
1.5
2197-CK_S-__
2197-CK_S-__-16A
2197-CJ_S-__
15
15
2197-ZK_S-__
2197-ZK_S-__-16A
2197-ZJ_S-__
2.0
2197-EK_S-__
2197-EK_S-__-16A
2197-EJ_S-__
[6]
2197-FK_S-__
2197-FK_S-__-16A
2197-FJ_S-__
2.5

Rating
kVA [1]
0.5 [5]
0.75 [5]
1 [5]
1.6 [5]
2 [5]
3 (1.5) [5]
380V
15
Delivery
Program
7.5 [5] (3.7)

10 [5] (5)
15 (7.5) [8]
20
20
30
50
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
5 (2.5) [5]
7.5 (3.7) [5]
10 (5) [5]
15 (7.5) [8]
Over-current protected for two separate source loads (phase to neutral with a grounded center tap).
2197-GKNP-__
2197-GKNP-__-16A
2197-GJNP-__
[6]
2197-HKNP-__
2197-HKNP-__-16A
2197-HJNP-__
2.5
2197-JKNP-__
2197-JKNP-__-16A
2197-JJNP-__
[9]
2197-KKNP-__
2197-KKNP-__-16A
2197-KJNP-__
3.0
2197-GKKNP-__
2197-GKKNP-__-16A
2197-GJKNP-__
20
20
2197-HKKNP-__
2197-HKKNP-__-16A
2197-HJKNP-__
2.5 [6]
30
2197-JKKNP-__
2197-JKKNP-__-16A
2197-JJKNP-__
20
2197-GKIT-__
2197-GKIT-__-16A
2197-GJIT-__
[6]
20
2197-HKIT-__
2197-HKIT-__-16A
2197-HJIT-__
2.5
30
2197-JKIT-__
2197-JKIT-__-16A
2197-JJIT-__
[9]
50
2197-KKIP-__
2197-KKIP-__-16A
2197-KJIP__
3.0
PE
PE-II
PE-II
PE-II
PE-II
Select the primary voltage code from table on page 217 (e.g., 2197-EKNS).
Select the trip current from table on page 221 (e.g., 2197-EKNS-30).
Select the circuit breaker from table on page 223 (e.g., 2197-EKNS-30CT).
and filters.
[8] Tap arrangement is two 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, four 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
6
7
8
5 [5] (2.5)
101
Transformer Units
2
3
5
6
Bulletin 2197Z*
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR), continued
necessary to oversize the field conductors (especially neutrals), use
k-factor lighting transformers, and oversize the lighting contactor units (increase by 50%). Contact your local
Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
NOTE: Units consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked together.
The circuit breaker compartment has a horizontal operation handle.
Catalog Number [2]
Space
NEMA Type 1 with
Factor
NEMA Type 1 and
400V
415V
NEMA Type 12 [1]
[3]
Type 1 w/ gasket
SINGLE PHASE110/115 secondary with one (1) 1-pole circuit breaker [5]
15
15
2197Z-FK_S-__
2197Z-FK_S-__-16A
2197Z-FJ_S-__
2.0 [6]

Rating
kVA [1]
380V
8
3 (1.5) [5]
15
Delivery
Program
PE-II
5 [5] (2.5)
7.5 [5] (3.7)
10 [5] (5)
15 (7.5) [8]
20
20
30
50
5 (2.5)
7.5 (3.7)
10 (5)
5 (2.5) [5]
7.5 (3.7) [5]
10 (5) [5]
15 (7.5) [8]
2197Z-GKNP-__
2197Z-GKNP-__-16A
2197Z-GJNP-__
[6]
2197Z-HKNP-__
2197Z-HKNP-__-16A
2197Z-HJNP-__
2.0
2197Z-JKNP-__
2197Z-JKNP-__-16A
2197Z-JJNP-__
[9]
2197Z-KKNP-__
2197Z-KKNP-__-16A
2197Z-KJNP-__
2.5
20
2197Z-GKKNP-__
2197Z-GKKNP-__-16A
2197Z-GJKNP-__
2197Z-HKKNP-__
2197Z-HKKNP-__-16A
2197Z-HJKNP-__
20
2.0 [6]
2197Z-JAKNP-__
2197Z-JAKNP-__-16A
2197Z-JJKNP-__
30
20
2197Z-GKIT-__
2197Z-GKIT-__-16A
2197Z-GJIT-__
[6]
20
2197Z-HKIT-__
2197Z-HKIT-__-16A
2197Z-HJIT-__
2.0
30
2197Z-JKIT-__
2197Z-JKIT-__-16A
2197Z-JJIT-__
[9]
50
2197Z-KKIP-__
2197Z-KKIP-__-16A
2197Z-KJIP__
2.5
PE-II
PE-II
PE-II
Select the primary voltage code from table on page 217 (e.g., 2197Z-EKNS).
Select the trip current from table on page 221 (e.g., 2197Z-EKNS-30).
Select the circuit breaker from table on page 223 (e.g., 2197Z-EKNS-30CT).
and filters.
[8] Tap arrangement is two 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, four 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
Miscellaneous Units
Catalog Number Explanation - Miscellaneous Units
3
Full Section Blank Mounting Plate with No Disconnecting Means, with or without Horizontal Power Bus
2100 -
120
**
4
5
Full Section Blank Mounting Plate with Fusible Disconnect Switch, with or without Horizontal Power Bus
2100 -
24J
120
**
- 32CT -
120
**
Mounting
Plate Depth
Fuse Clip
or Circuit
Breaker
Horizontal
Power Bus
Full Section Blank Mounting Plate with Circuit Breaker, with or without Horizontal Power Bus
2100 -
Bulletin
Number
Code
2100
Code
E
F
G
Disconnecting
NEMA Type
Means
Voltage
Unit Depth Placeholder Unit Width
Code Placeholder
X is a placeholder
Type
Disconnecting Means
No disconnecting means
With fusible disconnect
With circuit breaker
Code
A
C

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
Voltage
250V
600V
Code Unit Depth
1
15 Deep
2
20 Deep
Code
1
2
3
4
5
Code
B
C
D
Options
7
8
Code Option
See available
Options on page 23.
Unit Width
20 wide
25 wide
30 wide
35 wide
40 wide
10
Mounting Plate Depth

14 Deep
19 Deep
8.5 Deep
Code
2100F and
2100G only
Horizontal Power
Code Bus
Blank Provided with
horizontal power bus
120
No horizontal power
bus is provided
11
12
13
Fuse Clip or Circuit

Breaker
See page 105 for
fuse clip rating or
circuit breaker
14
15
16
17
18
19
15
20
103
Miscellaneous Units
Full Section Blank Mounting Plates

2
Line side of disconnect or circuit breaker is connected to horizontal bus for sections with horizontal bus.
Customer cables connect to the line side of the disconnect or circuit breaker for sections without horizontal bus.
3
4
5
With no
disconnect
means
Full width door, no vertical With fusible
wireway or vertical bus,
with or without horizontal disconnect
switch
power bus. Frame Mounted.
Full section Blank

Mounting Plates [2]
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Space
Factor
Description
With circuit
breaker
With horizontal bus

Without horizontal
bus
With horizontal bus
Without horizontal
bus
With horizontal bus
Without horizontal
bus
Voltage Code
Unit Depth
Fuse Clip
Voltage
250
600
Unit Depth
(Inches)
15
20
Code
A
C
Mounting Plate Depth (Inches)
Code
1
2
Code
14
14
15
[1],[2]
19
C [3]
8.5
D [4]

[2] For 15 deep sections without horizontal bus or 20 deep sections with or without
horizontal bus.
[3] Only available with 20 deep section without horizontal bus.
[4] Not available with 40 wide mounting plate.
Unit Width
16
17
18
19
15
20
2100-EKC_ X _ _-120
2100-EJC_ X _ _-120
2100-FK_ _ X _ _-_
2100-FJ_ _ X _ _-_
2100-FK_ _ X _ _-_-120
2100-FJ_ _ X _ _-_-120
2100-GKC_ X _ _ -_
2100-GJC_ X _ _ -_
2100-GKC_ X _ _-_-120
2100-GJC_ X _ _-_-120
Delivery
Program
SC-II

For 2100-E catalog numbers
Select unit depth from table below (e.g., 2100-EKC1).
Select unit width from table below (e.g., 2100-EKC1X1).
Select mounting plate depth from table below (e.g., 2100-EKC1X1D).
For 2100-F catalog numbers
Select fuse clip voltage from table below (e.g., 2100-FKC).
Select unit depth from table below (e.g., 2100-FKC1).
Select unit width from table below (e.g., 2100-FKC1X1).
Select mounting plate depth from table below (e.g., 2100-FXC1X1D).
Select disconnect rating and fuse clip from table on page 105 (e.g., 2100-FKC1X1D-24J).
For 2100-G catalog numbers
Select unit depth from table below (e.g., 2100-GKC1).
Select unit width from table below (e.g., 2100-GKC1X1).
Select mounting plate depth from table below (e.g., 2100-GKC1X1D).
Select trip current and circuit breaker option from tables on page 105 (e.g., 2100-GKC1X1D-32CT).
[2] 20 wide sections can be grouped up to 3 sections in a shipping block. 25 and wider sections are in separate shipping blocks. Sections without horizontal bus must be located
on the end of the MCC lineup in a separate shipping block.
Mounting Plate Depth
13
6.0
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
gasket
2100-EKC_ X _ _
2100-EJC_ X _ _
Width (Inches)
20
25
30
35
Code
1
2
3
4
40 [1]
20
25
30
35
40 [1]
1
2
3
4
Depth
15
20
[1] Only available with 2100-E. 40 wide vertical section is a

two-door section with a 3-point latch. 40 wide cannot have
horizontal power bus.
Miscellaneous Units
Disconnect Rating and Fuse Clip

Disconnect Rating
and Fuse Clip Size
Fuse Clip Class

J
R
H
J
R
H
J
R
H
J
R
H
J
R
H
30
60
100
200
400
Fuse Clip
Designator
24J
24R
24
25J
25R
25
26J
26R
26
27J
27R
27
28J
28R
28
3
4
5
6
7
8
Trip Current
Number
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
Trip Current
(Amperes)
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
Number
38
39
40
41
42
43
Trip Current
(Amperes)
80
90
100
125
150
175
Number
44
45
46
48
49
50
Trip Current
(Amperes)
200
225
250
300
350
400
10
11
Circuit Breaker Option

Rating
(Amperes)
15-50
60-100
125-150
175-225
250-400
Standard IC
Suffix
Frame
FDB
CT
Standard IC with Current

Limiting
Suffix
Frame
CD
FDB-LFD
12
Medium IC
High IC
Suffix
Frame
CB
FD
Suffix
Frame
13
HFD
14
CM
JD
KD
HJD
HKD
15
16
17
18
19
15
20
105
Miscellaneous Units
Blank Unit Doors
2
Description
3
4
5
Blank Unit Door
Covers the unused unit space (includes unit

support pan)
6
7
9
Empty Unit Insert [1]
10
11
12
Empty Unit Insert with
Disconnecting Means
[1],[3],[4]
14
15
16
17
Delivery
Program
SC
Field-Mounted Equipment Units
13
Catalog Number
Space Factor
NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
0.5
2100-BK05
2100-BJ05
2100-BK10
2100-BJ10
1.0
1.5
2100-BK15
2100-BJ15
2.0
2100-BK20
2100-BJ20
2.5
2100-BK25
2100-BJ25
3.0
2100-BK30
2100-BJ30
3.5
2100-BK35
2100-BJ35
4.0
2100-BK40
2100-BJ40
Catalog Number
Description
Space Factor
NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
2100-NK05
2100-NJ05
0.5 [2]
2100-NK10
2100-NJ10
1.0
For field installed equipment and 8.625 working
1.5
2100-NK15
2100-NJ15
depth. No plug-in stabs.
2.0
2100-NK20
2100-NJ20
Inserts come with support and door.
2.5
2100-NK25
2100-NJ25
Inserts are NOT UL listed and are NOT CSA
certified.
3.0
2100-NK30
2100-NJ30
3.5
2100-NK35
2100-NJ35
4.0
2100-NK40
2100-NJ40
1.5
2100D-CK_-__
2100D-CJ_-__
For field installed equipment, 8.625 working
depth. Includes fusible disconnect and plug-in
2.0
2100D-DK_-__
2100D-DJ_-__
stabs.[5]
2.5
2100D-EK_-__
2100D-EJ_-__
3.0
2100D-FK_-__
2100D-FJ_-__
Adding equipment to this unit insert may require
3.5
2100D-GK_-__
2100D-GJ_-__
field evaluation by UL/CSA in order to retain
listing/certification.
4.0
2100D-HK_-__
2100D-HJ_-__
1.5
2100M-CKC-__
2100M-CJC-__
For field installed equipment, 8.625 working
depth. Includes inverse time (thermal magnetic)
2.0
2100M-DKC-__
2100M-DJC-__
circuit breaker and plug-in stabs.[6]
2.5
2100M-EKC-__
2100M-EJC-__
3.0
2100M-FKC-__
2100M-FJC-__
Adding equipment to this unit insert may require
3.5
2100M-GKC-__
2100M-GJC-__
field evaluation by UL/CSA in order to retain
listing/certification.
4.0
2100M-HKC-__
2100M-HJC-__
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
See Options, Modifications, and Accessories, pages 127, for terminal block options.
Terminal block options (-800, -801, -802, -803, -804) are not available on 2100-NK05 or 2100-NJ05.
These units do not meet service entrance requirements. Not intended to be used as feeder circuits.
See Appendix for interrupting capacity ratings.
The catalog numbers listed are not complete:
Select the voltage code from table on page 107 (e.g., 2100D-CKC).
Select the fuse clip designator from table on page 107 (e.g., 2100D-CKC-24J).
If power fuse will be selected, select from page 220 (e.g., 2100D-CKC-24J-604G).
Select the trip current from table on page 107 (e.g., 2100M-CKC-30).
Select the circuit breaker from table on page 107 (e.g., 2100M-CKC-30CT).
18
19
15
20
Delivery
Program
SC
Miscellaneous Units
Tables for Configuring Bulletin 2100D and 2100M Unit Catalog Numbers
Voltage Code
Fuse Clip Voltage
250
600
Voltage Code
A
C
Fuse Clip Designator *

Fuse Clip
Rating
(Amperes)
30
60
100
200 [1]
Fuse Clip
Class
J
R
H
CC
J
R
H
J
R
H
J
R
H
Short Circuit
withstand Rating
through 600V
100kA
100kA
10kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
10kA
100kA
100kA
10kA
100kA
100kA
10kA
Fuse Clip
Designator
Number
Trip Current
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
24J
24R
24
24C
25J
25R
25
26J
26R
26
27J
27R
27
6
7
8
9
10
[1] Not available in 1.5 space factors.
Trip Current
Number
Trip Current
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
(Amperes)
11
(Amperes)
12
13
14
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Option ,

Rating
(Amperes)
15-50
60-100
125-150
175-225
Capacity
Suffix
Frame
CT
FDB
CT
FDB
CT
FDB
CT
JD
Capacity w/Current Limiter
Suffix
Frame
CD
FDB-LFD
CD
FDB-LFD
CD
FDB-LFD
Medium Interrupting
Capacity
Suffix
Frame
CB
FD
CB
FD
CB
FD
High Interrupting
Capacity
Suffix
Frame
CM
HFD
CM
HFD
CM
HFD
CM
HJD
15
16
17
18
19
15
20
Refer to publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses.

Refer to page 246 for circuit breaker interrupting capacity ratings.
Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE MCCs Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers.
107
Miscellaneous Units
Miscellaneous DeviceNet Units
Catalog Number
Space
Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/
NEMA Type 12
gasket
Description
3
4
5
DeviceNet Power Supply Unit

(110-120VAC input and 8.0A
24VDC output) [1]
This power supply is to be used
with 8.0A Class I Cable only.
Refer to DNET-UM072x-EN-P,
DeviceNet Cable System
Planning and Installation
Manual.[2]
DeviceNet
Redundant DeviceNet Power

Supply Unit
(110-120VAC input and 8.0A,
24VDC output). Two power
supplies providing back-up for
DeviceNet system.[1],[5]
DeviceNet
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
15
20
Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs or control circuit

transformer. Requires separate 110-120VAC source.
Includes disconnect, fuses and 500VA control circuit
transformer to provide power to power supply
Includes circuit breaker, fuses and 500VA control circuit

0.5
2100-DPS8KXWD
2100-DPS8JXWD
1.0
2100-DPS8K_[3]
2100-DPS8J_[3]
1.0 [4] 2100-DPS8K_-30_[6]
Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs or control circuit

transformer. Requires separate 110-120VAC source.
Includes disconnect, fuses and 500VA control circuit
Includes circuit breaker, fuses and 500VA control circuit
Without disconnecting means, plug-in stabs, or control circuit

transformer. Requires separate 110-120VAC source. Viewing
window in door to provide visual verification of network
status, etc.
With disconnect, fuses, and 80VA control circuit transformer.
Viewing window in door to provide visual verification of
network status, etc.
With circuit breaker, fuses, and 80VA control circuit
transformer. Viewing window in door to provide visual
DeviceNet
verification of network status, etc.
Without disconnecting means, plug-in stabs or control
Bulletin 1788 Ethernet to
transformer. Requires separate 110-120VAC source. Viewing
DeviceNet linking device. Used window in door to provide visual verification of network
to connect an Ethernet network status, etc.
to a DeviceNet network
With fusible disconnect and 80VA control transformer.
without the need for a PLC
Viewing window in door to provide visual verification of
chassis.[7],[9]
network status, etc.
With circuit breaker and 80VA control transformer. Viewing
et
window in door to provide visual verification of network
DeviceN
status, etc.
External DeviceNet Connector
Unit with remotely powered Door mounted external DeviceNet connection and 120VAC
120VAC receptacle
receptacle for connection of computer to DeviceNet without
having to open doors.
Bulletin 1788 ControlNet to
DeviceNet linking device used
to interface a DeviceNet
network to a ControlNet
network without the need for a
PLC chassis [7],[8]
1.0
2100-DPS8KXWD-767C
[3]
Delivery
Program
2100-DPS8K_-30_[6]
2100-DPS8JXWD-767C
1.5
2100-DPS8K_-767C
2100-DPS8J_-767C[3]
1.5
2100-DPS8K_-30_-767C[6]
2100-DPS8K_-30_-767C[6]
0.5
2100-C2DKXWD
2100-C2DJXWD
SC
1.0
2100-C2DK_ [3]
2100-C2DJ_ [3]
1.0
2100-C2DK_-30_ [6]
2100-C2DJ_-30_ [6]
0.5
2100-E2DKXWD
2100-E2DJXWD
1.0
2100-E2DK_[3]
2100-E2DJ_[3]
1.0
2100-E2DK_-30_[6]
2100-E2DJ_-30_[6]
0.5
2100-DCK05XWD
2100-DCJ05XWD
DeviceNet
[1] Includes buffer module which provides for 250ms ride-thru.

[2] See page 127 for optional external DeviceNet connector with 120VAC receptable (option 767A).
DeviceNet power supply requires a 95-132VAC 50/60 Hz power source that provides sinusoidal waveform. Use of non-sinusoidal power sources, including some UPSs, could
damage the DeviceNet power supply.
[3] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the voltage code from the Voltage Code Table below (e.g., 2100-DPS8KB).
[4] Requires 1.5 space factor when circuit breaker suffix CD is specified.
[5] Optional DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (Option -11DSA3) is available. Select from page 118.
Select the voltage code from the Voltage Code Table below (e.g., 2100-DPS-8KB).
Select the circuit breaker from the Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Option, Table below (e.g., 2100-DPS8KB-30CT).
[7] ControlNet to DeviceNet linking device units are supplied with a 1794 Flex I/O power supply to provide the 24VDC source for the unit so the linking device unit does not burden
the DeviceNet power supply with its 1.0A load.
[8] Refer to publication CNET-IN002x-EN-P, ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide, and 1770-IN041x-EN-P, Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,
for information on installing and routing ControlNet Cable.
[9] Refer to publication ENET-IN001x-EN-P, Ethernet Planning Guide, and 1770-IN041x-EN-P, Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, for information on installing
and routing ethernet cable.
Voltage Code
Fuse Clip Voltage
220-230
240
380
400
415
480
600
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Option[1],[2]

Voltage Code
P
A
N
KN
I
B
C
Suffix
CT
CD
CB
CM
Frame Type
FDB
FDB-LFD
FD
HFD
[1] Refer to Appendix for circuit breaker interrupting capacity ratings.

[2] Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE MCCs Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers.
Circuit Breaker Description

Standard Interrupting Capacity
Standard Interrupting Capacity with Current Limiter
Medium Interrupting Capacity
High Interrupting Capacity
Miscellaneous Units
Other Miscellaneous Units

Description
44 TB
66 TB
Top- mounted
88 TB
110 TB
44 TB
66 TB
Bottom- mounted
88 TB
NEMA Type C Terminal Includes Bulletin
110 TB
Board Unit (supplied
1492-CA1 terminal
76
TB
unwired)
blocks
114 TB
Top- mounted
152 TB
190 TB
76 TB
114 TB
Bottom- mounted
152 TB
190 TB
Requires separate 120V AC source. Must be installed in
bottom of section. Provides one (1) form C contact
closure. The use of bottom closing plates (see page 24) is
Smoke Detector Unit
for most efficient operation. For further
(not available with T-handle recommended
information on smoke detector unit, see publication
latches)
2100-IN046x-EN-P.

Unit [1]
Surge Protective Device
Unit (formerly known as
TVSS)
The SPD consists of an
IslaGuard surge
suppression system by
Control Concepts, with
circuitry provided to
monitor the status of all
protection modes. Unit
consists of a fused
disconnect feeding a surge
protective device (SPD)
rated to provide a minimum
of 160kA per phase of surge
current protection. The unit
is provided with one green
light as a status indicator.
(Response time is 0.5nS)
Corner Section
Unit is UL listed but is NOT CSA certified.

0.25 x 2 x 12 copper tin plated bus plate with #6-250
kcmil lug (280A capacity)
0.25 x 2 x 12 copper silver plated bus plate with
#6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity)
WYE power
systems with a
solidly grounded
neutral
3-wire
Catalog Number
Space
Factor NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
2100-CK10T-0044CA
2100-CJ10T-0044CA
2100-CK10T-0066CA
2100-CJ10T-0066CA
2100-CK10T-0088CA
2100-CJ10T-0088CA
2100-CK10T-0110CA
2100-CJ10T-0110CA
1.0
2100-CK10B-0044CA 2100-CJ10B-0044CA
2100-CK10B-0066CA 2100-CJ10B-0066CA
2100-CK10B-0088CA 2100-CJ10B-0088CA
2100-CK10B-0110CA 2100-CJ10B-0110CA
2100-CK15T-0076CA
2100-CJ15T-0076CA
2100-CK15T-0114CA
2100-CJ15T-0114CA
2100-CK15T-0152CA
2100-CJ15T-0152CA
2100-CK15T-0190CA
2100-CJ15T-0190CA
1.5
2100-CK15B-0076CA 2100-CJ15B-0076CA
2100-CK15B-0114CA 2100-CJ15B-0114CA
2100-CK15B-0152CA 2100-CJ15B-0152CA
2100-CK15B-0190CA 2100-CJ15B-0190CA
Delivery
Program
4
5
6
7
0.5
2100-SD1
2100-SD1
11
2100-BKNPC-05SF
2100-BJNPC-05SF
0.5
2100-BKNPS-05SF
2100-BJNPS-05SF
PE
480V L-L, 277V L-G [2]
2100-SPKB-1
2100-SPJB-1
SC
600V L-L, 346V L-G [3]
2100-SPKC-1
2100-SPJC-1
208V L-L, 120V L-G [3]
2100-SPKH-1
2100-SPJH-1
380V L-L, 220V L-G [3]
2100-SPKN-1
2100-SPJN-1
400V L-L, 230V L-G [3]
2100-SPKKN-1
2100-SPJKN-1
2100-SPKI-1
2100-SPJI-1
2100-SPKB-3
2100-SPJB-3
2100-SPKB-2
2100-SPKC-2
2100-SPKA-2
2100-SPKN-2
2100-SPKKN-2
2100-SPKI-2
2100-SPJB-2
2100-SPJC-2
2100-SPJA-2
2100-SPJN-2
2100-SPJKN-2
2100-SPJI-2
2100-CS60
2100-CS60
480V
600V
240V
380V
400V
415V
Use this catalog number to select a corner section with
an MCC lineup. See page 24 for corner section
description.
SC
0.5
480V L-L, 277V L-G, 277V L-N
10
415V L-L, 240V L-G [3]

WYE power
systems
4-wire
0.5
WYE power
systems with high
resistance grounded
neutral or Delta
power system
6.0
12
13
14
PE
15
SC
16
PE
17
18
SC-II
[1] Neutral Connection Plate 0.5 SF Unit can only be used in sections with vertical wireway. Not for use in sections with full width frame mounted units, including all
mains.When horizontal neutral bus is selected the cable connection from the neutral connection plate to the horizontal neutral plate is NOT provided.
[2] For systems with neutral bus (4-wire systems), use 2100-SP_B-3
[3] For systems with neutral bus (4-wire systems), contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
19
15
20
109
Miscellaneous Units
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
15
20
110
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications,

Accessories for Contactors and Starters, Metering,
Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels,
Transformer and Miscellaneous Units
Multiple option numbers are separated by a dash and added to the base catalog number in ascending order.
FVC
Option
Option
Number
Description
2102L
2103L
FVR
2106
2107
[3]
-1
Push Buttons
[1],[2]
-1B
-1E
Push Buttons and

Selector Switch -1F [5]
START - STOP
FORWARD - REVERSE - STOP
HIGH - LOW - STOP
OFF
STOP
HAND-START, HAND-STOP, HAND-OFF-AUTO
-2
-2A
Control Station -2B
Housing [6]
-2C
Blank
1 holefor one pilot device
2 holefor two pilot devices
3 holefor three pilot devices
4 holefor four pilot devices
HAND - OFF - AUTO
FORWARD - OFF - REVERSE
HIGH - OFF - LOW
FORWARD - OFF - REVERSE and HIGH - LOW
HIGH - LOW - OFF - REVERSE
FAST - OFF - SLOW
OFF - ON
FORWARD - OFF - REVERSE and FAST - SLOW
FAST - SLOW - OFF - REVERSE
Selector Switch -3
[1],[2]
(800H)
(maximum one
switch per unit)
-3E
2112
2113
RVAT
2172
2173
Delivery
Program
3
4
5
6
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
ON - OFF [3]
FAST - SLOW - STOP
HAND-ON, HAND-OFF, HAND-OFF-AUTO
[1],[2]
-2D [7]
FVNR
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W

TS2W TSR2W TSR2W
2126E 2126J
2122
2127E 2127J
2123
2126F 2126K
2127F 2127K
9
10
SC
11
[4]
12
13
[4]
14
[1] Push buttons may not be used in conjunction with selector switches, except with option 1F. Generally, when more than three devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are
supplied. When three or less devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. On 0.5 space factor units, Bulletin
800F pilot devices are supplied.
[2] Maximum of four (4) pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units and maximum of three (3) pilot devices on dual mounted units. Legend plates are available in French by adding 860F
to catalog string number.
[3] Two (2) Bulletin 800F pilot lights will be supplied when two (2) pilot lights are selected in conjunction with push buttons, separate or transformer control only. Only one (1) 800T
pilot light can be supplied on 2103L or 2113 dual units when push buttons are also selected.
[4] Mutually exclusive with DeviceNet communication modules, DeviceNet starter auxiliary (11DSA2, 11DSA3) and E3 solid-state overloads (7FEC_ _).
[5] When option 1F is used with 11DSA2 or 11DSA3, an additional N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required.
[6] Available only on units without pilot devices. The control station on the dual 2103L or dual 2113 is a flat mounting plate, flush mounted to the door of the unit. Holes are for
Bulletin 800T devices when unit is 1.0 space factor and larger. Holes are for Bulletin 800F pilot devices when unit is 0.5 space factor.
[7] Not available for 1.0 space factor and larger units.
111
15
16
17
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, Transformer and Miscellaneous Units
2
3
To select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number: A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red,
W = white (e.g., 4RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light). Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type
pilot lights. Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights. White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot
lights.
4
5
Option
Option
Number
Description
-4_ _
-4_ _ _ [7],[8]
-4_ _ _ _
-4_ _ [8]
-4E_ _ _ [7]
-4E_ _ _ _
FAST - SLOW - OFF
(Transformer
Type) [1]
-4E_ _ _ _ _ [7]
FAST - SLOW - FORWARD - REVERSE

FAST - SLOW - FORWARD - REVERSE OFF
-4T_ [12]
OVERLOAD
12
-4L_ [2]
ON [4],[5]
RUN
13
-4L_ _ [7],[8]
ON - OFF [4],[9]
RUN - OFF
HIGH - LOW
-4L_ _
LED
Type
14
15
-4L_ _ _ [7],[10]
-4EL_ _
FORWARD - REVERSE - OFF [11]

FAST - SLOW
-4EL_ _ _ [7]
FAST - SLOW - OFF
-4TL_ [12]
OVERLOAD
17
2172
2173
Delivery
Program
SC [6]
HIGH - LOW - OFF
-4L_ _ [8]
16
2112
2113
HIGH - LOW - FORWARD - REVERSE
Pilot
Lights
-4L_ _ _ [7],[10]
2106
2107
RVAT
Standard HIGH - LOW - FORWARD - REVERSE - OFF

Type [3]
FORWARD - REVERSE [9]
FAST - SLOW
11
2102L
2103L
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W

TS2W TSR2W TSR2W
2126E 2126J
2122
2127E 2127J
2123
2126F 2126K
2127F 2127K
HIGH - LOW - OFF
-4_ _ _ [7],[10]
-4E_ _
10
FVNR
ON - OFF [4],[9]
RUN - OFF
HIGH - LOW
-4_ _ [7],[8]
-4_ _ _ _ _ [7]
FVR
ON [4],[5]
RUN
-4_ [2]
FVC
[1] Legend plates are available in French by adding 860F to catalog string number. Generally, when more than three devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. When
three or less devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied, except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. On 0.5 space factor units, Bulletin 800F pilot devices
are supplied. Maximum of four (4) pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units and maximum of three (3) pilot devices on dual mounted units.
[2] When used in 2102, 2103, 2112 or 2113 with a DeviceNet starter auxiliary, a 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2102, 2103, 2112 or 2113 with 11DSA3 and
a 1F, a 900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
[3] Two (2) Bulletin 800F pilot lights will be supplied when two (2) pilot lights are selected in conjunction with push buttons, separate or transformer control only. Only one (1) Bulletin
800F pilot light can be supplied on 2103L or 2113 dual units when push buttons also are selected.
[4] When option 1F is selected with any ON pilot light, an N.O. auxiliary contact (option 90) also must be selected.
[5] When used in 2112 or 2113 with 7FEC_, a 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2112 or 2113 with 7FEC_ and a 1F, a 900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be
selected.
[6] SC delivery for 110-120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220-240V control voltage.
[7] Select an N.C. auxiliary contact for OFF pilot light when selected on 2102L, 2103L, 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, 2123, 2126 or 2127 units or on size 2 through 5 2172 and 2173 units
(except 2112 and 2113 vacuum starters).
[8] When used in 2102, 2103, 2112 or 2113 with a 11DSA3 (DeviceNet starter auxiliary), a 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2102, 2103, 2112 or
2113 with 11DSA3 and a 1F, a 9001 (2 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2106, 2107, 2122 or 2123 with 11DSA3, a 90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) must
be selected.
[9] When used in 2112 or 2113 with 7FEC_, a 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2112 or 2113 with 7FEC and a 1F, a 9001 (2 N.O. and 1 N.C.
auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2106 or 2107 with 7FEC, a 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[10] When used in 2106, 2107, 2122 or 2123 with 11DSA3, a 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[11] When used in 2106 or 2107 with 7FEC, a 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[12] Select an N.O. overload relay auxiliary contact (option 9) for OVERLOAD pilot light when standard Bulletin 592 eutectic alloy overload relay is specified. Not available with option
7FEC_, E3 overload or 11DSA3 DeviceNet starter auxiliary.
112
To select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number: A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red,
W = white (e.g., 5RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light). Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type
pilot lights. Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights. White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot
lights.
Option
Option
Number
Description
-5_ _ [7],[8]
-5_ _
-5_ _ _ _ _ [7]
-5_ _ [8]
Push-ToTest
Standard
Type [3]
-5_ _ _ [7],[10]
-5E_ _
Pilot
Lights
-5E_ _ _ [7]
-5E_ _ _ _
(Transformer
Type) [1]
-5E_ _ _ _ _ [7]
-5L_ _ [7],[8]
-5L_ _ [8]
-5L_ _ _ [7],[10]
-5EL_ _
TS1W
TS2W
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
2112
2113
2122
2123
TSR1W TSR1W
TSR2W TSR2W
2126E 2126J
2127E 2127J
2126F 2126K
2127F 2127K
2172
2173
Push-ToTest
LED Type
3
4
RVAT
Delivery
Program
5
6
7
8
9
10
SC [6]
ON [4],[5]
RUN
-5L_ [2]
-5L_ _ _ [7],[10]
FVNR
ON - OFF [4],[9]
RUN - OFF
HIGH - LOW
HIGH - LOW - OFF
HIGH - LOW - FORWARD - REVERSE
HIGH - LOW - FORWARD - REVERSE OFF
FAST - SLOW
FAST - SLOW - OFF
FAST - SLOW - FORWARD - REVERSE
FAST - SLOW - FORWARD - REVERSE OFF
OVERLOAD
-5T_ [12]
-5L_ _
FVR
ON [4],[5]
RUN
-5_ [2]
-5_ _ _ [7],[8]
-5_ _ _ _
FVC
11
12
ON - OFF [4],[9]
RUN - OFF
HIGH - LOW
HIGH - LOW - OFF
13
-5EL_ _ _ [7]

FAST - SLOW
FAST - SLOW - OFF
-5TL_ [12]
OVERLOAD
14
15
[1] Legend plates are available in French by adding 860F to catalog string number. Generally, when more than three devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. When
three or less devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied, except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. On 0.5 space factor units, Bulletin 800F pilot devices
are supplied. Maximum of four (4) pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units and maximum of three (3) pilot devices on dual mounted units.
[2] When used in 2102, 2103, 2112 or 2113 with a DeviceNet starter auxiliary, a 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2102, 2103, 2112 or 2113 with 11DSA3 and a
1F, a 900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
[3] Two (2) Bulletin 800F pilot lights will be supplied when two (2) pilot lights are selected in conjunction with push buttons, separate or transformer control only. Only one (1) Bulletin 800F
pilot light can be supplied on 2103L or 2113 dual units when push buttons also are selected.
[4] When option 1F is selected with any ON pilot light, an N.O. auxiliary contact (option 90) also must be selected.
[5] When used in 2112 or 2113 with 7FEC_, a 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2112 or 2113 with 7FEC_ and a 1F, a 900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be
selected.
[7] Select an N.C. auxiliary contact for OFF pilot light when selected on 2102L, 2103L, 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, 2123, 2126 or 2127 units or on size 2 through 5 2172 and 2173 units
(except 2112 and 2113 vacuum starters).
[8] When used in 2102, 2103, 2112 or 2113 with a 11DSA3 (DeviceNet starter auxiliary), a 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2102, 2103, 2112 or
2113 with 11DSA3 and a 1F, a 9001 (2 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2106, 2107, 2122 or 2123 with 11DSA3, a 90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) must
be selected.
[9] When used in 2112 or 2113 with 7FEC_, a 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used in 2112 or 2113 with 7FEC and a 1F, a 9001 (2 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary
contact) must be selected. When used in 2106 or 2107 with 7FEC, a 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[10] When used in 2106, 2107, 2122 or 2123 with 11DSA3, a 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[11] When used in 2106 or 2107 with 7FEC_, a 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[12] Select an N.O. overload relay auxiliary contact (option 9) for OVERLOAD pilot light when standard Bulletin 592 eutectic alloy overload relay is specified. Not available with option
7FEC_, E3 overload or 11DSA3 DeviceNet starter auxiliary.
113
16
17
2
Option
Option
Number
Description
4
5
-6P [1]
Control Circuit
Transformer
(with
grounded and
fused
secondary)
Standard
capacity with
primary fusing
100 watt extra capacity with

-6XP [4],[1] primary fusing
9
10
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
FVC
FVR
FVNR
Size
2102L
2103L
VA
2112
2113
VA
1
2
80 [2]
80
200
250
350
130
130
250
350
500
2106
2107
VA
80
80
200
250
350
130
130
250
350
500
3 [3]
4
5
6
1
2
3 [3]
4
5
6
80 [2]
80
200
250
350
80
130
130
250
350
500
130
TS1W
TS2W
2122
2123
VA
80
80
200
250
350
130
130
250
350
500
TSR1W
TSR2W
2126
2127
VA
130
200
200
250
RVAT
2172
2173
VA
130
250
350
500
80
200
350
500
750
130
When a control circuit transformer is selected on dual 2103L and 2113 units, one auxiliary contact mounting position (P3) is given up for the transformer secondary fuse.
For 0.5 space factor 2102L, 2103L, 2112 and 2113, standard capacity VA rating is 75VA.
For size 3 and vacuum starters.
Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
114
Delivery
Program
SC
Option
Option
Number
Description
NEMA Size 1, 2
Selectable trip class (10, 15,
20, 30) selectable
NEMA Size 3
E1 Plus Electronic
[5] Auto/Manual-Auto reset
[3],[4] -7FEE_
Overload Relay
electronic overload relay for NEMA Size 4
NEMA starters, size 1-6.
NEMA Size 5
NEMA Size 6
NEMA size 1,2
Manual Reset solid state
SMP-1 Solid State
-7FA_ _ [5] overload relay for NEMA
Overload Relay [3],[4]
starters.
Provision for Field

Installed
SMP-1 Solid State
Overload Relay [4]
Provision for Field
Installed
SMP-2 Solid State
Overload Relay [4]
-7FAXX
-7FBXX
FVR
FVNR
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
2112
2113
TSR1W
TSR2W
2126E
2122
2127E
2123 [1] 2126F
2127F [1]
TSR1W
TSR2W
2126J
2127J
2126K
2127K
2
RVAT
2172
2173
Delivery
Program
3
4
dual
[2]
6
7
dual
NEMA size 3
NEMA size 4 and
200A Vacuum
NEMA size 5,6 and
350A Vacuum, 450A
Vacuum
NEMA size 1,2
Class 10, 20, 30

SMP-2 Solid State
Auto/Manual reset solid
[5]
-7FB1_
state overload relay for
Overload Relay [3],[4]
NEMA starters.
FVC
TS1W
TS2W
9
10
dual
SC
11
NEMA size 3
NEMA size 4 and
200A Vacuum
NEMA size 5,6 and
350A Vacuum, 450A
Vacuum
NEMA size 1
NEMA size 2
NEMA size 3
NEMA size 4
200A Vacuum
NEMA size 1
NEMA size 2
NEMA size 3
NEMA size 4
200A Vacuum
12
13
14
15
[1] For two-speed starter applications, there are two overload option codes required (e.g., 7FEEEEEB). For two-speed applications the first code denotes the high speed overload relay
and the second code denotes the low speed overload relay.
[2] Requires extra 0.5 S.F. for NEMA 4, Bulletin 2112 with Class J or HRCII-C fuses.
[3] Options 7FA_ _, 7FB1_ and 7FEE_ are supplied with one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact.
[4] Solid-state overload relay options 7FA_, 7FB_, 7FEC_ and 7FEE_ are mutually exclusive.
[5] Option number is not complete:
Select overload relay code from appropriate table on 116 and add to option number (e.g., 7FEEB).
For SMP-1 overload relay, select class code: 1 = Class 10, 2 = Class 20. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for Class 30.
115
16
17
Overload Relay Codes for E1 Plus, Option -7FEE_
2
For Use with
NEMA Size
Full Load Current

Range (Amperes)
Overload Relay Code

(Add to Option
Number from 115 [e.g.,
7FEEB]) [1]
B
C
D
E
F
2[2]
0.2 - 1.0
1.0 - 5.0
3.2 - 16
5.4 - 27
9 - 45
18 - 90
30 - 150
60 - 300
120 - 600
[1] For dual 2113 and 2122, 2123, 2126 and 2127, two codes are required (e.g.,
7FEEBEEB).
[2] Not available in dual 2113, Size 2
Overload Relay Codes for SMP-2, Class 10, 20 or 30

Option 7FB1__
For Use with
NEMA Size
10
11
12
1, 2
2, 3
13
3, 4, 200A Vacuum
14
4, 200A Vacuum
5, 350A Vacuum
6, 450A Vacuum
15
Full Load Current

Range (Amperes)
0.19 - 0.6
0.32 - 1.0
1.0 - 2.9
1.6 - 5.0
3.7 - 12
5.7 - 18
12 - 32
14 - 45
23 - 75
66 - 110
57 - 180
96 - 300
200 - 630
Overload Relay Code

(Add to Option Number
from 115 [e.g. 7FB1B])
[1]
B
C
D
E
F
G [2]
H
J
K
L
M
N
R
7FB1B1B). The first code is high speed and the second code is low speed.
[2] Not available in 0.5 space factor 2112/2113 or 1.5 space factor 2106/2107 units.
16
17
116
Overload Relay Codes for SMP-1, Class 10, 20 or 30

Option 7FA_ _
For Use with
NEMA Size
Full Load Current

Range (Amperes)
0.19 - 0.6
0.32 - 1.0
1.0 - 2.9
1.6 - 5.0
3.7 - 12
Overload Relay Code

(Add to Option
Number from 115
[e.g., 7FA2B]) [1]
B [2]
C
D
E
F
5.7 - 18
G [3]
12 - 32
14 - 45
23 - 75
66 - 110
57 - 180
96 - 300
200 - 630
J
K
L
M
N
R
1, 2
2, 3
3, 4, 200A Vacuum
4, 200A Vacuum
5, 350A Vacuum
6, 450A Vacuum
7FA2B2B).
[2] Use current code A (0.1-0.32A) for 0.5 space factor 2112/2113 or 1.5 space factor
2106/2107 units.
[3] Not available in 0.5 space factor 2112/2113 or 1.5 space factor 2106/2107 units.
Option
Number
Option
E3 Electronic
Overload
Relay [1],[2]
DeviceNet
Description
FVC
FVR
FVNR
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
2112
2113
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W

TS2W TSR2W TSR2W
2126E 2126J
2122
2127E 2127J
2123
2126F 2126K
2127F 2127K
RVAT
2172
2173
Delivery
Program
NEMA size 1 [4]
-7FEC1_
[3]
E3 Basic is provided with two

(2) 24VDC inputs and one (1)
110-240VAC output.
For non-DeviceNet
applications a
24VDC separate
power source is
needed. A Bulletin
E3 Plus is provided with four (4)
193-PCT, may be
needed for
-7FEC2_ [3],[8] 24VDC inputs and two (2)
110-240VAC outputs.
programming and
monitoring. Refer to
publication,
193-UM001x-EN-P.
NEMA size 2
NEMA size 3
[5]
NEMA size 4 [6]

NEMA size 5 [7]
NEMA size 6
NEMA size 1
6
SC
[4]
NEMA size 2 [5]

NEMA size 3
NEMA size 4 [6],[6]
NEMA size 5 [7]

NEMA size 6
[1] Not available with common control. Not available with Type A wiring. Not available on dual 2113, 0.5 space factor 2112 and 2113 or 2112 and 2113 vacuum units. Mutually
exclusive with 89_ relay and 700TC_ transducer/sensor options. Outputs are rated at 3A @ 120VAC and 1.5A @ 240VAC.
[2] Overload relays (options 7FA_ _, 7FB1_, 7FEC_ and 7FEE_) are mutually exclusive.
[3] Catalog numbers listed are not complete:
For NEMA size 1-3 overload relays, select overload relay code from table below and add to option number (e.g., 7FEC2B).
For NEMA size 1-3 overload relays, if 120VAC inputs are required, place a Y configuration option in the catalog string number as in table below (e.g., 7FEC2BY).
For NEMA size 4-6, select overload relay code from table below and add to option number (e.g., 7FEC2B).
If applicable for NEMA size 4-6, select an E3 overload relay configuration option from table below, add to option number (e.g., 7FEC2BYG, 120VAC input points with ground
fault option).
Select Overload Relay Code from Table A and add to option number (e.g., 7FEC1B).
[4] NEMA size 1 2112/2113 1.0 space factor units are limited to 10 control terminal points and 3 power terminal points. When option 106 (eliminate power terminals) is used, up to
15 control terminal points are available. For 20 control terminal points, add 0.5 space factor.
[5] NEMA size 2 2112/2113 1.0 space factor units are limited to 10 control terminal points and 3 power terminal points. Option 106 (eliminate power terminals) is not available for
NEMA size 2 2112/2113 units. For 15 to 20 control terminal points, add 0.5 space factor.
[6] Requires extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA 4 Bulletin 2112 with Class J and HRCII-C fuses.
[7] Requires extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA 5 Bulletin 2112 with Class J fuses.
[8] NEMA size 1-3 E3 Plus overload relays have ground fault sensor as standard. NEMA size 4-6 E3 Plus overload relays need to have the ground fault configured to include a ground
fault sensor.
Overload Relay Codes for E3 and E3 Plus, Option 7FEC_

For use with NEMA
Size
2
3
4
5
6
Full Load Current

Range (Amperes)
0.4-2.0
1-5
3-15
5-25
9-45
18-90
28-140
60-302
125-630
Overload Relay Code (Add to

Option Number [e.g.,
7FEC1A])
P
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
K
E3 Overload Relay Configuration Options

Description
24VDC input points
120VAC input points, available for
110-120VAC control voltage only
Ground fault. Includes Bulletin
825-CBCT ground fault sensor.
120VAC input points and ground
fault (see description above)
9
10
11
12
13
Overload Relay Code (Add to

option number [e.g.,
7FEC1AYG])
None
14
Y
G [1]
15
YG [1]
[1] Available for E3 Plus overloads only.
16
17
11
2
3
Option
Option
Number
Description
4
5
Overload Relay -9
Auxiliary Contact
(Eutectic Alloy)
(one contact per
overload relay) [1] -9A
9
10
DeviceNet Starter
Auxiliary
(DSA) [2],[3]
-11DSA2
DeviceNet
-11DSA3
Additional Unit
Space
-15
Filters for Door

Vents
-16A
Normally Open
Normally Closed
FVC
FVR
FVNR
TS1W
TS2W
TSR1W
TSR2W
TSR1W
TSR2W
RVAT
Feeder/
Main
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
2112
2113
2122
2123
2126E
2127E
2126F
2127F
2126J
2127J
2126K
2127K
2172
2173
2192
2193
Type A
Wiring
Type B
Wiring
Delivery
Program
Type A
Wiring
Type B
Wiring
SC
For use with contactors and starters to provide DeviceNet

inputs and outputs. (4) 120V inputs and (2) 120V outputs. Not
[4],[5],[6]
to be used with option 7FEC_. Available for 110V-120V
control only.
For use with contactors and starters to provide DeviceNet
inputs and outputs. (4) 24VDC inputs and (2) 240VAC (max),
[5],[6]
30VDC (max) outputs. Not to be used with 7FEC_. Available
for 110V-120VAC or 220V-240VAC control voltage.
Adds 0.5 space factor unit space to Bulletin 2112 and 2113
size 1, 2 and 3 units.
Note: Bulletin 2112 and 2113, sizes 1 and 2, cannot be
increased from 1.5 to 2.0 space factors by selecting option
15, nor can size 1 increase from 0.5 to 1.0 space factor by
using option 15.
Filters for door vents on NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with Available on NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with gasket Bulletins 2195, 2196
gasket Bulletin 2195, 2196 and 2197 units
and 2197 only
11
-17 [8]
12
13
14
15
16
17
On coil, one per contactor, for starters and contactors, not

available on vacuum type
Surge
Suppressor [7]
SC
[9]
-17R
For units with interposing relays (89CB and 89CBL) and

unwired control relays (89CF and 89P)
O/L Contact on
Left Side of
Circuit
-18 [10]
Moves overload from right side to left side of circuit
Omit Wiring
-19
Control Circuit
Fuse
-21
-22
Omission of control wiring except primary and secondary

transformer wiring
One (1) control circuit fuse for separate control or line to
neutral control
Two (2) control circuit fuses for common control
[9]
[9]
[9]
[9]
PE
[1] Options 9 and 9A are mutually exclusive and not available with optional overload relay 7F_ _ _. Options 7FA1_ and 7FB1_ are supplied with one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary
contact.
[2] Not available with dual or 0.5 space factor 2103L or 2113 units with eutectic, SMP-1 or SMP-2 overloads. Mutually exclusive with 89_ relay and 87 timer options. Not available with
push buttons or selector switches, except options 3 and 1F.
[3] DeviceNet options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3 are mutually exclusive. Not available on vacuum starters.
[4] For 120/240VAC separate control only. A 120/240VAC source must be provided.
[5] Bulletins 2192F and 2192M require option 98 (external N.O. auxiliary contact). Bulletins 2193F and 2193M require option 98 (N.O. external auxiliary contact) or 98X (N.O. internal
auxiliary contact).
[6] Not available with dual 2192F units.
[7] Available for 110-240V control voltage. SC delivery for 110-120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220-240V control voltage. Not available for common control.
[8] Options 17 and 89BL are mutually exclusive.
[9] For unwired control relays (options 89CF and 89P) only.
[10] Not available on 2112 and 2113 1.0 space factor units or 2106 and 2107 1.5 space factor units when 800F pilot devices are used. Not available with option -7FEC_ _.
118
Option
Blown Fuse
Indicator Lights
Option
Number
-4BF
-30KV
-31KV
-32KV
-33KV
-34KV
-35KV
-36KV
-37KV
-38KV
-39KV
480V and 600V
-40KV
Power Factor
-41KV
Correction
-42KV
Capacitors [1],[2]
-43KV
(Refer to publication -44KV
2100-AT001x-EN-P, -45KV
Power Factor
-46KV
Correction
-47KV
Capacitors for
Bulletin 2100 MCC -48KV
Starter Units, for -49KV
more information)
-50KV
-51KV
-52KV
-53KV
-54KV
-55KV
-56KV
-57KV
-58KV
-59KV
Description
Option 4BF is valid only when 480V and 600V Power

Factor Correction Capacitor is selected
2 kVAR
2.5 kVAR
3 kVAR
4 kVAR
5 kVAR
2 kVAR through 40 kVAR in 0.5 space 6 kVAR
factor.
7 kVAR
7.5 kVAR
42.5 kVAR through 50 kVAR in 1.0
8
kVAR
space factor.
9 kVAR
These capacitors should not be used
10 kVAR
on motors subject to plugging or
jogging. Do not subject capacitors to 11 kVAR
repetitive switching where capacitors 12.5 kVAR
and motors might be reenergized too
13.5 kVAR
quickly after being de-energized.
15 kVAR
Do not install capacitors in any vertical 16 kVAR
section that contains a variable
17.5 kVAR
frequency drive.
18 kVAR
Capacitors are mounted in separate 20 kVAR
unit with a separate door. This unit is
located below selected starter. Door 22.5 kVAR
25 kVAR
interlock is included. Three phase
power fuses are included.
27.5 kVAR
Capacitors are factory wired to load 30 kVAR
side of the contactor and on the line 32.5 kVAR
side of the overload relay.
35 kVAR
37.5 kVAR
40 kVAR
42.5 kVAR
45 kVAR
50 kVAR
FVC
FVR
FVNR
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
2112
2113
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W RVAT

TS2W TSR2W TSR2W
Delivery
2126E 2126J
2122 2127E 2127J 2172 Program
2123
2126F 2126K 2173
2127F 2127K
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PE-II
10
11
12
13
14
[1] See option 4BF for optional blown fuse indicators. Not available on dual starters, 0.5 space factor units or 6.0 space factor units. Refer to Recommended Capacitor Size table in
Appendix for suggested capacitor ratings.
[2] For applications other than motor applications connected to the load side of the starter or for those applications outlined in publication 2100-AT001x-EN-P, contact your local Rockwell
15
16
17
119
2
3
Option
Option
Number
Description
4
5
Grounded Unit
Door
Unit Load
Connector
Unit Ground
Stab
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
-79L
-79LT
-79U
-79UT
Thermistor
Protection
Relay
-84A1
Unit Ammeter
-85AA
[1],[2]
-79GD
-85XA
Elapsed Time
-85T
Meter [3],[4],[5]
Unwired Timer -87A
Auxiliary (not
available on 0.5 -87B
SF units)
-88A
-88B
-88C
-88H
-88I
-88KN
Ground
-88N
Detection
-88AT
[6]
Lights
-88BT
-88CT
-88HT
-88IT
-88KNT
-88NT
Ground Fault
Protection [7]
-88GF
Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door.

Unit door hinge grounding strap for IEC requirements.
Unplated copper
Select on all plug-in units in sections with
vertical unit load ground bus
Tin plated copper
Copper unit ground stabs also may be used with Copper alloy
steel vertical ground bus. Select on plug-in units Unplated copper
in sections with vertical plug-in ground bus.
Tin plated copper
Bulletin 817-E2P, 120VAC, 50-60 Hz, output is unwired, not available
on dual starters, requires 1.5 space factor for size 1 and 2 and 2.0
space factor for 2113 size 3. Requires extra 0.5 space factor for
NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2112 with Class J and HRCII-C fuses. Not
available in units containing a current transducer. Available in
Canada only. Available for 120V separate or transformer control only.
Analog ammeter and current transformer.
Current transformer only for use with external meter. Current
transformer rated 2.5VA or greater.
Six digit non-resettable meter (with tenths), mounted in control
station
Bulletin 596 time delay addition to NEMA size 1 On delay
through 5 contactors with N.O. and N.C.
contacts, not available on vacuum type. Not
Off delay
available with -7FEC_ E3.
240 Volt
480 Volt
600 Volt
Three (3) Bulletin 800T pilot lights (clear), wired 208 Volt
in grounded WYE, complete with fusing
415 Volt
400 Volt
380 Volt
240 Volt
480 Volt
Three (3) Bulletin 800T push-to-test pilot lights 600 Volt
(clear), wired in grounded WYE, complete with 208 Volt
fusing
415 Volt
400 Volt
380 Volt
Integral ground fault protection system with adjustable pick-up,
adjustable time delay, control power indicator light, trip indicator
and built-in test feature. Shunt trip is included. See required voltage
code on 74.
FVC
FVR
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
TSR1W TSR1W
FVNR TS1W
Delivery
2126E 2126J
2112 2122 2127E 2127J 2172 Program
2113 2123 2126F 2126K 2173
2127F 2127K
Available on all standard control units

Available on all standard control plug-in units, including Bulletin 2192
and 2193 plug-in feeder units
Available on all standard control plug-in units, including Bulletin 2192
and 2193 plug-in feeder units
SC
Available on Bulletin 2191M, 2192M and 2193M ONLY
Available on Bulletin 2191M, 2192M and 2193M ONLY
Available on Bulletin 2192M ONLY, 1600A-2000A ONLY. Available for

380V, 400V, 415V, 480V and 600V applications only.
PE-II
[1] Ammeter has 5A movement, 3.5 scale, 102 deflection and 2% of full scale accuracy. Current transformer for external meter is supplied with 8-foot secondary leads. Ammeter
scale and CT ratio are determined by the horsepower code. Not valid on 0.5 space factor or dual mounted units.
[2] Unit ammeter and current transducer options are mutually exclusive.
[3] Elapsed time meter mounts in position normally used for a pilot device, limiting the maximum number of pilot devices selected. On 0.5 space factor units, elapsed time meter uses
two positions normally used for a pilot device. Not available on dual mounted units. Available on units with 120 Volt separate or transformer control only. Not available on 380-415V,
50Hz applications.
[4] Mutually exclusive with control relay options 89CB, 89CBL, 89CF_ and 89P in 1.0 space factor and current transformer options 700TC1 and 700TC4 in 1.0 space factor.
[5] Requires option -90, Normal open auxiliary contact for FVS and FVNR. Requires option -202 for RVAT.
[6] Not available on Bulletin 2191M units specified with metering options. Not available on Bulletin 2191MT, 600A in horizontal wireway corner section or 10 wide incoming lug
section. Mutually exclusive with key interlock mounting provision (option 201).
[7] Horizontal neutral bus and incoming neutral bus is required when 3-phase, 4-wire power system is specified.
120
Option
Incoming Neutral
Bus [2]
See table on
page 68 for
available lugs
Incoming Neutral
Bus [6]
For Bulletins
2192M (main
fusible
disconnect
switch) and
2193M (main
circuit breaker).
See tables on
page 76 for
2192M and
pages 83-84 for
2193M standard
and optional
lugs.
Option
Number
-88HN_
(halfrated)
-88FN_
(fullrated)
Provides for incoming neutral

connection to horizontal neutral bus
within the main incoming unit.
Incoming neutral bus must match
the horizontal neutral bus, half- or
full-rated.
-88HN
(halfrated)
Provides for incoming neutral
connection to horizontal neutral bus
within the main incoming unit.
Incoming neutral bus must match
the horizontal neutral bus, half- or
full-rated.
-88FN
(fullrated)
Incoming Neutral -88NPC [10]

Connection Plate
(can be used only
in sections with a
vertical wireway) -88NPS [10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Description
Rating
Main Neutral Bus

Location
MLUG MFDS MCB
Space Factor Adder
600
[3]
MLUG
None
800
[4]
None
1200
[4]
None
1600
[5]
None
2000
[5]
None
600
[3]
None
800
[4]
None
1200
[4]
[7]
1600
[5]
None
2000
[5]
MFDS
MCB
MLUG
2191M MFDS MCB Delivery
2192M 2193M Program
[1]
4
5
6
7
None
400
[9]
[7]
[8]
None
600
[9]
[9]
1.0
1.0 [8]
800
[9]
[9]
1.0
1.0 [8]
1.0
1200
[9]
[9]
1.0
1600
[3]
N/A
None
N/A
2000
[3]
[3]
None
None
150
N/A
[7]
N/A
None
225
N/A
[7]
N/A
None
400
[9]
[7]
[8]
None
600
[9]
[9]
1.0
1.0 [8]
800
[9]
[9]
1.0
1200
[9]
[9]
1.0
1.0 [8]
1.0
1600
[3]
N/A
None
N/A
[3]
[3]
None
None
2000
0.25 x 2 x 12 copper tin plated bus plate with #6250 kcmil lug. Insulated from and mounted on unit
support pan. Located below main incoming unit if top entry and located above main incoming unit if bottom
entry. Adds 0.5 space factor for main unit if less than 6.0 space factor. Not available for 2191M unit in top
horizontal wireway. 280A capacity.
0.25 x 2 x 12 copper silver plated bus plate with #6250 kcmil lug. Insulated from and mounted on unit
support pan. Located below main incoming unit if top entry and located above main incoming unit if bottom
entry. Adds 0.5 space factor for main unit if less than 6.0 space factor. Not available for 2191M unit in top
horizontal wireway. 280A capacity.
PE
8
9
10
11
[11]
SC-II
[11]
PE
Not available with 600A incoming lug compartment in horizontal wireway, 300A incoming lug compartment or 10 wide section with incoming lugs.
Following are guidelines for MLUG-Main Neutral Bus location. Place T for top of B for bottom to indicate the location of options -88HN_ and -88FN_.
Same as MLUG, MFDS, MCB (e.g., if MLUG, MFDS or MCB is in the top of the section, main neutral bus will be in top bus pocket).
Horizontal neutral must be located on the opposite side of the MLUG.
No restrictions.
Available in U.S. In Canada, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
Top incoming only. Horizontal neutral must be located below the main power bus; full-rated neutral bus for 1200A Bulletin 2191M units require a 6.0 space factor lug compartment.
Adds 5 to width and eliminates vertical wireway.
Horizontal neutral must be located below the main power bus.
Will increase unit size by 0.5 SF, mounted below main lug that is top mounted or mounted above main lug that is bottom mounted. Main lug and neutral unit doors are interlocked
Not available with 600A incoming lug compartment in horizontal wireway or 10 wide section with incoming lugs.
12
13
14
15
16
17
121
2
3
Option
Option
Number
4
Interposing Relay
[1]
Mutually
exclusive with
89CF and 89P,
unwired control
relays
-89CB
-89CBL [3]
Description
Control circuit interposing relay. Utilizes Bulletin 700-CF control relay to

control starter coil in control circuit. Available on NEMA sizes 1 through
5. The starter or contactor coil voltages and interposing relay coil
voltages are the same as the control voltage.
Line circuit interposing relay. Utilizes Bulletin 700-CF control relay to
control starter coil in control circuit. Available on NEMA sizes 1 through
5. The starter or contactor coil voltages are the same as the line
voltage. The interposing relay coil voltage is the same as the control
voltage.
FVC
FVR
FVNR
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
2112
2113
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W

TS2W TSR2W TSR2W
2126E
2126J
2127E
2127J
2122
2126F
2126K
2123
2127F
2127K
RVAT
2172
2173
Delivery
Program
SC [2]
[1] 2.0 space factor minimum when selected on Bulletin 2113 size 3 starters and Bulletin 2106 and 2107 size 1 or 2. Not available on dual 2103L, dual 2113 units or 0.5 space factor units.
Not available with common control. Mutually exclusive with 7FEC_ options and 11DSA2 or 11DSA3 DeviceNet starter auxiliary options.
[3] Options 89CBL and 17 are mutually exclusive. When one (1) control circuit fuse for separate control (21) is selected with 89CBL on 1.0 space factor Bulletin 2102L, 2103L, 2112 or 2113
units, one (1) auxiliary contact mounting position (P3) is given up for the control circuit fuse.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
122
FVC
FVR
FVNR TS1W
TS2W
Option
Option
Number
Description
-89CF40
-89CF31
4 N.O.
3 N.O. and 1
N.C.
2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
4 N.O.
Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay

[2]
-89CF22
-89CF40A
On-delay
includes (1)
NOTC and
(1) NCTO
contact
Off-delay
includes (1)
0.3 to 30
NOTO and
[4]
seconds
(1) NCTC
contact
On-delay
includes (1)
Bulletin
700CF 4-pole NOTC and
(1) NCTO
relay with
contact
time
attachment Off-delay
includes (1)
1.8 to 180
NOTO and
[4]
seconds
(1) NCTC
contact
with mechanical latch
attachment [4]
Bulletin
700CF 4-pole
-89CF22A relay with
time
-89CF40B attachment
Unwired
Control
Relay [1]
-89CF22B
-89CF40C
Mutually
exclusive
with 89CB -89CF22C
and 89CBL
interpos-89CF40D
ing relays
For
-89CF22D
common
control,
-89CF40L
120V coil
is provided
-89CF22L
-89P2
-89P4
-89PT
-89PT2
-89PT4
-89PL2
Bulletin 700P relay

Bulletin 700P with
pneumatic time delay
attachment (on/off delay)
with two (2) timed contacts
(0.1 to 60 seconds) [4]
Bulletin 700P
with mechanical latch
attachment [4]
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
TSR1W TSR1W RVAT

TSR2W TSR2W
2126E 2126J
Delivery
2112
2122
2127E 2127J 2172 Program
2113
2123
2126F 2126K 2173
2127F 2127K
QUANTITY SUPPLIED
6
7
1
Instantaneouos
2 N.O. and 2
Contacts
N.C.
(Instantaneous
contacts on
Bulletin 700CF
relays are nonconvertible.
Bulletin 700P
relays have
instantaneous
contacts that
are convertible
from normally
open to
normally
closed.)
2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
4 N.O.
8
SC [3]
4 N.O.
10
2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
4 N.O.
11
2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
4 N.O.
2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
2 N.O.
4 N.O.
No
instantaneous
contacts
2 N.O.
4 N.O.
2 N.O.
PE
12
SC [3]
13
1
PE
14
15
[1] Not available on dual 2103L units, dual 2113 units or 0.5 space factor units. When selected on 2122 or 2123 size 1 or 2 starter units, power terminal blocks will not be provided. One (1)
relay will be furnished per each contactor on reversing (2106/2107), two speed (2122/2123) and two-speed reversing (2126/2127) starters. Bulletin 2106 and 2107 size 1 and 2 starters
and Bulletin 2113 size 3 starters require 2.0 space factors when a relay is selected. Mutually exclusive with 11DSA2 and 11DSA3 DeviceNet starter auxiliary relay, 7FEC and 7FNX_ E3
overload relay options.
[2] When control circuit transformer is selected on Bulletin 2102L or 2103L 30A or 60A units or Bulletin 2112 or 2113 size 1 or 2 units, the secondary control transformer fuse is mounted
in one of the three starter auxiliary contact pockets.
[4] When selecting Bulletin 2102L or 2103L 30A or 60A units or Bulletin 2112 or 2113 size 1 and 2 starters, a 1.5 space factor unit is required.
123
16
17
2197
Xfmr
2196
2193F
2193M
CB
2192M
2173
FDS
2192F
2172
2127
2126
TS1W TSR1W
RVAT
TS2W TSR2W
2123
FVNR
2122
FVR
2113
FVC
2112
Misc.
Wiring Units
Type
2107
NEMA Size
2103
Description
2103L
Option
Number
2102L
Option
2100D
2100M
Delivery
Program
A
NORMALLY OPEN
One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact mounted on each contactor 1-6
or starter
-90
B [2]
A
NORMALLY CLOSED
One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact mounted on each contactor 1-6
or starter
-91
B [2]
Auxiliary
Contacts[1]
SC
-202 [3]
-98 [4]
-98X [6]
-99 [4]
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
-99X [6]
NORMALLY OPEN and NORMALLY CLOSED

Two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C. auxiliary contacts per
starter
NORMALLY OPEN
One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (operates with movement
of external handle only)
NORMALLY OPEN
One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact mounted internally in
circuit breaker
NORMALLY CLOSED
One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (operates with movement
NORMALLY CLOSED
One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact mounted internally in circuit
breaker
2-5 Auto trans- A

former type and
[2]
all vacuum types B
1-5
6
1-6
1-5
6
1-6
[5]
A or B
A or B
[5]
A or B
A or B
[1] Multiple auxiliary contacts must be group coded by adding the second and third digit of the special feature number to the base digit 9 (e.g., 90-91-98X-99, when group coded, reads
9018X9).
[2] Type B auxiliary contacts are wired to terminal blocks. If the number of auxiliary contact wiring points required exceeds the number of terminals available in the unit, remaining
auxiliary contacts will be unwired. Refer to wiring diagram.
[3] Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum type starters will utilize auxiliary contact block (2 N.O. and 2 N.C.) mounted on contactor. Bulletin 2172 and 2173 autotransformer type starters use
Bulletin 700CF relay contacts (2 N.O. and 2 N.C.).
[4] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only. Contacts are
not designed to actuate as the result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected. Auxiliary contacts are supplied
unwired. Not available on dual 2192F units or 1600A and 2000A 2193M units.
[5] For 1600A and 2000A 2192M, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four (4). The following contact arrangements are allowed.
One (1) contact: one (1) N.O. or one (1) N.C.
Two (2) contacts: two (2) N.O. or two (2) N.C. or one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C.
Three (3) contacts: two (2) N.O. and one (1) N.C. or one (1) N.O. and two (2) N.C.
Four (4) contacts: two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C.
The auxiliary contacts are mounted external to the switch and are actuated by the movement of the operating handle. Auxiliary contacts are supplied unwired.
[6] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is (2) N.O. and (2) N.C. With a shunt trip, the maximum is (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. except for R-frame breakers,
where the maximum is (2) N.O. and (2) N.C.
Maximum Number of Additional Auxiliary Contacts Per Starter/Contactor

Bulletin Number [1]
2102L, 2103L [2]
2112/2113 [2]
2103L/2113 Dual
2106/2107
2122/2123
2172/2173
2112/2113 0.5 SF
2126/2127
Size 1-2
NEMA
Size 3-5
Vacuum
Type
Size 6
4 [3]
3
4
4 [3]
[4]
4 [3]
[1] Units selected with OFF pilot light will use one of these contacts. Bulletins 2126 and 2127 will use two of these contacts.
[2] When Bulletin 596 timers are selected on 30-300A contactors or size 1-5 starters, auxiliary mounting positions (P3 and P4) are used, limiting the maximum number of starter
auxiliaries to two (2). When 89CB, 89CBL, 89CF, 89P, 700TC_, 11DSA2 or 11DSA3 with terminal blocks is present with transformer control in 1.0 space factor units, the number of
starter auxiliary contacts is limited to four (4). When 89CBL is present with separate control and control circuit fuse (21) in 1.0 space factor units, the number of starter auxiliary
contacts is limited to four (4) for units with 7FEC_ _. In E3 overloads, the number of starter auxiliary contacts is limited to five (5). For size 2 units with 7FEEE_, E1 Plus Overload,
the number of auxiliary contacts is limited to five (5)
[3] Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum type starters will utilize auxiliary contact block (2 N.O. and 2 N.C.) mounted on contactor. Bulletin 2172 and 2173 autotransformer type starters
use Bulletin 700CF relay contacts (2 N.O. and 2 N.C.).
[4] Size 6 Bulletin 2172 and 2173 starters are provided with two (2) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary relay contacts as standard.
124
Option
Omission of
Power Terminal
Blocks [1]
Option
Number
-106
For contactors and starters

(NEMA Type BD)
-110 [2]
For 30A and 60A fusible disconnect feeders
Control Terminal
-107
Block [1],[3],[4]
T-Handle
Key-interlock
Mounting
Provision [5]
Current
Transducers
(4-20mA Output)
-201
For circuit breaker or fusible disconnect main or

feeder units. Permits customer mounting of Superior
or Kirk brand key interlocks on unit operating handle.
[8]
[9]
2106
2107
2
Delivery
Program
-700TC1 [7]
-700TC2 [7]
Ohio Semitronics Model MCT5-005E

85-135V AC, 50/60Hz power (includes current
transformer)
Crompton Instruments Model 253-TALU-LSHG 120V
AC +/-20%, 50/60Hz power (includes current
transformer). SC delivery in Canada.
N-K Technologies model AT 12-40V DC at sensor
(current transformer not needed on sizes 1-3, included
on sizes 4-6)
Riley Corp., 5-40VDC at sensor (current transformer
not needed) model 420, sizes 1-3, all voltages
not needed) [8]
not needed) [9]
3
4
5
Available for Bulletin 2192F ONLY
6
Available on all standard control units except 2191F, 2191M,
2192M, 2193M and 2195
SC
Available for Bulletins 2192 and 2193 ONLY
[6]
-700TC5 [7]
[7]
2102L2
103L
TSR1W TSR1W
FVNR TS1W
2126E
2126J
2112 2122 2127E
2127J 2172
2113 2123
2126F
2126K 2173
2127F
2127K
One (1) extra 5-pole control terminal block (unwired)

Current Sensors
(4-20mA Output)
[5]
[6]
FVR
NEMA sizes 1, 2 and 3
-111
-700TC4 [7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Description
FVC
9
PE
10
SC
11
12
Not available on 0.5 space factor units. Not available on Bulletin 2112 or 2113 size 2 in 1.0 space factor with E3 (option 7FEC_).
This option is not available on dual mounted 2192F.
A maximum of two (2) 5-pole control terminal blocks only for each side of dual unit.
An additional block of five control terminals can be supplied for customer use, provided the total number of control terminals does not exceed 15 maximum on units with power
terminals, 20 maximum on units without power terminals. Check wiring diagram for limitations.
Mutually exclusive with ground detection lights (option 88_). Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
For 150A-1200A 2192M and 150A-2000A 2193M units, use Superior key interlock #S105810Y, Type B-4003-1 (bolt flush when withdrawn) or Kirk key interlock #KFL000010. For 1600A
and 2000A 2192M units, use Superior key interlock #S105821Y, Type B-06003-1 (bolt extends 0.375 when withdrawn) or Kirk key interlock #KBL003710. Note: Fusible units should not
be used on a tie (double ended) system, due to access to fuses and back feeding. For these applications, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
Transducer/sensor output is unwired. Not available on 0.5 space factor or dual starter units. Options 700TC1, 700TC4 and 700TC5 require minimum 1.5 space factors for size 1 and 2 if
optional control relay, timer auxiliary relay or 11DSA2/11DSA3 is used. Option 700TC1 requires minimum 2.0 space factors for Bulletin 2113, size 3 when 11DSA2 or 11DSA3 is used.
When control circuit transformer primary fusing is selected, the control transformer secondary fuse is mounted in one of the three starter auxiliary contact pockets. Option 700TC2
always requires minimum 1.5 space factors for sizes 1 and 2. Option 700TC2 requires minimum 2.0 space factors for Bulletin 2113, size 3. Unit ammeter options, current transducer and
thermistor protection relay options are mutually exclusive. Options 700TC1, 700TC2, 700TC4 and 700TC5 require extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2112 with Class J and
HRCII-C fuses. Option 700TC5 requires extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA Size 5 Bulletin 2112 with Class J fuses.
Model 420L, size 4 (all voltages) and size 5 at 380V, 415V, 480V and 600V only. Also 200A vacuum 40HP at 208V, 40-50HP at 240V, 380-415V, 480V and 600V all horsepowers and 350A
vacuum 125-150HP at 380-415V, 150-200HP at 480V and 200HP at 600V.
Model 420X, size 5 at 208V and 240V and size 6 (all voltages). Also 350A vacuum 208V, 240V, 200HP at 380V-415V, 250-300HP at 600V and 450A vacuum (all voltages).
13
14
15
16
17
125
2
Option
Option
Number
Control
Circuit
Wiring [1]
Control Circuit
Lugs [1],[2],[3]
-750 [2]
-750B [2]
-750S [2]
-750RL
-750SL
-751D
Control Wire
Markers [1]
9
10
11
12
Description
Heat shrink type wire marker
-751S
Sleeve type wire marker
Shunt Trip [4]
-754
100% Rating of
Main Disconnect
Switch or Circuit
Breaker [5]
-755
FVR
FVNR
TS1W
TS2W
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
2112
2113
2122
2123
TSR1W TSR1W
TSR2W TSR2W
2126E
2126J
2127E
2127J
2126F 2126K
2127F 2127K
RVAT
2172
2173
Type MTW(TEW) 90C copper wire, VW1

#16 AWG
rated
Type MTW(TEW) 90C copper wire, VW1
#14 AWG (tinned)
rated
Tinned power and #14 AWG, Type MTW (TEW) 90 control wire,
including stab wires and jumper, excluding starter power wire
jumpers
Type SIS 90C copper wire
#14 AWG (tinned)
Insulated ring lugs for control wires where possible
Insulated spade lugs for control wires where possible
Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of control wire.
Not available in Canada.
-751HS
Omission of Circuit -752

Breaker
FVC
NEMA size 1 and 2

NEMA size 3
NEMA size 4
For tripping circuit breakers from remote 120 volt, 60 Hz source
SC
SC (+2
days)
SC
SC (+2
days)
SC
For combination starter units, HMCP frame

only. N/A in 0.5 space factor units.
Provides 100% rating of main switch or circuit breaker. NEMA Type

1 and Type 1 with gasket only, except non-fused 2192M is available
in NEMA Type 12. Not available with NEMA Type 3R or Type 4.
Delivery
Program
SC
Available on all circuit breaker units
Available on 2192M, 600A-2000A
Available on 2193M, 600A-2000A ONLY
600A
800A
1200A
2000A
PE-II
[1] Options for factory wiring of control circuits. Dedicated auxiliary devices (e.g., fans), device and component internal wiring and wiring that could affect operation or certification(s)
(e.g., insulation temperature class, EMC shielding requirements, communication requirements, UL, cUL, CSA, CE) are not included.
[2] Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
[3] Examples where insulated lugs CANNOT be used: 2400 equipment, Bulletin 800F pilot devices, 700CF, size 6 auxiliaries, vacuum starters and auxiliaries and disconnect/circuit breaker
auxiliaries and where more than one (1) wire per terminal is required.
[4] Except for R-frame circuit breakers, not available when two (2) N.O. (98X8X), two (2) N.C. (99X9X) or two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C. (98X8X9X9X) internal contacts are selected for circuit
breakers. Not available on 2193PP plug-in panel board with main circuit breaker.
[5] Optional Lug -80D01K not valid with 2000A 2193MT Units with optional 100% rated circuit breaker.
13
14
15
16
17
126
2
Option
Option
Number
External DeviceNet
-767A
Connector with
120VAC Receptacle
-800
-801
Unwired Pull-Apart
Terminal
-802
Blocks [1]
-803
-804
French Legend
Plates
-860F
Unit Door
Nameplates [2]
Overload Relay
Heater
Elements (Bulletin
592)
Stainless Steel
Nameplate Screws
[3]
Export Packing
Below Deck
Description
Provides external DeviceNet connection and 120VAC receptacle

on door of DeviceNet power supply unit. See page 108.
All mounting tabs on unit bottom plate
are turned up for field installed terminal
blocks
are turned up. (1) 5-pole pull-apart
terminal block included.
Bulletin 1492-EC
5-pole terminal blocks are turned up. (2) 5-pole pull-apart
terminal blocks included.
Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot devices.
Specify 860F when pilot device option is selected.
Acrylic plate (available in U.S. only).
Lettering is white with black letters or
1.125 x 3.625
black with white letters.
engraved 3-line or
Phenolic plate. Lettering is white with
4-line nameplate
black letters, black with white letters or
red with white letters.
Set of three (3) W-type heater elements per overload
supplied loose in each unit. Available on SC-II or PE-II assembled
motor control centers only.
See 239 for heater element selection instructions.
Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates
(2 per unit)
Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing
is not watertight or waterproof. Considerations should be taken if
extended storage is expected.
FVC
FVR
FVNR
TS1W
TS2W
2102L
2103L
2106
2107
2112
2113
2122
2123
TSR1W
TSR2W
2126E
2127E
2126F
2127F
TSR1W
TSR2W
2126J
2127J
2126K
2127K
RVAT
2172
2173
Delivery
Program
3
4
Available on 2100-DPS_ units only
5
6
7
Available on 2100-NK and 2100-NJ empty unit inserts and 2100D and
2100M empty unit inserts with disconnecting means ONLY
8
SC
9
Available on all pilot devices
10

11
SC-II
12
SC
(+2 days)
13
[1] Not available on 2100-NK05 or 2100-NJ05 units.

[2] Blank nameplates will be supplied when no engraving is selected. Letter height for 3-line nameplates will be 0.22. Letter height for 4-line nameplates will be 0.18. All text will be
centered horizontally and vertically.
14
15
16
17
127
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
128

Accessories for
Space Saving NEMA-Rated Starter Units
2
3
Pilot devices are Bulletin 800F
To select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number: A=amber, B=blue, C=clear, G=green, R=red, W=White (e.g.,
4RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light)
Option
Number
Option
[1] [2]
[3]
Description
-1
Push Buttons [1], [2]

Push Buttons and Selector
Switch [1], [2]
-1B[3]
STOP
-1F[4]
HAND-START, HAND-STOP, HAND-OFF-AUTO
-3
-3E[3]
-4_ _[7]
-4_ _ _ [6], [8]
-4L_ _ _[6], [8]

Pilot Lights
(Transformer Type) [2]
LED Type
Lens color
designator
A, B, G, R, W
-4TL _[9]
-5_[4], [5]
-5_ _[4], [6], [7]
-5_ _ [7]
-5_ _ _ [6], [8]
-5T _ [9]
-5L_ _ [7]
-5L_ _ _[6], [8]
-5TL _[9]
ON-OFF
11
SC
12
FORWARD-REVERSE
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF
13
OVERLOAD
ON
Push-to-Test
ON-OFF
Standard Type
Lens color
FORWARD-REVERSE
designator
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF
A, B, C, G, R
OVERLOAD
-5L_ [4], [5]

-5L_ _[4], [6], [7]
10
Standard Type ON-OFF

Lens color
FORWARD-REVERSE
designator
A, B, C, G, R
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF
ON
-4L_ _ [7]
ON
OVERLOAD
OFF - ON
-4L_[4], [5]
FORWARD - OFF - REVERSE [3]
-4T _[9]
-4L_ _[4], [6], [7]
Delivery
Program
HAND - OFF - AUTO
-4_[4], [5]
-4_ _[4], [6], [7]
FVNR
2112, 2113
START - STOP
FORWARD - REVERSE - STOP
Push Buttons ,
Selector Switch [1], [2]
FVR
2106, 2107
14
15
ON
Push-to-Test
LED Type
Lens color
designator
A, B, G, R, W
ON-OFF
16
FORWARD-REVERSE
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF
17
OVERLOAD
[1] Push buttons may not be used in conjunction with selector switches, except with option 1F.
[2] Maximum of four (4) pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units. When more than four (4) pilot devices are required, the 0.5 space factor units must be increased to 1.0 space factor.
Maximum of six (6) pilot devices on 1.0 space factor and larger units.
[3] Mutually exclusive with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA_) and E3 solid-state overload relays (7FEC_ _).
[4] When option 1F is used with 11DSA_, one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required. When option 1F is selected with any ON pilot light, one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact,
option 90, is required.
[5] When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA_) or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _), one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required. When used
in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) and option 1F or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _) and option 1F, two (2) N.O. auxiliary contacts, option 900, are
required.
[6] Select one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact, option 91, for OFF pilot light when in 2106, 2107, 2112 or 2113.
[7] When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _), one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact, option 901, is
required. When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) and option 1F or E3 solid-state overload relay
(7FEC_ _) and option 1F, two (2) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contacts, option 9001, are required. When used in 2106 or 2107 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) or E3
electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _), one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required.
[8] When used in 2106 or 2107 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _), one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact, option 901, is
required.
[9] Not available with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _).
129
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Space Saving NEMA-Rated Starter Units
2
3
4
5
Option
Number
Option
12
13
Size 1
80VA[1]
80VA[1]
Size 2
80VA
Size 1
Size 2
130VA
130VA
80VA[1]
130VA
130VA
Standard capacity with primary fusing
E1 Plus Electronic Overload

-7FEE_ [5]
Relay [3], [4]
E3 Electronic Overload
Relay[4],[7],[6]
-7FEC1_[5]
For non-DeviceNet
applications a 24VDC
separate power source is
needed. A Bulletin 193-PCT,
may be needed for
programming and
-7FEC2_[5]
monitoring. Refer to
publication
193-UM001x-EN-P.
Selectable trip class (10, 15, 20, 30) selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset
electronic overload relay for NEMA starters, size 1-3.
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary

(DSA) [7], [8]
-11DSA3
11
FVNR
2112, 2113
Control Circuit Transformer -6P

(with grounded and fused
secondary)
-6XP [2]
-11DSA2
10
FVR
2106, 2107
Description
Extra capacity with primary fusing
Delivery
Program
Size 1
E3 Basic is provided with two (2) 24VDC inputs and
one (1) 110-240VAC output
Size 2
SC
Size 1
E3 Plus is provided with four (4) 24VDC inputs and

two (2) 110-240VAC output
Size 2
For use with starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. Four (4)
120VAC inputs and two (2) 120V outputs. Not to be used with E3
solid-state overload relay (7FEC_ _)
For use with starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. Four (4)
24VDC inputs and two (2) 240VAC max outputs. Not to be used with E3
solid-state overload relay (7FEC_ _)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
For 0.5 space factor or 1.0 space factor with option -15; 2106, 2107, 2112 and 2113, the standard capacity VA rating is 75VA.
Extra capacity control circuit transformer, option 6XP, requires 0.5 space factor units to be increased to 1.0 space factor.
E1 Plus electronic overload relay is supplied with one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact.
Overload relay option 7FEE_ and 7FEC_ _ are not mutually exclusive.
Option number is not complete. Select overload relay code from appropriate table below and add to option number (e.g., 7FEEB or 7FEC2B).
For E3 electronic overload relay, option 7FEC_ _, if 120VAC inputs are required, place Y at the end of the option code (e.g., 7FEC1BY or 7FEC2BY).
[6] 1.0 space factor required for Size 1 Bulletin 2106 and 2107 units.
1.0 space factor required for size 1 Bulletin 2112 and 2113 with pilot devices and external reset button for overload relay.
1.0 space factor required for Size 2 Bulletin 2113 units.
[7] Not available with push button or selector switches, except options 3 and 1F. Not available with unwired control relay, option 89CF_ and 89HA_.
[8] DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary, options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3, are mutually exclusive. 1.0 space factor required for size 1, Bulletin 2107 and size 2, Bulletin 2113.
Overload Relay Codes for E1 Plus, Option 7FEE_
14
For use with

NEMA-Rated Size
1
15
Full Load Current

Range (Amperes)
1.0 - 5.0
3.2 - 16
5.4 - 27
9 - 45
Overload Relay Code

(Add to Option Number
[e.g., 7FEEB])
C
D
E
F
E3 Overload Relay Configuration Option
16
Overload Relay Codes for E3 and E3 Plus, Option -7FEC_ _

For use with
NEMA-Rated Size
17
1
2
130
Full Load Current

Range (Amperes)
1-5
3 - 15
5 - 25
9 - 45
Overload Relay Code (Add

to Option Number [e.g.,
7FEC2B)
A
B
C
D
Description
120VAC input points
Overload Relay Code (Add

otpion to number [e.g. 7FEC2BY)
Y
Option
Number
Option
Additional Unit
Space
FVR
2106,
2107
Description
FVNR
2112,
2113
Delivery
Program
-15
Adds 0.5 space factor to the standard space factor of the unit after options have been
added to the unit.
-17
On starter coil, one per contactor
-17R
On control relay, one per control relay
Omission of control wiring, except primary and secondary transformer wiring

One (1) control circuit fuse for separate control
Surge Suppressor
Omit Wiring
-19
Control Circuit Fuse -21
Grounded Unit
-79GD
Door
Unit Load
Connector
Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door
-79UT
Unplated
Copper
Select on all plug-in units in section with vertical unit load ground bus
Tin Plated
Copper
Copper Alloy
Unplated
Copper unit grounds stabs may be used with steel vertical ground bus. Copper
Select on plug-in units in sections with vertical plug-in ground bus
Tin Plated
Copper
-85T
Six digit non-resettable meter with tenths, mounted in control station
-79L
-79LT
-
Unit Ground Stab
Elapsed Time
Meter[1]
-79U
-89CF40
-89CF31
-89CF22
-89CF40A [4]
-89CF22A [4]
-89CF40B [4]
-89CF22B [4]
Unwired Control
Relay [2],[3]
-89CF40C [4]
-89CF22C [4]
-89CF40D [4]
-89CF22D [4]
-89CF40L
On-delay
with (1)
NOTC and (1)
Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with time NCTO contact
attachment
Off-delay
0.3 - 30 seconds
with (1)
NOTO and (1)
NCTC contact
Instantaneous
On-delay
Contacts
with (1)
NOTC and (1)
Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with time NOTO
contact
attachment
1.8 - 180 seconds
Off-delay
with (1)
NCTO and (1)
NCTC contact
[4]
-89CF22L [4]
Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with mechanical latch

attachment
-89HA33 [4]
Bulletin 700HA 3PDT relay (Contacts rated 240VAC,

max.)
4 N.O.
3 N.O. / 1
N.C.
3 N.O. / 2
N.C.
7
8
9
10
2
4 N.O.
2 N.O. / 2
N.C.
4 N.O.
2 N.O. / 2
N.C.
4 N.O.
2 N.O. / 2
N.C.
4 N.O.
2 N.O. / 2
N.C.
4 N.O.
2 N.O. / 2
N.C.
3 N.O. / 3
N.C.
SC
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
[1] Elapsed Time Meter (85T) requires one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90. Mounts in position normally used for two (2) pilot devices, limiting the maximum number of pilot
devices allowed.
[2] Not available with E3 electronic overload relays (7FEC).
[3] Requires 0.5 space factor Size 1 Bulletin 2106 and 2107 and size 2 Bulletin 2113 units to be increased to 1.0 space factor.
[4] Requires Size 2 Bulletin 2107 unit to be 1.5 space factor when specified with control circuit transformer, option 6P or 6XP.
131
Option
Number
Option
3
4
Auxiliary Contacts
[1]
-90[2]
NORMALLY OPEN One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact on each contactor or starter
-91 [2]
NORMALLY CLOSED One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact on each contactor or starter
-98[3]
NORMALLY OPEN One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact

(operates with movement of external handle only)
NORMALLY OPEN, One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact
mounted internally in circuit breaker
NORMALLY CLOSED, One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact
(operates with movement of external handle only)
NORMALLY CLOSED, One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact
mounted internally in circuit breaker
Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of control wire. Not available in Canada
Heat shrink type wire marker
Legend plates engraved in French for all pilot devices
Acrylic plate (available in U.S.
only), white with black letters or
black with white letters
1.125 x 3.625 engraved 3-line or 4-line nameplate
Phenolic plate, white with black
letters, black with letters or red
with white letters
-98X[4]
-99[3]
-99X[4]
T-Handles
-111
-751D
Control Wire Markers -751HS
-751S
French Legend Plates -860F
Unit Door
Nameplate[5]
10
Stainless Steel
Nameplate Screws
Export Packing Below
Deck
11
Description
FVR
FVNR
Delivery
2106, 2107 2112, 2113 Program
SC
Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates (2 per unit)

Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing is not watertight or
waterproof. Considerations should be taken if extended storage is expected.
[1] Multiple auxiliary contacts must be group coded by adding the second and third digit of the special feature number to the base digit 9 (e.g., 90-91-98X-99, when group coded,
reads 9018X9)
[2] Auxiliary contacts are wired to terminal blocks. If the number of auxiliary contact wiring points exceeds the number of terminals available in the unit, remaining auxiliary contacts
will be unwired. See auxiliary contact options table below for allowable auxiliary contact configurations.
[3] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
Contacts are not designed to actuate as the result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected.
[4] Only available for Bulletin 2107 and 2113. The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C.
[5] Blank nameplates will be supplied when no engraving is selected or provided. Letter height for 3-line nameplates will be 0.22. Letter height for 4-line nameplates will be 0.18.
All text will be centered horizontally and vertically.
12
13
Auxiliary Contact Option

Auxiliary Contact Bulletin 2106 and 2112 Bulletin 2107and 2113
Catalog String
Size 1
Size 1 and 2
90
91
900
901
911
9000
9001
9011
9111
90000
90001
90011
90111
91111
14
15
16
17
132

2
Bulletin 2154G and 2155G

Soft Starter (SMC) Units - SMC Dialog PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
These combination soft starter units are specially designed for use in
CENTERLINE MCCs. Each unit contains a microprocessor-controlled motor
controller, control circuit transformer and either a fusible disconnect switch or a
circuit breaker.
Features include:
3
4
Four starting modes: soft start with kickstart, current limit, dual ramp and full voltage
Energy saver
Phase rebalance (converter module required for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket
units)
Electronic motor overload protection
Metering
Built-in communicationSCANport
2-line, 16 character backlit LCD display
Options
Soft stop
Pump control
Preset slow speed
SMB smart motor braking
Accu-Stop
Slow speed with braking
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B unit, with terminals mounted
within the controller unit for connection of remote pilot devices, input signals, etc.
Bulletins 2154G and 2155G are available in NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 1 with
gasket and NEMA Type 12 construction. NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket
units include fan(s) and a vented door. NEMA Type 12 units are provided with a
non-vented door, bypass contactor (application rated) and converter module.
NEMA Type 12 smart motor controller units can be used with NEMA Type 1 and
NEMA Type 1 with gasket motor control centers when the application requires a
bypass contactor that energizes when the smart motor controller reaches up to
speed and de-energizes when the stop function of the smart motor controller is
activated. Each unit door includes a window for viewing the display, except when a
door mounted HIM is specified. The energy saving and phase rebalance features
of the SMC Dialog Plus are inactive when the bypass contactor is energized.
However, the power monitoring functions remain active. When energy save and
phase rebalance are both enabled, phase rebalance takes precedence in operation.
Fuse clips are provided for branch circuit protection for Bulletin 2154G units.
Instantaneous or a variety of inverse time (thermal magnetic) circuit breakers
provide branch circuit protection on Bulletin 2155G units. SCR fusing can be
added on all Bulletin 2154G and 2155G units. When SCR fusing is specified on
Bulletin 2154G units, the SCR fuses are an additional set of fuses, except for 360A
and 500A units, where SCR fuses provide both the short circuit protection and the
SCR protection.
Bulletin 2154G units, 360A and 500A, are supplied with a bolted pressure switch
for the disconnecting means. Bulletin 2154G and 2155G units, 360A and 500A,
are supplied with interposing relays for the bypass contactor and the isolation
contactor (when supplied). Bulletin 2154G and 2155G units, 97A through 500A,
are frame mounted in vertical sections with a horizontal bus that is 5 deeper than
standard. These units require 20 deep vertical sections.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
133

Bulletin 2154H and 2155H
Soft Starter (SMC) Units - SMC-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
These combination soft starter units are designed especially for use in
CENTERLINE motor control centers. Each unit contains a
microprocessor-controlled motor controller, control circuit transformer and either
a fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
Features include:
2
3
4
5
Three starting modes: soft start, kick start and current limit
Electronic overload protection with selectable overload trip class
Motor and system diagnostics
Configurable auxiliary contacts
Soft stop
Integrated bypass contactor
Seven standard modes of operation: soft start, current limit start, dual ramp, full
voltage, linear speed acceleration, preset slow speed and soft stop
Optional modes of operation: pump control, Smart Motor Braking , Accu-Stop
and slow speed with braking
Integral SCR bypass
Electronic overload protection with selectable trip class
Full metering and diagnostics
Four programmable auxiliary contacts
DPI communication
LCD display
Keyboard programming
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminal blocks
mounted within the controller unit for connection of remote pilot devices, input
signals, etc. Bulletins 2154H and 2155H are available in NEMA Type 1, NEMA
Type 1 with gasket and NEMA Type 12 plug-in construction. Class J time delay
fuses provide branch circuit protection on Bulletin 2154H units. Instantaneous or
a variety of inverse time (thermal magnetic) circuit breakers provide branch circuit
protection on 2155H units. A variety of options such as isolation contactors,
auxiliary contacts, pilot devices, protective modules, DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary
(DSA), etc., can be added to Bulletin 2154H and 2155H units. Extra space may be
required to accommodate the optional equipment.
Bulletin 2154J and 2155J
Soft Starter (SMC) Units - SMC-Flex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
These combination soft starter units are designed especially for use in
CENTERLINE motor control centers. Each unit contains a
microprocessor-controlled motor controller, control circuit transformer and either
a fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
Features include:
9
10
11
12
13
14
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminal blocks
mounted within the controller unit for connection of remote pilot devices, input
signals, etc. Bulletins 2154J and 2155J are available in NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type
1 with gasket and NEMA Type 12 construction. Each unit door includes a
window for viewing the LCD display, except when door mounted human interface
is provided. Class J time delay fuses provide branch circuit protection on 5A-361A
Bulletin 2154J units. Class L time delay fuses provide branch circuit protection on
480A Bulletin 2154J units. Instantaneous or varieties of inverse time (thermal
magnetic) circuit breakers provide branch circuit protection on 2155J units. A
variety of options such as isolation contactors, auxiliary contacts, pilot devices,
protective modules, human interface modules, DeviceNet communication etc. can
be added to Bulletin 2154J and 2155J units. In some cases, extra space may be
required to accommodate the optional equipment.
15
16
17
134
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2154G and 2155G
Combination Soft Starter (SMC Dialog Plus) Unit

Bulletin 2154G and 2155G with Bulletin 150 soft starter SMC Dialog PLUS
24A - 500A ratings
NEMA Class I, Type B wiring with terminals mounted within the unit
3
4
5
6
2154G
2155G
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
B
Code
2154G
2155G
B
B
K
K
B
B
Current Rating
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Wiring Type
Type B
Type
SMC Dialog Plus Soft
Starter (SMC) with
Fusible Disconnect
SMC Dialog Plus Soft
Starter (SMC) with
Circuit Breaker
Code
B
D
F
H
K
M
P
R
T
Current
Rating
24A
35A
54A
97A
135A
180A
240A
360A
500A
NEMA Enclosure
Code Type
A
with gasket with
K
with gasket without
NEMA Type 12 with
D
J
38-24J
38CA
Horsepower/kW Code
and Disconnecting Means
6P
6P
Control Transformer
and Options
8
9
Horsepower/kW Code and

Disconnecting Means
38 Horsepower/kW code
2154G- 38-24J 24J Fuse, Clip Rating and Class
See tables on Page 218 and 219
38__ Horsepower/kW code
2155G- 38_
__CA Circuit Breaker Type
See tables on page 218 and 224
Code
Code
P
A
N
KN
I
B
C
Control
Voltage Type
220 - 230V [1]
240V
380V [1]
400V [1]
415V [1]
480V
600V
10
11
12
Control Transformer
Code and Options
See Options section beginning
on Page 145.
13
14
15
[1] Units at these voltages

are not UL listed, cUL
listed or CSA certified.
16
17
135

2
3
4
Units2154G
Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible Disconnect Switch (SMC Dialog Plus)

SCR fuses and isolation contactor are not included. Select on page 149. The addition of these options may require additional space.
See page 150 for space factors of units with options.
Control circuit transformer must be selected. Select on page 146.
Bulletin 150 SMC Dialog Plus controllers are UL listed and CSA certified as motor overload protective devices. An external
overload relay is not required for single motor applications.
See page 249 for short circuit withstand ratings.
Nominal Horsepower (Nominal kW)
The horsepower and kW ratings shown are nominal.
Rating The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC Dialog
Plus is the output ampere rating.
(Amps)
220-230V
240V
480V
380V-415V [2]
600V [3]
[2]
24
35
(0.75-5.5)
(7.5)
1-7.5
10
(0.75-11)
(15)
1-15
20-25
1-20
25-30
9
10
54
11
97
135
(11-15)
(18.5-22)
(30-37)
15-20
25-30
40-50
(18.5-22)
(30-45)
(55)
30-40
50-75
100
40-50
60-75
100-125
12
180
(45)
60
(75-90)
125-150
150
13
240
(55-75)
75
(110)
200
200-250
14
360 [9]
(90-110)
100-150
(132-185)
250-300
300-350
15
500 [9]
16
17
(132-150)
200
(200-250)
350-400
400-500
Fuse Clip
Rating
(Amps)
30
60
30
60
60
60
100
60
100
200
60
100
200
100
200
400
100
200
400
200
400
600
400
J
R, HRCII-C
J
R, HRCII-C
J, R, HRCII-C
J, HRCII-C
J
J, R, HRCII-C
NEMA Type 12 [4]
2154GB-BK_-_
2154GB-BJ_-_
2154GB-DK_-_
2154GB-DJ_-_
2.0 [5]
2.5
SC
3.0
2154GB-FK_-_
2154GB-FJ_-_
2154GB-HK_-_
2154GB-HJ_-_
2154GB-KK_-_
2154GB-KJ_-_
6.0 [7], 20
W
2154GB-MK_-_
20 D [8]
2154GB-MJ_-_
6.0 [7], 25
2154GB-PK_-_
W
20 D
2154GB-PJ_-_
6.0 [7], 30
2154GB-RK_-_
W
20 D
2154GB-RJ_-_
6.0 [7], 35
2154GB-TK_-_
W
20 D
2154GB-TJ_-_
3.0
[6]
J, R, HRCII-C
J
Delivery
Program
2.0
R
R, HRCII-C
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
Class
6.0 [7], 20
W
20 D [8]
J
J, R, HRCII-C
J
J, R, HRCII-C
600
400
600
800
600
Space
Factor
J
J, R, HRCII-C
L
J, R, HRCII-C
800
SC-II

Select the control voltage code from table on page 217 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g., 2154GB-BKB).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2154GB-BKB-35).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (e.g., 2154GB-BKN-35K).
If power fuse will not be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 219 (e.g., 2154GB-BKB-35-24J).
If power fuse will be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 224 (e.g., 2154GB-BKB-35__ -20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 221 (e.g.,
2154GB-BKB-35GT-20J).
[2] Units at these voltages are not UL listed or CSA certified.
[3] Delivery programs are as follows: PE in U.S. and SC in Canada for 24A-54A, PE-II in U.S. and SC-II in Canada for 97A-360A and PE-II in U.S. and Canada for 500A.
[4] On NEMA Type 12 units, the energy savings and phase rebalance features will be inactive when the bypass contactor is energized. NEMA Type 12 SMC units can be used with
NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with gasket motor control centers when the application requires a bypass contactor that energizes when the SMC reaches up to speed and
de-energizes when the stop function of the SMC is activated.
[5] NEMA Type 12 units are 2.5 space factors.
[6] NEMA Type 12 units are 3.5 space factors.
[7] Frame mounted section without vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5 deeper than standard. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For top entry
of load cables consult factory.
[8] In NEMA Type 12 units, sections are 25 wide, 20 deep.
[9] When option 13SCR (add SCR fuses) is selected, the SCR fusing provides both short circuit protection and SCR protection. Optional power fuses are not valid when 13SCR or any
other fuse clip is present.
136
Units2155G
Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit Breaker (SMC Dialog PLUS)

SCR fuses and isolation contactor are not included. Select on page 149. The addition of these options may require additional space.
See page 150 for space factors of units with options.
Control circuit transformer must be selected. Select on page 146.
Bulletin 150 SMC Dialog Plus controllers are UL listed and CSA certified as motor overload protective devices. An external
overload relay is not required for single motor applications.
2
3
4
5

Rating
(Amps)
24
35
54
97
135
180
240

The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC Dialog Plus is the
output ampere rating.
220-230V [2]
240V
380V-415V [2]
480V
600V [3]
(0.75-5.5)
(7.5)
(11-15)
(18.5-22)
(30-37)
(45)
1-7.5
10
15-20
25-30
40-50
60
(0.75-11)
(15)
(18.5-22)
(30-45)
(55)
(75-90)
1-15
20-25
30-40
50-75
100
125-150
1-20
25-30
40-50
60-75
100-125
150
(55-75)
75
(110)
200
200-250
360
(90-110)
100-150
(132-185)
250-300
300-350
500
(132-150)
200
(200-250)
350-400
400-500
Space Factor
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 1 and

Type 1 w/ gasket
2.0
2155GB-BK_-__
2155GB-DK_-__
2.0 [5]
2155GB-FK_-__
3.0
2155GB-HK_-__
6.0 [6]
2155GB-KK_-__
20 W, 20 D
2155GB-MK_-__
6.0 [6]
NEMA Type 12 [4]

2155GB-BJ_-__
2155GB-DJ_-__
2155GB-FJ_-__
2155GB-HJ_-__
2155GB-KJ_-__
2155GB-MJ_-__
2155GB-PK_-__
2155GB-PJ_-__
2155GB-RK_-__
2155GB-RJ_-__
6.0 [6]
2155GB-TK_-__
35 W, 20 D
2155GB-TJ_-__
25 W, 20 D
6.0 [6]
30 W, 20 D
Delivery
Program
6
7
SC
8
9
SC-II
10
11

Select the control voltage code from table on page 217 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g., 2155GB-BKB).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired, (e.g., 2155GB-BKB-35).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired, (e.g., 2155GB-BKN-35K).
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2155GB-BKB-35CA or 2155GB-BKN-35KCA).
[3] Delivery programs are as follows: PE in U.S. and SC in Canada for 24A-54A, PE-II in U.S. and SC-II in Canada for 97A-360A and PE-II in U.S. and Canada for 500A.
[4] On NEMA Type 12 units, the energy savings and phase rebalance features will be inactive when the bypass contactor is energized. NEMA Type 12 SMC units can be used with
NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with gasket motor control centers when the application requires a bypass contactor that energizes when the SMC reaches up to speed and
de-energizes when the stop function of the SMC is activated.
[5] NEMA Type 12 unit is 2.5 space factor.
12
13
14
15
16
17
137

2
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2154H and 2155H

Combination Soft Starter (SMC-3) Unit
3
4
5
Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Solid State Controller

Three starting modes: soft start, kick start and current limit
3A - 85A rating
Built-in bypass contactor and overload relay
2154H
2155H
B
B
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
2154H
10
2155H
Type
SMC-3 Soft Starter
(SMC) with Fusible
Disconnect
SMC-3 Soft Starter
(SMC) with Circuit
Breaker
11
Code
B
12
13
Wiring Type
Type B
Code
A
B
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
A
A
A
B
B
Current Rating
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Control Voltage
Type
Current
Rating
3A
9A
19A
25A
30A
37A
43A
60A
85A
Code
P
A
N
KN
I
B
C
38
38CA
Horsepower/kW Code
Control
Voltage Type
220 - 230V [1]
240V
380V [1]
400V [1]
415V [1]
480V
600V
**
**
Options
Code Options
See Options section

A
with gasket with
K
with gasket without
NEMA Type 12 with
are not UL or cUL listed.
D
J
Code
Disconnecting Means
2154H- 38
See tables on Page 218
2155H- 38CA
14
15
16
17
138

Units2154H
Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible Disconnect Switch (SMC-3)

Isolation contactor is not included. Select on page 149. This addition or other options may require additional space, see table below.
Control circuit transformer included.
Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controller includes (1) N.O. auxiliary contact set to NORMAL. The Bulletin 150-CF64 fan also is included for
3-37A ratings. Integrated fan is standard for 43-85A ratings.
Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controllers are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload relay is
not required for single motor applications.
Rating
(Amps)

The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC-3 is the
Disc.
Rating
Catalog Number [1]

Space
Factor
Delivery
Program
220-230V [2]
240V
380V-415V [2]
480V
600V [3]
(0.25-0.55)
0.5
(0.37-1.1)
0.5-1.5
0.75-2
30
0.5 [4]
NEMA Type 1 and

NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
2154HB-AA_-_
2154HB-AD_-_
(0.75-2.2)
0.75-2
(1.5-3.7)
2-5
3-7.5
30
0.5 [4]
2154HB-BA_-_
2154HB-BD_-_
19
25
30
37
43
60
(3.7)
(5.5)
(7.5)
(11)
(15)
(18.5-22)
3-5
7.5
10
15
20
25-30
(5.5-7.5)
(11)
(15)
(18.5)
(22)
(30)
(37)
(45)
7.5-10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
10-15
20
25
30
40
50
60-75
30
30
60
60
60
100
100
200
0.5 [4]
1.0
1.0
1.0
2154HB-DA_-_
2154HB-EA_-_
2154HB-FA_-_
2154HB-GA_-_
2154HB-HA_-_
2154HB-JA_-_
2154HB-DD_-_
2154HB-ED_-_
2154HB-FD_-_
2154HB-GD_-_
2154HB-HD_-_
2154HB-JD_-_
2154HB-KA_-_
2154HB-KD_-_
85
1.5 [5]
1.5 [6]
4
5
6
8
SC
9
10
Bulletin 2154H Space Factors with Unit Options
11
12
13
NEMA Type 1 and 1 with Gasket

With Option -13IC
With Option -89C With Option -13IC and -13DSA_ With Option -13IC and -89C
Standard Unit
With Option -13DSA_
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5[1]
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5 [2]
1.5[2]
1.5[2]
1.5

Select the control voltage code from table on page 217 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g., 2154HB-AAB).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2154HB-AAB-35).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (e.g., 2154HB-AAN-35K).
The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the SMC-3. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter A with the letter
K (e.g., 2154HB-AK __-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2154HB-AJ__-__).
[2] Units at these voltages are not UL or cUL listed.
[3] Delivery program is PE in U.S. and SC in Canada.
[4] These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused molded case switch, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one 10 pt. pull-apart control terminal block
(Type B-D only), with #16 AWG control wire only.
[5] 2.0 space factor for NEMA Type 12 applications.
[6] 2.5 space factor for NEMA Type 12 applications.
Ratings
(Amps)
3
9
19
25
30
37
43
60
85
14
1.5
1.5
15
2.0
2.0
16
[1] 1.0 space factor when -89CF_A, -89CF_B, -89CF_C, -89CF_D or -89CF_L specified.
[2] 2.0 space factor for 45kw at 380V-415V, 60HP at 480V and 60-75HP at 600V applications.
Ratings
(Amps)
3
9
19
25
30
37
43
60
85
Standard
Unit
With Option
-13DSA_
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
17
NEMA Type 12
With Option With Option
With Option
With Option
-13IC
-89C
-13IC and -13DSA_ -13IC and -89C
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.5
139

2
3
4
5
Units2155H
Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit Breaker (SMC-3)

Isolation contactor is not included. Select on page 149. This addition or other options may require additional space.
Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controller includes (1) N.O. auxiliary contact set to NORMAL. The Bulletin 150-CF64 fan also is included for
3-37A ratings. Integrated fan is standard for 43-85A ratings.
Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controllers are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload relay is
not required for single motor applications.
Rating
(Amperes)
3
9
19
25
30
37
43
60
9
10
85
11
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
12
13

The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC-3 is the output
ampere rating.
220 - 230V [1]
240V
380V-415V [1]
480V
600V [2]
(0.25-0.55)
(0.75-2.2)
(3.7)
(5.5)
(7.5)
(11)
(15)
(18.5-22)
0.5
0.75-2
3-5
7.5
10
15
20
25-30
(0.37-1.1)
(1.5-3.7)
(5.5-7.5)
(11)
(15)
(18.5)
(22)
(30)
(37)
(45)
0.5-1.5
2-5
7.5-10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
0.75-2
3-7.5
10-15
20
25
30
40
50
60-75
Catalog Number [4]

Wiring Type B - Class I
Space
Factor
1.0
1.5 [3]
NEMA Type 1 and

Type 1 with gasket
2155HB-AA_-__
2155HB-BA_-__
2155HB-DA_-__
2155HB-EA_-__
2155HB-FA_-__
2155HB-GA_-__
2155HB-HA_-__
2155HB-JA_-__
2155HB-AD_-__
2155HB-BD_-__
2155HB-DD_-__
2155HB-ED_-__
2155HB-FD_-__
2155HB-GD_-__
2155HB-HD_-__
2155HB-JD_-__
2155HB-KA_-__
2155HB-KD_-__
Delivery
Program
NEMA Type 12
SC
Units at these voltages are not UL listed or CSA certified.

Delivery program is PE in the United States and SC in Canada.
For NEMA Type 12 applications 43A is 2.0 space factor, 60A is 2.5 space factor and 85A is 3.0 space factor.
The catalog numbers listed are not complete:
Select the control voltage code from the table on page 217 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g. 2155HB-AAB)
If horsepower rated, select the number from the table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g. 2155HB-AAB-35)
If kW rated, select the number from the table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (e.g. 2155HB-AAN-35K)
Select the appropriate suffix from the table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g. 2155HB-AAB-35CA or 2155HB-AAN-35KCA)
The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the SMC-3. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter A with the letter
K (e.g. 2100HB-AK__-__) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g. 2155HB-AJ__-__).
Bulletin 2155H Space Factors with Unit Options
14
15
16
17
Ratings
With
(Amps) Standard Option With Option
Unit
-13HIC
-13DSA_
3
9
19
1.0
1.0
25
1.5
30
37
43
60
1.5
1.5
85
1.5 [1]
With
Option
-13IC
With
Option
-89C
1.0
1.0
NEMA Type 1 and 1 with Gasket

With Option With Option With Option With Option With Option With Option
With Option
-13IC and -13IC and -13HIC and -13HIC and -13HIC and 13HIC and 13IC 13HIC and 13IC
-13DSA_
-89C_
-13DSA_
-13IC
-89C_
and 13DSA_
and 89C__
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
[1]
1.5
1.5
[1]
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5 [1]
1.5 [1]
2.0
1.5 [1]
[1] 2.0 space factor for 45 kw at 380V-415V, 60HP at 480V and 60-75HP at 600V applications.
Ratings
(Amps) Standard
Unit
3
9
19
25
30
37
43
60
85
With
Option With Option With Option
-13HIC
-13IC
-13DSA_
With
Option
-89C
NEMA Type 12
With Option With Option With Option With Option With Option With Option
With Option
-13IC and
-13IC and -13HIC and -13HIC and -13HIC and 13HIC and 13IC 13HIC and 13IC
-13DSA_
-89C_
-13DSA_
-13IC
-89C_
and 13DSA_
and 89C__
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0[1]
2.0
2.5
3.0[1]
2.5
3.0
3.5[1]
2.0
2.5
3.5[1]
2.0
2.5
3.0[1]
2.0
2.5
3.5[1]
2.0
2.5
3.5[1]
2.5
3.0
3.5[1]
2.5
3.0
4.0[1]
2.5
3.0
3.5[1]
2.5
3.0
4.0[1]
2.5
3.0
4.0[1]
[1] Reduce by 0.5 space factor for 45kW at 380V-415V, 60HP at 480V and 60-75HP at 600V applications when used with circuit breaker type CT or CM.
140
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2154J and 2155J
Combination Soft Starter (SMC-Flex) Unit

Seven standard modes of operation: soft stop, current limit, dual ramp, full-voltage, linear speed
acceleration, preset slow speed and soft stop
Optional modes of operation: pump control, Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and slow speed with
braking
5 - 480A rating
Built-in bypass contactor and overload relay
NEMA Class I, Type B wiring with terminals mounted in unit
4
5
6
7
2154J
2155J
Bulletin Number
Code
2154J
2155J
B
B
Wiring Type
Type
SMC-Flex Soft
Starter (SMC) with
Fusible Disconnect
SMC-Flex Soft
Starter (SMC) with
Circuit Breaker
Code
B
Wiring Type
Type B
F108
F108
L
L
Current Rating
Code
F005
F025
F043
F060
F085
F108
F135
F201
F251
F317
F361
F480
Current
Rating
5A
25A
43A
60A
85A
108A
135A
201A
251A
317A
361A
480A
K
K
B
B
NEMA Type
Control Voltage
Type
Line
Connected
Code
P
A
N
KN
I
B
C
49
49CA
Horsepower/kW Code
Control
Voltage Type
220 - 230V [1]
240V
380V [1]
400V [1]
415V [1]
480V
600V
**
**
Options
9
10
Code Options
See Options section
11
12

are not UL or cUL listed.

K
with gasket without
J
Code
2154J-49
2155J- 49CA
13

Disconnecting Means
See table on Page 218
14
15
16
17
141

2
Units2154J
Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible Disconnect Switch (SMC-Flex) - Line Connected

SMC-Flex units are configured as line connected, for Delta connected contact factory.
Isolation contactor is not included. Select on page 149. The addition of this option may require additional space. See page 142 for
space factor of units with option.
Bulletin 150 SMC-Flex controllers are C-UL US (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload
relay is not required for single motor applications.

Rating The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC-Flex Disc.
is the output ampere rating.
(Amps)
Rating
5
25
43
60
85
108
135
201
251
317
361
480
10
11
12
13
220-230V [2]
240V
380V-415V [2]
480V
600V [3]
(0.25-1.1)
(1.5-5.5)
(7.5-11)
(15)
(18.5-22)
(30)
(37)
(45-55)
(75)
(90)
(110)
(132)
0.5-1
1.5-7.5
10-15
20
25-30
40
50
60-75
100
125
150
200
(0.37-2.2
(3.7-11)
(15-22)
(30)
(37)
(45)
(55)
(75-90)
(110-132)
(150-160)
(185)
(200-250)
0.5-3
5-15
20-30
40
50
60
75
100
125-150
200
250
300
350-400
0.75-3
5-20
25-40
50
60-75
100
125
150-200
250
300
350
400-500
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [1]

Wiring Type B
Class I
Space
Factor
NEMA Type 1 and

Type 1 w/ gasket
30
30
60
100
100
200
200
200
400
400
400
600
600
2154JB-F005LK_-__
2154JB-F025LK_-__
2154JB-F043LK_-__
2154JB-F060LK_-__
2.0
2.5
2154JB-F085LK_-__
2154JB-F108LK_-__
2154JB-F135LK_-__
2154JB-F201LK_-__
[5]
6.0 , 20 W
2154JB-F251LK_-__
2154JB-F317LK_-__
6.0[6],
2154JB-F361LK_-__
20 W, 20 D
2154JB-F480LK_-__
4.0[4], 20 W
Catalog Number [1]

Wiring Type B
Delivery
Class I
Program
NEMA Type 12
3.0
3.5
2154JB-F005LJ_-__
2154JB-F025LJ_-__
2154JB-F043LJ_-__
2154JB-F060LJ_-__
SC
2154JB-F085LJ_-__
2154JB-F108LJ_-__
2154JB-F135LJ_-__
2154JB-F201LJ_-__
[5]
6.0 , 20 W
2154JB-F251LJ_-__
2154JB-F317LJ_-__
6.0[6],
2154JB-F361LJ_-__
20 W, 20 D
2154JB-F480LJ_-__
4.0[4], 20 W
SC-II

Select the control voltage code from table on page 217 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g., 2154JB-F108LKB).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired, (e.g., 2154JB-F108KBB-48).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired, (e.g., 2154JB-F108LKN-48K).
[3] Delivery program is PE-II in the United States and SC-II in Canada.
[4] Frame mounted unit without vertical wireway. Must be mounted in bottom of section. Cannot be used in section with 9 vertical wireway.
[5] Frame mounted section without vertical wireway. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For top entry of load cables, consult the factory.
of load cables, consult the factory.
Bulletin 2154J Space Factors with Unit Options
14
15
16
17
Space Factor for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket Units

Rating
(Amperes) Standard Unit With Option With Option 13IC With Options 13GF
13GF
and 13IC
5
25
2.0
43
60
2.5
85
108
4.0, 20 W
135
4.0, 20 W
201
6.0, 20 W
251
6.0, 20 W
317
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
361
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
480
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 30 W, 20 D
[1] Requires 3.5 space factor for 45kW @ 380-415V, 60HP @ 480V and 60-75HP @ 600V.
142
Standard Unit
Space Factor for NEMA Type 12 Units

With Option With Option 13IC With Options 13GF
13GF
and 13IC
3.0
3.0 / 3.5 [1]

4.0, 20 W
4.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
6.0, 30 W, 20 D
Units2155J
Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit Breaker (SMC-Flex) - Line Connected

SMC-Flex units are configured as line connected, for Delta connected contact factory.
Isolation contactor is not included. Select on page 149. The addition of this option may require additional space. See page 143 for
space factor of units with option.
Bulletin 150 SMC-Flex controllers are C-UL US (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload
relay is not required for single motor applications.

Catalog Number [1]
The
limiting
factor
in
the
application
and
use
of
the
SMC-Flex
is
Wiring
Type BClass I
Rating
Space Factor
the output ampere rating.
(Amps)
480V
220-230V [2] 240V 380V-415V [2]
600V [3]
1 w/ gasket
5
25
43
60
85
108
135
201
251
317
361
480
(0.25-1.1)
(1.5-5.5)
(7.5-11)
(15)
(18.5-22)
(30)
(37)
(45-55)
(75)
(90)
(110)
(132)
0.5-1
1.5-7.5
10-15
20
25-30
40
50
60-75
100
125
150
200
(0.37-2.2)
(3.7-11)
(15-22)
(30)
(37)
(45)
(55)
(75-90)
(110-132)
(150-160)
(185)
(200-250)
0.5-3
5-15
20-30
40
50-60
75
100
125-150
200
250
300
350-400
0.75-3
5-20
25-40
50
60-75
100
125
150-200
250
300
350
400-500
2155JB-F005LK_-__
2155JB-F025LK_-__
2155JB-F043LK_-__
2155JB-F060LK_-__
2.0
Space
Factor
4
5
6
SC
2155JB-F085LJ_-__
2155JB-F108LJ_-__
2155JB-F135LJ_-__
2155JB-F201LJ_-__
6.0[5], 20 W
2155JB-F251LJ_-__
2155JB-F317LJ_-__
6.0 [6]
2155JB-F361LJ_-__
20 W, 20 D
2155JB-F480LJ_-__
4.0[4], 20 W
2155JB-F005LJ_-__
2155JB-F025LJ_-__
2155JB-F043LJ_-__
2155JB-F060LJ_-__
3.5
2155JB-F108LK_-__
2155JB-F135LK_-__
2155JB-F201LK_-__
6.0[5], 20 W
2155JB-F251LK_-__
2155JB-F317LK_-__
6.0 [6]
2155JB-F361LK_-__
20 W, 20 D
2155JB-F480LK_-__
Delivery
Program
NEMA Type 12
3.0
2155JB-F085LK_-__
2.5
Catalog Number [1]

Wiring Type B
Class I
4.0[4], 20 W
10
SC-II
11

Select the control voltage code from table on page 217 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g., 2155JB-F108LKB).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired, (e.g., 2155JB-F108KBB-48).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired, (e.g., 2155JB-F108LKN-48K).
Select the appropriate suffix from the table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g. 2155JB-F108LKB-45CA or 2155JB-F108LKB-48KCA).
[3] Delivery program is PE-II in the United States and SC-II in Canada.
[4] Frame mounted unit without vertical wireway. Must be mounted in bottom of section. Cannot be used in section with 9 vertical wireway.
[5] Frame mounted section without vertical wireway. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of lead cables. For top entry of load cables consult factory.
[6] Frame mounted section without vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5 deeper then standard. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For top entry
12
13
Bulletin 2155J Space Factors with Unit Options

With
With
With
With
Options
Options
Option
Options 13IC
13GF and
13GF and
13HIC
and 13HIC
13IC
13HIC
Rating
With
With
(Amperes) Standard Option Option
Unit
13GF
13IC
5
25
43
60
2.0
108
135
201
251
317
361
480
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.5 [2]
3.0
3.0[2]
4.0, 20 W
4.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
15
3.5
4.0, 20 W
4.0, 20 W
16
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W
17
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
6.0, 30 W, 20 D
With
Options
13GF, 13IC
and 13HIC
3.5 [2]
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
14
With
Options
13IC and
13HIC
3.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.0 [1]
2.0
85

With
With
With
With
With
With
Options Standard
Options
Options
Option Option
Option
13GF, 13IC
13GF and
13GF and
Unit
13GF
13IC
13HIC
and 13HIC
13IC
13HIC
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
6.0, 30 W, 20 D
[1] The following combination of option requires 2.5 space factors: Options 89_ and 4T_ or 4TL_ or 5TL and 9_ (without Option 13IC).
[2] Space factor for 45kW applications @380V-415V with circuit breaker designator CT or CM.
143

2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
144

Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units
[2],[3]
START-STOP
STOP
START-STOP and SOFT STOP
-1XB
START-STOP and PUMP STOP
-1XC
START-STOP and SLOW SPEED
-1XD
START-STOP and BRAKE
-1XE
START-STOP and ACCU-STOP

START-STOP, SLOW SPEED and
BRAKE
Blank
1 holefor one Bulletin 800T/800F pilot device
2 holefor two Bulletin 800T/800F pilot devices
3 holefor three Bulletin 800T/800F pilot devices
4 holefor four Bulletin 800T/800F pilot devices
HAND-OFF-AUTO
OFF-ON
-2
-2A
Control Station Housing
-2B
[9]
-2C
Selector Switch
Selector Switch [2], [12]
-2D [10]
-3
-3E [3]
-3XA
-3XB
-3XD
SMC-Flex
Delivery
Program
2155J
2154J
2155H
2154H
2155G
SMC-3 [1]
[4]
-1
-1B
-1XA
-1XF
[2],[11],
Description
2154G
Option
Number
Option
Push Buttons
SMC Dialog Plus
SC
24A-500A ratings only.
Note: When any of the
SMC Dialog Plus options
(13XA-13XF) is selected,
the only push buttons
that can be specified are
the corresponding
1XA-1XF options.
[5]
[5]
[6]
[6]
[5]
[5]
[7]
[7]
[7]
[7]
[7] [8]
[7] [8]
4
5
6
PE
SC
9
10
HAND-OFF-AUTO for Soft Stop [13]

HAND-OFF-AUTO for Pump Control
HAND-OFF-AUTO for Smart Motor Braking [14]
[1] Pilot devices for 0.5 space factor units are Bulletin 800F. A minimum of 1.0 space factor is required for SMC-3 units when more than four pilot devices are required.
[2] Maximum one (1) switch per unit. Push buttons may not be used in conjunction with selector switches. When three (3) or less pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices
are supplied, except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. Generally, when more than three (3) pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. For 0.5
space factor units, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. Maximum four (4) pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units.
[3] Mutually exclusive with 13GK5, 13GK61, 13GU6, 13GD, 13GR and 13DSA_.
[4] Two (2) Bulletin 800F pilot lights will be supplied when two (2) pilot lights are selected in conjunction with two (2) push buttons.
[5] Can only be used with standard starting mode for SMC-Flex.
[6] Can only be used with Pump Control option 13XB for SMC-Flex.
[7] Can only be used with Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and Slow Speed with Braking option 13XD for SMC-Flex.
[8] Option 1XF cannot be used with ON/OFF and fault pilot lights for SMC-Flex.
[9] Available only on units without pilot devices. Holes are for Bulletin 800T pilot devices when unit is 1.0 space factor and larger. Holes are for Bulletin 800F pilot devices when unit
is 0.5 space factor.
[10] Not available for 1.0 space factor and larger units.
[11] Selector switches 3 and 3E are not available when any of the SMC Dialog Plus options 13XA through 13XF is selected.
[12] These selector switches can only be used with corresponding control options (e.g. -3XA used only with standard starting mode, -3XB used only for 13XB and 3XD only used for
13XD).
[13] Selector switch option 3XA functions when SMC-Flex is operating in Soft Stop mode. Consult factory if SMC-Flex will be operating in Preset Slow Speed mode.
[14] Selector switch option 3XD functions when SMC-Flex is operating in Smart Motor Braking mode. Consult factory if SMC-Flex will be operating in Accu-Stop or Slow Speed Braking
mode.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
145
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units
-4_
-4_ _
-4T_
Standard type
-4L_ _
Pilot Lights (Transformer -4TL_
Type) [2],[3]
-5_
-5_ _
-5T_
-5L
9
10
11
12
-5L_ _
-5TL_
Push-To-Test LED
Type
[4]
[5]
[5]
ON-OFF [2]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
ON [4]
[5]
[5]
ON-OFF [2]
[5]
[5]
[6]
[6]
[6]
[6]
ON [4]
ON-OFF [2]
FAULT
[6]
[6]
FAULT
SC
[6]
[6]
For Bulletins 2154G Only
Control Circuit
Transformer Type
Option
Transformer Ratings (VA) for SMC Dialog Plus Ratings (Amperes)

Description
With grounded and

fused secondary
14
-6P
Standard capacity with primary fusing
15
17
2155J
[5]
[5]
[1] Pilot devices for 0.5 space factor units are Bulletin 800F. A minimum of 1.0 space factor is required for SMC-3 units when more than four pilot devices are required.
[2] Select one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (option 91). Select one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (options 90 and 91) for NEMA Type 12 SMC Dialog Plus units when isolation
contactor (option 13IC) is selected. Select (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (option 91) for SMC-3 units. Select (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (options 90 and 91) for SMC-3 units
with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_).
[3] When three (3) or less pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied, except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. Generally, when more than three
(3) pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. For 0.5 space factor units, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. Maximum four (4) pilot devices on 0.5
space factor units.
[4] Select one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (option 90) for NEMA Type 12 SMC Dialog Plus units when isolation contactor (option 13IC) and ON pilot light are selected. Select one (1)
N.O. auxiliary contact (option 90) for SMC-3 units with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_).
[5] Select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (Option 90) when ON pilot light is selected for SMC-Flex units. Select (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (Option 90 and 91) when ON-OFF pilot
lights are selected for SMC-Flex units.
[6] Not available with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (Option 13DSA3).
13
16
2154J
[5]
[5]
FAULT
Push-To-Test
Standard Type
Delivery
Program
ON-OFF [2]
ON
LED type
SMC-Flex
ON [4]
FAULT
-4L_
SMC-3 [1]
2155H
Description
2154H
Option
SMC
Dialog Plus
Option
Number
2155G
2154G
To select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number: A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red, W
= white (e.g., 4R is a red ON pilot light). Clear and white are not available on LED type pilot lights and white is not
available on Bulletin 800F type pilot lights.
-6XP
100 watt extra capacity with primary

fusing
24A
35A
54A
97A
135A
180A
240A
360A
500A
130
200
130
200
200
250
250
250
350 [1]
350
500 [1]
250
350 [1]
350
500 [1]
350
350
500
500
750
[1] Transformer rating (VA) when option 13IC (add isolation contactor) is selected.
146
350 [1]
350
500 [1]
500 [1]
500
750 [1]
2
Option
Converter
Module [1]
Option
Number
-13CM
-13D
Protective
Modules
(line and load
protective
modules are
supplied as
standard on
500A SMC
Dialog Plus)
-13E
Description
SMC
Dialog Plus
2154G
2155G
Provides for utilization of phase rebalance feature 24A-97A

on SMC Dialog Plus and eliminates need for
Calibration Procedure. For NEMA Type 1 and
135A-500A
Type 1 with gasket units only. Provided as
standard for NEMA Type 12 units.
24A-54A
97A-360A
3A-37A
480V MAX
43A-85A
5A-85A
108A-480A
Line Side
24A-54A
Protective
97A-360A
module contains
capacitors and
3A-37A
600V
metal oxide
43A-85A
varistors (MOVs)
5A-85A
which protect the
internal power
108A-480A
circuitry from
24A-54A
severe electrical
97A-360A
transients and
high electrical
480V MAX
43A-85A
noise
5A-85A
108A-480A
Load Side
24A-54A
97A-360A
600V
43A-85A
5A-85A
108A-480A
SMC-3
2154H
2155H
SMC-Flex
2154J
2155J
Delivery
Program
3
4
SC
5
SC
6
7
PE in U.S.,
SC in Canada
8
9
SC
10
PE in U.S.,
SC in Canada
11
[1] Adding this option may increase the space factor of the unit. See page 150 for space factors of units with options.
12
13
14
15
16
17
147
DeviceNet Starter
Auxiliary (mutually
exclusive) [1]
DeviceNet
Communication
Module [3]
(mutually exclusive)
DeviceNet
Communication
Module [3]
DeviceNet
[2]
[2]
-13GD1
-13GD2
-13GR
-13GD
-13GK5
-13GU6
Single point RIO

RS-232/RS-422/RS-485/DF1 or DH-485 Protocol
Single Point Remote I/O
DeviceNet communication module. Mounted internal to SMC-Flex.
DeviceNet communication module
Enhanced DeviceNet
-13GK61
Enhanced DeviceNet communication module with (4) input points
-13HJ2C
-13HBA0
-13HBA3
-13HBA5
-13HC3S
-13HC5S
14
15
High Interrupting
Capacity Fuses (Class -13HIC
J - Time Delay) [4]
16
17
2155J
(4) 24VDC inputs and (2) 120VAC outputs for DeviceNet.
-13HJPC
13
2154J
-13DSA3
-13HA2C
12
2155H
[2]
-13HA1C
11
SMC-Flex
[2]
-13HAPC
Human Interface
Module (HIM) [3]
SMC-3
(4) 120VAC inputs and (2) 120VAC outputs for DeviceNet.
-13HABC
10
SMC
Dialog Plus
-13DSA2
Ground Fault Current

-13GF
Transformer
Description
2154H
Option
Number
2155G
Option
2154G
Provides ground fault core balance current transformer for ground fault
indication
Blank cover. No
functionality.
Bezel mounted on door. Cable to SMC Dialog
Programmer only
Plus included. No window on door.
Programmer/Control with Available only on NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with
Analog Potentiometer
gasket.
Programmer/Control with
Digital Potentiometer
Programmer only
Door mounted. HIM is not removable from bezel.
One HIM required per SMC Dialog Plus unit. No
Programmer/Control with window on door.
Digital Potentiometer
Available on NEMA Type 12 only.
Blank Cover. No
functionality
Door mounted in bezel. Cable to SMC Flex unit
LCD display, full numeric included. No window on door.
keypad
Available on NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with
LCD display programmer gasket only.
only
LCD display, full numeric Door mounted. HIM is not removable from bezel.
keypad
One HIM required per SMC Flex unit. No window
LCD display programmer on door.
Available on NEMA 12 only.
only
Delivery
Program
SC
PE
SC
3A-19A
25A-37A
43A-60A
85A
Provides unit with high interrupting
capacity fuses for increased short circuit Class J - Time 5A
withstand rating.
Delay
25A
43A-60A
ratings of Bulletin 2155J units with this
65A-108A
option.
135A-201A
251A-361A
Class L - Time
480A
Delay
[1] Not available with push buttons, selector switch (option 3E) and control relays (option 89C_ or 89P_). The addition of DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_) may increase
space factor of 2154H and 2155H SMC-3 units. See page 139 and page 140. Select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (Option 90) when used with Bulletin 2154J and 2155J.
[2] When specifying options 13DSA2 or 13DSA3 with Bulletin 2154J and 2155J units, option 13GD must also be specified.
[3] Communication modules and Human Interface Modules are mutually exclusive for Bulletins 2154G and 2155G SMC Dialog Plus units.
[4] Option -13HIC will add 1/2 space factor to Bulletin 2155H units. Adding this option may require additional space for Bulletin 2155J units. See page 150 for space factors of units
with this option.
148
Add Isolation
Contactor[1],[2]
Add SCR Fuses [2]
-13IC
-13SCR
Provides unit with Bulletin 100 isolation contactor.
Provides unit with three (3) Form 101 fuses used for SCR
protection.
Note: Adding SCR fuses increases 5A through 16A units by 0.5
space factor.
2155J
SMC-Flex
2154J
2155H
SMC-3
2154H
2155G
SMC
Dialog Plus
Description
2154G
Option
Option
Number
3A-19A
[3]
[4]
[4]
24A, 25A
[3]
[4]
[4]
30A-37A
[3]
43A
[4]
[4]
54A-60A
[4]
[4]
85A
[4]
[4]
97A-108A
[4]
[4]
135A-180A
[4]
[4]
201A-251A
[4]
[4]
317A-361A
[4]
[4]
480A-500A
24A
35A
54A
97A
135A
180A
240A
[4]
[4]
Delivery
Program
3
4
5
6
7
SC
8
9
360A [5]
10
500A [5]
Standard Starting
Mode [6],[7]
Pump Control [6],[8]
-13XB
Braking Control
Smart Motor Braking,
Accu-Stop and Slow -13XD
Speed Braking [6],[9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
This starting mode group provides soft start, soft stop, current
limit, full voltage, kick start, preset slow speed, linear speed start
and stop and dual ramp. Refer to SMC-Flex Selection Guide,
5-480A
Publication 150-SG008x-EN-P, for detailed description of modes of
operation.
This starting mode provides pump start and stop in addition to soft
start, soft stop, current limit, full voltage and kick start.
5-480A
Refer to SMC-Flex Selection Guide, Publication 150-SG008x-EN-P,
for detailed description of modes of operation.
5-85A
108A
This starting mode provides Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and 135A
Slow Speed Braking in addition to soft start, soft stop, current
201A
limit, full voltage, kick start and preset slow speed.
Refer to SMC-Flex Selection Guide, Publication 150-SG008x-EN-P, 251A
317A
for detailed description of modes of operation.
361A
480A
11
12
PE
13
14
Auxiliary contacts (options 90 and 91) are only available when option 13IC (add isolation contactor) is selected, except for SMC-3 and SMC-Flex units.
Adding this option may increase the space factor of the unit. See page 150 for space factors of units with options.
Option 13IC (add isolation contactor) may increase space factor of 2154H SMC-3 unit. See page 139.
When isolation contactor (Option 13IC) is selected the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four (4) in any combination.
When option 13SCR (add SCR fuses) is selected for SMC Dialog Plus units 360A and 500A, the SCR fuses provide both branch circuit and SCR protection.
Soft Start, Pump Stop, Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and slow speed with braking are not intended to be used as an emergency stop
Push Button option 1XA and 1XC can only be used with standard starting mode
Push Button option 1XB can only be used with Pump Control (Option 13XB).
Push Button option 1XD, 1XE and 1XF can only be used with Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and Slow Speed with Braking (Option 13XD).
15
16
17
149
Bulletin 2154G Space Factors with Unit Options
2
3

Fuse Clip
Rating
Size
(Amperes) (Amperes)
24
5
35
54
9
97 [1]
10
135 [1]
11
180 [1]
240 [1]
12
360 [1]
13
14
15
16
500 [1]
30
60
30
60
60
100
60
100
60
100
200
60
100
200
60
100
200
100
200
400
100
200
400
200
400
600
400
600
400
600
800
600
800
Fuse Clip
Type
With
Standard
Option
Unit
13CM
With
Option
13IC
With
With
With
With
Options Options Options
Option 13CM and 13CM and 13IC and
13SCR
13IC
13SCR
13SCR

With
With
Options
With
With
Standard
Options
13CM,
Option
Option
Unit
13IC and
13IC and
13IC
13SCR
13SCR
13SCR
2.0
2.0
2.0
R, HRCII-C
J
R, HRCII-C
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
HRCII-C
3.5
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
4.0
4.0
J, R, HRCII-C
J
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
J, R, HRCII-C
J
J, R, HRCII-C
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
J
J, R, HRCII-C
J
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
J, R, HRCII-C
6.0, 30 W, 20 D
L
J, R, HRCII-C
L
6.0, 35 W, 20 D
Bulletin 2155G Space Factors with Unit Options

Rating
With
(Amperes) Standard Option
Unit
13CM
24
35
2.0
54

With
With With Options With Options With Options With Options
With
With
With Options
Option Option
13CM and
13CM and
13IC and
13CM, 13IC Standard
Option
Option
13IC and
Unit
13IC
13SCR
13IC
13SCR
13SCR
and 13SCR
13IC
13SCR
13SCR
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.0
3.5
97 [1]
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
135 [1]
180 [1]
17
6.0, 20 W, 20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
[1]
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
360 [1]
6.0, 30 W, 20 D
500 [1]
6.0, 35 W, 20 D
240
150
6.0, 20 W,
20 D
6.0, 25 W, 20 D
Option
Option
Number
Soft Stop [1],[2]
-13XA
Pump Control [1]
-13XB
Preset Slow Speed

[1]
SMB
Smart Motor
Braking [1],[2]
Accu-Stop [1],[2]
Slow Speed with

Braking [1],[2]
-13XC
-13XD
-13XE
-13XF
SMC
Dialog Plus
2154G 2155G
Description
Provides a ramp down time of 0-60 seconds
Provides smooth motor acceleration and deceleration, reducing surges
caused by the starting and stopping of centrifugal pumps. Starting time is
adjustable from 0 to 30 seconds. Stopping time is adjustable from 0 to 120
seconds.
Provides a preset slow speed for positioning or alignment applications.
Preset speeds can be selected at either 7% or 15% of rated motor speed,
with adjustable slow speed current from 0% to 450% of full load current.
Microprocessor-based braking system applies three phase braking current

that is adjustable from 0% to 450% of full load. Requires no additional
contactor or power devices and provides automatic zero shutoff without a
timer, sensor, or tachometer.
Provides precise stopping control for positioning or minimizing jogging to

stop. A three phase braking current is applied to the motor (adjustable from
150% to 400% of full load current) until it reaches a preset slow speed
(either 7% or 15% of motor rated speed). The motor is held at this speed
until a stop command is given. Braking torque is then applied until the motor
reaches zero speed. Slow speed current is adjustable from 50% to 450% of
full load current.
Provides forward slow speed for positioning and alignment and braking
control for stop.
Note: Slow speed running is not intended for continuous operation due to
heat produced in the motor and reduced motor cooling.
2
Delivery
Program
24A-500A
24A-500A
5
24A-500A
24A
35A
54A
97A
135A
180A
240A
360A
500A
24A
35A
54A
97A
135A
180A
240A
360A
500A
24A
35A
54A
97A
135A
180A
240A
360A
500A
6
7
8
9
PE
10
11
12
13
[1] Selector switch options (3, 3E) are not available when any of the SMC Dialog Plus options (13XA through 13XF) is selected. All SMC Dialog Plus options (13XA through 13XF) are
mutually exclusiveonly one of the options may be selected. The only push buttons available for SMC Dialog Plus options 13XA through 13XF are the corresponding 1XA
through 1XF options.
[2] Not intended to be used as an emergency stop.
14
15
16
17
151
2
3
4
5
Option
Number
Option
Surge
-17R
Suppressor
Omit Wiring
-19
Grounded Unit
-79GD
Door
Unit Load
Connector
-79L
-79LT
Unit Ground
Stab
-79U
-79UT
-89CF40
-89CF31
-89CF22
-89CF40A
10
-89CF22A
-89CF40B
-89CF22B
11
12
-89CF40C
Unwired
-89CF22C
Control Relay [1]
-89CF40D
-89CF22D
-89CF40L
13
-89CF22L
14
-89P2
-89P4
-89PT
-89PT2
-89PT4
15
-89PL2
Description
Provides surge suppressor across coil of unwired control relays (option 89CF or
89P)
Omission of control wiring
Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door. Unit door
hinge grounding strap for IEC requirements.
Unplated
Specify on all plug-in units in sections with vertical unit load ground copper
bus
Tin plated
copper
Copper alloy
Specify on plug-in units in sections with vertical plug-in ground bus. Unplated
Copper unit ground stabs also may be used with steel vertical
copper
ground bus.
Tin plated
copper
4 N.O.
3 N.O. and 1
Bulletin 700CF
N.C.
4-Pole Relay
2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
On Delay
4 N.O.
Includes (1) NOTC
Bulletin 700CF
2 N.O. and 2
4-Pole Relay with and (1) NCTO
N.C.
Contact
Time Attachment
Off Delay
4 N.O.
0.3 to 30 seconds Includes (1) NOTO
and (1) NCTC
Instantaneous Contacts 2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
Contact
(Instantaneous
contacts
On Delay
4 N.O.
Includes (1) NOTC on Bulletin 700CF relays
2 N.O. and 2
Bulletin 700CF
are
and (1) NCTO
4-Pole Relay with Contact
non-convertible Bulletin N.C.
Time Attachment
700P relays have
Off Delay
instantaneous contacts 4 N.O.
Includes
(1)
NOTO
1.8 to 180 seconds
that are convertible from 2 N.O. and 2
and (1) NCTC
normally open to
N.C.
Contact
normally closed.)
4 N.O.
Bulletin 700CF
4-Pole Relay with Mechanical Latch
2 N.O. and 2
Attachment
N.C.
2 N.O.
Bulletin 700P Relay
4 N.O.
None
Bulletin 700P with Pneumatic Time Delay
Attachment (on/off delay) with two (2)
2 N.O.
timed contacts (0.1-60 sec)
4 N.O.
Bulletin 700P Relay with Mechanical
2 N.O.
Latch Attachment
SMC
Dialog Plus
2154G 2155G
SMC-3
2154H
2155H
SMC-Flex
2154J
2155J
Delivery
Program
SC
SC
PE
SC
PE
[1] Mutually exclusive with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_). The addition of unwired control relay (option 89CF) may increase the space factor of 2154H SMC-3 units.
See page 139.
16
17
152
2
Option
Option
Number
-90
-91
Auxiliary
Contacts
Type B
Wiring
-98 [4]
-98X [5]
-99 [4]
-99X [5]
Description
Normally Open1 N.O. auxiliary contact mounted on isolation contactor
(13IC) when supplied
Normally Closed1 N.C. auxiliary contact mounted on isolation contactor
(13IC) when supplied
Normally Open1 N.O. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with
movement of external handle only)
Normally Open1 N.O. mounted internally. Circuit breaker units only.
Normally Closed1 N.C. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with
Normally Closed1 N.C. mounted internally. Circuit breaker units only.
SMC
Dialog Plus
2154G 2155G
SMC-3
2154H
SMC-Flex
2155H
2154J
2155J
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
Delivery
Program
3
4
SC
5
6
[1] Auxiliary contacts are only available when option 13IC (add isolation contactor) is selected on SMC Dialog Plus units. When 13IC is selected, the maximum number of auxiliary
contacts is as follows:
Four (4) in any combination.
When ON pilot lights is selected on NEMA Type 12 SMC Dialog Plus units, select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (option 90).
When ON-OFF pilot lights are selected on NEMA Type 12 SMC Dialog Plus units, select (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (options 90 and 91).
[2] The following apply to auxiliary contacts for Bulletin 2154H and 2155H SMC-3 units
Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controller includes one N.O. auxiliary contact set to NORMAL.
When isolation contactor (option -13IC) is selected the maximum number auxiliary contacts is four (4) in any combination. These auxiliary contacts are on the -13IC isolation
contactor.
When isolation contactor (option -13IC) is not selected, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is two (2) in the following combinations (1) N.O., (1) N.C., (2) N.O. or (1) N.O.
and (1) N.C. The auxiliary contacts are side-mounted on the SMC-3 and set to NORMAL.
When ON-OFF pilot lights are selected on SMC-3 units, select (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (option -91)
When ON-OFF pilot lights and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) are selected on SMC-3 units, select (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (option -90 and -91).
When ON pilot light and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) are selected in SMC-3 units, select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (option -90).
[3] The following apply to auxiliary contacts for Bulletin 2154J and 2155J SMC Flex units:
When isolation contactor (Option 13IC) is selected, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four (4) in any combination.
When isolation contactor (Option 13IC) is not selected, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four (4) in the following combinations: (2) N.O. / (2) N.C., (3) N.O. / (1)
N.C., (4) N.O. or (4) N.C.
When ON pilot light is selected on SMC-Flex units, select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (option -90).
When ON-OFF pilot lights are selected on SMC-Flex units, select (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (option -90 and -91).
When DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (-13DSA_) is selected on SMC-Flex units, select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (option -90).
[4] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected. Auxiliary
contacts are supplied unwired.
[5] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is (2) N.O. and (2) N.C. (form C). Internal auxiliary contacts (98X or 99X) are wired to a 3-point floating
terminal block.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
153
2
Option
3
4
5
Option
Number
Control Terminal Block -107

-111
T-Handle
-750B
One (1) extra 5-pole control terminal block (unwired)

T-Handle latch on unit door
Type MTW (TEW) 90C #16 AWG copper wire, VW1 rated
Type MTW (TEW) 90C #14 AWG (tinned) copper wire, VW1
rated
Type MTW (TEW) 90C #14 AWG (tinned) copper wire, VW1
rated
Tinned power and #14 AWG, Type MTW (TEW) 90C control
wire, including stab wires and jumper
-750S
Type SIS 90C #14 AWG (tinned) copper wire
-750RL [3]
Insulated ring lugs for control wires where possible
Control Circuit Wiring

[1]
Control Circuit Ring

Lugs
Control Circuit Spade
Lugs
-750
-750SL
-751D
Control Wire Markers
9
Shunt Trip
10
French Legend Plates
Description
-751HS
-751S
-754 [4]
-860F
Unit Door Nameplates
11
[3]
SMC
Dialog Plus
2154G 2155G
SMC-3
2154H
SMC-Flex
2155H
2154J
2155J
Delivery
Program
SC
[2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
SC (+2 days)
Insulated spade lugs for control wires where possible

Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of control
wire. Not available in Canada.
Heat shrink type marker at each end of control wire
Sleeve type marker at each end of control wire
SC
SC (+2 days)
For tripping circuit breakers from remote 120V, 60Hz source

Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot
devices. Specify 860F when pilot device option is selected.
Lettering is white with black letters or
1.125 3.625
black with white letters.
engraved
3-line or 4-line
Phenolic plate. Lettering is white with
nameplate
black letters, black with white letters,
or red with white letters.
Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates (2 per
unit)
Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic.
Packing is not watertight or waterproof. Considerations
should be taken if extended storage is expected.
SC
Stainless Steel
Nameplate Screws
12
Export Packing Below

Deck
13
[1] Options for factory wiring of control circuits. Device and component internal wiring and wiring that could affect operation or certification (e.g., insulation temperature class, EMC
shielding requirements, communication requirements, UL, cUL, CSA, CE) are not included.
[2] Requires 0.5 space factor SMC-3 units to be increased to 1.0 space factor.
[3] Examples of where insulated lugs cannot be used include SMC terminals, Bulletin 800F pilot devices, 700CF relays, disconnects/circuit breakers and areas where more than one
(1) wire per terminal is required.
[4] Not available when 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. (form C) internal contacts are selected for circuit breakers.
14
15
16
17
154
SC-II
SC-II (+2 days)
Bulletin 2162P and 2163P

with Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
These combination variable frequency AC motor drive units are specially designed
for use in CENTERLINE motor control centers. Each unit contains a high
performance, microprocessor-controlled, variable frequency AC drive and either a
fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
They also:
Include isolated logic and power.

Produce a three-phase, pulse width modulated (PWM) adjustable
frequency output and voltage output for exceptional control of motor speed and
torque.
Are digitally programmable with access to mode programming, providing precise and
repeatedly accurate set-up, control and operation, plus adaptability to handle a variety
of applications.
Include fan(s) and venting where required. See page 255.
Include internal electronic overload protection.
220V-230V
240V
380V-415V
480V
600V
Drive Rating
0.37kW-3.7kW
5.5kW-22kW
0.5 HP-5 HP
7.5 HP-30 HP
0.25kW-3.7kW
5.5kW-90kW
110kW-160kW
0.5 HP-5 HP
7.5HP-125HP, 150HP (VT)
150HP (CT), 200 HP250 HP
1 HP-125 HP
150 HP-250 HP
4
5
6
7
8
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A unit, with terminals
mounted on the drive chassis for connection of remote pilot devices, input
signals, etc. For NEMA Type 3R construction, contact your local Rockwell
Automation Sales Office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
Bulletins 2162P and 2163P drive units include drive input fuses. These fuses
provide both branch circuit protection and drive input protection in Bulletin
2162P units. The drive input fuses are provided in series with the circuit breakers
in Bulletin 2163P units. The types of fuses are as shown in the following chart.
A control circuit transformer, control logic interface board and Human Interface
Module (HIM) must be selected. The Bulletin 2162P and 2163P drive units are
factory programmed in the English mode. However, the user can change the
program to any language specified in the drive user manual. A common mode
choke is also included, except when load reactors are supplied with the Bulletin
2162P and 2163P units.
System Voltage
9
10
11
12
Fuse Class or Type

CC Time Delay
J Time Delay
CC Time Delay
J Time Delay
CC Time Delay
J Time Delay
170M Square Body semi-conductor
CC Time Delay
J Time Delay
13
14
15

J Time Delay
16
17
155

Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q
with PowerFlex 70 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
These combination variable frequency AC motor drive units are specifically
designed for use in CENTERLINE motor control centers. Each unit contains a
high performance, microprocessor-controlled, variable frequency AC drive and
either a fusible disconnect switch or a circuit breaker.
They also:
2
3
4

Include filters on 380-415VAC.
Include UL Class J time delay fuses. These fuses provide both branch circuit
protection and drive input protection. The drive input fuses are provided in series
with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163Q units.
Include control circuit transformer (CCT). The CCT is sized to provide power for all
standard pilot devices and any required fan(s).
Produce a three-phase, pulse width modulated (PWM) adjustable frequency output
and voltage output for exceptional control of motor speed and torque.
repeatedly accurate setup, control and operation and adaptability to handle a variety
of applications.
A Human Interface Module (HIM) must be selected.

Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q use normal duty PowerFlex 70 drives.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A unit with terminals
signals, etc. For NEMA 3R enclosure construction, contact your local Rockwell
Bulletin 2162R and 2163R
with PowerFlex 700 Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
They also:
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
156

Include filters on 380-415VAC.
with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163R units.
repeatedly accurate set-up, control and operation and adaptability to handle a variety
of applications.
Have available 24VDC or 115VAC control voltages.
A Human Interface Module (HIM) and I/O control interface must be selected.
Bulletin 2162R and 2163R use normal duty PowerFlex 700 drives.
mounted on the drive chassis for connection of remote pilot devices, input signals,
etc. For NEMA 3R enclosure construction, contact your local Rockwell Automation
Sales Office or Allen-Bradley distributor.

Bulletin 2162T and 2163T
PowerFlex 40 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
They also:

with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163T units.
repeatedly accurate setup, control and operation and adaptability to handle a variety
of applications.
3
4
5
6
7
Bulletin 2162T and 2163T use normal duty PowerFlex 40 drives.

signals, etc. For NEMA 3R enclosure construction, contact your local Rockwell
Bulletin 2164Q, 2164R, 2165Q and 2165R
Manual Drive Bypass and PowerFlex 70 or PowerFlex 700 Drive . . . . . . . . . 186
These combination variable frequency drive units are specially designed for use in
CENTERLINE motor control centers. The configuration consists of two
interlocked components, one containing the bypass circuitry and one containing a
PowerFlex 70 (Bulletin 2164Q or 2165Q) or PowerFlex 700 (Bulletin 2164R or
2165R) variable frequency drive. The bypass component contains a fusible or
circuit breaker disconnect, control circuit transformer, six-pole manually operated
bypass switch, pull-apart terminal blocks and bypass contactor (Bulletin 100
contactor) with a Bulletin 193 overload relay. The drive compartment contains the
respective PowerFlex variable frequency drive (see product descriptions on
Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q and 2163R for specific PowerFlex 70 and 700
features) less control circuit transformer and disconnecting means. This
configuration allows for the drive to be taken offline and replaced as needed with
minimal disruption to the application process. When in bypass mode the
serviceable drive component meets NFPA 70E hazard/Risk Level 0.
The bypass component is provided as a NEMA Class II wiring, Type B unit.
Terminals mounted on the drive chassis are provided for the connection of
remote devices, input signals, etc. Also
A Human Interface Module must be specified.

Drive On and Bypass On pilot lights must be specified.
An I/O (control interface) card must be specified for Bulletins 2164R and 2165R.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bulletin 2164Q and 2165Q use normal duty PowerFlex 70 drives.

Bulletin 2164R and 2165R use normal duty PowerFlex 700 drives.
For all NEMA 3R applications, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales
Office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
16
17
157

2
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2160P

1336 Plus II Variable Frequency AC Drive Line/Load Reactor Units
Supplied in a unit separate from the drive
Rating 75HP to 250 HP
Available in NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket or Type 12 Enclosure Type
3
4
5
2160P
Bulletin Number
Code
2160P
9
10
Wiring Type
Drive Type
NEMA
Enclosure Type
Line Voltage
Code Drive Type

C
Constant Torque
V
Variable Torque
Type
Variable Frequency
Drive (VFD)
Supplemental Units
for 1336 PLUS II
Code
A
075
Nominal
Horsepower Rating
Wiring Type
Type A

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
14RXL
01
Unit Type
Identification Code
Code Line Voltage

B
480V
C
600V
Code
Unit Type
14RLX_ _ Line Reactor
14RXL_ _ Load Reactor
Code
Identification Code
to adjustable
01 - 99 Corresponds
frequency drive unit location
11
Code Rating
Constant Torque
075 75 HP
100 100 HP
125 125 HP
150 150 HP
200 200 HP
250 250 HP
12
13
Code Rating
Variable Torque - 480V Only
060
75 HP
075
100HP
100
125 HP
125
150 HP
150
200 HP
200
250 HP
14
15
16
17
158
Units2160P
1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Line or Load Reactor Unit
See page 203 for a description of load reactor options and associated rules.
Reactor unit is a separate unit from the drive unit.
Reactor unit requires an additional section mounted to the right of the section with the drive unit. These two sections will create a
shipping block.
The reactor unit is to be mounted in the bottom of the section.
The remaining space in the additional section may be used for plug-in units.
Nominal Horsepower
The horsepower ratings shown

are nominal. The limiting factor
in the application and use of the
Bulletin 1336 PLUS II drive is the
75
100
125
150
200
250
75
100
125
150
200
250
75
100
125
150
200
250
Drive Type
Line
Voltage
Space
Factor
1.5 [2]
Constant
Torque
1.5 [3]
480
1.5 [2]
Variable
Torque
1.5 [3]
Constant
Torque
1.5 [2]
600
1.5 [3]
Catalog Number [1]

gasket
2160PA-075CKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-100CKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-125CKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-150CKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-200CKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-250CKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-060VKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-075VKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-100VKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-125VKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-150VKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-200VKB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-075CKC-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-100CKC-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-125CKC-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-150CKC-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-200CKC-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-250CKC-14R_ _ _ _
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
1.5 [2]
2160PA-075CJB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-100CJB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-125CJB-14R_ _ _ _
Delivery
Program
2
3
4
5
6
1.5 [3]
1.5 [2]
1.5 [3]
1.5 [2]
1.5 [3]
Available for NEMA Type 1 and

Type 1 w/ gasket only
2160PA-060VJB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-075VJB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-100VJB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-125VJB-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-075CJC-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-100CJC-14R_ _ _ _
2160PA-125CJC-14R_ _ _ _
8
9
PE-II
10
11


Select LX for line reactor or XL for load reactor (e.g., 14RLX).
Select the drive supplementary unit identification code (01-99) (e.g., 2160PA-075CKB-14RXL01). The supplementary unit identification code must begin with 01 and
sequentially use the others (02, 03, 04, etc.). Each reactor unit is to have a unique supplementary unit identification code that correlates with the same identification
code on the drive unit.
[2] Frame mounted in bottom of section with vertical wireway.
[3] Frame mounted in bottom of section without vertical wireway.
12
13
14
15
16
17
159

2
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2160R

PowerFlex 700H Variable Frequency AC Drive Load Reactor Unit
3
4
Supplied in a unit separate from the drive

255A (200 HP) Rating
Available in NEMA Enclosure Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only
NOTE: PowerFlex 700H drives have approximately 3% line reactance inherent to the device.
Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for information
2160R
Bulletin Number
Code
9
2160R
10
Wiring Type
300
Nominal Horsepower
Rating
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Line Voltage
Type
Variable Frequency
Drive (VFD)
Supplemental Units
for PowerFlex 700H
Code
A
11
Wiring Type
Type A
14RXL
01
Unit Type
Identification Code
Code Line Voltage

B
480V
Code
300
Code
Unit Type
14RXL_ _ Load Reactor
Rating
200 HP

K
with gasket
12
13
14
15
16
17
160
Code
Identification Code
to adjustable
01 - 99 Corresponds
frequency drive unit location
Units2160R
PowerFlex 700H Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Load Reactor
See page 202 for a description of load reactor options and associated rules.
Reactor unit is a separate unit from the drive unit.
Reactor unit requires an additional section mounted to the right of the section with the drive unit. These two sections will create a
shipping block.
The reactor unit is to be mounted in the bottom of the section.
The remaining space in the additional section may be used for plug-in units.
Nominal Horsepower
The horsepower ratings shown are
nominal. The limiting factor in the
application and use of the Bulletin
1336 PLUS II drive is the output
ampere rating.
200
Line
Voltage
Space
Factor
480
1.5[2]
Catalog Number [1]

gasket
2160RA-300KB-14RXL _ _
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
2
3
4
5
Delivery
Program
6
Available for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket
only
PE-II

Select the drive supplementary unit identification code (01-99) (e.g., 2160R-300KB-14XL01).
The supplementary unit identification code must begin with 01 and continue sequentially (02, 03, 04, etc.) Each reactor unit is to have a unique supplementary unit
identification code that correlates with the same identification code on the drive unit.
[2] Frame mounted in the bottom section without vertical wireway.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
161

2
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162P and 2163P

Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Drive
NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket or Type 12 Enclosure Type

NEMA Wiring, Class I, Type A
Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Drive is not intended for use with single phase motors
4
5
2162P
2163P
A
A
Bulletin
Number
Wiring
Type
Code
9
10
2162P
2163P
F05
F05
K
K
B
B
Nominal Horsepower
NEMA
Drive Type
and kW Rating
Enclosure Type
Line
Voltage
Code Drive Type[1]

C
Constant Torque
V
Variable Torque
Type
Bulletin 1336 PLUS II
Variable Frequency AC
Drive (VFD) with
Fusible Disconnect
Bulletin 1336 PLUS II
Variable Frequency AC
Drive (VFD) with
Circuit Breaker
Wiring Type
Type A
12
33
33CA
Horsepower/kW and
6P-14HAS2C-14L6
6P-14HAS2C-14L6
Control Transformer, Human Interface
Module, Control Interface and Options

33 Horsepower/kW code.
2162P-33
See table on page 218
33__ Horsepower/kW
2163P-33CA code.
__CA Circuit Breaker Type.

NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 Code Line Voltage
K
P
with gasket
220-230V [1]
J
NEMA Type 12
A
240V
N
380V [1]
KN 400V [1]
I
415V [1]
B
480V
C
600V
13
Code
[1] Drive type code C - constant torque is valid for

all line voltage codes. Drive type code V
(variable torque) is valid for 480V only
11
Code
A
C
C
Control Transformer,
Human Interface
Module, Control
Code Interface and Options
See Options section beginning on
page 197
[1] Units at these voltages are not UL

listed, cUL listed or CSA certified
220-230V Line Voltage

Constant Torque
14
F05
F07
F10
F10
F15
F30
F50
007
007
015
020
020
025
15
16
17
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.7kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW
22 kW
Ratings
240V Line Voltage 380-415V Line Voltage
Constant Torque
Constant Torque
F05
F07
F10
F15
F20
F30
F50
007
010
015
020
025
030
0.5 HP
0.75 HP
1 HP
1.5 HP
2 HP
3 HP
5 HP
7.5 HP
10 HP
15 HP
20 HP
25 HP
30 HP
F05
F07
F07
F10
F15
F20
F30
F50
F75
F100
F150
F200
020
025
030
040
050
060
075
100
125
200
200
250
250
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.7 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW
22 kW
30 kW
37 kW
45 kW
55 kW
75 kW
90 kW
110 kW[1]
132 kW[1]
150 kW[1]
160 kW[1]
480V Line Voltage

600V Line Voltage
Constant Torque Variable Torque Constant Torque
F05
F07
F10
F15
F20
F30
F50
F75
F100
F150
F200
025
030
040
050
X060
075
100
125
150
200
250
[1] Available for 2162P only. NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only
162
0.5 HP
0.75 HP
1 HP
1.5 HP
2 HP
3 HP
5 HP
7.5 HP
10 HP
15 HP
20 HP
25 HP
30 HP
40 HP
50 HP
60 HP
75 HP
100 HP
125 HP
150 HP[1]
200 HP[1]
250 HP[1]
F05
F07
F10
F15
F20
F30
F50
F75
F75
F100
F200
020
025
040
040
050
060
075
100
125
150
200
0.5 HP
0.75 HP
1 HP
1.5 HP
2 HP
3 HP
5 HP
7.5 HP
10 HP
15 HP
20 HP
25 HP
30 HP
40 HP
50 HP
60 HP
75 HP
100 HP
125 HP
150 HP
200 HP[1]
250 HP[1]
F10
F20
F30
F50
F75
F100
F150
F200
025
030
040
050
060
075
100
125
150
200
250
1 HP
2 HP
3 HP
5 HP
7.5 HP
10 HP
15 HP
20 HP
25 HP
30 HP
40 HP
50 HP
60 HP
75 HP
100 HP
125 HP
150 HP[1]
200 HP[1]
250 HP[1]
Units2162P
Combination Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect, 220V-240V (Constant Torque)

For specific drive applications refer to Bulletin 1336 Plus II User Manual.
Branch circuit (overload) protection provided by the overload internal to drive.
See page 250 for Combination Unit Short Circuit Withstand Ratings table.
Wiring is Type A only.
Proper placement of drive units in the MCC is essential for proper operation and life cycle of the drive. Strong consideration
should be given to placing units with drives at the bottom of the section. When more than one drive unit is placed in a section, the
drive unit with the highest rating should be located at the bottom of the section.
Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units may cause drive to trip.
Control circuit transformer is required. Select on page 198.
HIM (Human Interface Module) is required. Control logic board is required. Select on page 200.
Bulletin 1336 PLUS II drives are UL listed and CSA certified as motor overload protective devices. An external overload relay is
not required for single motor applications. The Bulletin 1336 PLUS II drive is not intended for use with single phase motors.
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
Nominal Horsepower
(Nominal kW)
The horsepower and kW ratings shown are nominal. The
limiting factor in the application and use of the Bulletin
1336 PLUS II drive is the output ampere rating.
[3]
240V
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
27
34
48
65
77
220-230V
(0.37)
(0.55)
(0.75-1.1)
(1.5)
(2.2)
(3.7)
(5.5-7.5)
(11)
(15-18.5)
(22)
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
80
30
Space
Factor
2.0
3.0
3.0 PE
6.0
20 W
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
2162PA-F05CK_-_
2162PA-F07CK_-_
2162PA-F10CK_-_
2162PA-F15CK_-_
2162PA-F20CK_-_
2162PA-F30CK_-_
2162PA-F50CK_-_
2162PA-007CK_-_
2162PA-010CK_-_
2162PA-015CK_-_
2162PA-020CK_-_
2162PA-025CK_-_
2162PA-030CK_-_
Space
Factor
2.0
4.0
6.0
20 W
6.0
25 W
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 12
2162PA-F05CJ_-_
2162PA-F07CJ_-_
2162PA-F10CJ_-_
2162PA-F15CJ_-_
2162PA-F20CJ_-_
2162PA-F30CJ_-_
2162PA-F50CJ_-_
2162PA-007CJ_-_
2162PA-010CJ_-_
2162PA-015CJ_-_
2162PA-020CJ_-_
2162PA-025CJ_-_
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Delivery
Program
9
10
PE
11
12
PE-II
13
2162PA-030CJ_-_
[1] Ampere ratings are at a 4kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4kHz are selected, the drive output current rating must be derated. For complete derating information,
contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office and/or refer to publication 1336 PLUS-5.3.
Select the voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2162P-F05CKA).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2162PA-F05CKA-33).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (e.g., 2162PA-F05CKP-33K).
[3] Units at these voltages are not UL listed, cUL listed or CSA certified.
14
15
16
17
163

2
3
4
5
Units2162P
Combination Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect,
380V-480V (Constant Torque)
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Bulletin 2162P (150-250 HP) roll-out drive units include Type 170M square body semi-conductor fuses.
Nominal Horsepower (Nominal
kW)
The horsepower and kW ratings shown are
nominal. The limiting factor in the application
and use of the Bulletin 1336 PLUS II drive is the
[3]
480V
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
13.3
16.1
24.0
27.0
39.0
45.0
60.0
75.0
77.0
85.0
106
138
173
199
263
380-415V
(0.25)
(0.37-0.55)
(0.75)
(1.1)
(1.5)
(2.2)
(3.7)
(5.5)
(7.5)
(11)
(15)
(18.5)
(22)
(30)
(37)
(45)
(55)
(75)
(90)
(110-132)
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
325
(150-160)
250
Space
Factor
2.0
3.0
SC
6.0
20 W
6.0
35 W
20 D[5]
6.0
25 W
20 D
[4],[5]
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
2162PA-F05CK_-_
2162PA-F07CK_-_
2162PA-F10CK_-_
2162PA-F15CK_-_
2162PA-F20CK_-_
2162PA-F30CK_-_
2162PA-F50CK_-_
2162PA-F75CK_-_
2162PA-F100CK_-_
2162PA-F150CK_-_
2162PA-F200CK_-_
2162PA-025CK_-_
2162PA-030CK_-_
2162PA-040CK_-_
2162PA-050CK_-_
2162PA-X060CK_-_
2162PA-060CK_-_
2162PA-075CK_-_
2162PA-100CK_-_
2162PA-125CK_-_
2162PA_-150CK_-_
2162PA_-200CK_-_
2162PA_-250CK_-_
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 12
2162PA-F05CJ_-_
2162PA-F07CJ_-_
2162PA-F10CJ_-_
2.0
2162PA-F15CJ_-_
2162PA-F20CJ_-_
2162PA-F30CJ_-_
2162PA-F50CJ_-_
2162PA-F75CJ_-_
2162PA-F100CJ_-_
3.0
2162PA-F150CJ_-_
2162PA-F200CJ_-_
2162PA-025CJ_-_
2162PA-030CJ_-_
6.0
20 W
2162PA-040CJ_-_
2162PA-050CJ_-_
6.0, 25 W 2162PA-X060CJ_-_
2162PA-060CJ_-_
6.0
2162PA-075CJ_-_
35 W
2162PA-100CJ_-_
[5]
20 D
2162PA-125CJ_-_
Delivery
Program
PE for
380-415V
SC for
480V
PE-II for
380-415V
SC-II for
480V
PE-II
Available for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/

gasket only
If required, insert T for top entry of cables or B for bottom entry of cables (e.g., 2162PAT or 2162PAB). Top entry requires pullbox.
Select the voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g. 2162PA-F05CKB).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2162PA-F05CKB-33).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (e.g., 2162PA-F05CKN-33K).
[4] Roll-out drive construction. Roll-out construction is not seismic rated.
164
Units2162P
Combination Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect, 480V (Variable Torque)

HIM (Human Interface Module) is required. Control logic board is required. Select both on page 200.
Bulletin 2162P (200-250 HP) roll-out drive units include Type 170M square body semi-conductor fuses.
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
15.4
22.0
27.0
34.0
42.0
65.0
77.0
96.0
120
150
180
240
292
Nominal Horsepower
The horsepower ratings shown are
nominal. The limiting factor in the
application and use of the Bulletin 1336
PLUS II drive is the output ampere rating.
480V
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5-10
15
20
25
30
40-50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
Space
Factor
2.0
3.0
6.0
20 W
6.0
35 W
20 D[4]
6.0
25 W
20 D
[3],[4]
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
2162PA-F05VK_-_
2162PA-F07VK_-_
2162PA-F10VK_-_
2162PA-F15VK_-_
2162PA-F20VK_-_
2162PA-F30VK_-_
2162PA-F50VK_-_
2162PA-F75VK_-_
2162PA-F100VK_-_
2162PA-F200VK_-_
2162PA-020VK_-_
2162PA-025VK_-_
2162PA-040VK_-_
2162PA-050VK_-_
2162PA-060VK_-_
2162PA-075VK_-_
2162PA-100VK_-_
2162PA-125VK_-_
2162PA_-150VK_-_
2162PA_-200VK_-_
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Delivery
Program
9
2162PA-F05VJ_-_
2162PA-F07VJ_-_
2162PA-F10VJ_-_
2.0
2162PA-F15VJ_-_
2162PA-F20VJ_-_
2162PA-F30VJ_-_
2162PA-F50VJ_-_
2162PA-F75VJ_-_
3.0
2162PA-F100VJ_-_
2162PA-F200VJ_-_
2162PA-020VJ_-_
6.0
2162PA-025VJ_-_
20 W
2162PA-040VJ_-_
6.0, 25 W 2162PA-050VJ_-_
2162PA-060VJ_-_
6.0
2162PA-075VJ_-_
35 W
2162PA-100VJ_-_
[4]
20 D
2162PA-125VJ_-_
10
11
SC
12
13
SC-II
14
PE-II
15
Available for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/

gasket only
If required, insert T for top entry of cables or B for bottom entry of cables (e.g., 2162PAT or 2162PAB). Top entry requires a pullbox.
Select the voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2162PA-F05VKB).
Select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2162PA-F05VKB-33).
165
16
17

2
3
4
5
Units2162P
Combination Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect, 600V (Constant Torque)

Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
19.0
24.0
30.0
35.0
45.0
57.0
62.0
85.0
109
138
158
252
284
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Nominal Horsepower
The horsepower ratings shown are nominal. The
limiting factor in the application and use of the
Bulletin 1336 PLUS II drive is the output ampere
rating.
600V
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
Space Factor
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
2162PA-F10CK_-_
2162PA-F20CK_-_
2162PA-F30CK_-_
2162PA-F50CK_-_
3.0
2162PA-F75CK_-_
2162PA-F100CK_-_
2162PA-F150CK_-_
2162PA-F200CK_-_
2162PA-025CK_-_
2162PA-030CK_-_
6.0
2162PA-040CK_-_
20 W
2162PA-050CK_-_
2162PA-060CK_-_
2162PA-075CK_-_
6.0
2162PA-100CK_-_
[4]
35 W, 20 D
2162PA-125CK_-_
2162PA_-150CK_-_
6.0
[3],[4] 2162PA_-200CK_-_
25 W, 20 D
2162PA_-250CK_-_
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 12
2162PA-F10CJ_-_
2162PA-F20CJ_-_
2162PA-F30CJ_-_
3.0
2162PA-F50CJ_-_
2162PA-F75CJ_-_
2162PA-F100CJ_-_
2162PA-F150CJ_-_
3.5
2162PA-F200CJ_-_
2162PA-025CJ_-_
2162PA-030CJ_-_
6.0
20 W
2162PA-040CJ_-_
2162PA-050CJ_-_
6.0, 25 W 2162PA-060CJ_-_
2162PA-075CJ_-_
6.0
35 W
2162PA-100CJ_-_
20 D[4]
2162PA-125CJ_-_
Delivery
Program
PE in
United States
SC in
Canada
PE-II in
United States
SC-II in
Canada
PE-II
Available for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1

w/ gasket only
If required, insert T for top entry of cables or B for bottom entry of cables (e.g., 2162PAT or 2162PAB). Top entry requires a pullbox.
Select the voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2162PA-F10CKC).
Select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2162PA-F10CKC-35).
17
166
Units2163P
Combination Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker, 220V-240V (Constant Torque)

Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
27
34
48
65
77
80

The limiting factor in the application and use of the
rating.
[3]
240V
220-230V
(0.37)
(0.55)
(0.75-1.1)
(1.5)
(2.2)
(3.7)
(5.5-7.5)
(11)
(15-18.5)
(22)
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
Space
Factor
2.0
3.0
3.0 PE
6.0, 20 W
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
2163PA-F05CK_-_
2163PA-F07CK_-_
2163PA-F10CK_-_
2163PA-F15CK_-_
2163PA-F20CK_-_
2163PA-F30CK_-_
2163PA-F50CK_-_
2163PA-007CK_-_
2163PA-010CK_-_
2163PA-015CK_-_
2163PA-020CK_-_
2163PA-025CK_-_
2163PA-030CK_-_
Space
Factor
2.0
4.0
6.0
20 W
6.0, 25 W
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 12
2163PA-F05CJ_-_
2163PA-F07CJ_-_
2163PA-F10CJ_-_
2163PA-F15CJ_-_
2163PA-F20CJ_-_
2163PA-F30CJ_-_
2163PA-F50CJ_-_
2163PA-007CJ_-_
2163PA-010CJ_-_
2163PA-015CJ_-_
2163PA-020CJ_-_
2163PA-025CJ_-_
2163PA-030CJ_-_
Delivery
Program
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PE
11
12
PE-II
Select the voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2163PA-F05CKA).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2163PA-F05CKA-33).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (e.g., 2163PA-F05CKP-33K).
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163PA-F05CKA-33CA or 2163PA-F05CKP-33KCA).
13
14
15
16
17
167

2
3
4
5
Units2163P
Combination Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker, 380V-480V (Constant Torque)

Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
13.3
16.1
24.0
27.0
39.0
45.0
60.0
75.0
77.0
85.0
106
138
173
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

The horsepower and kW ratings shown are
nominal. The limiting factor in the application and
use of the Bulletin 1336 PLUS II drive is the output
ampere rating.
[3]
480V
380-415V
(0.25)
(0.37-0.55)
(0.75)
(1.1)
(1.5)
(2.2)
(3.7)
(5.5)
(7.5)
(11)
(15)
(18.5)
(22)
(30)
(37)
(45)
(55)
(75)
(90)
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
2163PA-F05CK_-_
2163PA-F07CK_-_
2163PA-F10CK_-_
2163PA-F15CK_-_
2.0
2163PA-F20CK_-_
2163PA-F30CK_-_
2163PA-F50CK_-_
2163PA-F75CK_-_
2163PA-F100CK_-_
3.0
2163PA-F150CK_-_
2163PA-F200CK_-_
SC
2163PA-025CK_-_
2163PA-030CK_-_
2163PA-040CK_-_
6.0, 20 W 2163PA-050CK_-_
2163PA-X060CK_-_
2163PA-060CK_-_
6.0, 35 W, 2163PA-075CK_-_
20 D[4] 2163PA-100CK_-_
2163PA-125CK_-_
Space
Factor
2.0
3.0
6.0, 20 W
6.0, 25 W
6.0, 35 W,
20 D[4]
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 12
2163PA-F05CJ_-_
2163PA-F07CJ_-_
2163PA-F10CJ_-_
2163PA-F15CJ_-_
2163PA-F20CJ_-_
2163PA-F30CJ_-_
2163PA-F50CJ_-_
2163PA-F75CJ_-_
2163PA-F100CJ_-_
2163PA-F150CJ_-_
2163PA-F200CJ_-_
2163PA-025CJ_-_
2163PA-030CJ_-_
2163PA-040CJ_-_
2163PA-050CJ_-_
2163PA-X060CJ_-_
2163PA-060CJ_-_
2163PA-075CJ_-_
2163PA-100CJ_-_
2163PA-125CJ_-_
Delivery
Program
PE for
380-415V
SC for
480V
PE-II for
380-415V
SC-II for
480V
[1] Ampere ratings are at a 4kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4kHz are selected, the drive output current rating must be derated. For complete derating
information, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office and/or refer to publication 1336 PLUS-5.3.
Select the voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2163PA-F05CKB).
If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2163PA-F05CKB-33).
If kW rated, select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (e.g., 2163PA-F05CKN-33K).
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163PA-F05CKB-33CA or 2163PA-F05CKN-33KCA).
[4] Frame mounted 20 deep without vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5 deeper than standard.
168
PE-II
Units2163P
Combination Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker, 480V (Variable Torque)

Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
15.4
22.0
27.0
34.0
42.0
65.0
75.0
96.0
120
150
180
Nominal Horsepower
The horsepower ratings shown are nominal.
The limiting factor in the application and use of
the Bulletin 1336 PLUS II drive is the output
ampere rating.
480V
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5-10
15
20
25
30
40-50
60
75
100
125
150
Space
Factor
[2]
Catalog Number
NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
2163PA-F05VK_-_
2163PA-F07VK_-_
2163PA-F10VK_-_
2.0
2163PA-F15VK_-_
2163PA-F20VK_-_
2163PA-F30VK_-_
2163PA-F50VK_-_
2163PA-F75VK_-_
2163PA-F100VK_-_
3.0
2163PA-F200VK_-_
2163PA-020VK_-_
2163PA-025VK_-_
2163PA-040VK_-_
6.0, 20 W
2163PA-050VK_-_
2163PA-060VK_-_
6.0, 35 W 2163PA-075VK_-_
20 D[3] 2163PA-100VK_-_
2163PA-125VK_-_
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 12
2163PA-F05VJ_-_
2163PA-F07VJ_-_
2163PA-F10VJ_-_
2.0
2163PA-F15VJ_-_
2163PA-F20VJ_-_
2163PA-F30VJ_-_
2163PA-F50VJ_-_
2163PA-F75VJ_-_
3.0
2163PA-F100VJ_-_
2163PA-F200VJ_-_
2163PA-020VJ_-_
6.0, 20 W 2163PA-025VJ_-_
2163PA-040VJ_-_
6.0, 25 W 2163PA-050VJ_-_
2163PA-060VJ_-_
6.0, 35 W 2163PA-075VJ_-_
20 D[3] 2163PA-100VJ_-_
2163PA-125VJ_-_
Delivery
Program
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SC
11
12
SC-II
13
PE-II
14
Select the voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2163PA-F05VKB).
Select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2163PA-F05VKAB-33).
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163PA-F05VKB-33CA).
15
16
17
169

2
3
4
5
Units2163P
Combination Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker, 600V (Constant Torque)

Maximum
Continuous
Output Amperes
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Nominal Horsepower
[1]
The horsepower ratings shown are nominal. The

limiting factor in the application and use of the
rating.
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10
12
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
85
109
138
600V
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 1 and
Type 1 w/ gasket
2163PA-F10CK_-_
2163PA-F20CK_-_
2163PA-F30CK_-_
2163PA-F50CK_-_
3.0
2163PA-F75CK_-_
2163PA-F100CK_-_
2163PA-F150CK_-_
2163PA-F200CK_-_
2163PA-025CK_-_
2163PA-030CK_-_
6.0, 20 W 2163PA-040CK_-_
2163PA-050CK_-_
2163PA-060CK_-_
2163PA-075CK_-_
6.0, 35 W,
2163PA-100CK_-_
[3]
20 D
2163PA-125CK_-_
Space
Factor
Catalog Number [2]

NEMA Type 12
2163PA-F10CJ_-_
2163PA-F20CJ_-_
2163PA-F30CJ_-_
3.0
2163PA-F50CJ_-_
2163PA-F75CJ_-_
2163PA-F100CJ_-_
2163PA-F150CJ_-_
3.5
2163PA-F200CJ_-_
2163PA-025CJ_-_
2163PA-030CJ_-_
6.0, 20 W
2163PA-040CJ_-_
2163PA-050CJ_-_
6.0, 25 W 2163PA-060CJ_-_
2163PA-075CJ_-_
6.0, 35 W,
2163PA-100CJ_-_
[3]
20 D
2163PA-125CJ_-_
Delivery
Program
PE in United
States,
SC in Canada
PE-II in United
States
SC-II in Canada
PE-II
Select the voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2163PA-F05CKC).
Select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2163PA-F10CKC-35).
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163PA-F10CKC-35CA).
16
17
170
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q
PowerFlex 70 Drive
Bulletins 2162Q and 2163Q use normal duty PowerFlex 70 drives

NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A
Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM) adjustable
frequency output to vary motor speed
3
4
5
2162Q
2163Q
A
A
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
1P1
1P1
K
K
PowerFlex 70 Nominal
Output Current Rating
B
B
NEMA
Line Voltage
Enclosure Type
33
33CA
Nominal Horsepower/kW
and Circuit Breaker Type
14HA0
14HA0
Human Interface
Module and Options
8
Code
2162Q
2163Q
Type
PowerFlex 70 Variable
Frequency AC Drive
with Fusible
Disconnect
Frequency AC Drive

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
Code and Circuit Breaker Type
33 Nominal Horsepower/kW
2162Q-33
code. See table on page 218
33_ Nominal Horsepower/kW
2163Q-33CA code.
__CA Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 224
Code
10
11
Code
A
Wiring Type
Type A
Code
N
KN
I
B
C
Line Voltage
380V [1]
400V [1]
415V [1]
480V
600V
12
13
[1] Units at these voltages are not UL or

cUL listed.
Nominal Output Current Rating (Amperes) [1]

380-415V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code
Ratings
Code Ratings Code Ratings
1P3
1.3
1P1
1.1
0P9
0.9
2P1
2.1
2P1
2.1
1P7
1.7
3P5
3.5
3P4
3.4
2P7
2.7
5P0
5.0
5P0
5.0
3P9
3.9
8P7
8.7
8P0
8.0
6P1
6.1
011
11.5
011
11
9P0
9.0
015
15.4
014
14
011
11
022
22
022
22
017
17
030
30
027
27
022
22
037
37
034
34
043
43
040
40
060
60
052
52
072
72
065
65
14
Human Interface Module
Code and Options
See options section beginning on
page 197
15
16
17
[1] Bulletins 2162Q and 2163Q use Normal Duty PowerFlex 70 Drives
171

2
3
4
5
Units2162Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480V

For specific drive applications refer to PowerFlex 70 User Manual.
All PowerFlex ratings are Normal Duty.
Branch circuit (overload) protection is provided by the internal drive overload.
Wiring is Type A only. Drive can only accept 16 AWG control wire.
HIM (Human Interface Module) is required. Select on page 200.
PowerFlex 70 AC drives are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload relay is not
required for single motor applications. PowerFlex 70 AC drives are not intended for use with single phase motors.
Maximum
Continuous Output
Amperes [1]
9
1.1
1.3
2.1
3.4
3.5
5
8
8.7
11
11.5
14
15.4
22
27
30
34
37
40
43
10
11
12
13
14
15
52 [4],[5]
60 [5]
65
16
17
[6],[7]
72
Nominal kW
Nominal HP
The horsepower and kW ratings
shown below are for reference only.
PowerFlex 70 drive units should be
sized according to the application and
480V
380-415V[3]
0.5
0.37
0.55-0.75
0.75-1
1.5-2
1.1-1.5
2.2
3
5
3.7
7.5
5.5
10
7.5
11
15
20
15
25
18.5
30
22
40
30
37
50
Space
Factor
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
Catalog Number NEMA

Type 1 and Type 1 w/
gasket [2]
2162QA-1P1K_-_
2162QA-1P3K_-_
2162QA-2P1K_-_
2162QA-3P4K_-_
2162QA-3P5K_-_
2162QA-5P0K_-_
2162QA-8P0K_-_
2162QA-8P7K_-_
2162QA-011K_-_
2162QA-011K_-_
2162QA-014K_-_
2162QA-015K_-_
2162QA-022K_-_
2162QA-027K_-_
2162QA-030K_-_
2162QA-034K_-_
2162QA-037K_-_
2162QA-040K_-_
2162QA-043K_-_
2162QA-052K_-_
2162QA-060K_-_
3.5
2162QA-065K_-_
2162QA-072K_-_
Space
Factor
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
Catalog Number NEMA Delivery

Program
12 [2]
2162QA-1P1J_-_
2162QA-1P3J_-_
2162QA-2P1J_-_
2162QA-3P4J_-_
2162QA-3P5J_-_
2162QA-5P0J_-_
2162QA-8P0J_-_
2162QA-8P7J_-_
2162QA-011J_-_
2162QA-011J_-_
2162QA-014J_-_
2162QA-015J_-_
2162QA-022J_-_
2162QA-027J_-_
2162QA-030J_-_
2162QA-034J_-_
2162QA-037J_-_
2162QA-040J_-_
2162QA-043J_-_
2162QA-052J_-_
SC
2162QA-060J_-_
2162QA-065J_-_
2162QA-072J_-_
[1] Ampere ratings are at a 4kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4kHz are selected, the drive output ampere ratings must be derated. For derating information, contact
your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office and/or refer to PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, PFLEX-RM001x-EN-E.
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2162QA-1P3KN).
Select number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kilowatt or horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162QA-037KN-44K or 2162QA-037KB-44).
[3] Units at these voltages are not UL listed or cUL listed.
[4] Requires 4.0 total space factors for option -14RLX_ for NEMA 1/1G and 12 and 6.0 total space factors, 20"W, 15"D, frame-mounted for option -14RXL_ for NEMA 1/1G and 12.
Option -14RXL_ changes delivery program to SC-II.
[5] Requires an 3.5 total space factors when specifying door mounting pilot devices or for NEMA 1/1G.
[6] Requires 4.0 total space factors for option -14RLX in NEMA1/1G without doormounted pilot devices. Requires 4.5 total space factors for option -14RLX and any door mounted
pilot devices in NEMA 1/1G. Requires 4.5 total space factors for option -14RLX in NEMA 12.
[7] Requires 6.0 total space factors, 20W, 15D for option -14RXL in NEMA 1/1G and 12.
172
Units2162Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600V

PowerFlex 70 AC drives are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protected devices. An external overload relay is not
Maximum Continuous
Output Amperes [1]
0.9
1.7
2.7
3.9
6.1
9
11
17
22
Nominal HP
below are for reference only.
PowerFlex 70 drive units should
be sized according to the
application and output ampere
rating.
0.5
0.75-1
1.5-2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
Space
Factor
1.5
2.0
2.5
Catalog Number
1 w/ gasket [2]
2162QA-0P9K_-_
2162QA-1P7K_-_
2162QA-2P7K_-_
2162QA-3P9K_-_
2162QA-6P1K_-_
2162QA-9P0K_-_
2162QA-011K_-_
2162QA-017K_-_
2162QA-022K_-_
Space
Factor
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Delivery
Program
9
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
2162QA-0P9J_-_
2162QA-1P7J_-_
2162QA-2P7J_-_
2162QA-3P9J_-_
2162QA-6P1J_-_
2162QA-9P0J_-_
2162QA-011J_-_
2162QA-017J_-_
2162QA-022J_-_
10
PE in U.S.
11
SC in Canada
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (2162QA-0P9KC-33).
Select HP rating code from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162QA-0P9KC-33).
12
13
14
15
16
17
173

2
3
4
5
Units2163Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 AC Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 380-480V

Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
9
1.1
1.3
2.1
3.4
3.5
5
8
8.7
11
11.5
14
15.4
22
27
30
34
37
40
43
10
11
12
13
14
15
52 [4],[5]
16
17
Nominal kW
Nominal HP
The horsepower and kW ratings
shown below are for reference only.
PowerFlex 70 drive units should be
sized according to the application and
480V
380-415V[3]
0.5
0.37
0.55-0.75
0.75-1
1.5-2
1.1-1.5
2.2
3
5
3.7
7.5
5.5
10
7.5
11
15
20
15
25
18.5
30
22
40
60 [5]
30
65 [6]
37
50
72
Space
Factor
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [2]
2163QA-1P1K_-_
2163QA-1P3K_-_
2163QA-2P1K_-_
2163QA-3P4K_-_
2163QA-3P5K_-_
2163QA-5P0K_-_
2163QA-8P0K_-_
2163QA-8P7K_-_
2163QA-011K_-_
2163QA-011K_-_
2163QA-014K_-_
2163QA-015K_-_
2163QA-022K_-_
2163QA-027K_-_
2163QA-030K_-_
2163QA-034K_-_
2163QA-037K_-_
2163QA-040K_-_
2163QA-043K_-_
2163QA-052K_-_
2163QA-060K_-_
3.5
4.0
2163QA-065K_-_
2163QA-072K_-_
Space
Factor
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
Catalog Number NEMA

12 [2]
2163QA-1P1J_-_
2163QA-1P3J_-_
2163QA-2P1J_-_
2163QA-3P4J_-_
2163QA-3P5J_-_
2163QA-5P0J_-_
2163QA-8P0J_-_
2163QA-8P7J_-_
2163QA-011J_-_
2163QA-011J_-_
2163QA-014J_-_
2163QA-015J_-_
2163QA-022J_-_
2163QA-027J_-_
2163QA-030J_-_
2163QA-034J_-_
2163QA-037J_-_
2163QA-040J_-_
2163QA-043J_-_
2163QA-052J_-_
Delivery
Program
SC
2163QA-060J_-_
2163QA-065J_-_
2163QA-072J_-_
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2163QA-1P3KN).
Select number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kilowatt or horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163QA-037KN-44K or 2163QA-037KB-44).
Select the appropriate suffix from the Circuit Breaker Type table on page 224 to identify circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163QA-1P3KN-33KCA).
[4] Requires 4.0 total space factors for option -14RLX_ for NEMA 1/1G and 12 and 6.0 total space factors, 20"W, 15"D, frame-mounted for option -14RXL_ for NEMA 1/1G and 12.
Option -14RXL_ changes delivery program to SC-II.
[5] Requires an additional 0.5 space factor when specifying door mounting pilot devices or door mounted HIMs.
[6] Requires 4.5 total space factors for option -14RLX for NEMA 1/1G and NEMA 12 and 6.0 total space factors, 20"W, 15"D, frame-mounted for option -14RXL_ for NEMA 1/1G and
NEMA 12. Option -14RXL_ changes delivery program to SC-II.
174
Units2163Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 AC Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 600V

Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
0.9
1.7
2.7
3.9
6.1
9
11
17
22
Nominal HP
PowerFlex 70 AC drive units
should be sized according to the
rating.
0.5
0.75-1
1.5-2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
Space
Factor
1.5
2.0
2.5
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [2]
2163QA-0P9K_-_
2163QA-1P7K_-_
2163QA-2P7K_-_
2163QA-3P9K_-_
2163QA-6P1K_-_
2163QA-9P0K_-_
2163QA-011K_-_
2163QA-017K_-_
2163QA-022K_-_
Space
Factor
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
Catalog Number NEMA

12 [2]
2163QA-0P9J_-_
2163QA-1P7J_-_
2163QA-2P7J_-_
2163QA-3P9J_-_
2163QA-6P1J_-_
2163QA-9P0J_-_
2163QA-011J_-_
2163QA-017J_-_
2163QA-022J_-_
Delivery
Program
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PE in U.S
SC in Canada
11
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2163QA-0P9KC).
Select HP rating code from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163QA-0P9KC-33).
Select the appropriate suffix from the Circuit Breaker Type table on page 224 to identify circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163QA-0P9KC-33CA).
12
13
14
15
16
17
175

2
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162R and 2163R

PowerFlex 700 Drive
3
4
Bulletins 2162R and 2163R use normal duty PowerFlex 700 Drives
Class J time delay drive input fuses provide both branch circuit and drive input protection
Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM) adjustable frequency
output to vary motor speed
5
2162R
2163R
A
A
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
Code
2162R
10
2163R
11
Type
Frequency AC Drive
Frequency AC Drive
Code
A
034
034
K
K

NEMA
Output Current Rating Enclosure Type
13
14
15
16
17
Line Voltage

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
Code
N
KN
I
B
C
44
44CA
14HA0
14HA0
Human Interface
Module and Options
2162R-33
code. See table on page 218.
2163R-33CA code.
__CA Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 224.
Code
Line Voltage
380V [1]
400V [1]
415V [1]
480V
600V
[1] 400 VAC range drive used where input voltage is 380V 415 VAC. Units at these voltages are not UL or cUL
listed.
[1] Bulletin 2162R and 2163R use Normal Duty PowerFlex 700 Drives
176
Wiring Type
Type A
Nominal Constant Current Ratings (Amperes) [1]

380-415V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code Ratings
Code Ratings
Code Ratings
1P3
1.3
1P1 1.1
1P7 1.7
2P1
2.1
2P1 2.1
2P7 2.7
3P5
3.5
3P4 3.4
3P9 3.9
5P0
5.0
5P0 5.0
6P1 6.1
8P7
8.7
8P0 8
9P0 9.0
011
11.5
011 11
011 11
015
15.4
014 14
017 17
022
22
022 22
022 22
030
30
027 27
027 27
037
37
034 34
032 32
043
43
040 40
041 41
056
56
052 52
052 52
072
72
065 65
062 62
105
105
077 77
077 77
170
170
096 96
125 125
300
255
125 125
144 144
156 156
180 180
300 255
12
B
B

Code and Options
page 197.
Units2162R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480VAC

For specific drive applications refer to the PowerFlex 700 User Manual.
Proper placement of drive units in the MCC is essential for proper operation and life cycle of the drive. Strong consideration should be given to
placing units with drives at the bottom of the section. When more than one drive unit is placed in a section, the drive unit with the highest rating
should be located at the bottom of the section.
PowerFlex 700 drives are provided with an appropriately sized control circuit transformer as standard.
2
3
4
5
6
PowerFlex 700 drives are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protected devices. An external overload relay is not required for single motor applications. PowerFlex
700 AC drives are not intended for use with single phase motors.
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
Nominal kW
Nominal HP
The horsepower and kW ratings shown below are
for reference only. PowerFlex 700 drive units should
be sized according to the application and output
ampere rating.
[3]
380-415V
0.37
0.55 - 0.75
1.1 - 1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45 - 55
75 - 90
0.5
0.75 - 1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
180
150
255
110 - 132
255
Space Factor
Space Factor
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
Delivery
Program
480V
1.1
1.3
2.1
3.4
3.5
5.0
8.0
8.7
11
11.5
14
15.4
22
27
30
34
37
40
43
52
56
65
72
77
96
105
125
156
170
7
Catalog Number NEMA
gasket [2]
2162RA-1P1K_-_
2162RA-1P3K_-_
2162RA-2P1K_-_
2162RA-3P4K_-_
2162RA-3P5K_-_
2162RA-5P0K_-_
2162RA-8P0K_-_
2162RA-8P7K_-_
2162RA-011K_-_
2162RA-011K_-_
2162RA-014K_-_
2162RA-015K_-_
2162RA-022K_-_
2162RA-027K_-_
2162RA-030K_-_
2162RA-034K_-_
2162RA-037K_-_
2162RA-040K_-_
2162RA-043K_-_
2162RA-052K_-_
2162RA-056K_-_
2162RA-065K_-_
2162RA-072K_-_
2162RA-077K_-_
2162RA-096K_-_
2162RA-105K_-_
2162RA-125K_-_
2162RA-156K_-_
2162RA-170K_-_
2.0
2.5
3.0
6.0, 20 W
6.0
25W, 20D[4]
2162RA-180K_-_
6.0, 35W, 20D[4]
2162RAT-300K_-_
6.0, 30W, 20D[4]
2162RAB-300K_-_
[4]
6.0, 35W, 20D
2162RAT-300K_-_
6.0, 30W, 20D[4]
2162RAB-300K_-_
200
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
6.0, 25 W
6.0
25W, 20D[4]
6.0
30W, 20D[4]
6.0
35W, 20D[4]
2162RA-1P1J_-_
2162RA-1P3J_-_
2162RA-2P1J_-_
2162RA-3P4J_-_
2162RA-3P5J_-_
2162RA-5P0J_-_
2162RA-8P0J_-_
2162RA-8P7J_-_
2162RA-011J_-_
2162RA-011J_-_
2162RA-014J_-_
2162RA-015J_-_
2162RA-022J_-_
2162RA-027J_-_
2162RA-030J_-_
2162RA-034J_-_
2162RA-037J_-_
2162RA-040J_-_
2162RA-043J_-_
2162RA-052J_-_
2162RA-056J_-_
2162RA-065J_-_
2162RA-072J_-_
2162RA-077J_-_
2162RA-096J_-_
2162RA-105J_-_
2162RA-125J_-_
2162RA-156J_-_
2162RA-170J_-_
9
10
11
SC
12
13
14
15
16
SC-II
17
2162RA-180J_-_
Available in NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with

gasket only
PE-II
[1] Ampere ratings are at a 4kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4kHz are selected, the drive output current ratings must be derated. For derating information, contact
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2162RA-037KN).
Select number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kilowatt or horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162RA-037KN-44K or 2162RA-037KB-44).
177

2
3
4
5
Units2162R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600VAC

PowerFlex 700 drives are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protected devices. An external overload relay is not
1.7 [2]
Nominal HP
The HP ratings shown below are for
reference only. PowerFlex 700 drive
units should be sized according to the
application and output ampere rating.
1
2.7 [2]
1.5-2
2162RA-2P7K_-_
3.9 [2]
2162RA-3P9K_-_
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Space
Factor
Catalog Number
1 w/ gasket [1]
Space Factor
2162RA-1P7K_-_
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2162RA-1P7J_-_
2.0
2162RA-2P7J_-_
2162RA-3P9J_-_
6.1 [2]
9 [2]
7.5
2162RA-9P0K_-_
11 [2]
10
2162RA-011K_-_
2162RA-011J_-_
17 [2]
15
2162RA-017K_-_
2162RA-017J_-_
22 [2]
20
27 [2]
25
32 [2]
30
41 [2]
40
52 [2]
50
62 [3]
60
77 [3]
75
125 [3]
100-125
144 [3]
150
2.0
2.5
2162RA-6P1K_-_
2162RA-022K_-_
3.0
2162RA-041K_-_
2162RA-052K_-_
6.0, 20W
6.0, 25W,
20D [4]
2162RA-6P1J_-_
2.5
3.0
2162RA-027K_-_
2162RA-032K_-_
Delivery
Program
2162RA-9P0J_-_
2162RA-022J_-_
2162RA-027J_-_
3.5
4.0
PE in U.S.,
2162RA-032J_-_
SC in
Canada
2162RA-041J_-_
2162RA-052J_-_
2162RA-062K_-_
6.0, 25W
2162RA-062J_-_
2162RA-077K_-_
6.0, 25W, 20D [4]
2162RA-077J_-_
2162RA-125K_-_
6.0, 30W, 20D [4]
2162RA-125J_-_
2162RA-144K_-_
6.0, 35W, 20D [4]
2162RA-144J_-_

Select voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2162RA-022KC).
Select number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162RA-022KC-33).
[3] Ampere ratings are at 2kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 2kHz are selected, the drive output current ratings may require derating. Contact your local Rockwell
Automation Sales Office and to PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, PFLEX-RM001x-EN-E.
17
178
Units2163R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 380-480VAC

Proper placement of drive units in the MCC is essential for proper operation and life cycle of the drive. Strong consideration should be given to
placing units with drives at the bottom of the section. When more than one drive unit is placed in a section, the drive unit with the highest rating
should be located at the bottom of the section.
HIM (Human Interface Module) is required. An I/O control interface is required. Select on page 200.
PowerFlex 700 drives are provided with an appropriately sized control circuit transformer as standard.
PowerFlex 700 drives are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload relay is not required for single
motor applications. PowerFlex 700 AC drives are not intended for use with single phase motors.
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
1.1
1.3
2.1
3.4
3.5
5.0
8.0
8.7
11
11.5
14
15.4
22
27
30
34
37
40
43
52
56
65
72
77
96
105
125
156
170
Nominal kW
Nominal HP
The horsepower and kW ratings shown below are for reference only.
Catalog Number
PowerFlex 700 drive units should be sized according to the application Space Factor NEMA Type 1 and
and output ampere rating.
Type 1 w/ gasket [2]
[3]
480V
380-415V
0.5
2163RA-1P1K_-_
2163RA-1P3K_-_
0.37
0.55 - 0.75
0.75 - 1
2163RA-2P1K_-_
1.5 - 2
2163RA-3P4K_-_
2163RA-3P5K_-_
1.1 - 1.5
2.2
3
2163RA-5P0K_-_
2.0
5
2163RA-8P0K_-_
2163RA-8P7K_-_
4
7.5
2163RA-011K_-_
5.5
2163RA-011K_-_
10
2163RA-014K_-_
2163RA-015K_-_
7.5
11
15
2163RA-022K_-_
20
2163RA-027K_-_
2163RA-030K_-_
15
2.5
25
2163RA-034K_-_
18.5
2163RA-037K_-_
2163RA-040K_-_
30
22
2163RA-043K_-_
3.0
40
2163RA-052K_-_
2163RA-056K_-_
30
2163RA-065K_-_
50
3.5
37
2163RA-072K_-_
60
6.0, 20 W 2163RA-077K_-_
2163RA-096K_-_
75
45 - 55
2163RA-105K_-_
100
2163RA-125K_-_
6.0
125
[4] 2163RA-156K_-_
25W, 20D
2163RA-170K_-_
75 - 90
180
150
255
110 - 132
255
200
6.0, 30W,
20D [4],[5]
Space Factor
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
Delivery
Program
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
6.0, 25 W
6.0
25W, 20D[4]
6.0
30 W, 20D[4]
2163RA-1P1J_-_
2163RA-1P3J_-_
2163RA-2P1J_-_
2163RA-3P4J_-_
2163RA-3P5J_-_
2163RA-5P0J_-_
2163RA-8P0J_-_
2163RA-8P7J_-_
2163RA-011J_-_
2163RA-011J_-_
2163RA-014J_-_
2163RA-015J_-_
2163RA-022J_-_
2163RA-027J_-_
2163RA-030J_-_
2163RA-034J_-_
2163RA-037J_-_
2163RA-040J_-_
2163RA-043J_-_
2163RA-052J_-_
2163RA-056J_-_
2163RA-065J_-_
2163RA-072J_-_
2163RA-077J_-_
2163RA-096J_-_
2163RA-105J_-_
2163RA-125J_-_
2163RA-156J_-_
2163RA-170J_-_
2163RA-180K_-_
6.0
2163RA-180J_-_
35 W, 20D[4]
2163RAT-300K_-_
2163RAB-300K_-_
2163RAT-300K_-_
2163RAB-300K_-_
Available in NEMA Type 1 and Type 1

with gasket only.
9
10
11
SC
12
13
14
15
16
SC-II
17
PE-II
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2163RA-037KN).
Select number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal kilowatt or horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163RA-037KN-44K or 2163RA-037KB-44).
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163RA-037KN-44KCA).
[5] When specifying circuit breaker codes CT, CB or CM on 132kW PowerFlex 700H drives the width of the section increases to 35.
179

2
3
4
5
Units2163R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 600VAC
Nominal HP
Maximum
The HP ratings shown below are for reference
Continuous
only. PowerFlex 700 drive units should be
Output
sized according to the application and output
Amperes
ampere rating.
[2]
1
1.7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

PowerFlex 700 drives are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protected devices. An external overload relay is not
Space
Factor
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [1]
Space
Factor
2163RA-1P7K_-_
Catalog Number NEMA

12 [2]
2163RA-1P7J_-_
2.7 [2]
1.5-2
3.9 [2]
6.1 [2]
9 [2]
7.5
2163RA-9P0K_-_
11 [2]
10
2163RA-011K_-_
2163RA-011J_-_
17 [2]
15
2163RA-017K_-_
2163RA-017J_-_
22 [2]
20
27 [2]
25
32 [2]
30
41 [2]
40
52 [2]
50
62 [3]
60
6.0, 20W 2163RA-062K_-_
77 [3]
75
2163RA-077K_-_
125 [3]
100-125
144 [3]
150
2163RA-2P7K_-_
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
2.0
2163RA-2P7J_-_
2163RA-3P9K_-_
2163RA-3P9J_-_
2163RA-6P1K_-_
2163RA-6P1J_-_
2163RA-022K_-_
2.5
3.0
2163RA-027K_-_
2163RA-032K_-_
2163RA-041K_-_
2163RA-052K_-_
6.0, 25W,
2163RA-125K_-_
20D[4]
2163RA-144K_-_
Delivery
Program
2163RA-9P0J_-_
2163RA-022J_-_
PE in U.S.,
2163RA-027J_-_
3.5
4.0
6.0, 25W
6.0, 25W,
20D[4]
6.0, 30W,
20D[4]
6.0, 35W,
20D[4]
2163RA-032J_-_
2163RA-041J_-_
SC in Canada
2163RA-052J_-_
2163RA-062J_-_
2163RA-077J_-_
2163RA-125J_-_
2163RA-144J_-_

Select voltage code from table on page 218 to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163RA-022KC).
Select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162RA-022KC-33).
Select the appropriate suffix from the table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163RA-022KC-33CA)
180
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162T and 2163T
PowerFlex 40 Drive
Bulletins 2162T and 2163T use PowerFlex 40 Drives
UL Class CC or J time delay drive input fuses provide both branch circuit and drive input
protection, fuse class dependent on drive rating
Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM)
adjustable frequency output to vary motor speed
3
4
5
6
2162T
2163T
A
A
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
6P0
6P0
K
K
B
B
NEMA
Line Voltage
Enclosure Type
38
38CA
14HBA0
14HBA0
Human Interface
Module and Options
8
9
Code
2162T
2163T
Type
Frequency AC Drive
Frequency AC Drive
Code
A

with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
K
2162T-38
2163T-38CA __CA
Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 224.
10
Code
11
Wiring Type
Type A
Nominal Constant Current Ratings (Amperes)

380-480V Line Voltage
600V Line Voltage
Code
Ratings
Code
Ratings
1P4
1.4
1P7
1.7
2P3
2.3
3P0
3.0
4P0
4.0
4P2
4.2
6P0
6.0
6P6
6.6
010
10.5
9P9
9.9
012
12
012
12.2
017
17
019
19
024
24
12
Code
N
KN
I
B
C
Line Voltage
380V [1]
400V [1]
415V [1]
480V
600V
13
14
[1] 400 VAC range drive used where input voltage is 380V 415 VAC. Units at these voltages are not UL or cUL
listed.
15

Code and Options
page 197.
16
17
181

2
3
4
5
Units2162T
Combination PowerFlex 40 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480VAC

Internal HIM (Human Interface Module) is included. Optional door mounted HIMs can be selected on page 200.
9
10
11
12
13
Nominal kW
Nominal HP
Maximum The horsepower and kw ratings shown below
Continuous are for reference only. PowerFlex 40 drive units
Output
should be sized according to the application
Amperes[1]
480V
380-415V[3]
1.4
0.37
0.5
2.3
0.55 - 0.75
0.75 - 1.0
4.0
1.1 - 1.5
2.0
6.0
2.2
3.0
10.5
3.7
5.0
12
5.5
7.5
17
7.5
10
24
11
15
Space
Factor
1.0[4]
2.0 [4]
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [2]
2162TA-1P4K_-_
2162TA-2P3K_-_
2162TA-4P0K_-_
2162TA-6P0K_-_
2162TA-010K_-_
2162TA-012K_-_
2162TA-017K_-_
2162TA-024K_-_
Space
Factor
1.5 [4]
2.0 [4]
2.5 [4]
3.0 [4]
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2162TA-1P4J_-_
2162TA-2P3J_-_
2162TA-4P0J_-_
2162TA-6P0J_-_
2162TA-010J_-_
2162TA-012J_-_
2162TA-017J_-_
2162TA-024J_-_
Delivery
Program
SC
your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office and/or refer to PowerFlex 40 User Manual, 22B-UM001x-EN-E.
Select voltage code from table on page 218 to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162TA-1P4KB).
Select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the horsepower or kilowatt rating desired (e.g., 2162TA-1P4KB-33 or 2162TA-1P4KN-33K).
[3] Units at these voltages are not UL listed or cUL listed
[4] Adding options to this catalog number could result in an increased space factor.
PowerFlex 40 Space Factors with Options

NEMA 1/1G
14
Voltage Frame Drive

Rating
Rating
15
B
16
380, 400,
415
C
17
B
480
C
182
1.4A
2.3A
4.0A
6.0A
10.5A
12A
17A
24A
1.4A
2.3A
4.0A
6.0A
10.5A
12A
17A
24A
NEMA 12
Base
Control
Isolated
Line or
Unit Station (1,
Signal
Load
(Space 2, 3, 4 or 5 Conditioner Reactors
Factor) devices)
(-14N2)
(-14R_ _)
1.0
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
N/A
N/A
Isolated
Signal
Conditioner
(-14N2) AND
Line or Load
Reactors
N/A
N/A
1.5
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
Base Control
Line or Isolated Signal
Station Isolated
Unit (1,
Signal
Load
Conditioner
2,
3,
4
(Space
Conditioner Reactors (-14N2) AND Line
or
5
Factor) devices) (-14N2) (-14R_ _) or Load Reactors
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
Units2162T

Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes[1]
1.7
3.0
4.2
6.6
9.9
12.2
19.0
Nominal HP
only. PowerFlex 40 drive units should be sized
according to the application and output
ampere rating.
1.0
1.5 - 2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10
15
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [2]
Space
Factor
2162TA-1P7K_-_
2162TA-3P0K_-_
2162TA-4P2K_-_
2162TA-6P6K_-_
2162TA-9P9K_-_
2162TA-012K_-_
2162TA-019K_-_
1.0 [3]
2.0 [3]
Space
Factor
1.5 [3]
2.0 [3]
2.5 [3]
3.0 [3]
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2162TA-1P7J_-_
2162TA-3P0J_-_
2162TA-4P2J_-_
2162TA-6P6J_-_
2162TA-9P9J_-_
2162TA-012J_-_
2162TA-019J_-_
Delivery
Program
Voltage Frame Drive

Rating
Rating
B
600
C
1.7A
3.0A
4.2A
6.6A
9.9A
12.2A
19A
1.0
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
6
7
10
Base Control
Station Isolated
Unit (1,
Signal
Load
Conditioner
2, 3, 4 Conditioner Reactors
(Space
(-14N2) AND Line
or
5
1.5
SC in Canada
NEMA 12
Base
Control
Isolated
Line or
Unit Station (1, Signal
Load
Factor) devices)
(-14N2)
(-14R_ _)
PE in U.S.,

Isolated
Signal
Conditioner
(-14N2) AND
Line or Load
Reactors
Select voltage code from table on page 218 to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162TA-1P7KC).
Select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162TA-1P7KC-35).
NEMA 1/1G
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
183
Units2163T
2
3
4
5
Combination PowerFlex 40 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 380-480VAC

Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes[1]
1.4
2.3
4.0
6.0
10.5
12
17
24
10
11
12
13
Nominal kW
Nominal HP
The HP and kW ratings shown below are for
reference only. PowerFlex 40 drive units
should be sized according to the application
480V
380-415V [3]
0.37
0.5
0.55 - 0.75
0.75 - 1.0
1.1 - 1.5
1.5 - 2.0
2.2
3.0
3.7
5.0
5.5
7.5
7.5
10
11
15
Space
Factor
1.0 [4]
2.0 [4]
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [2]
2163TA-1P4K_-_
2163TA-2P3K_-_
2163TA-4P0K_-_
2163TA-6P0K_-_
2163TA-010K_-_
2163TA-012K_-_
2163TA-017K_-_
2163TA-024K_-_
Space
Factor
1.5 [4]
2.0 [4]
2.5 [4]
3.0 [4]
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2163TA-1P4J_-_
2163TA-2P3J_-_
2163TA-4P0J_-_
2163TA-6P0J_-_
2163TA-010J_-_
2163TA-012J_-_
2163TA-017J_-_
2163TA-024J_-_
Delivery
Program
SC
Select voltage code from table on page 218 to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163TA-1P4KB).
Select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163TA-1P4KB-33).
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163TA-1P4KB-33CA).

NEMA 1/1G
14
Voltage Frame Drive
Rating
Rating
15
16
B
380, 400,
415
17
B
480
C
184
1.4A
2.3A
4.0A
6.0A
10.5A
12A
17A
24A
1.4A
2.3A
4.0A
6.0A
10.5A
12A
17A
24A
NEMA 12
Base
Control
Isolated
Line or
Load
Factor) devices)
(-14N2)
(-14R_ _)
1.0
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
N/A
N/A
Isolated
Signal
Conditioner
(-14N2) AND
Line or Load
Reactors
N/A
N/A
1.5
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
Base Control
Station Isolated
Unit (1,
Signal
Load
Conditioner
2,
3,
4
(Space
Conditioner
Reactors
(-14N2)
AND Line
or 5
Factor) devices)
(-14N2) (-14R_ _) or Load Reactors
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
Units2163T

Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes[1]
1.7
3.0
4.2
6.6
9.9
12.2
19.0
Nominal HP
only. PowerFlex 40 drive units should be sized
according to the application and output
ampere rating.
1.0
1.5 - 2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10
15
Space
Factor
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [2]
2163TA-1P7K_-_
2163TA-3P0K_-_
2163TA-4P2K_-_
2163TA-6P6K_-_
2163TA-9P9K_-_
2163TA-012K_-_
2163TA-019K_-_
1.0 [3]
2.0 [3]
Space
Factor
1.5 [3]
2.0 [3]
2.5 [3]
3.0 [3]
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2163TA-1P7J_-_
2163TA-3P0J_-_
2163TA-4P2J_-_
2163TA-6P6J_-_
2163TA-9P9J_-_
2163TA-012J_-_
2163TA-019J_-_
Delivery
Program
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PE in U.S.,
10
SC in Canada
Select voltage code from table on page 218 to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163TA-1P7KC).
Select the number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163TA-1P7KC-35).
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163TA-1P4KB-33CA).
11
12

NEMA 12
13
Base Control
Station Isolated
Unit (1,
Signal
Load
Conditioner
2, 3, 4 Conditioner Reactors
(Space
(-14N2) AND Line
or
5
14
NEMA 1/1G
Voltage Frame Drive
Rating
Rating
B
600
C
1.7A
3.0A
4.2A
6.6A
9.9A
12.2A
19A
Base Control Isolated

Line or
Load
Factor) devices) (-14N2)
(-14R_ _)
1.0
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
Isolated
Signal
Conditioner
(-14N2) AND
Line or Load
Reactors
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
15
16
17
185

2
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2164Q and 2165Q

PowerFlex 70 Drive with Manual Isolated Drive Bypass
Bulletins 2164Q and 2165Q use Normal Duty PowerFlex 70 Drives
Two interlocked compartments, one with bypass circuitry and one with drive - drive can be taken
offline and replaced as needed with minimal disruption to the application process
Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM) adjustable
frequency output to vary motor speed
3
4
5
2164Q
2165Q
A
A
Bulletin Number
Wiring Type
1P1
1P1
A
A
B
B
NEMA
Output Current Rating Enclosure Type
Line Voltage
33
33CA
14HA0
14HA0
Human Interface
Module and Options
9
10
Code
2164Q
11
2165Q
Type
Manual Drive Bypass
with PowerFlex 70 VFD
and Fusible Disconnect
Manual Drive Bypass
with PowerFlex 70 VFD
and Circuit Breaker
12
Code
A
13
14
Wiring Type
Type A
Code Line Voltage

B
480V
C
600V

NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with gasket
A
w/ external reset button
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with gasket
K
w/o external reset button
NEMA Type 12 w/ external reset
D
button
NEMA Type 12 w/o external reset
J
button
Nominal Constant Current Ratings

(Amperes) [1]
480 Line Voltage
600V Line Voltage
Code Ratings
Code Ratings
1P1 1.1
0P9 0.9
2P1 2.1
1P7 1.7
3P4 3.4
2P7 2.7
5P0 5.0
3P9 3.9
8P0 8
6P1 6.1
011 11
9P0 9.0
014 14
011 11
022 22
017 17
027 27
022 22
15
16
17
[1] Bulletins 2164Q and 2165Q use Normal Duty

PowerFlex 70 Drives.
186
2164Q-33
2165Q-33CA __CA
Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 224.
Code

Code and Options
page 197.
Units2164Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 480V

Configuration consists of two units. The bypass unit contains a fusible disconnect, bypass contactor, 6-pole manual bypass switch,
control circuit transformer and pull-apart terminal blocks. Drive unit contains PowerFlex 70 variable frequency drive.
A Human Interface Module is required. Select on page 200.
Drive On and Bypass On pilot lights (options 4_ _) and BYPASS-OFF-DRIVE/START-STOP (option 1F) must be specified.
See page 197.
Unit doors are interlocked.
To configure a manual drive bypass unit, replace the 2162Q bulletin number with 2164Q. All other 2162Q configurations, options
and accessories apply (e.g., 2162QA-1P1KB-33will become 2164Q-1P1AB-33).
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (DSA) options (11DSA2 and 11DSA3) are available for the bypass unit of the manual drive bypass
configuration.
Maximum Continuous
Output Amperes [1]
1.1
2.1
3.4
5
8
11
14
22
27
Nominal HP
rating.
0.5
0.75-1
1.5-2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
4
5
6
7
8
Space
Factor
2.5
3.0
3.5
Catalog Number
1 w/ gasket [2]
2164QA-1P1A_-_
2164QA-2P1A_-_
2164QA-3P4A_-_
2164QA-5P0A_-_
2164QA-8P0A_-_
2164QA-011A_-_
2164QA-014A_-_
2164QA-022A_-_
2164QA-027A_-_
Space
Factor
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2164QA-1P1D_-_
2164QA-2P1D_-_
2164QA-3P4D_-_
2164QA-5P0D_-_
2164QA-8P0D_-_
2164QA-011D_-_
2164QA-014D_-_
2164QA-022D_-_
2164QA-027D_-_
Delivery
Program
9
10
11
SC-II
12
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (2164QA-1P1AB-33).
Select HP rating code from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2164QA-1P1AB-33).
The catalog numbers listed include an external resent button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter A with
the letter K (e.g.,2164QA-1P1K_-_) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2164QA-1P1J_-_).
13
14
15
16
17
187

2
3
4
5
Units2164Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 600V
Maximum Continuous
Output Amperes [1]
10
0.9
1.7
2.7
3.9
6.1
9
11
17
22
11
12
13
14

See page 197.
and accessories apply (e.g., 2162QA-0P9KC-33will become 2164Q-0P9AC-33).
configuration.
Nominal HP
rating.
0.5
0.75-1
1.5-2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
Space
Factor
2.5
3.0
3.5
Catalog Number
1 w/ gasket [2]
2164QA-0P9A_-_
2164QA-1P7A_-_
2164QA-2P7A_-_
2164QA-3P9A_-_
2164QA-6P1A_-_
2164QA-9P0A_-_
2164QA-011A_-_
2164QA-017A_-_
2164QA-022A_-_
Space
Factor
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2164QA-0P9D_-_
2164QA-1P7D_-_
2164QA-2P7D_-_
2164QA-3P9D_-_
2164QA-6P1D_-_
2164QA-9P0D_-_
2164QA-011D_-_
2164QA-017D_-_
2164QA-022D_-_
Delivery
Program
PE-II in U.S
SC-II in Canada
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (2164QA-1P7AC-34).
Select HP rating code from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2164QA-1P7AC-34).
15
16
17
188
Units2165Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass,
480V

Configuration consists of two units. The bypass unit contains a circuit breaker, bypass contactor, 6-pole manual bypass switch,
control circuit transformer and pull-apart terminal blocks. Drive unit contains PowerFlex 70 variable frequency drive and pull-apart
terminal blocks.
and accessories apply (e.g., 2163QA-1P1KB-33will become 2165Q-1P1AB-33).
configuration.
See page 197.
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
1.1
2.1
3.4
5
8
11
14
22
27
Nominal HP
rating.
0.5
0.75-1
1.5-2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
Space
Factor
2.5
3.0
3.5
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [2]
2165QA-1P1A_-_
2165QA-2P1A_-_
2165QA-3P4A_-_
2165QA-5P0A_-_
2165QA-8P0A_-_
2165QA-011A_-_
2165QA-014A_-_
2165QA-022A_-_
2165QA-027A_-_
Space
Factor
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
Catalog Number NEMA

12 [2]
2165QA-1P1D_-_
2165QA-2P1D_-_
2165QA-3P4D_-_
2165QA-5P0D_-_
2165QA-8P0D_-_
2165QA-011D_-_
2165QA-014D_-_
2165QA-022D_-_
2165QA-027D_-_
4
5
6
7
8
9
Delivery
Program
10
11
SC-II
12
13
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2165QA-1P1AB).
Select HP rating code from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2165QA-1P1AB-33).
Select the appropriate suffix from the Circuit Breaker Type table on page 224 to identify circuit breaker type (e.g., 2165QA-1P1AB-33CA).
14
15
16
17
189

2
3
4
5
Units2165Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass,
600V
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
10
0.9
1.7
2.7
3.9
6.1
9
11
17
22
11
12
13
14

control circuit transformer and pull-apart terminal blocks. Drive unit contains PowerFlex 70 variable frequency drive and pull-apart
terminal blocks.
and accessories apply (e.g., 2163QA-0P9KC-33will become 2165Q-0P9AC-33).
configuration.
See page 197.
Nominal HP
rating.
0.5
0.75-1
1.5-2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
Space
Factor
2.5
3.0
3.5
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [2]
2165QA-0P9A_-_
2165QA-1P7A_-_
2165QA-2P7A_-_
2165QA-3P9A_-_
2165QA-6P1A_-_
2165QA-9P0A_-_
2165QA-011A_-_
2165QA-017A_-_
2165QA-022A_-_
Space
Factor
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
Catalog Number NEMA

12 [2]
2165QA-0P9D_-_
2165QA-1P7D_-_
2165QA-2P7D_-_
2165QA-3P9D_-_
2165QA-6P1D_-_
2165QA-9P0D_-_
2165QA-011D_-_
2165QA-017D_-_
2165QA-022D_-_
Delivery
Program
PE-II in U.S
SC-II in Canada
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2165QA-1P7AC).
Select HP rating code from table on page 218 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2165QA-1P7AC-33).
Select the appropriate suffix from the Circuit Breaker Type table on page 224 to identify circuit breaker type (e.g., 2165QA-1P7AC-33CA).
15
16
17
190
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2164R and 2165R
PowerFlex 700 Drive with Manual Isolated Drive Bypass

Two interlocked components, one with bypass circuitry and one with drive - drive can be taken offline and replaced as needed with
minimal disruption to the application process
Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM) adjustable frequency output to vary motor speed
3
4
5
2164R
2165R
A
A
Bulletin
Number
Wiring Type
034
034
A
A
B
B

NEMA
Enclosure Type
Line Voltage
44
44CA
14HA0
14HA0
Human Interface
Module and Options
7
8
Code
2164R
2165R
Type
Manual Drive Bypass
with PowerFlex 700
VFD Drive and Fusible
Disconnect
Manual Drive Bypass
with PowerFlex 700
VFD and Circuit Breaker
Code
Line
Code Voltage
B
480V
C
600V
2164R-44
2165R-44CA
Code and Circuit Breaker
Type
__CA Circuit Breaker Type.
See table on page 224.
9
10
11
Code
A
Wiring Type
Type A
Nominal Constant Current Ratings (Amperes) [1]

480V Line Voltage
600V Line Voltage
Code
Ratings
Code
Ratings
1P1
1.1
1P7
1.7
2P1
2.1
2P7
2.7
3P4
3.4
3P9
3.9
5P0
5.0
6P1
6.1
8P0
8
9P0
9
011
11
011
11
014
14
017
17
022
22
022
22
027
27
027
27
034
34
032
32
040
40
041
41
052
52
052
52
065
65
062
62
077
77
077
77
096
96
125
125
125
125
144
144
156
156
180
180

A
with gasket w/ external
reset button
K
with gasket w/o external
reset button
NEMA Type 12 w/ external
D
reset button
NEMA Type 12 w/o
J
12

Code and Options
page 197.
13
14
15
16
17
[1] Bulletins 2164R and 2165R use Normal Duty PowerFlex 700 Drives.
191

2
3
4
5
Units2164R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass,
480VAC
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
1.1
2.1
3.4
5
8
11
14
22
27
34
40
52
65
77
96
125
Nominal HP
PowerFlex 700 drive units
should be sized according to
the application and output
ampere rating.
0.5
0.75 - 1
1.5 - 2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
156
125
180
150
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes [1]
16

A Human Interface Module (HIM) and an I/O control interface are required. Select on page 200.
See page 197.
To configure a manual drive bypass unit, replace the 2162R bulletin number with 2164R. All other 2162R configurations, options
and accessories apply (e.g., 2162RA-034K_-44will become 2164RA-034A_-44).
configuration.
Space Factor
3.0
3.5
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0, 35 W
6.0
35 W, 20 D[3]
6.0
45 W, 20 D [3]
Catalog Number
NEMA Type 1 and
2164RA-1P1A_-_
2164RA-2P1A_-_
2164RA-3P4A_-_
2164RA-5P0A_-_
2164RA-8P0A_-_
2164RA-011A_-_
2164RA-014A_-_
2164RA-022A_-_
2164RA-027A_-_
2164RA-034A_-_
2164RA-040A_-_
2164RA-052A_-_
2164RA-065A_-_
2164RA-077A_-_
2164RA-096A_-_
2164RA-125A_-_
2164RA-156A_-_
2164RA-180A_-_
Space Factor
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.5
6.0
6.0, 35 W
6.0
35 W, 20 D[3]
6.0
45 W, 20 D[3]
6.0
50 W, 20 D[3]
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2164RA-1P1D_-_
2164RA-2P1D_-_
2164RA-3P4D_-_
2164RA-5P0D_-_
2164RA-8P0D_-_
2164RA-011D_-_
2164RA-014D_-_
2164RA-022D_-_
2164RA-027D_-_
2164RA-034D_-_
2164RA-040D_-_
2164RA-052D_-_
2164RA-065D_-_
2164RA-077D_-_
2164RA-096D_-_
2164RA-125D_-_
Delivery
Program
SC-II
2164RA-156D_-_
2164RA-180D_-_
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (2164RA-034AB).
Select number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2164RA-034AB-44).
the letter K (e.g.,2164RA-034K_-_) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2164RA-034J_-_).
192
Units2164R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass,
600VAC

See page 197.
configuration.
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Amperes
1.7 [2]
Nominal HP
The horsepower ratings shown below
Catalog Number NEMA
are for reference only. PowerFlex 700 Space Factor Type 1 and Type 1 w/
drive units should be sized according to
gasket [1]
the application and output ampere
rating.
1
2164RA-1P7A_-_
Space
Factor
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
1.5 - 2
3.9 [2]
2164RA-3P9A_-_
2164RA-3P9D_-_
6.1 [2]
2164RA-6P1A_-_
2164RA-6P1D_-_
9 [2]
7.5
2164RA-9P0A_-_
11 [2]
10
17 [2]
15
22 [2]
20
2164RA-022A_-_
27 [2]
25
2164RA-027A_-_
32 [2]
30
41 [2]
40
52 [2]
50
62 [3]
60
77 [3]
75
125 [3]
100 - 125
144 [3]
150
3.0
3.5
4.5
5.0
6.0, 35W
6.0, 35W,
20D [4]
6.0, 45W,
20D [4]
2164RA-2P7A_-_
3.0
3.5
2164RA-011D_-_
2164RA-017D_-_
2164RA-032A_-_
2164RA-041A_-_
2164RA-052A_-_
2164RA-062A_-_
2164RA-077A_-_
2164RA-125A_-_
2164RA-144A_-_
4.0
2164RA-022D_-_
9
10
11
2164RA-9P0D_-_
2164RA-017A_-_
2164RA-2P7D_-_
2164RA-011A_-_
Delivery
Program
2164RA-1P7D_-_
2.7 [2]
PE-II in U.S.,
12
SC-II in
Canada
13
2164RA-027D_-_
4.5
5.5
6.0, 35W
6.0, 35W,
20D [4]
6.0, 45W,
20D [4]
6.0, 50W,
20D [4]
2164RA-032D_-_
2164RA-041D_-_
2164RA-052D_-_
2164RA-062D_-_
14
2164RA-077D_-_
15
2164RA-125D_-_
2164RA-144D_-_

The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter A with
the letter K (e.g., 2164RA-034K_-_) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2164RA-034J_-_).
[4] Frame mounted, 20 deep section without vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5 deeper than standard.
193
16
17
Units2165R
2
3
4
5
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Isolated
Bypass, 480VAC
9
10
11
12
13
14
Nominal HP
The
horsepower
ratings shown
Maximum
Continuous
Output Amperes PowerFlex 700 drive units should
[1]
rating.
1.1
0.5
2.1
0.75 - 1
3.4
1.5 - 2
5
3
8
5
11
7.5
14
10
22
15
27
20
34
25
40
30
52
40
65
50
77
60
96
75
125
100
15
16
17

A Human Interface Module and an I/O control interface are required. Select on page 200.
configuration.
Drive On and Bypass On pilot lights (option 4_ _) and BYPASS-OFF-DRIVE/START-STOP (option 1F) must be specified.
See page 197.
156
125
180
150
Space Factor
3.0
3.5
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0, 35 W
6.0
35 W, 20 D[3]
6.0
45 W, 20 D [3]
Catalog Number
NEMA Type 1 and
2165RA-1P1A_-_
2165RA-2P1A_-_
2165RA-3P4A_-_
2165RA-5P0A_-_
2165RA-8P0A_-_
2165RA-011A_-_
2165RA-014A_-_
2165RA-022A_-_
2165RA-027A_-_
2165RA-034A_-_
2165RA-040A_-_
2165RA-052A_-_
2165RA-065A_-_
2165RA-077A_-_
2165RA-096A_-_
2165RA-125A_-_
2165RA-156A_-_
2165RA-180A_-_
Space Factor
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.5
6.0
6.0, 35 W
6.0
35 W, 20 D[3]
6.0
45 W, 20 D[3]
6.0
50 W, 20 D[3]
Catalog Number
NEMA 12 [2]
2165RA-1P1D_-_
2165RA-2P1D_-_
2165RA-3P4D_-_
2165RA-5P0D_-_
2165RA-8P0D_-_
2165RA-011D_-_
2165RA-014D_-_
2165RA-022D_-_
2165RA-027D_-_
2165RA-034D_-_
2165RA-040D_-_
2165RA-052D_-_
2165RA-065D_-_
2165RA-077D_-_
2165RA-096D_-_
2165RA-125D_-_
Delivery
Program
SC-II
2165RA-156D_-_
2165RA-180D_-_
Select voltage code from table on page 218 (e.g., 2165RA-034AB).
Select number from table on page 218 that corresponds to the kilowatt rating desired (e.g., 2165RA-034AB-44).
Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2165RA-037AN-44KCA).
the letter K (e.g.,2165RA-034K_-_) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2165RA-034J_-_).
194
Units2165R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 600VAC

Drive On and Bypass On pilot lights (option 4_ _) and BYPASS-OFF-DRIVE/START-STOP (option 1F) must be specified.
See page 197.
and accessories apply (e.g., 2162RA-022K_44will become 2164RA-022A_44).
configuration.
Nominal HP
The
horsepower
ratings shown below
Maximum
are for reference only. PowerFlex 700
Continuous
Output Amperes drive units should be sized according
to the application and output ampere
rating.
[2]
1
1.7
[2]
1.5
-2
2.7
Space
Factor
Catalog Number NEMA

gasket [1]
Space
Factor
2165RA-1P7A_-_
3.0
2165RA-2P7A_-_
Catalog Number NEMA

12 [2]
3.0
2165RA-3P9A_-_
2165RA-3P9D_-_
6.1 [2]
2165RA-6P1A_-_
2165RA-6P1D_-_
9 [2]
7.5
2165RA-9P0A_-_
11 [2]
10
17 [2]
15
22 [2]
20
2165RA-022A_-_
27 [2]
25
2165RA-027A_-_
32 [2]
30
41 [2]
40
52 [2]
50
62 [3]
60
77 [3]
75
125 [3]
100 - 125
144 [3]
150
3.5
4.5
5.0
6.0, 35W
6.0, 35W,
20D [4]
6.0, 45W,
20D [4]
3.5
2165RA-011D_-_
2165RA-017A_-_
2165RA-017D_-_
2165RA-032A_-_
2165RA-041A_-_
2165RA-052A_-_
2165RA-062A_-_
2165RA-077A_-_
2165RA-125A_-_
2165RA-144A_-_
10
2165RA-022D_-_
11
PE-II in U.S.,
12
2165RA-027D_-_
4.5
5.5
6.0, 35W
6.0, 35W,
20D [4]
6.0, 45W,
20D [4]
6.0, 50W,
20D [4]
2165RA-9P0D_-_
2165RA-011A_-_
4.0
2165RA-2P7D_-_
Delivery
Program
2165RA-1P7D_-_
3.9 [2]
2165RA-032D_-_
2165RA-041D_-_
SC-II in
Canada
13
2165RA-052D_-_
2165RA-062D_-_
14
2165RA-077D_-_
2165RA-125D_-_
15
2165RA-144D_-_

The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter A with
the letter K (e.g., 2165RA-034K_-_) or replace the letter D with the letter J (e.g., 2165RA-034J_-_).
Select the appropriate suffix from the table on page 224 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2165RA-022AC-33CA)
[4] Frame mounted, 20 deep section without vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5 deeper than standard.
195
16
17

2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
196

Accessories for Combination Variable Frequency
To select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number: A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red, W = white (e.g., 4R is a red ON
pilot light). Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type pilot lights. Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights. White is
not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights.
PowerFlex
PowerFlex 40,
Bulletin 1336
70 and 700
70
and
700
PLUS II Drives
Manual
Drive
Drives
Option
Delivery
Bypass
Option
Description
Number
Program
2162Q 2163Q 2164Q 2165Q
2162P 2163P 2162R 2163R 2164R 2165R
2162T 2163T
Push Buttons [1],[2],[3]
-1
-1E
DRIVE STARTDRIVE STOP

JOG
Push Buttons and

Selector Switch [1],[3]
-1F
BYPASS-OFF-DRIVE, BYPASS START-BYPASS STOP
-3
[1] [3]
Selector Switch ,
[4]
-3E
[4]
3
4
5
6
7
REQUIRED
AUTOMANUAL (speed select)

FORWARDREVERSE
HANDOFFAUTO
-3F [2]
-4_
Standard type
-4_ _
-4_ _
-4L_
LED type
-4L_ _
Pilot Lights
-4L _ _
(Transformer Type) [3] -5_
Push-to-Test standard type
-5_ _
-5_ _
-5L_
Push-to-Test LED type
-5L_ _
-5L_ _
For control circuit transformers (options 6P and 6XP), see page 198
RUN
RUN-AT SPEED
BYPASS ON-DRIVE ON
RUN
RUN-AT SPEED
BYPASS ON-DRIVE ON
RUN
RUNAT SPEED
BYPASS ON-DRIVE ON
RUN
RUN-AT SPEED
BYPASS ON-DRIVE ON
9
REQUIRED
SC
10
11
12
[1] When three (3) or less pilot devices, including option 760, the speed potentiometer, are selected Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied except selector switches are Bulletin
800H devices. When more than three (3) pilot lights are selected, 800F pilot devices are supplied.
[2] Door-mounted push buttons (DRIVE START - DRIVE STOP and JOG) or AUTO-MANUAL selector switch cannot be selected in conjunction with HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch or
14GK5, 14GU6, 14GM5, 14GM6, 14GMS5, 14GD, 14GC or 14GMS6 except when using option 1F on Bulletin 2164 and 2165 units.
[3] Space factor adders may be required. When selected in 2162T and 2163T PowerFlex 40 units, see pages 181-185.
[4] Not available with DeviceNet communication module 14GK5, 14GU6, 14GM5, 14GM6, 14GMS5, 14GD, 14GC or 14GMS6.
13
14
15
16
17
197
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive
2
Bulletin 1336
PLUS II Drive
Description
Option
Option Number
3
4
Primary
Voltage
220V-240V
5
-6P
Standard capacity
with primary
protection
380V-480V
600V
9
Control Circuit Transformer
10
220V-240V
11
-6XP
100 watt extra
capacity with
primary protection
12
380V-480V
13
600V
14
0.5-7.5 (0.37-7.5)
10-30 (11-22)
0.5-10 (0.37-7.5)
15-25 (11-22)
30
0.5-20 (0.25-15)
Enclosure
Type
1, 1G
1, 1G
12
12
12
1, 1G
Transformer
Rating
80VA
130VA
80VA
130VA
200VA
80VA
25-150 [1] (18.5-90)
1, 1G
130VA
1, 1G
350VA
12
12
80VA
130VA
12
200VA
1, 1G
1, 1G
1, 1G
12
12
12
1, 1G
1, 1G
12
12
12
1, 1G
80VA
130VA
350VA
80VA
130VA
200VA
130VA
200VA
130VA
200VA
250VA
130VA
Drive Horsepower (kW)
150-250 [2]
(110-160)
0.5-20 (0.25-15)
25-50 (18.5-37)
60-150 [1] (45-90)

1-20
25-125
150-250
1-20
25-50
60-125
0.5-7.5 (0.37-7.5)
10-30 (11-22)
0.5-10 (0.37-7.5)
15-25 (11-22)
30
0.5-20 (0.25-15)
25-150 [1] (18.5-90)
1, 1G
200VA
150-250 [2] (110-160)

0.5-20 (0.25-15)
25-50 (18.5-37)
1, 1G
500VA
12
12
130VA
200VA
12
250VA
1, 1G
1, 1G
1, 1G
12
12
12
130VA
200VA
500VA
130VA
200VA
250VA
60-150 [1] (45-90)

1-20
25-125
150-250
1-20
25-50
60-125
[1] For 150HP variable torque applications only.

[2] For 380V-480V constant torque and 200 HP-250HP 480V variable torque applications only.
15
16
17
198
2162P
2163P
Delivery
Program
SC
Bulletin 1336
PLUS II Drive
Option
Option
Number
-14GR [1]
Communication
Modules [5]
(mutually
exclusive)
-11DSA2
-11DSA3
DeviceNet
-14GD [1]
RS-232, 422, 485, DF1 and DH-485 protocol,

mounted on drive
2163Q
2163R
2163T
[9]
[9]
PowerFlex
70 and 700
Manual Drive
Bypass
2164Q
2164R
-14GM5 [2]
DeviceNet, mounted on drive
-14GM6 [2]
Enhanced DeviceNet, mounted on drive
For B and larger drive

frame sizes [3]
SC
PE
SC
PE
[6],[7]
[6],[7]
[6] [7]
[6] [7]
[6], [7]
[6], [7]
7
8
For all drive frame

sizes [8]
9
SC
10
11
For all drive frame

sizes
ControlNet Communication Module, Mounted Internal to Drive.
3
4
PE
DeviceNet communication module, mounted internal to drive

For A1-A4 drive
frame sizes [4]
Delivery
Program
SC
For B and larger drive

frame sizes [4]
For all drive frame
sizes
2165Q
2165R
For A1-A4 drive

frame sizes [4]
-14GK5 [2],[3] DeviceNet, mounted external to drive

-14GU6 [2],[3] Enhanced DeviceNet, mounted external to drive
-14GK61
DeviceNet with (4) input points, mounted external
[1],[2],[3]
to drive
-14GC [1]
2162Q
2162R
2162T
For use with contactors and starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. (4)
120V inputs and (2) 120V outputs. Not to be used with options 7FEC_ or 7FC_.
Available for 110V-120V control only.
For use with contactors and starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. (4)
24VDC inputs and (2) 240VAC (max), 30VDC (max) outputs. Not to be used with
7FEC_ or 7FC_. Available for 110V-120VAC or 220V-240VAC control voltage.
-14GMS5 [5] DeviceNet, snap-in mounted on drive

-14GMS6 [5] Enhanced DeviceNet, snap-in mounted on drive
ControlNet
Communication
Module
2162P 2163P
Remote I/O communication module, mounted internal to drive
-14GD1 [2],[3] Single point RI/O, mounted external to drive

-14GD2 [2],[3] mounted external to drive
-14GM1 [2] Single point RI/O, mounted on drive
-14GM2 [2] mounted on drive
-14GMS1 [5] Single point RI/O, mounted on drive
-14GMS2 [5]
DeviceNet
Communication
Modules
(mutually
exclusive)
Description
PowerFlex 40, 70
and 700 Drives
[9]
[9]
[6] [7]
[6] [7]
[1] Communication modules (options -14GC, 14GD and 14GR) are mutually exclusive on Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, 2163R, 2164Q, 2164R, 2165Q, 2165R, 2162T and 2163T.
[2] Communication modules (options 14GD1, 14GD2, 14GK5, 14GK61, 14GM1, 14GM2 and 14GM5) are mutually exclusive with analog isolation (options 14N2 and 14N3) on
Bulletins 2162P and 2163P.
[3] Bulletin 1203-S03 splitter cable is used when externally mounted communication modules are used with door-mounted HIMs (14HAPC, 14HA1C, 14HC3S, 14HC5S, 14HA2C,
14HJPC, or 14HJ2C) on Bulletin 2162P, 2162Q, 2162R, 2163P, 2163Q, 2163R, 2164Q, 2164R, 2165Q and 2165R drives.
[4] Refer to Appendix, page 259, for Drive Frame table.
[5] Snap-in communication modules (options 14GMS1, 14GMS2, 14GMS5 and 14GMS6) are mutually exclusive with snap-in Human Interface Modules (options 14HASBC,
14HCSPC, 14HCS1C and 14HCS2C).
[6] When communication is desired for Bulletin 2164Q, 2164R, 2165Q, or 2165R units, one communication module must be selected for each of the bypass compartments.
[7] Options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3 are available for the bypass compartment of Bulletin 2164Q, 2164R, 2165Q and 2165R units.
[8] Not available for E-frame drives. See Appendix, 259, for drive frame sizes.
[9] Not available on PowerFlex 40 Drives.
12
13
14
15
16
17
199
2
3
Option
4
5
Option
Number
Description
-14HABC [2]
Blank cover. No functionality.
-14HAPC [2]
-14HJPC [2]
Programmer only
Programmer/Control with Analog
Potentiometer
Programmer/Control with Digital
Potentiometer
Programmer only
-14HJ2C [2]

Potentiometer
-14HA1C
[2]
-14HA2C [2]
Bulletin 1336
PLUS II Drive
PowerFlex 40, 70
and 700 Drives
2162P 2163P
2162Q
2162R
2162T
2163Q
2163R
2163T
PowerFlex
70 and 700
Manual Drive
Delivery
Bypass
Program
2164Q 2165Q
2164R 2165R
Door mounted in bezel. Cable

to drive included. Available
on NEMA Type 1 and Type
1 with gasket ONLY.
Door mounted. HIM is not
removable (Bezel and HIM
are one piece; one HIM
required per drive unit).
Available on NEMA Type 12
ONLY.
-14HASBC [3] Blank cover. No functionality.
9
10
Programmer only with upload and

-14HCSPC [3] download capabilities
Programmer/Control with Analog
Human Interface -14HCS1C [3] Potentiometer and upload/download
capabilities
Module (HIM) [1]
(mutually
-14HCS2C [3] Potentiometer and upload/download
exclusive)
capabilities
-14HBA0
No HIM (blank plate)
11
12
13
14
15
16
Mounted inside unit on drive

in snap-in cradle. Available
on NEMA Type 1, 1 with
gasket and 12 [4]. Includes
viewing window on door.
Mounted in bezel on the door.

HIM is removable. NEMA 1,
1G only. Cable to drive is
protected
SC
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
-14HBA2
-14HBA3
-14HBA4
LCD display, digital keypad

LCD display, full numeric keypad
LCD display, analog potentiometer
-14HBA5
LCD display, programmer only
[5]
[5]
-14HA0
No HIM (blank plate)
[5]
[5]
-14HA2
LCD display, digital keypad
-14HA3
-14HA4
LCD display, analog potentiometer
-14HA5
-14HC2S
-14HC3S
-14HC5S
Mounted inside unit on drive.

Available on NEMA Type 1, 1
with gasket and 12. Includes
viewing window on door.
Door mounted. HIM is not
removable. Cable to drive is
included. NEMA Type 12
Only.
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[6]
[6]
[5] [7]
[5] [7]
[5] [7]
[5] [7]
,
,
[1] A Human Interface Module (HIM) must be selected, except on Bulletin 2162T and 2163T. Optional door mounted HIMs are available for 2162T and 2163T units. PowerFlex 40
drives include an integral HIM as standard.
[2] Bulletin 1203-S03 splitter cable is used when door mounted HIMs and an externally mounted communication module (14GD1, 14GD2, 14GK5 or 14GU6) are used on Bulletin
2162P, 2162Q, 2162R, 2163P, 2163Q, 2164Q, 2164R, 2165Q and 2165R units.
[3] Snap-in communication modules (options 14GMS1, 14GMS2 and 14GMS5) are mutually exclusive with snap-in Human Interface Modules (options 14HASBC, 14HCSPC,
14HCS1C and 14HCS2C).
[4] Not available for 1336 PLUS II E-frame drives. See pages 255 for drive frame sizes.
[5] Not available on Bulletin 2162T or 2163T
[6] Only available on PowerFlex 40, 2162T and 2163T.
[7] Space Factor adder may be required. See page 203.
17
200
Option
Number
Option
Bulletin 1336 PowerFlex 40, 70 and

PLUS II Drive
700 Drives
Description
2162P
Encoder Feedback [1]
-14ENC1
-14L4
-14L4E
Control Logic Interface
-14L5
[2]
Board
-14L5E
-14L6
-14L6E
-14DA1C
I/O Control Voltage
Enhanced Control
Platform
[3]
[1]
2163Q
2163R
2163T
[1]
2164Q
2164R
[1]
[4] [5]
[4] [5]
[4] [5]
[4] [5]
120 VAC Control Voltage Interface with Vector Control
[4],[5]
[4],[5]
[4],[5]
[4],[5]
-14DA1E
24 VDC Control Voltage with Sensorless Vector Control
[6]
[6]
120 VAC Control Voltage with Sensorless Vector Control
-14CO
Enhanced control platform for PowerFlex 70 drive units

Enhanced control platform for PowerFlex 70 drive units with
DriveGuard Safe-off Option
Two (2) isolated configurable inputs
One (1) isolated bipolar input (10V or 20mA) and one (1)
isolated thermistor input
One (1) isolated bipolar input (10V or 20mA) and one (1)
isolated configurable input
Single-ended, non-isolated configurable (including pot) input and
two (2) single-ended, non-isolated outputs (1 configurable,
1-20mA)
Two (2) isolated configurable outputs
One (1) isolated configurable input and output
One (1) isolated pulse input, one (1) non-isolated pulse output
and one (1) single-ended, non-isolated configurable output
Provides a DC signal that is proportional to the drive DC output
signal. The signal is fully isolated from the drive output, line
power and ground.
-14GO
-14LA1
Analog Interface Board
-14LA3
(Slot B) [9]
-14LA4
-14LA5
-14N2 [10]
Delivery
Program
[1]
-14DA1D
-14DA1F
2165Q
2165R
Encoder Feedback Module, 12V

5V TTL control logic interface board
5V TTL control logic interface board with encoder feedback
24V AC/DC control interface board
24V AC/DC control interface board with encoder feedback
115V AC control logic interface board
115V AC control logic interface board with encoder feedback
24 VDC Control Voltage Interface with Vector Control
-14LA2
Analog Interface Board
-14LA6
(Slot A) [9]
-14LA7
Analog Output
Isolation
2163P
2162Q
2162R
2162T
PowerFlex
70 and 700
Manual Drive
Bypass
3
4
SC
PE
SC
PE
SC
PE
5
6
[6]
[6]
[7] [8]
[7] [8]
[7] [8]
[7] [8]
[7],[8]
[7],[8]
[7],[8]
[7],[8]
7
SC
8
9
PE
10
SC
11
PE
SC
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Only available on PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control platform.

A control logic interface board MUST be selected.
An I/O control board must be selected.
Available on PowerFlex 700 only. PowerFlex 70 is 24VDC control only, supplied by the PowerFlex 70 drive.
Not available on Bulletin 2162T or 2163T.
Available for PowerFlex 700H Drives only. Sensorless vector control platform.
Enhanced control option must be specified on Bulletin 2162Q, 2163Q, 2164Q or 2165Q units.
Available only on Bulletin 2162Q, 2163Q, 2164Q or 2165Q units.
Configurable inputs and outputs are 10V or 20mA. Analog interface boards (options 14LA2, 14LA6 and14LA7) are not available with door mounted speed potentiometer
(option 760).
[10] Space factor adder may be required. See page 203.
12
13
14
15
16
17
201
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A load reactor (connecting a reactor on the load side of the drive) should be considered as a means to address one or more of the following issues:
1.)Multi-motor applications (one drive feeding more than one motor).
2.)A low voltage insulation class motor applied on a long cable length.
3.)575V motor applications (other than short cable length applications).
A load reactor is NOT required for applications where:
1.)Line voltage is 230V or less.
2.)A Bulletin 1204 terminator unit is utilized.
3.)A Bulletin 1204 reflected wave reduction device (used on 1305 drives only) is utilized.
4.)An Allen-Bradley controlled matched solution is being applied (e.g., a 1850V CIV motor is used for a cable length of 600 ft. [185 m] or less in a 575V application).
A line reactor (connecting a reactor on the line side of the drive) should be considered as a means to address one or more of the following issues:
1.)Applications with severe power line transient disturbances degrading the power quality of the incoming power line (e.g., arcing during power line switching, arc
welder applications, or switching of a system power factor correction capacitor bank at the main service [especially if the PFCC bank is switched by a vacuum
contactor]).
2.)Applications utilizing improvement of power line harmonic content.
However, due to the built-in DC link reactor internal to the Allen-Bradley IGBT-based PWM drives (frames A4, B, C, D and E on Bulletins 2162P and 2163P, as
listed on page 258), a line reactor will usually have little effect on the improvement of power line harmonic distortion.
3.)Applications exposed to excessive high voltage transients due to lightning.
However, a surge protective device unit for the total MCC is recommended for such applications (e.g., catalog #2100-SPKB-1, catalog #2100-SPKC-1, etc.).
Applications with both line and load reactors are not recommended without first contacting your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. While this application is not
detrimental to the drive itself, it may produce erroneous drive operation caused by effects of common mode current. These effects can be influenced by drive HP, carrier
frequency, motor load and output cable length. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office when both line and load reactors are deemed necessary for the
application.
Additional recommendations are available in the specific IGBT-based PWM inverter user manual. Consult these manuals for restrictions regarding drive carrier frequency,
motor cable length and motor insulation class (inverter class motors). Information on the use of reactors and the use of Bulletin 1204 terminators can also be found in the
user manuals.
PowerFlex 40, 70 PowerFlex 70 and
Bulletin 1336
700 Manual Drive
PLUS II Drive
and 700 Drives [1]
Bypass [1]
Delivery
Program
2162Q
2163Q
2164Q
2165Q
Option
Option Number
Description
2162P
2163P
2162R
2163R
2164R
2165R
2162T
2163T
0.5-1 HP
1.5-2 HP
3-5 HP
7.5 HP
10 HP
15 HP
20-25 HP
480V
SC in U.S
30 HP
40 HP
50-60 HP
75 HP
100 HP
-14R_
125 HP
3% impedance line or load reactor.
[3] [5]
Line or Load
, (See space Available for 480V and 600V drive units
150 HP
factor adders on up to 60HP
Reactors [2]
1 HP
page 203)
2 HP
3-7.5 HP
10 HP
15 HP
PE in
20-25 HP
U.S.,
600V
30 HP
SC in
40 HP
Canada
50-60 HP
75 HP
100 HP
125 HP
150 HP
3%
impedance
line
or
load
reactor.
Line or Load
480V and
75 - 250 HP
-14R_ _ _ _ [3],[5] Available for 480V and 600V drive units,
600V
Reactors [2],[4]
75HP through 250 HP
PE-II
Load Reactor
3% impedance load reactor for 200HP
[3]
480V
200 HP
-14RXL _ _
PowerFlex 700H drive units
Only [4],[6]
[1] Line or load reactors are available on PowerFlex 40 drives through 15 HP, PowerFlex 70 drives through 50 HP, PowerFlex 700 drives through 150HP and PowerFlex 700H at 200HP.
[2] Line and load reactors are mutually exclusive, as space factor adders may be required see page 203 and 204.
[3] The option numbers listed are not complete:
Select LX for line reactor or XL for load reactors (e.g., 14RLX).
For drive units 75HP through 250HP, select the drive supplementary unit identification code (01-99) (e.g., 14RLX01). The supplementary unit identification code must begin
with 01 and increase sequentially with multiple drive units (02, 03, 04, etc.). Each drive unit is to have a unique supplementary unit identification code that correlates
with the same identification code on the supplementary unit. See page 159 for catalog number .
[4] Line or load reactors for 75 through 250HP drives at 480V and 600V are separate units from the drive units. The line and load reactors require an additional section mounted to the
right of the section with the drive. The reactor will be mounted in a supplementary drive unit in the bottom of the additional section. The two (2) sections will be one (1) shipping
block. Not available in back-to-back construction.
[5] Common mode choke is not included when load reactor option 14RXL or 14RXL_ _ is selected on 2162P and 2163P units.
[6] PowerFlex 700H drives have approximately 3% of inherent line reactance.
202
Space Factor Adders for Line or Load Reactors
Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2162P and 2163P
NEMA Type
1, 1G, 12
Rating
25HP
30HP
Space Factor Adder
0.5
4
Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2162Q and 2163Q
480V
NEMA Type
1, 1G
Rating
1.1A
2.1A
3.4A
5.0A
8.0A
11.0A
14.0A
34.0A
Space Factor Adder
52.0A
[2]
65.0
[2]
600V
NEMA Type
0.5
1, 1G
Rating
0.9A
1.7A
2.7A
3.9A
6.1A
9.0A
11.0A
Space Factor Adder
6
0.5
7
8
0.5 [1]
[1] Required for option -14RXL_, load reactor only.

[2] See unit pages for space factor adders.
10

NEMA Type
12
Rating
34.0A
52.0A
65.0
Space Factor Adder

0.5
11
[1]
[1] See unit pages for space factor adders.
12

480V
NEMA Type
12
Rating
5.0A
8.0A
11A
14A
NEMA Type
0.5
12
Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2162R and 2163R

480V
NEMA Type
Rating
1, 1G
27A [1]
34A
40A
52A [2]
65A [3]
13
600V
Space Factor Adder
Space Factor Adder
12
0.5
14
15
NEMA Type
1, 1G
0.5, 1.0
Rating
12
0.5
Space Factor Adder
16
22A[1]
27A
32A
41A
52A [4]
1.1A [1]
3.4A [1]
Space Factor Adder
600V
0.5
2.1A [1]
Rating
3.9A
6.1A
9.0A
11A
17
0.5
1.7 - 3.9 [1]

27A
32A
5.0A [1]
34A
40A
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Bulletin 2163R only.

Requires 0.5 space factor for line reactor (option -14RLX), 1.0 space factor for load reactor (option -14RXL).
Bulletin 2162R requires 1.0 space factor adder and Bulletin 2163R requires 0.5 space factor adder.
Bulletin 2162R only.
203
2
Space Factor Adders for Line or Load Reactors

Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2164R and 2165R
480V
3
4
5
NEMA Type
Rating
34A
1, 1G
52A [1]
65A
14A
34A
40A
12
Space Factor Adder
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
204
NEMA Type
1, 1G
12
0.5
[1] Space factor adder needed for load reactor (option -14RXL) only.
600V
Rating
27A
32A
27A
Space Factor Adder

0.5
PowerFlex
70 and 700
Manual Drive
Delivery
Bypass
Program
2162Q 2163Q 2164Q 2165Q
2163P 2162R 2163R
2162T 2163T 2164R 2165R
Bulletin 1336
PLUS II Drive
Option
Option
Number
Grounded Unit
-79GD
Door [1]
Unit Load
Connector
Unit Ground
Stab
-79L
-79LT
-79U
-79UT
-98 [2]
Auxiliary
Contacts
T-Handle
-98X [3]
-99 [2]
-99X [3]
-111
-750
Control Circuit -750B

Wiring [4]
-750S
-751D
Control Wire
Markers
Description
Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on hinge of unit door. Unit door grounding strap
for IEC requirements.
Specify on plug-in units for sections with
Unplated copper
unplated vertical unit load ground bus
Specify on plug-in units for sections with tin Tin plated cooper
plated vertical unit load ground bus
Specify on plug-in units for sections with
Copper alloy
vertical plug-in ground bus. Unplated copper Unplated copper
unit ground stab can also be used with steel
Tin plated cooper
vertical ground bus.
Normally OpenOne (1) N.O. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with
Normally OpenOne (1) N.O. mounted internally. Circuit breaker units only.
Normally ClosedOne (1) N.C. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with
Normally ClosedOne (1) N.C. mounted internally. Circuit breaker units only.
T-Handle latch on unit door. Not available on 2160P units.
#14 AWG (tinned) copper wire, Type MTW (TEW) 90C
Tinned power and #14 AWG, Type MTW (TEW) 90C control wire, including stab
wires and jumper
#14 AWG (tinned) copper wire, Type SIS 90C
Brady Datab wire markers at each end of the control wires. Not available in Canada.
-751HS
Heat shrink type wire markers
-751S
Door Mounted
Speed
Potentiometer -760
2162P
PowerFlex 40,
70 and 700
Drives
2
3
4
5
6
SC
7
8
9
SC (+2
days)
SC
SC (+2
days)
10
11
10k ohm single-turn speed potentiometer
[5],[6]
French Legend -860F

Plates
Unit Door
Nameplates [1]
Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot devices.

Specify 860F when pilot device options are selected.
Nameplate is white with black
1.125 3.625 engraved 3-line nameplate or letters or black with white letters.
4-line nameplate
Phenolic plate. Nameplate is white
with black letters or black with white
letters.
Stainless Steel
Nameplate
Screws [1]
Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates (2 per unit)
Export Packing
Below Deck
Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing is not watertight or
waterproof. Extended storage may require space heater and other considerations. For
sections, see page 28.
SC
12
13
SC-II
SC (+2
days)
[1] Also available on 2160P units.

[2] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position
only. Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected. Auxiliary
[3] The maximum number of auxiliaries that can be supplied is two (2). These are form C contacts. Each form C contact includes one N.O. and one N.C. contact. Internal auxiliary
contacts (98X or 99X) are wired to a 3-point floating terminal block.
[4] Options for factory wiring of control circuits. Device and component internal wiring and wiring that could affect operation or certification(s) (e.g., insulation temperature class,
EMC shielding requirements, communication requirements, UL, cUL, CSA and CE) are not included.
[5] Door mounted speed potentiometer (option 760) is not available with analog interface boards (options 14LA2, 14LA6 and 14LA7).
[6] Mutually exclusive with Human Interface Module options 14HA1C, 14HA2C, 14HN1C, 14HN2C, 14HJ2C, 14HCS1C and 14HCS2C.
205
14
15
16
17
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
206
Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling

Panels
Bulletin 2180E, 2182E, 2183E

with Bulletin 1771 Programmable I/O Chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Bulletin 2180E, 2182E and 2183E units contain one or more Bulletin 1771
input/output chassis. Space factors depend on the specific features, options,
modifications and accessories selected. Power supply and terminal blocks are
optional.
Unit features:
Without disconnecting means or plug-in stabs, one 4-slot or 8-slot chassis in 2.0 space
factor units.
With disconnecting means (15A trip circuit breaker or 30A disconnect switch), control
circuit transformer and plug-in stabs, one 4-slot or 8-slot chassis in 3.0 space factor
units.
Viewing window in the door to permit visual verification of the
I/O status indicators.
NOTE: Plug-in units must be located in the bottom of the vertical section.
25 and 35 wide full section features:

One 8-slot chassis in 25 wide section, with or without horizontal bus.
Two 8-slot chassis in 25 wide section, with or without horizontal bus.
One or two 16-slot chassis with 35 wide section.
Can be specified without or with disconnecting means (30A trip circuit breaker or 30A
disconnect switch) and control circuit transformer (non-isolated).
Viewing window in the door to permit visual verification of the I/O status indicators.
40 wide full section features:
15 deep without horizontal bus, 20 deep with or without horizontal bus. Bus splice
access is from rear (removal of backplates is necessary).
Horizontal power bus is 5 deeper than standard.
Two 20 wide doors with vault-style latching mechanism.
0.25 x 1 ground bus is supplied as standard.
For Bulletin 2180Eone, two, or three 16-slot chassis without disconnecting means.
For Bulletins 2182E and 2183Eone or two 16-slot chassis with disconnecting means
(30A trip or 30A disconnect switch) and primary fused transformer (non-isolated), six
(6) 1-pole 10A circuit breakers, duplex receptacle and a power distribution terminal
block.
Isolated ground bus for each chassis included.
Viewing windows in the doors permit visual verification of the I/O status indicators.
Wire ducts included.
Optional fluorescent light and door switch.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
NOTE: For unit replacement, see appropriate footnotes.
Bulletin 2180J, 2182J, 2183J

with Bulletin 1746 SLC 500 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Unit features:
One 7-slot I/O chassis.
Without disconnecting means or plug-in stabs in 1.0 space factor units.
Includes unwired master control relay (Bulletin 700CF, 4-pole).
With disconnecting means (15A trip circuit breaker or 30A disconnect switch) and
plug-in stabs in 1.5 space factor units. Includes 750VA transformer with primary fusing
and unwired master control relay (Bulletin 700CF, 4-pole).
Viewing window in the door to permit visual verification of the
I/O status indicators.
Optional power supply.
207
14
15
16

2
3
Bulletin 2180L, 2182L, 2183L

with Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
The Bulletin 2180L, 2182L and 2183L units include a choice of (1) 4-slot or (1)
7-slot Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix chassis.
Unit features:
4
5
Without disconnecting means or plug-in stabs
4-slot chassis, 1.0 space factor.

7-slot chassis, 1.5 space factor (frame mounted without vertical wireway). Top or
bottom mounted.
With disconnecting means:
Fusible disconnect (30A switch), plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer, 4-slot
chassis, 1.5 space factor.
Fusible disconnect (30A switch) without plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer,
7-slot chassis, 2.0 space factor (frame mounted without vertical wireway).
Circuit breaker (15A trip), plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer, 4-slot chassis, 1.5
space factor.
Circuit breaker (15A trip) without plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer, 7-slot
chassis, 2.0 space factor (frame mounted without vertical wireway). Top- or
bottom-mounted.
Unit options include:
Processor cards (all memory upgrade options).

Communication cards (Ethernet, ControlNet, DeviceNet, RI/O DH+).
Power supply (10.0A)
10
Bulletin 2181B
Marshalling Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
11
20 wide full section with (366) 1492-CA1 or (620) 1492-HM1 terminal blocks.
40 wide full section with (915) 1492-CA1 or (1550) 1492-HM1 terminal blocks.
15 and 20 deep without horizontal bus. Wire ducts included.
Viewing window in the door to permit visual verification of the I/O status indicators.
12
13
14
15
16
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2180, 2182 and 2183
Programmable Control I/O Chassis Units

NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket and Type 12
Type A Wiring
3
4
5
2180E
2182E
2183E
Bulletin Number
Code
2180E
2182E
2183E
2180J
2182J
2183J
2180L
2182L
2183L
A
A
A
K
K
K
XWD
B
B
Number of I/O Chassis and

Slots
NEMA Enclosure
Type
Line Voltage
Type
Bulletin 1771 Programmable
Controller (PLC) I/O Chassis
without Disconnecting Means
Controller (PLC) I/O Chassis with
Fusible Disconnect
Controller (PLC) I/O Chassis with
Circuit Breaker
Bulletin 1746 SLC 500
Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O
Chassis without Disconnecting
Means
Chassis with Fusible Disconnect
Chassis with circuit breaker
Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix
Chassis without Disconnecting
Means[1]
Chassis with Fusible Disconnect[1]
Chassis with Circuit Breaker[1]
[1] 2180LB, 2182LB and 2183LB indicate bottom

mounting on section.

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
30CT
Trip Current and Circuit
Breaker Type
Code Line Voltage

P
220 - 230V
A
240V
N
380V
KN
400V
I
415V
B
480V
C
600V
XWD
120V
Does not include
transformer or power
bus stabs
**
**
**
6
7
Options
8
Code Option
See Options section
9
10
11
12
Code Number of I/O Chassis and Slots
A
(1) 4-slot chassis
(1) 7-slot chassis (Bulletins 2180J, 2182J and
B
2183J and Bulletins 2180L, 2182L and 2183L)
(1) 8-slot chassis (Bulletins 2180E, 2182E and
B
2183E)
(1) 8-slot chassis
C
25 (635 mm) wide full section
(2) 8-slot chassis
D
(1)
16-slot chassis
E
(2) 16-slot chassis
F
(1)
16-slot chassis
G
(2) 16-slot chassis
H
(3) 16-slot chassis
J
Trip Current and

Code
Bulletin 2183_ Only See Table on page 211.
13
14
15
16
209

2
3
4
Units2180E, 2182E, 2183E

Bulletin 1771 Programmable Controller I/O Chassis (PLC)

All programmable control I/O chassis plug-in units must be located in the bottom of the vertical section to retain UL listing.
Space Factor
Section
Width
(inches)
4 slot
8 slot
2.0
2.0
Catalog Number [1]

Wiring Type A Only - Class I
NEMA Type 12
w/ gasket
2180EAKXWD
2180EAJXWD
2180EBKXWD
2180EBJXWD
8 slot
6.0 [2]
25
2180ECKXWD
2180ECJXWD
8 slot
6.0 [2]
25
2180EDKXWD
2180EDJXWD
1
2
16 slot
16 slot
6.0 [2]
35
2180EEKXWD
2180EFKXWD
2180EEJXWD
2180EFJXWD
1 [3]
16 slot
2180EGKXWD
2180EGJXWD
[3]
16 slot
2180EHKXWD
2180EHJXWD
3 [3]
1
16 slot
2180EJKXWD
2180EJJXWD
4 slot
2.0
2182EAK__
2182EAJ__
8 slot
2.5 [7]
2182EBK__
2182EBJ__
8 slot
6.0 [2]
25
2182ECK__
2182ECJ__
8 slot
6.0 [2]
25
2182EDK__
2182EDJ__
1
2
16 slot
16 slot
6.0 [2]
35
2182EEK__
2182EFK__
2182EEJ__
2182EFJ__
1 [6]
16 slot
2182EGJ__
16 slot
40 wide
20 deep [5]
2182EGK__
2 [6]
1
6.0 [2],[4]
2182EHK__
2182EHJ__
4 slot
2.0
2183EAK__30__
2183EAJ__30__
8 slot
2.5 [7]
2183EBK__30__
2183EBJ__30__
8 slot
6.0 [2]
25
2183ECK__30__
2183ECJ__30__
8 slot
6.0 [2]
25
2183EDK__32__
2183EDJ__32__
1
2
16 slot
16 slot
6.0 [2]
35
2183EEK__32__
2183EFK__32__
2183EEJ__32__
2183EFJ__32__
1 [6]
16 slot
2183EGJ__32__
16 slot
40 wide
20 deep [5]
2183EGK__32__
2 [6]
6.0 [2],[4]
2183EHK__32__
2183EHJ__32__
I/O Chassis
Bulletin
Chassis
Quantity
1
1
Chassis Size
2180E
Basic I/O chassis

without
disconnecting
means, transformer,
or plug-in stabs
10
11
2182E
Basic I/O chassis

with disconnect and
transformer [1]
12
13
14
15
16
2183E
Basic I/O chassis

with circuit breaker
and transformer [1]
6.0
[2],[4]
40 wide
20 deep [5]
[1] Catalog numbers listed are not complete for Bulletins 2182E and 2183E:
Select the appropriate voltage code from table on page 211 to identify the control transformer primary voltage.
For Bulletin 2183E, also select the appropriate circuit breaker suffix from table on page 211 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2183EAKB30CT).
[2] Frame mounted, no vertical wireway.
[3] If one (1) chassis is selected, it will be located in the middle.
If two (2) chassis are selected, they will be located at the top and the middle.
If three (3) chassis are selected, they will be located at the top, middle and bottom.
[4] 40 wide sections have two doors. Not available in NEMA Type 3R.
[5] Frame mounted 20 deep section without vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5 deeper than standard. Available 15 deep without horizontal bus.
[6] If one (1) chassis is selected, it will be located in the middle, directly below the disconnecting means panel.
If two (2) chassis are selected, they will be located at the middle (directly below the disconnecting means panel) and at the bottom.
[7] Not UL listed or CSA certified.
Delivery
Program
SC
SC-II
SC
SC-II
SC
SC-II
Units2180J, 2182J, 2183J

Bulletin 1746 SLC 500 Programmable Controller (PLC)

I/O Chassis
Bulletin
Chassis
Quantity
Chassis Size
2180J [2]
Basic I/O chassis without
disconnecting means or
plug-in stabs
7 slot
2182J [2]
Basic I/O chassis
with disconnect and
transformer
2183J [2]
Basic I/O chassis with
circuit breaker and
transformer
Space
Factor
1.0
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
gasket
2180JBKXWD
3
Delivery
Program
2180JBJXWD
6
7 slot
1.5
2182JBK__
2182JBJ__
SC
7
7 slot
1.5
2183JBK__30__
2183JBJ30__
[1] Catalog numbers listed are not complete for Bulletins 2182J and 2183J:
Select the appropriate voltage code from table to identify the control transformer primary voltage (e.g., 2182JBKB).
For Bulletin 2183J, also select the suffix letter from table to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2183JBKB30CT).
[2] A power supply must be selected for all 2180J, 2182J and 2183J units. Refer to power supply options on page 215.
10
Primary Voltage for Transformer

Primary Voltage
220/230
240
380
400
415
480
600
Voltage Code
P
A
N
KN
I
B
C
11
12
13
Circuit Breaker Options and Adders (for combination short circuit withstand ratings, see page 250) *
Circuit Breaker
Frame Type
FDB
HFD
Suffix
CT
CM
14
FDBLFD
CD [1]
15
[1] Available on Bulletin 2183E only.
16
Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, for more information.
211

2
3
Units2180L, 2182L, 2183L

Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix Programmable Controller (PLC)

I/O Chassis
4
5
Bulletin
2180L [2]
Basic I/O chassis without
disconnecting means or
plug-in stabs. Includes
viewing window.
2182L [2]
disconnect and
transformer. Includes
viewing window.
2183L [2]
circuit breaker and
transformer. Includes
viewing window.
10
Chassis
Quantity
1
Chassis Size
Space
Factor
4 slot
1.0
7 slot
2.0 [3]
4 slot
Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Type 12
gasket
2180L-AKXWD
2180L-AJXWD
Delivery
Program
SC
2180LB-BKXWD
2180LB-BJXWD
1.5
2182L-AK__
2182L-AJ__
SC
7 slot
2.0 [3]
2182LB-BK__
2182LB-BJ__
SC-II
4 slot
1.5
2183L-AK_-30__
2182L-AJ_-30__
SC
7 slot
2.0[3]
2183LB-BK_-30__
2183LB-BJ_-30__
SC-II
[1] Catalog numbers listed are not complete:

Select appropriate voltage code from the table on page 211 to identify the control transformer primary voltage (e.g., 2182L-BKB).
For Bulletin 2183L, also select the suffix letter from the table on page 211 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2183L-BKB-30CT).
[2] A power supply must be selected for all 2180L, 2182L and 2183L units. Refer to the Options table on page 215.
[3] These units are frame mounted with no vertical wireway and must be mounted in bottom of section.
11
12
13
14
15
16
SC-II
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2181B
Marshalling Panels
Viewing window in door allows visual verification of I/O status indicators
Type A wiring, NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket or Type 12
Wire ducts included
3
4
5
2181B
Bulletin Number
Code
2181B
XW
Space Factor
NEMA Enclosure Type
Line Voltage
Type
Terminal Block Section
(Marshalling Panel)

K
with gasket
J
NEMA Type 12
Code Space Factor

M
6.0, 20 (508 mm) wide
N
6.0, 40 (1016 mm) wide
120
Horizontal Bus
0366CA
Terminal Blocks and Options
6
7
Code
120
Horizontal
Bus
Horizontal Bus
Omitted
Terminal Blocks
Code and Options
See table on page 214 and
Options section beginning on
page 215.
Code Line Voltage

XW No Line Voltage
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
213

2
3
4
5
Units2181B
Marshalling Panel

Bulletin
Space Factor
Section Width
(Inches)
6.0
20
full section
40
full section
2181B
Marshalling Panel
6.0
Catalog Number [1]

(Wiring Type A Only)
NEMA Type 12
2181BMKXW120__
2181BMJXW120__
2181BNKXW120__
2181BNJXW120__
Delivery
Program
PE-II
[1] Catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the terminal block code from the table below that corresponds to the required number of terminal blocks (e.g., 2181BNAXW
1201550HM1).
Terminal Blocks (Unwired) for Marshalling Panels and Terminal Blocks

Terminal Block Type
1492CA1
1492HM1
Number of Terminal Blocks

366
915
620
1550
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Space Factors
6.0, 20 wide
6.0, 40 wide
6.0, 20 wide
6.0, 40 wide
Terminal Block Code

0366CA
0915CA
0620HM1
1550HM1

Accessories for Programmable Controllers and
Marshalling Panels
2
3
Option
DeviceNet
Scanner
Module
DeviceNet
Option
Number
Bulletin 1771 I/O

Chassis
2180E 2182E 2183E
Description
-12SDN01
-12P4S1 [4]
-12P4S2 [4]
Power
-12P4R2 [4]
Supply [1]
(Refer to table
on 260 for
-12P4R3 [4]
supplied control
circuit
transformer)
-12P4R4 [4]
-12P7
DeviceNet scanner module
Bulletin 1771-P2, 6.5A power supply and

1771-CE (4-slot chassis) or 1771-CD (8- or 16-slot
chassis) power cable
Bulletin 1771P4S, 8.0A power supply.
One power supply per chassis is required. A
maximum of two power supplies per chassis can
be selected.
Note: One chassis slot is necessary for each
power supply.
-12DH__ [2]
ControlLogix
Programming -12CP
Cable
ControlNet
-12CNT
T-Tap
Grounded Unit
-79GD
Door
Unit
-79U
Ground Stab
-79UT
-98 [9]
-98X [10]
-99
[9]
-99X [10]
[9]
[10]
2183J
4
5
6
For (1) 4-slot, (1) 8-slot, or (1)

16-slot [3]
One 1771P4S power supply
Two 1771P4S power

supplies (for one chassis) and
one 1771CT paralleling cable
Two 1771P4R Power

Supplies (for one chassis)
Three 1771P4R Power
16-slot chassis only
Four 1771P4R Power
16-slot chassis only
Bulletin 1771P7, 16A power supply and 1771 For (1) 8-slot or 16-slot
CP2 power cable.
For (2) 8-slot or for (2) 16-slot
Note: Does not mount in chassis slot. Not
For (3) 16-slot (40 wide only)
available for plug-in units.
Bulletin 1771P4R, 8.0A power supply. This is a
redundant power supply and requires two
supplies to operate. Up to four power supplies
per chassis can be selected.
Note: One chassis slot is necessary for each
power supply.
One (1) Bulletin 1746P1, 2.0A power supply

One (1) Bulletin 1746P2, 5.0A power supply
Bulletin 1756-PA72, 10.0A power supply for 4- and 7-slot ControlLogix chassis
Bulletin 1756-LM5512 processor with 750 Kb of memory
Bulletin 1756-LM5513 processor with 1.5 MB of memory
ControlLogix
Bulletin 1756-LM5514 processor with 3.5 MB of memory
Processor [6]
Bulletin 1756-LM5516 processor with 7.5 MB (total) of memory
Bulletin 1756-CNBR ControlNet communication module with redundant
-12CN__ [2],[8] ControlNet port
ControlLogix
[2] Bulletin 1756-ENBT Ethernet communication module
Communication -12ENB__
Modules [6]
-12DN__ [2] Bulletin 1756-DNB DeviceNet communication module DeviceNet
[7]
[8]
2182J
1747-SDN
-12PA [5]
-12PB [5]
-12PA72
-12LMA_
-12LMB_
-12LMC_
-12LMD_ [7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
2180J
Bulletin 1756
ControlLogix Chassis Delivery
Program
2180L 2182L 2183L
1771-SDN
-12P2 [2]
Auxiliary
Contacts
9
10
11
SC
12
13
Bulletin 1756-DHRIO Data Highway Plus and Remote I/O communication module
Bulletin 1756-CP3 cable for programming ControlLogix processors
Bulletin 1786 ControlNet T-Tap for use with ControlNet Communication Modules
14
Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on hinge of unit door. (Unit door grounding
strap for IEC requirements.)
Select on plug-in units for sections with vertical Copper alloy
plug-in ground bus. Unplated copper unit ground Unplated copper
stab can also be used with steel vertical ground
Tin plate copper
bus.
15
Normally Open(1) N.O. mounted on

operating mechanism (operates with movement
Normally Open(1) N.O. mounted internally
Normally Closed(1) N.C. mounted on
operating mechanism (operates with movement
Normally Closed(1) N.C. mounted internally
Disconnects
Circuit Breakers
16
Circuit Breakers
Disconnects
Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breakers
Power supply options are mutually exclusive.

2182E or 2183E 4-slot with 12P2: add 1.0 space factor. 2180E 8-slot with 12P2: add 1.0 space factor. 2182E or 2183E 8-slot with 12P2: add 1.0 space factor.
Not available in 40 wide units.
UL listing and CSA certification only valid for 6.0 space factor units.
Option is NOT CSA certified.
Option numbers are not complete. Add the number of chassis slot the option is to be mounted in (e.g., a 12LA_ located in slot 0 will be 12LA0 and a 12ENB_ located in slot 3 will
be 12ENB3). Multiple quantities of the same option may be mounted in the same chassis (e.g., a 7-slot chassis may contain two processor cards, two ethernet cards, one
ControlNet card and two DeviceNet cards).
Check with your Rockwell Automation representative for details on the memory restrictions of the 1756-L55M16 controller.
Option 12CNT, Bulletin 1786 ControlNet T-Tap, is available for use with option 12CN_ for connection to ControlNet scheme. See publication CNET-IN002x-EN-P, ControlNet Coax
Media Planning and Installation Guide, for cabling configuration.
The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected. Auxiliary
The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is two (2). These are form C contacts. Each form C contact includes one N.O. and one N.C. contact.
Internal auxiliary contacts (98X or 99X) are wired to a 3-point floating terminal block.
215
17
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Programmable Controllers and Marshalling Panels
2
Option
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
T-Handle
Omit
Horizontal
Power Bus
Option
Number
Description
-111
T-Handle latches on unit door
-120 [1]
Available on 15 and 20 deep 25 and 35 wide

or on 20 deep 40 wide
Bulletin 1771 I/O

Chassis
2180E 2182E 2183E
Section is supplied with a top-mounted light that is

activated by a door switch. Note: Only available on
40 wide 2180E, 2181B, 2182E and 2183E.
For (1) 8-slot chassis, 25 wide (100 terminals)
-806
For (1) 16-slot chassis, no disconnecting means, 40
wide (180 terminals)
Bulletin
1492HM1 For (2) 16-slot chassis, no disconnecting means, 40
Terminal wide (360 terminals)
Blocks
(white only) wide (540 terminals)
For (1) 16-slot chassis, with disconnecting means,
40 wide (360 terminals)
Terminal
Blocks
(unwired) for
chassis in
full sections
[2]
only
-807
wide (108 terminals)
Bulletin
1492CA1 For (2) 16-slot chassis, no disconnecting means, 40
Terminal wide (216 terminals)
Blocks
(white only) wide (324 terminals)
Acrylic plate (available in
U.S. only). Lettering is
white with black letters
1.125 x 3.625 engraved or black with white
Unit Door
letters.
3-line nameplate or
Nameplates
4-line nameplate
Phenolic plate. Lettering
is white with black letters
or black with white
letters.
Stainless
Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit
Steel
nameplate (2 per unit)

Nameplate
Screws
Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear
Export
plastic. Packing is not watertight or waterproof.
Packing
Considerations should be taken if extended storage

Below Deck
is expected.

2180J
2182J
2183J
Bulletin 1756
Marshalling
Delivery
ControlLogix Chassis
Panel
Program
2180L 2182L 2183L
2181B
Light and
-203B
Door Switch
[1] Enclosures with horizontal power bus omission are listed under UL Standard 508.
[2] Options 806 and 807 are mutually exclusive.
17
216
SC
SC
SC (+2
days)
Control Voltage Type for Bulletins 2102L, 2103L, 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, 2123, 2126, 2127, 2172 and 2173
208V
H
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Control Voltage Code

380V
400V
415V
240V
A
480V
B
600V
C
Control Type
120V, 60Hz, Transformer Control [1]
HD
AD
BD
CD
120V, 60Hz, Separate Control [2]
110V, 50Hz, Transformer Control [1],[3]
NS
IS
KN
KNS
NP
NP
KNP
KNP
5
6
7
8
IT
IT
NLP
220V, 50Hz, Line to Neutral Control, (Separate Control) [4],[5]
KNLP
ILT
Common Control [6]
9
10
Select a control circuit transformer. See Options section.

Control circuit fusing (option 21) and/or disconnect interlock (option 98) may be required to comply with NEC. See Options section.
Incorporates primary taps for future conversion to new global IEC voltage standards (e.g., 400V/115V/230V). Allows conversion without the need to replace transformers or coils.
Requires horizontal neutral bus and vertical neutral bus in 9 vertical wireway. Refer to Section Modifications to select.
Select control circuit fusing (see option 21 in Options section).
Select control circuit fusing (see option 22 in Options section). Required to comply with NEC.
Control Voltage Type for Space Saving NEMA-Rated Bulletins 2106, 2107, 2112 and 2113
600V
120V, 60Hz, Transformer Control [1]
BD
CD
14
[1] Select a control circuit transformer. See Options section.

[2] Control circuit fusing (option 21) and/or disconnect interlock (option 98) may be required to comply with NEC. See Options section.
Primary Voltage Code for Bulletins 2195, 2196, 2196Z, 2197 and 2197Z
240V
A
380V
N
400V
KN
415V
I
480V
B
15
600V
C
Control Voltage Type for Bulletins 2154 and 2155
16

220V [1]
230V [1]
240V
12
13
Control Type
480V
11
380V [1]
400V [1]
415V [1]
KN
480V
600V
Control Type
110V, 50Hz Transformer Control
17
18
217
2
Control Voltage Type for Bulletins 2162, 2163, 2164 and 2165
Line Voltage
220/230
Voltage Code
240
A [2]
380
N [1],[2]
400
KN [1],[2]
415
480
600
I [1],[2]
B
C
4
5
P [1],[2]

[2] Not applicable to 2164 or 2165.
Horsepower Ratings for All Bulletins

Motor
HP
0.125
0.25
0.33
0.50
0.75
1
1.5
2
9
10
11
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Motor
HP
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
Number
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Motor
HP
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
Number
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
54
Motor
HP
250
300
350
400
Number
450
500
60
61
56
57
58
59
kW Ratings for Bulletins 2154, 2155, 2162 and 2163 [1]

kW
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
12
13
14
15
16
Number
Number
32K
33K
34K
35K
36K
37K
38K
39K
40K
41K
42K
43K
44K
45K
46K
kW
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
150
160
185
200
220
250
Number
47K
48K
49K
50K
51K
52K
53K
54K
55K
56K
57K
58K
59K
[1] kW rated units are not UL listed, cUL listed or CSA certified.
17
18
218
Discount Schedule B and B1
Fuse Clip Designator Selection and Power Fuse Selection for Bulletins 2106, 2112, 2122, 2126, 2154G and 2172 *,
To select Fuse Clip Designator,
select code from one of these two columns.
Fuse Clip
Rating
(Amperes)
30
30
60
100
200
400
600
Fuse Clip
Type
CC [4]
J
R
H
[1],[4]
HRCII-C [5]
J
R
H [1],[4]
HRCII-C
J
R
[5]
H [1],[4]
HRCII-C [5]
J
R
H [1],[4]
HRCII-C [5]
J
R
H [1],[4]
HRCII-C [5]
J
R
HRCII-C [5]
800
24C
24J
24R
24
When power fuses will be

selected, select fuse clip
designator from this
column [1],[2].
The 20 portion of your Fuse Clip
Designator (e.g., 20J) means that
the power fuse will be selected
automatically based on load
horsepower.
20C
20J
20R
24E
25J
25R
25
20E
20J
20R
25E
26J
26R
26
20E
20J
20R
26E
27J
27R
27
20E
20J
20R
27E
28J
28R
28
20E
20J
20R
28E
29J
29R
29E
24L
20E
20J
20R
20E
20L
When NO power fuses will be

selected, select fuse clip
designator from this column.
To select Power Fuses,

select power fuse manufacturer code hese
columns [1],[2].
Power Fuse Manufacturer Code
[3]
4
Typical (T) Accel.
Time
< 5 sec.
Long (L) Accel.

Time
> 5 sec.
Fuse
Class
LT
LL
GT or BT
GL or BL
CC
J
R
5
6
GT or BT
GT or BT
GT or BT
GT or BT
GL or BL
GL or BL
GL or BL
GL or BL
GT or BT
GL or BL
GT or BT
GL or BL
7
8
HRCII-C
J
R
HRCII-C
J
R
10
HRCII-C
J
R
11
HRCII-C
J
R
12
13
HRCII-C
J
R
HRCII-C
L
14
[1] Power fuse option not available for Class H fuse clips.
[2] Available on 480V and 600V applications only.
To select power fuses for Bulletins 2106, 2112, 2122, 2126 and 2172:
Select fuse clip designator and add to catalog string number (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31__-20J).
Then select power fuse manufacturer code and add to catalog string number (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31GT-20J). Only use power fuse code when selecting power fuses.
[3] Select power fuse manufacturer code by indicating choice of power fuse manufacturerGT or GL = Ferraz Shawmut and BT or BL = Bussmann. When selecting Bussmann Class
J or R, delivery program changes to PE. The Ferraz Shawmut Class J fuse incorporates blown fuse indication for fuses above 8A.
[4] Not available with Bulletin 2154G units.
[5] HRCII-C fuses are available in Canada only. HRCII-C Bussmann (BT or BL) fuses are not available; use HRCII-C Ferraz Shawmut (option code GT or GL). They are CSA certified but
are NOT UL listed.
15
16
17
18
For Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F and 2192M, see table on page 220. For Bulletin 2196, see 221.
Refer to publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses, for more information.
219
2
Fuse Clip Designator Selection and Power Fuse Selection for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F and 2192M *,
Use this information to select a fuse clip designator.
Fuse Clip Rating
Fuse Clip
Fuse Clip Type
(Amperes)
Designator
3
4
5
CC
24C
J
R
H [1]
24J
24R
24
60
J
R
H [1]
25J
25R
25
100
J
R
H [1]
26J
26R
26
200
J
R
H [1]
27J
27R
27
400
J
R
H [1]
28J
28R
28
600
J
R
H [1]
L
29J
29R
29
23L [5]
800
24L
1200
25L
1600
2000
L
L
26L
27L
30
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Use this information to select power fuses. [1],[2]

Power Fuse
Power Fuse
Power Fuse Rating
Fuse Class
(Amperes)
Rating Code
Manufacturer [3]
1
600
3
601
6
602
10
603
CC
L [4]
15
604
20
605
25
606
30
607
1
600
3
601
6
602
J
10
603
R
15
604
20
605
25
606
30
607
35
608
40
609
J
45
610
R
50
611
60
612
70
613
J
80
614
R
90
615
100
616
110
617
125
618
J
G or B [4]
150
619
R
175
620
200
621
225
622
250
623
J
300
624
R
350
625
400
626
450
627
J
500
628
R
600
629
601
630
L
601
630
700
631
L
800
632
1000
633
L
1200
634
1600
637
L
2000
639
L
[1] Power fuse option is not available for Class H fuse clips.
[2] Available on 480V and 600V applications only. To select power fuses for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F and 2192M, combine power fuse rating code and power fuse
manufacturer code and add to catalog string number (e.g., 2102LB-BKBD-24J-607G). Only use power fuse code when selecting power fuses.
[3] L = Littelfuse, G = Ferraz Shawmut, B = Bussmann. The Ferraz Shawmut Class J fuse incorporates blown fuse indication for fuses above 8A.
[4] When selecting Bussmann or Littelfuse power fuses, delivery program changes to PE. Littelfuse power fuses are available only in Class CC fuses with blown fuse indicators.
[5] Available: G = Ferraz Shawmut, 601A only.
*
220
For Bulletins 2106, 2112, 2122, 2126, 2154 and 2172, see table on page 219. For Bulletin 2196, see 221.
Refer to publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses, for more information.
2
Fuse Clip Designator for Bulletin 2196 and 2196Z [1],[2]

Fuse Manufacturer
Fuse Clip Fuse Clip Fuse Clip
Size
Type
Designator
Code [3]
J
24J
Select G or B
R
24R
30
G=Ferraz Shawmut
B=Bussmann
24
H [4]
J
25J
Select G or B
R
25R
60
G=Ferraz Shawmut
B=Bussmann
25
H [4]
J
26J
Select G or B
R
26R
100
G=Ferraz Shawmut
B=Bussmann
26
H [4]
J
27J
Select G or B
R
27R
200
G=Ferraz Shawmut
B=Bussmann
27
H [4]
Fuse Clip
Class
J
R
H
J
R
H
J
R
H
J
R
H
4
5
6
7
8
[1] Only 24J option available for 2196Z units.

[2] See Appendix for short circuit withstand ratings. For fuse rating based upon kVA of
transformer, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P. Selecting Bussmann or Littelfuse
power fuse changes delivery program to PE. Power fuses are not available for Type H
fuse clip. Power fuses are available on 480V and 600V only.
[3] The Ferraz Shawmut Class J fuse incorporates blown fuse indication for fuses above
8A.
[4] Power fuse option not available for Class H fuse clip.
9
10
Trip Current for Bulletin 2103L

Contactor Rating
(Amperes)
Trip Current
(Amperes)
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
Number
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
30 or 60
30, 60, or 100
60 or 100
38 [1]
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
100, 200, or 300
200 or 300
300
11
12
13
14
15
16
[1] Available only on 100A contactors.
Trip Current for Bulletin 2197 and 2197Z

Number
Trip Current
30
31
32
34
35
36
15
20
30
40
50
60
(Amperes)
Number
Trip Current
37
40
41
42
44
70
100
125
150
200
17
(Amperes)
18
221
2
Circuit Breaker TypeInverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Options for Bulletin 2103L*,
Rating
(Amperes)
(0.5 SF)
30-60
100
200
300
30
Capacity
Suffix
Frame
Capacity with Current Limiter [1]
Suffix
Frame
Medium Interrupting
Capacity
Suffix
Frame
High Interrupting
Capacity
Suffix
Frame
CT
FDB
CB
FD
CM
HFD
CT
CT
CT
CT
FDB
FDB
JD
KD
CD
CD
FDB-LFD
CB
CB
FD
FD
CM
CM
CM
CM
HFD
HFD
HJD
HKD
FDB-LFD [2]
[1] Circuit breakers with current limiters are not available on dual mounted units.
[2] Add 0.5 space factor.
Circuit Breaker Type for Bulletin 2113 Vacuum*

Rating
(Amperes)
200
10
350
450
11
Instantaneous Circuit Breakers [1]

Suffix
Frame
HMCP
CA
HMCP250
HMCP250
HMCP400
CA
HMCP600
CA
HMCP600
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Solid State) Circuit Breakers [2]

Suffix
Frame
Suffix
Frame
[3]
[3]
JD
HJD
CT
CM
CT
JD
CM
HJD
JD
HJD
CT
CM
KD
HKD
CT
LD
CM
HLD
CT
LD
CM
HLD
[1] Refer to publication 2100-TD001x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers HMCP Circuit Breakers, for more information.
[2] Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, for more information.
[3] Add 0.5 space factor.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
222
Refer to Appendix for interrupting capacity and short circuit withstand rating.
Circuit Breaker Type for Bulletins 2107, 2113, 2123, 2127 and 2173*
[1]
NEMA
Size
Instantaneous Circuit Breakers

(For motor applications where transient inrush current exceeds
13 times the full load current, contact your local Rockwell
Automation Sales Office.)
High I.C.
with Current
High I.C.
Standard I.C. [3],[4]
Limiter
Suffix
Frame
Suffix
Frame
Suffix
Frame
Standard I.C.
Frame
Suffix
Frame
CT
FDB
CM
HFD
CT
FDB
CD
FDB-LFD [5]
CM
HFD
CT
FDB
CD
FDB-LFD [5]
CM
HFD
CT
FDB
CD [6]
FDB-LFD [7]
CM
HFD
CT
JD [7]
JD
KD
KD
LD
CM
CMH [10]
CM[11]
CM
MDL
CM
HMCP
CZ
HMCP
CA
HMCP
CC
CZ
HMCP
CA
HMCP
CC
CZ
HMCP
CA
HMCP
CC [6]
CA
HMCP[8]
HMCP250
HMCP400
HMCP400
HMCP600
CT
CTH [10]
CT[11]
CT
CT
CA
CAH [10]
CA[11]
CA
6 [12]
CC
HMCP-ELC
[5]
HMCP-ELC
[7]
HMCP-ELC
[7] [9]
,
Suffix
CA
[5]
High I.C.
Frame
HMCP-ELC
Standard I.C. with

Current Limiter
Suffix
(0.5 SF)
--
Inverse Time [2]

(Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breakers
CM
HJD
[7]
9
HJD
HKD HKD
10
HLD
HMDL
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Refer to publication 2100-TD001x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers HMCP Circuit Breakers, for more information.
For Bulletins 2107, 2113, 2123E, 2123F, 2127E, 2127F, 2127J, 2127K and 2173: 25kA short circuit withstand rating. CZ is available at 600V only.
For Bulletin 2113, circuit breakers with current limiters are not available on dual mounted units.
For Bulletin 2107, add 0.5 space factor.
For Bulletin 2123F, add 0.5 space factor.
For Bulletin 2113, add 0.5 space factor.
HMCP250 supplied on Bulletin 2173 size 4.
Not available for Bulletin 2173, size 4
For special applications where higher than normal inrush exists. Substitute a 400A frame circuit breaker for a 250A frame circuit breaker in Bulletins 2107, 2113, 2123E and
2123F in size 5, 125-150 HP, 480V applications only.
[11] 200HP Applications Only
[12] For Bulletins 2113 and 2173, for 200HP at 240V or 400HP at 480V, suffix letter identifying circuit breaker must be CT or CM only.
11
12
13
Circuit Breaker Type for Space Saving NEMA-Rated Bulletins 2107 and 2113
NEMA
Size
Instantaneous Circuit Breakers

(For motor applications where transient inrush current
exceeds 13 times the full load current, contact your
local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.)
High I.C.
Suffix
Frame
1
2
CA[1]
HMCP
14
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breakers

Standard I.C.
Suffix
Frame
CT
FDB
Medium Standard I.C.

Suffix
Frame
CB
15
High I.C.
Suffix
Frame
FD
CM
HFD
16
[1] No UL listing for 1.5 - 3HP @ 600V.
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Options for Bulletin 2197 *
Rating (Amperes)
15-50
60-100
125-150
200
Standard I.C.
Suffix
Frame
CT
FDB
CT
FDB
CT
FDB
CT
JD
Std. I.C. w/ Current Limiter

Suffix
Frame
CD
FDB-LFD
CD
FDB-LFD
CD
FDB-LFD
Medium I.C.
Suffix
Frame
CB
FD
CB
FD
CB
FD
17
High I.C.
Suffix
CM
CM
CM
CM
Frame
HFD
HFD
HFD
HJD
18
Refer to Appendix for interrupting capacity and short circuit withstand rating.
223
2
Circuit Breaker Type for Horsepower and kW Rated Units for Bulletins 2155G, 2155H and 2155J*
Instantaneous Circuit Breakers [1]

(For motor applications where transient
inrush currents exceed 13 times the full
load current, contact your local Rockwell
Automation Sales Office.)
High I.C.
Suffix
Frame
Rating
(Amperes)
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Solid-State) Circuit Breakers [2]

Standard I.C.
Suffix
Frame
Medium I.C.
Suffix
Frame
High I.C.
Suffix
Frame
5
9
19
24
25
30
35
37
FDB
FD
HFD
CB
HMCP
43
54
60
85-97
108
10
CA [3],[4]
CT
HMCP
HMCP250
135
11
240
HMCP250
HMCP400
HMCP400
HMCP600
251
HMCP600
317
360 - 361
480
HMCP600
HMCP600
201
12
13
14
15
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
JD
FD[6]
HFD [5]
HJD
HFD
HJD
CM
HJD
JD
HJD
KD
JD
KD
KD
KD
LD
LD
LD
LD
HMCP600 [7]
HKD
HJD
HKD
HKD
HKD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
HLD
LD
HMCP600 [7]
500
FD [5]
JD
HMCP250
HMCP400
180
FDB
JD
HMDL
MDL
Refer to publication 2100-TD001x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers HMCP Circuit Breakers, for more information.
Circuit breaker suffix CA is not available for Bulletin 0.5 - 1 HP at 480V and 0.75 - 1 HP at 600V.
Bulletin 2155H SMC-Flex units with circuit breaker suffix CA requires High Interrupting Capacity fuses (option 13HIC).
30HP maximum at 240V, 50HP maximum at 480V and 600V, 22kW maximum at 220-230V and 37kW maximum at 380-415V.
30HP maximum at 240V, 50HP maximum at 480-600V, 22kW maximum at 220-230V and 37kW maximum at 380-415V
Not available at 240V, 350HP maximum at 480V, 450HP maximum at 600V, 132kW maximum at 220-230V and 220kW maximum at 380-415V.
*,
Circuit Breaker Type for Bulletins 2163P, 2163Q, 2163R, 2163T, 2165Q and 2165R
Type
16
HP Range
kW Range
17
18
Instantaneous
0.5-60
0.25-37
75-200 [1]
45-75
90
Suffix
CA
CA
CA
Frame Size
HMCP
HMCP250
HMCP400
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic)

0.5-40
50-60
0.25-22 [2]
18.5,
30-37 [2]
60-200 [1]
22,
45-75 [2]
[5] [6]
[7] [6]
[5] [6]
CT ,
FDB
CT ,
FDB
CT
JD
90
CT
KD
Inverse Time (Thermal

Magnetic) Medium
Interrupting Capacity
0.5-40
50
0.25-22 [2]
18.5,
30-37 [3]
[5] [6]
CB ,
FD
[5] [6]
CB ,
FD

0.5-40
50-60
0.25-22 [3]
18.5,
30-37 [3]
60-200 [1]
22,
45-75 [4]
[5] [6]
[7] [6]
CM ,
HFD
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
150HP rating for 480V variable torque applications only.

Only available through 15kW at 220-230V.
18.5kW rating is at 220-230V only.
22kw rating is at 220-230V only.
Only available through 30HP at 240V, through 50HP at 480V and through 60HP at 600V.
Increases width to 35 on PowerFlex 700H 132kW drives.
Used for 60HP at 480V.
For combination short circuit withstand ratings, see 250.

224
[5] [6]
CM ,
HFD
CM ,
HJD
90
CM [6]
HKD
Hardware and Kits
Section Hardware and Kits for Field Installation

Description
10 wide
Drip Hood
Drip hood for NEMA Type 1, 1 w/ gasket and 12. Drip hood is an 20 wide
NOTE: NEMA Types 1, 1 overhang on top of a section. It provides protection from limited 25 wide
with gasket and 12 with amounts of liquid or dirt dripping and/or running down the front
drip hood fulfill NEMA
of a section. Select one drip hood per section. Drip hoods fit 15 30 wide
Type 2 requirements
and 20 deep sections.
35 wide
40 wide
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket
For 15'' deep sections
NEMA Type 12
12'' high x 20'' wide
NEMA Type 12
Pullbox
NEMA Type 12
12'' high x 25'' wide
NEMA Type 12
For use on Series A through E NEMA Type 1
NEMA Type 1 w/ gasket and 12
Top Horizontal Wireway For locating units with handle vertical sections
interlocks in the topmost space
Pan
NEMA Type 1
For use on Series F through
factor of a vertical section
current series sections
NEMA Type 1 w/ gasket and 12
For 20'' wide vertical section
Horizontal Wireway
Covers either top or bottom wireway opening at front of vertical For 30'' wide vertical section
Cover
section
Covers both top and bottom
NEMA Type 12
horizontal
wireway
openings
End Closing Plate
and bus opening on one side of
vertical section only
NEMA Type 12
For 20'' wide x 15'' deep section
For 20'' wide x 20'' deep section
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 w/ gasket MCC
Bottom Closing Plate
(Non-gasketed plates)
For 15'' deep corner section
External Mounting
Channel Kits
Unit Operating Handle

Extender
Space Heater Kit
Gasketing Kit[1]

Two (2) 1.5'' x 3'' mounting channels for a single section.
NOTE: Adding an external mounting channel will add 1.5'' to
height of section.
Permits unit operating handle to be located an additional 3'' above the NEC 6' 7'' handle-to-floor height limitation.
Complies with NEC Article 404.8(A) and the UL Standard for Safety UL 845. Can also be used on Bulletin 2400 units.
200 watt, 120 volt strip heater with thermostat set at 21C (70F)
200 watt, 240 volt strip heater with thermostat set at 21C (70F)
Gasketing to cover the section perimeter of two (2) 1.0 space factor doors or one (1) 1.5 through 5.0 space factor doors.
For units mounted in series A through D sections.
3
Catalog
Number
2100H-DH10
2100H-DH20
2100H-DH25
2100H-DH30
2100H-DH35
2100H-DH40
2100H-N2A1
2100H-N2J1
2100H-N2A2
2100H-N2J2
2100H-N2AA1
2100H-N2AJ1
2100H-N2AA2
2100H-N2AJ2
2100H-NA4A1
2100H-NA4J1
2100H-NA4A2
2100H-NA4J2
2100H-NWW20
2100H-NWW25
2100H-NWW30
2100H-NWW35
2100H-NWW40
2100H-N3A1
2100H-N3J1
2100H-N3A2
2100H-N3J2
2100H-N1A1
2100H-N1A2
2100H-N1A1C
2100H-N1A2C
2100H-NMC1
2100H-NMC2
2100H-NMC3
2100H-NMC4
2100H-NMC7
2100H-NMC5
2100H-NMC6
Delivery
Program
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SC
11
12
13
14
15
2100H-NE1
16
2100H-NH1
2100H-NH2
2100H-GJ10
17
[1] Cannot be air shipped
18
19
225
Hardware and Kits

2
3
Bus Kits, Splices and Bus Isolation Hardware for Field Installation
Catalog
Number
Description
For use on vertical sections series C or later, with or without a vertical wireway. Includes five (5) vertical wireway tie bars.
Vertical Wireway Tie Bar Mounts on right-hand sidesheet for sections with vertical wireway. Mounts on right-hand and/or left-hand sidesheets for 2100H-WWTB
sections without vertical wireway.
Wiring Diagram Holder Kit For a central location of all wiring diagrams. Includes wiring diagram clip, clip location identification label for outside of 2400H-WDH
section and mounting instructions.
Touch-Up Paint [1]
Vertical Ground Bus Kit
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
ANSI 49 medium light gray, 12 oz. spray can (cannot be used for NEMA Type 3R enclosures)
2100H-NP1
Contains vertical ground bus, hardware and installation

instructions
2400H-GS1
Zinc plated steel
Unplated copper
Tin plated copper
Unplated copper
Vertical Unit Load Ground Contains vertical ground bus, six (6) unit load connectors,
Bus Kit
hardware and installation instructions
Tin plated copper
For 600A aluminum, tin plated bus
Splice bars, hardware and installation instructions for 3-phase For 600A copper, tin plated bus
splicing of NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket and
For 800A copper, tin plated bus
Type 12 sections. One (1) kit required per shipping split on front
mounted lineups, two (2) for back-to-back.
Horizontal Power Bus
Splice Kit
Splice bars, hardware and installation instructions for 3-phase For 600A copper, tin plated bus
splicing of NEMA Type I, Type I with gasket and Type 12
sections. One of the sections has horizontal power bus 5
deeper then normal (Bumped-back Bus)
For 0.25'' x 1'' unplated copper bus
One (1) splice bar per kit, complete with hardware and
For 0.25'' x 2'' unplated copper bus
Horizontal Ground Bus
installation instructions. One (1) kit required per shipping split
Splice Kit
For 0.25'' x 1'' tin plated copper bus
on front mounted lineups, two (2) for back-to-back.
For 0.25'' x 2'' tin plated copper bus
1-pint can
[1]
NO-OX-ID compound for bus bars and plug-in stabs
NO-OX-ID
1-ounce tube
Insulated from and mounted on top of horizontal wireway
pan.
Insulated from and mounted to unit support pan for blank
0.25'' x 2'' x 12'' copper tin plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil unit space. Blank door not included. Select on page
lug (280A capacity)
106.
Insulated from and mounted on bottom horizontal
wireway pan
Kit [2]
Insulated from and mounted on top of horizontal wireway
pan
Insulated from and mounted to unit support pan for blank
0.25'' x 2'' x 12'' copper silver plated bus plate with #6-250
unit space. Blank door not included. Select on page
kcmil lug (280A capacity)
106.
Insulated from and mounted on bottom horizontal
wireway pan
Protective capsfor unused plug-in stab openings. 36 per package.
Manual shuttersfor isolation of plug-in stab openings. 12 per package.
Bus Stab Isolation Kit
Available for use on vertical sections, series G through current series.
Automatic shuttersfor isolation of plug-in stab openings. 12 per package.
Available for use on vertical sections, series G through current series.
Unit Isolating Barriers
For closing the wire opening between unit and vertical wireway. 6 per package. Series K and later structures.
Contains vertical ground bus, six (6) unit plug-in stabs,
hardware and installation instructions
2100H-N79U
2100H-N79UT
2100H-N79L
2100H-N79LT
2100H-NAT06
2100H-NAT08
2100H-NCT06
2100H-NCT08
2100H-NCT12
2100H-NCT16
2100H-NCT20
2100H-ZAT06
2100H-ZAT08
2100H-ZCT06
2100H-ZCT08
2100H-ZCT12
2100H-ZCT16
2100H-ZCT20
2100H-NC1
2100H-NC2
2100H-NTC1
2100H-NTC2
2100H-N18
2100H-N18T
2100H-NPC1
2100H-NPC2
2100H-NPC3
2100H-NPS1
2100H-NPS2
2100H-NPS3
2100H-N1
2100H-SM1
2100H-SA1
2100H-N2K
[1] Cannot be air shipped

[2] A neutral connection plate can be used only in sections with a vertical wireway. Not for use in sections with full width frame mounted units, including all mains.
226
Delivery
Program
SC
Hardware and Kits
Lugs for Field Installation
Hardware not included.

One lug per kit.
For use on:

Bulletin 2191 Mains and Feeders
Bulletin 2192 400A Disconnect with Optional Lug Pad
Assembly
Bulletin 2192 600-1200A Bolted Pressure Switches
Bulletin 2193 with Optional Lug Pad Assembly
Description
#6-350 kcmil
#6-350 kcmil (double barrel lug)
For use on 600A incoming line lug
Mechanical Lugs
[1]
(for use with 42kA bus bracing only compartments only
when used with main or feeder lug #4/0-600 kcmil
compartment, Bulletin 2191M or
#4/0-600 kcmil (double barrel lug) For
Lugs for Incoming Line 2191F)
use on 600A incoming line lug
Provisions (2-hole
compartments only [1]
standard NEMA 1-3/4
350-800 kcmil
spacing for 1/2
250
kcmil
hardware)
350
kcmil
Crimp Lugs
One Lug per Kit
(Panduit Type LCC)
500 kcmil
750 kcmil
250 kcmil
350 kcmil
Crimp Lugs
(Burndy YA-A series)
500 kcmil
750 kcmil
1.0
space factor
Insulating barrier for covering
Incoming Line Lug
1.5 space factor
user's
terminations
in
main
bus
lug
Barriers
compartments
2.0 space factor
CU/AL
Figure Catalog Number

#
2100H-80350
1
CU/AL
2100H-80350DB
CU/AL
2100H-80600
CU/AL
2100H-80600DB
CU/AL
CU
CU
CU
CU
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
CU/AL
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2100H-80800
2100H-82250
2100H-82350
2100H-82500
2100H-82750
2100H-83250
2100H-83350
2100H-83500
2100H-83750
2100H-NLB10
2100H-NLB15
2100H-NLB20
3
4
Delivery
Program
5
6
7
8
SC
9
10
11
12
[1] NOT for use on incoming neutral bus. Use single conductor lug for incoming neutral bus applications.
Lug Dimensions
Number of
Cables Per Lug Dimension A
MECHANICAL TYPE LUGS
#6-350 kcmil
1
2.13 (54 mm)
#4/0-600 kcmil
1
2.31 (59 mm)
350-800 kcmil
1
2.25 (57 mm)
#6-350 kcmil
2
2.13 (54 mm)
#4/0-600 kcmil
2
2.13 (54 mm)
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Panduit Type LCC)
250 kcmil
2.94 (75 mm)
350 kcmil
3.38 (86 mm)
1
500 kcmil
3.78 (96 mm)
750 kcmil
4.63 (118 mm)
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Burndy YA-A Series)
250 kcmil
2.91 (74 mm)
350 kcmil
3.69 (94 mm)
1
500 kcmil
4.44 (113 mm)
750 kcmil
4.94 (125 mm)
Lug Size
Refer to
Figure
13
1
1
1
2
2
14
15
16
17
18
19
227
Hardware and Kits

2
Unit Hardware and Kits for Field Installation

Description
3
4
5
Control Station
Housing
Control Station
Mounting Plate
Door Hardware Kit

Door Hinge Kit [1]
Cardholder for Unit
Doors
Available for use on units

Blank
series letter H through current 1 holefor one (1) Bulletin 800T pilot device
series. Housings for series A
2 holefor two (2) Bulletin 800T pilot devices
through G are no longer
available.
3 holefor three (3) Bulletin 800T pilot devices
Blank (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only)
1 holefor one (1) Bulletin 800T pilot device (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only)
2 holefor two (2) Bulletin 800T pilot devices (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only)
3 holefor three (3) Bulletin 800T pilot devices (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only)
Includes two (2) door latch
1.0 space factor
assemblies and two (2) door Series H or later
0.5 space factor
hinge assemblies
0.5 space factor door
Includes two (2) hinges and Series H or later
two (2) hinge pins
Series E or later
1.0 space factor (or larger) door
2100H-N8
2100H-N9
2100H-N10
2100H-N11
2100H-N8D
2100H-N9D
2100H-N10D
2100H-N11D
2100H-NDH2
1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders with blank cards
6 per package
2100H-CH1
Blank (6 per package)

With legend
With legend
With legend
With legend
With legend
2100H-N3AW
2100H-N3EAW
2100H-N3AB
2100H-N3EAB
2100H-N3W
2100H-N3EW
2100H-N3R
2100H-N3ER
2100H-N3B
2100H-N3EB
Engravable acrylic
(1.125'' x 3.625'')
(not available in Canada)
10
12
Engravable phenolic
(1.125'' x 3.625'')
13
14
Master Nameplates
Stainless Steel
Nameplate Screws
Unit Support Pan
15
White background with

black lettering
Black background with
white lettering
black lettering
Unit Door Nameplates
11
Engravable phenolic
(2 x 6)
Red background with

white lettering
white lettering
black lettering
white lettering
19
228
2100H-N3EMW
2100H-N3EMB
2100H-SSNS1
Style 1 for units 1.0 space factor or larger, series A

through D sections
2100H-UAJ1
Space Factor
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
6.0
17
2100H-NHP1
2100H-NHP2
With legend
NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with

gasket and Type 12
NEMA Enclosure Type 1
Style 3 for units 1.0 space factor or larger, series E
NEMA Enclosure Type 1 with gasket and
through current series (replaces style 2)
Type 12
Style 3 with interlock bushing, for 0.5 space factor units, NEMA Enclosure Type 1
series E through current series, with horizontally-toggled NEMA Enclosure Type 1 with gasket and
unit operating handles (replaces style 2)
Type 12
Quantity of Kits Needed
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
Delivery
Program
2100H-NDH3
Stainless steel nameplate screws for door or master nameplates (12 per package)
[1] Use the table below for determining the quantity of hinge and hinge pin kits needed.
16
Catalog Number
2100H-UA1
2100H-UJ1
2400H-USPA1
2400H-USPJ1
SC
Hardware and Kits
Unit Hardware and Kits for Field Installation, continued

Delivery
Catalog Number Program
Description
Plug-In Unit
Retrofit Kit
Unit Insert
Extension Kit
Unit Door
Grounding Kit
Permits installation of half (0.5) space factor plug-in units into existing series E through J Bulletin 2100 vertical
2400H-R1
section. Includes hinges, grounding wire and extended unit door latch.
Includes 0.5 space factor
For expanding all 1.0 SF units and Series T and later 1.5 SF units
2100H-NXT05B1
door and unit extension,
twenty (20) pull-apart
For expanding Series R and earlier 1.5 SF units and all 2.0 SF through
terminals and hardware to
2100H-NXT05B2
3.5 SF units
increase usable mounting
space of plug-in units
Unit door is grounded by a hinge mounted ground wire. Mounts on bottom hinge of unit door.
2100H-GD1
Mounts externally to existing For small 0.38'' reset button screw head. Includes five (5) reset button heads.
Extended Reset door overload reset button.
Button Kit
Allows reset of overload
For large 0.50'' reset button screw head. Includes five (5) reset button heads.
relays without use of tools
60A, 3-pole block, accepts #4-#14 AWG wire. Not for use on 0.5 space factor
Power terminal block
Pull-Apart
units.
Terminal Bocks
25A, 5-pole block, accepts #12-#20 AWG wire. Not for use on 0.5 space factor
[1]
Control terminal block
units.
Transparent polycarbonate
For 30A, 60A, 100A fusible disconnect. 10 per package.
wraparound line terminal
For 200A fusible disconnect. Series A-M. 5 per package.
shield permits visual
Line Terminal
monitoring of conductors and For 200A fusible disconnect. Series N and later. 5 per package.
Shield
power terminations.
Replaces standard line
terminal shield. Not available For 400A fusible disconnect. Series N and later. 5 per package.
on 0.5 space factor units.
Units Series
For units with 30A, 60A, 100A, or 200A fusible disconnects
A-N
Permits mounting a
External
Unit Series
maximum of two (2) Bulletin
Auxiliary
A-C
1495-N8 (normally open) or
Contact Adapter 1495-N9 (normally closed)
Unit Series
For units with 400A fusible disconnects
Kits
D-M
auxiliary contacts on the unit
FOR FUSIBLE operating mechanism,
Unit Series N
DISCONNECT: external to the disconnect.
Unit
Series
Not for use on
For units with 600A or 800A fusible disconnects
C- L
0.5 space factor
or dualPermits mounting a
mounted units. maximum of two (2) Bulletin
Auxiliaries are 2100H-N19 (normally open)
actuated by the or 2100H-N20 (normally
For units with 30A, 60A, 100A, 200A or 400A fusible
Unit Series Q
unit operating closed) auxiliary contacts on disconnects
and later
handle.
the unit operating
mechanism, external to the
disconnect.
External
One (1) Normally Open
Unit Series Q
Auxiliary
Must be used with external auxiliary adapter kit
or later
One
(1)
Normally
Closed
Contact
2100H-NRB1
FOR BOLTED
PRESSURE
SWITCHES:
For 2192F and
2192M 600A,
800A and
1200A units.
2100H-N26A
Mounts one (1) form C auxiliary contact on the operating mechanism, external to the bolted
pressure switch
Mounts two (2) form C auxiliary contacts on the operating mechanism, external to the bolted
pressure switch
Unit Series Q
and later
2
3
4
5
6
2100H-NRB2
1492-ED103
1492-EC85
2100H-NLT26
2100H-NLT27
2100H-NLT28
9
10
2100H-NLT29
None required
SC
11
1495-N16
595-N1 [2]
12
None required
1495-N13
13
2100H-N21
14
15
2100H-N19
2100H-N20
16
2100H-N26B
17
[1] Plug-in units have provision for a maximum of four (4) pull-apart terminal blocks (any combination of 3-pole or 5-pole blocks). Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
[2] Kit permits mounting of two (2) Bulletin 595-A (normally open) or 595-B (normally closed) auxiliary contacts only. Not compatible with Bulletin 1495-NB or 1495-NP auxiliary
contact kits.
18
19
229
Hardware and Kits

2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
Catalog
Number
Description
External
Auxiliary
Contact Kits
FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

For 0.5 space factor units.
Auxiliaries are actuated by the
unit operating handle only and
will not reflect a circuit breaker
trip
FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
For dual 2103, 2113 and 2193F
units
External
Auxiliary
Contact
Adapter Kits
FOR
CIRCUIT
BREAKERS:
Not for use on
0.5 space
factor units.
Auxiliaries
are actuated
by the unit
operating
handle only
and will not
reflect a
circuit
breaker trip.
13
14
15
16
17
19
230
Permits mounting a maximum of

two (2) Bulletin 1495-N8
(normally open) or 1495-N9
(normally closed) auxiliary
contacts on the unit operating
circuit breaker
Permits mounting a maximum of

two (2) normally open
(2100H-N19) or normally closed
(2100H-N20) auxiliary contacts
on the unit operating
circuit breaker
Mounts one (1) form C auxiliary contact on the operating

mechanism, external to the breaker. Cutler-Hammer 150A
HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD, FDC and 225A JD, HJD and JDC.
Mounts two (2) form C auxiliary contacts on the operating
mechanism, external to the breaker. Cutler-Hammer 150A
HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD, FDC and 225A JD, HJD and JDC.
Mounts one (1) form C auxiliary contact on the operating
mechanism, external to the breaker. Cutler-Hammer FDB, FD,
HFD, FDB-LFD and FDC.
Mounts two (2) form C auxiliary contacts on the operating
mechanism, external to the breaker. Cutler-Hammer FDB, FD,
HFD, FDB-LFD and FDC.
For units with dual circuit breakers only. Cutler-Hammer Series
C 150A HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD and FDC.
For units with single circuit breakers only. Cutler-Hammer Series
C
150A HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD, FDC
225/250A JD, HFD, JDC, HMCP
400A HMCP, KD, HKD and KDC.
For units with Cutler-Hammer 225A frame (MCP 225A and JB)
and 400A frame (MCP 400, LBB, or HLB) circuit breakers
For units with Cutler-Hammer 600A LC, HLC circuit breakers
For units with Cutler-Hammer 800A MC, HMC, MDS, ND, HND,
or NDC circuit breakers
For units with Cutler-Hammer 600A L-frame (LD, HLD, or LDC)
and 600A HMCP circuit breakers
For units with Cutler-Hammer 1200A NC, HNC, ND, HND, or
NDC circuit breakers
For units with single circuit breakers only. Cutler-Hammer
Series C.
150A HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD and FDC.
250A HMCP, JD, HJD and JDC.
400A HMCP, KD, HKD and KDC.
For units with Cutler-Hammer
600A HMCP, LD, HLD, or LDC.
800A MC, HMC, MDS, MDL, HMDL, ND, HND, or NDC.
1200A ND, HND, or NDC circuit breakers.
Delivery
Program
2100H-N18A
Unit Series P and
later
2100H-N18B
2100H-N25A
Unit Series Q and
later
2100H-N25B
2100H-N16
Unit Series K-N
2100H-N17
SC
Unit Series C-G
1495-N16
Unit Series C-N

Unit Series C-N
Unit Series N
1495-N13
Unit Series C-N

Units Series Q
and later
2100H-N22
Unit Series Q and 2100H-N23

later
Hardware and Kits

Description
15A
20A
30A
Bolt-on Inverse Time
15A with ground fault
(Thermal Magnetic) Branch
20A with ground fault
Breakers for Lighting
50A
Panels (2193LE) [1]
100A
Filler plates
(10 per package)
15A
20A
25A
30A
35A
40A
Inverse Time (Thermal
Magnetic) Branch Breakers 50A
for Panel Board Plug-In Unit 60A
(2193PP) [2]
70A
80A
90A
100A
Filler plates
(10 per package)
1-Pole 120/240V AC,

10kA rms symmetrical
Catalog Number
2100-B1015
2100-B1020
2100-B1030
2100-B1015G
2100-B1020G
2100-FILLER
1-Pole 277V AC, 14kA
rms
symmetrical
2100-GHB1015
2100-GHB1020
2100-GHB1025
2100-GHB1030
2100-GHB1035
2100-GHB1040
2100-GHB1050
2100-GHB1060
2100-GHB1070
2100-GHB1080
2100-GHB1090
2100-GHB1100
2100-FILLER
2-Pole 120/240V AC,

Catalog Number
2100-B2015
2100-B2020
2100-B2030
2100-B2050
2100-B2100
3-Pole 120/240V AC,

Catalog Number
2100-B3015
2100-B3020
2100-B3030
2100-B3050
2100-B3100
2-Pole 480Y/277V AC,

3-Pole 480Y/277V AC,

2
Delivery
Program
3
4
5
SC
6
7
8
2100-GHB2015
2100-GHB2020
2100-GHB2025
2100-GHB2030
2100-GHB2035
2100-GHB2040
2100-GHB2050
2100-GHB2060
2100-GHB2070
2100-GHB2080
2100-GHB2090
2100-GHB2100
2100-GHB3015
2100-GHB3020
2100-GHB3025
2100-GHB3030
2100-GHB3035
2100-GHB3040
2100-GHB3050
2100-GHB3060
2100-GHB3070
2100-GHB3080
2100-GHB3090
2100-GHB3100
PE
SC
9
10
11
12
[1] Bolt-on branch breaker frame type for lighting panel boards is BAB.
[2] Bolt-on branch breaker frame type for plug-in panel board unit is GHB.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
231
Hardware and Kits

2
3
4
DeviceNet Hardware and Kits for Field Installation DeviceNet

Description
DeviceNet
Communication
Module with Inputs
For use with starters with SMP-3 solid-state overload relays, drive units and SMC units. Allows for
DeviceNet communications. Includes (4) inputs.
For Bulletin 1771 I/O

chassis
DeviceNet Scanner
DeviceNet scanner module for Bulletins 2180J, 2182J and 2183J
For SLC 500 chassis
Modules
For Bulletin 1756
DeviceNet scanner module for Bulletins 2180L, 2182L and 2183L
chassis
MCC DeviceNet
Includes the necessary DeviceNet connectors and resistors to terminate the DeviceNet cable system
Terminating Resistor in a motor control center. NOTE: if terminating resistors are not used, the DeviceNet cable system
Kit
will not operate correctly. This kit is shipped with each DeviceNet motor control center.
DeviceNet
(2) 120 ohm, 5% terminating a DeviceNet trunk cable. NOTE: if terminating resistors are not used, the
Terminating Resistors DeviceNet cable system will not operate correctly.
Double DeviceNet
Allows two DeviceNet cables to be independently connected to a single DeviceNet port in the MCC
Connector
vertical wireway.
DeviceNet Connection For covering unused DeviceNet connectors in the vertical wireway of a DeviceNet MCC. 6 per
Cover Kit
package.
18 in. (45.7 cm)
used for connecting DeviceNet MCC units to the DeviceNet ports in
36 in. (91.4 cm)
DeviceNet Unit Cable Cable
vertical wireway. Includes cable and (1) connector on each end of the cable.
60 in. (152.4 cm)
Round DeviceNet
8A round DeviceNet cable with (1) connector on each end for connecting a
Cable with
laptop computer to a DeviceNet port in an IntelliCENTER or DeviceNet MCC 10 ft. (305 cm)
Connectors
DeviceNet scanner module for Bulletins 2180E, 2182E and 2183E
9
10
11
12
13
DeviceNet Trunk Line

8A flat DeviceNet cable used for trunk lines
246 ft. (75 m)
Cable [1]
8A round DeviceNet cable used for drop lines
164 ft. (50 m)
8A Round DeviceNet
8A
round
DeviceNet
cable
uses
for
extending
the
trunk
line
beyond
the
MCC.
Cable [1]
246 ft. (75 m)
Class I, shielded cable
Includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that aid in starting up DeviceNet systems,
DeviceNet Field
commissioning DeviceNet nodes, testing DeviceNet devices and training on DeviceNet. See
Support Kit
publication 2100-TD021x-EN-P, Field Support Kit for DeviceNet MCCs, for complete information.
[1] Refer to publication DNET-UM072x-EN-P, DeviceNet Cable System Planning and Installation Manual, for application information.
14
15
16
17
19
232
Catalog
Number
Delivery
Program
2100-GK61
SC
1771-SDN
[1]
1747-SDN
[1]
1756-DNB
[1]
2100H-DNTR1
SC
1485A-C2
[1]
1485P-P1J5-UU5
[1]
2100H-DNCC1
2100H-DNUC18
2100H-DNUC36
2100H-DNUC60
SC
2100H-ICPC120
1485C-P1E75
[1]
2100H-DNRC1
SC
1485C-P1BS75
[1]
2100H-DFSK1
Appendix
2
Approximate Dimensions
3
For additional information, reference publication 2100-DD1, Dimension Drawings Reference Book.
All 6.0 space factor units are frame mounted and do not have a vertical wireway.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15'' Deep
20'' Deep
Dimension
20 Wide
25 Wide
30 Wide
35 Wide
20 Wide
25 Wide
30 Wide
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
A
9.13 (232)
9.13
(232)
9.13 (232)
9.13 (232) 14.13 (359) 14.13 (359) 14.13 (359)
B
11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421)
C
15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508)
D
20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889) 20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762)
E
10.00 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381) 17.50 (445) 12.50 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381)
NOTE: Optional external mounting channels add 1.5 to height. Refer to page 225 for mounting channels.
15
35 Wide
inch (mm)
14.13 (359)
16.56 (421)
20.00 (508)
35.00 (889)
17.50 (445)
16
17
18
19
20
233
Appendix
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Section
Depth
Dimensions
16
17
A
B
C
15 Deep
inch
9.13
11.56
15.00
20 Deep
(mm)
(232)
(294)
(381)
inch
14.13
16.56
20.00
(mm)
(359)
(421)
(508)
18
19
20
234
Appendix
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Interior Section Width
Section Depth
20
25
30
Dimension
15 Deep
20 Deep
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
inch (mm) inch (mm)
A
25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889)
A
25.13 (638) 30.13 (765)
B
13.75 (349) 16.25 (413) 18.75 (476)
B
12.63 (321) 15.13 (384)
C
11.25 (286) 13.75 (349) 16.25 (413)
C
16.81 (427) 21.81 (554)
D
8.87
(225) 11.37 (289) 13.87 (352)
Floor Plan
Dimensions
17
18
19
20
235
Appendix
2
WIREWAY
0.38"
(10 mm)
6"
(152 mm)
6.00"
(152 mm)
1.06"
(27 mm)
4
5
16.25"
(413 mm)
90"
(2286 mm)
21.13"
(537 mm)
WIREWAY
6"
(152 mm)
76.88"
(1953 mm)
15"
(381 mm)
10
11
12
21.13"
(537 mm)
40.00"
(1016 mm)
10.00"
(254 mm)
1.14"
(29 mm)
20.00"
(508 mm)
20"
(508 mm)
1.14"
(29 mm)
3.25" (83 mm)
SPACE FOR
INCOMING
CABLES
.56" x 1.13" SLOT

(14 mm x 29 mm) SLOT
C
16.25"
(413 mm)
2.62"
(67 mm)
1.69"
(43 mm)
40" wide section (90" high)
13
MTG HOLES FOR 5/16" HDWE
Blank mounting plate
14
15
16
Section
Section Width
Depth
Dimension
Dimension
15 Deep
20 Deep
20
25
30
inch (mm) inch (mm)
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
A
9.13 (232) 14.13 (359)
A
17.25 (438) 22.25 (565) 27.25 (692)
B
11.00 (294) 16.56 (421)
B
16.50 (419) 21.50 (546) 26.50 (673)
C
15.00 (381) 20.00 (508)
C
5.25
(133)
7.75
(197) 10.25 (260)
17
18
19
20
236
35
inch (mm)
32.25 (819)
31.50 (800)
12.75 (324)
40
inch (mm)
37.25 (946)
36.50 (927)
15.25 (387)
Appendix
2.50"
(64 mm)
20"
(508 mm)
2.50"
(64 mm)
20"
(508 mm)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
70.48"
(1790.19 mm)
70.48"
(1790.19 mm)
11
12
13
E
71" high section
(1803.4 mm)
Dimensions
A
B
C
D
E
14
Section Depth
15 Deep
20 Deep
inch
(mm)
inch
(mm)
15.00
(380)
20.00
(508)
14.75
(374)
19.75
(500)
5.12
(130)
10.12
(256)
4
(101)
8
(203)
4.40
(112)
15
16
17
18
19
20
237
Appendix
2
Motor Control Center Construction

Nominal
Major Structural Components
3
4
5
9
10
11
Side Plates
Reinforcing C Channel
Backplate 20 Wide
Backplate 25 Wide
Backplate 25 - 40 Wide
Bottom Mounting Angle
Right-Hand Unit Support
Covers and Panels
Top Plate (all widths)
Bottom Plate
External End Plate
Horizontal Wireway Cover
Wireway Baffle
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan
Doors
Unit Door (1.0 - 5.0 Space Factor)
Unit Door (6.0 Space Factor)
Vertical Wireway Door
Other Steel
Pull Box Parts
Unit Wrap Around
Unit Support Pan
inches
mm
0.075
0.105
0.067
0.067
0.105
0.164
0.075
1.905
2.667
1.70
1.70
2.667
4.166
1.905
Approximate
Gauge
(AWG)
14
12
15
15
12
8
14
0.075
0.075
0.075
0.060
0.075
0.060
1.905
1.905
1.905
1.524
1.905
1.524
14
14
14
16
14
16
0.075
0.105
0.060
1.905
2.667
1.524
14
12
16
0.075
0.075
0.075
1.905
1.905
1.905
14
14
14
Approximate Weights of CENTERLINE Motor Control Center Sections

12
MCC Section Dimensions

15/20 D, 20 W
15/20 D, 25 W
15/20 D, 30 W
15/20 D, 35 W
13
14
NEMA 1 or 12
Lbs. (kg)
per section [1]
750 (340)
750 (340)
800 (363)
800 (363)
[1] Weights are based on worst case approximations.
MCC Finish
NEMA Type
1, 1G, 12
3R
15
16
17
18
19
20
238
Finish
ANSI 49, Medium Light Grey
High Gloss White (outside only)
NEMA 3R or 4
Lbs. (kg)
per section [1]
950 (431)
1000 (454)
1050 (477)
N/A
Appendix
Heater Element Selection
Overload Relay Class Designations
Industry standard NEMA Part ICS 2-222 designates an overload relay by a class number, indicating the maximum time in
seconds at which the relay will trip when carrying a current equal to 600 percent of its current rating.
A class 10 overload relay will trip in 10 seconds or less at a current equal to 600 percent of its rating. Applications include
hermetric motors, submersible pumps and motors with short locked rotor time capability.
A class 20 overload relay will trip in 20 seconds or less at a current equal to 600 percent of its rating. They are often used for
applications involving motors driving high inertia loads, where additional accelerating time is needed.
Allen-Bradley standard overload relay protection using type W heater elements provides class 20 operation and is
recommended for general applications. For applications regarding class 10 and 30 overload relays, consult your local
Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
Heater Element Selection
The Full Load Amps listed in the table are to be used for heater element selection. The rating of the relay in amperes at
40C is 115% of the full load amps listed for the Heater Element No.
Refer to the motor nameplate for the full load current, the service factor and the motor classification by application and
temperature rise.
Use this motor nameplate information, the application rules and the full load amps listed in the tables to determine the
Heater Element No.
Motors Rated For Continuous Duty
Motors with marked service factor of not less than 1.15 or motors with a marked temperature rise not over 40C.
1.) The same temperature at the controller and motorSelect the heater element number with the listed full load amps nearest the full
load value shown on the motor nameplate. This will provide integral horsepower motors with protection between 110 and 120% of
the nameplate full load currents.
2.) Higher temperature at the controller than at the motor*If the full load current value shown on the motor nameplate is between
the listed full load amps, select the heater element number with the higher value. This will provide integral horsepower motors with
protection between 115 and 125% of the nameplate full load currents.
3.) Lower temperature at the controller than at the motorIf the full load current value shown on the motor nameplate is between
the listed full load amps, select the heater element number with the lower value. This will provide integral horsepower motors with
protection between 105 and 115% of the nameplate full load currents.
All Other Motors Rated For Continuous Duty (Includes Motors With Marked Service Factor Of 1.0)
Select the heater element number one rating smaller than determined by the rules in paragraphs 1, 2 and 3. This will provide
protection at current levels 10% lower than indicated above.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Motors Rated For Intermittent Duty
Consult your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
*
Rules 2 and 3 apply when the temperature difference does not exceed 10C (18F). Consult your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office when the temperature difference is
greater.
239
Appendix
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
240
Appendix
Heater Element Selection Tables

Index to Heater Element Selection Tables
Device
Bulletin Number
2106/2107
2112/2113
(0.5 space factor)
2112/2113
[1]
2112/2113 Vacuum
Combination Motor
Starters
2113 [1]
2113 Dual
2122/2123
2126/2127
2172/2173
Size
NEMA 1-4
NEMA 5
Table Number
143
347
NEMA 1
181
NEMA 1-4
NEMA 5
NEMA 6
200A
350A
450A
143
347
195
181
347
195
NEMA 3, 4
152
NEMA 1
NEMA 2
NEMA 1-4
NEMA 5
NEMA 1-2
NEMA 2-4
NEMA 5
NEMA 6
141
146
143
347
143
152
347
195
[1] For Bulletin 2113 NEMA size 3 in 1.5 space factor units and NEMA size 4 in 2.0
space factor units, use Table 152.
Table 141
Heater Element
Number
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14
W15
W16
W17
W18
W19
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
W25
W26
W27
W28
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
Full Load Amps

Size 1
0.18
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.27
0.30
0.33
0.36
0.40
0.44
0.53
0.53
0.59
0.65
0.72
0.79
0.87
0.96
1.05
1.16
1.27
1.40
1.54
1.70
Heater Element
Number
W38
W39
W40
W41
W42
W43
W44
W45
W46
W47
W48
W49
W50
W51
W52
W53
W54
W55
W56
W57
W58
W59
W60
W61
Full Load Amps

Size 1
2.73
3.00
3.30
3.63
4.00
4.40
4.84
5.32
5.84
6.41
7.03
7.72
8.47
9.3
10.2
11.2
12.3
13.5
14.8
16.1
17.5
19.0
20.7
22.5
Table 143
Heater Element
Number
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14
W15
W16
W17
W18
Size 1
0.19
0.21
0.23
0.25
0.28
0.30
0.33
0.36
0.40
Full Load Amps

Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Heater Element
Number
W19
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
W25
W26
W27
W28
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
W36
W37
W38
W39
W40
W41
W42
W43
W44
W45
W46
W47
W48
W49
W50
W51
W52
W53
W54
W55
W56
W57
W58
W59
W60
W61
W62
W63
W64
W65
W66
W67
W68
W69
W70
W71
W72
W73
W74
W75
W76
W77
W78
W79
W80
W81
W82
Size 1
0.44
0.49
0.53
0.56
0.64
0.70
0.77
0.85
0.93
1.02
1.12
1.23
1.35
1.48
1.62
1.79
1.97
2.18
2.40
2.65
2.92
3.23
3.56
3.93
4.30
4.71
5.16
5.66
6.28
6.94
7.71
8.45
9.29
10.3
11.4
12.5
13.7
15.0
16.3
17.7
19.3
20.9
22.7
24.7
26.9
29.2
Full Load Amps

Size 2
Size 3
8.56
9.4
10.4
11.5
12.6
13.8
15.1
16.4
17.9
19.5
21.2
23.0
25.4
25.1
27.8
27.3
30.5
29.7
33.5
31.5
37.0
34.5
40.5
37.5
44.5
41.0
48.5
44.0
53.0
47.0
59.0
64.0
69.0
73.0
77.0
81.0
85.0
90.0
2
Size 4
35.0
38.5
42.0
46.0
51.0
56.0
61.0
66.0
71.0
76.0
82.0
88.0
94.0
100.0
106.0
113.0
120.0
135.0
135.0
241
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Appendix
Table 146
Heater Element
Number
W45
W46
W47
W48
W49
W50
W51
W52
W53
W54
W55
W56
W57
3
4
5
Table 181
Full Load Amps
Size 2
5.53
6.04
6.60
7.21
7.87
8.60
9.39
10.3
11.2
12.2
13.3
14.6
15.8
W58
W59
W60
W61
W62
W63
W64
W65
W66
W67
W68
W69
Full Load Amps

Size 2
17.3
18.9
20.6
22.5
24.6
26.8
29.4
32.0
34.5
37.5
41.0
44.5
Full Load Amps

Size 3
25.1
27.5
30.5
33.5
36.5
40.0
44.0
48.0
53.0
58.0
62.0
67.0
72.0
77.0
82.0
88.0
94.0
Size 4
33.0
36.0
39.5
43.0
47.0
51.0
56.0
61.0
66.0
72.0
77.0
83.0
89.0
95.0
102.0
108.0
116.0
123.0
130.0
137.0
Heater Element
Number
Table 152
Heater Element
Number
W45
W46
W47
W48
W49
W50
W51
W52
W53
W54
W55
W56
W57
W58
W59
W60
W61
W62
W63
W64
W65
W66
W67
W68
W69
W70
W71
W72
W73
W74
W75
W76
W77
W78
W79
W80
W81
W82
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
242
Size 2
8.56
9.4
10.4
11.5
12.6
13.8
15.1
16.4
17.7
19.1
21.1
23.2
25.7
28.5
30.5
33.0
35.5
38.5
41.5
45.0
Heater Element Number

W23
W24
W25
W26
W27
W28
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
W36
W37
W38
W39
W40
W41
W42
W43
W44
W45
W46
W47
W48
W49
W50
W51
W52
W53
W54
W55
W56
W57
W58
W59
W60
W61
W62
W66
W67
W68
W69
W70
W71
W72
W73
W74
W75
W76
W77
W78
W79
W80
W81
W82
W83
W84
W85
Full Load Amps

2112/2113
2112/2113
Size 1
200A Vacuum
0.5 Space Factor
0.67
0.74
0.84
0.90
1.00
1.10
1.22
1.31
1.43
1.55
1.66
1.80
1.97
2.12
2.33
2.59
2.84
3.15
3.46
3.84
4.27
4.73
5.36
5.82
6.33
6.97
7.63
8.49
9.24
10.1
11.1
12.2
13.6
14.6
15.7
17.2
18.9
20.5
22.2
24.2
43
47
51
56
61
66
72
77
83
89
95
102
108
116
123
130
137
150
160
165
Appendix
Table 196
Heater Element
Number
W26
W27
W28
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
W36
W37
W38
W39
W40
W41
W42
Full Load Amps

2112/2113
2112/2113
2172/2173
450A Vacuum
Size 6
115
125
135
147
165
179
196
216
232
232
260
260
287
287
315
315
350
350
385
385
420
420
465
515
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table 347
Heater Element
Number
Size 5
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
W36
W37
W38
W39
W40
W41
W42
W43
W44
W45
77
83
90
98
107
116
126
138
150
164
178
194
212
232
254
270
Full Load Amps

2112/2113
350A Vacuum
150
164
178
194
212
232
254
279
309
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
243
Appendix
2
Full Load Currents
The full load currents listed below are average values for horsepower rated motors of several manufacturers at the more
common rated voltages and speeds. These average values, along with the similar values listed in the NEC/UL/cUL, should
be used only as a guide for selecting suitable components for the motor branch circuit. The rated full load current, shown
on the motor nameplate, may vary considerably from the listed value, depending on the specific motor design.
IMPORTANT: The motor nameplate full load current always should be used in determining the rating of the devices
used for motor running overcurrent protection.
Full Load Current of 3 Phase, 60 Hertz AC Induction Motors
HP
0.25
0.33
0.50
0.75
10
11
1
1.5
2
12
13
5
7.5
14
10
15
15
16
20
25
17
30
18
19
20
244
RPM
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
208V
1.20
1.39
1.62
1.48
1.69
1.89
2.08
2.54
2.89
2.89
3.47
3.81
3.51
4.25
4.60
5.04
5.80
6.49
6.51
7.18
8.20
9.24
10.4
11.6
15.7
15.9
18.6
22.1
25.0
26.6
29.7
31.5
32.9
43.0
46.7
49.1
59.2
59.6
61.7
70.9
74.7
76.0
85.7
88.2
91.6
Full Load Current

240V
480V
1.04
0.52
1.20
0.60
1.40
0.70
1.28
0.64
1.46
0.73
1.64
0.82
1.80
0.90
2.20
1.10
2.50
1.25
2.50
1.25
3.00
1.50
3.30
1.65
3.04
1.52
3.68
1.84
3.98
1.99
4.36
2.18
5.02
2.51
5.62
2.81
5.64
2.82
6.22
3.11
7.10
3.55
8.00
4.00
9.04
4.52
10.1
5.04
13.6
6.80
13.8
6.88
16.1
8.07
19.1
9.57
21.7
10.8
23.1
11.5
25.7
12.9
27.3
13.7
28.4
14.2
37.2
18.6
40.4
20.2
42.5
21.3
51.3
25.6
51.6
25.8
53.4
26.7
61.4
30.7
64.7
32.3
65.8
32.9
74.2
37.1
76.4
38.2
79.3
39.7
600V
0.42
0.48
0.56
0.51
0.58
0.66
0.72
0.88
1.00
1.00
1.20
1.32
1.22
1.47
1.59
1.74
2.01
2.25
2.26
2.49
2.84
3.20
3.62
4.03
5.44
5.50
6.46
7.66
8.66
9.22
10.3
10.9
11.4
14.9
16.2
17.0
20.5
20.6
21.4
24.6
25.9
26.3
29.7
30.5
31.7
HP
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
RPM
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
208V
111
117
119
141
144
147
165
172
173
204
211
215
267
276
281
333
340
347
397
404
414
524
531
538
642
658
682
774
790
804
Full Load Current

240V
480V
96.0
48.0
102
50.8
103
51.7
122
61.2
125
62.3
127
63.4
143
71.6
149
74.3
150
74.9
177
88.5
183
91.4
186
93.1
231
116
239
119
243
122
288
144
294
147
300
150
344
172
350
175
358
179
454
227
460
230
466
233
556
278
570
285
590
295
670
335
684
342
696
348
748
374
762
381
774
387
874
437
892
446
902
451
972
486
992
496
1004
502
1074
537
1096
548
1108
554
600V
38.4
40.6
41.4
49.0
49.8
50.7
57.3
59.4
59.9
70.8
73.1
74.5
92.6
95.5
97.2
115
118
120
138
140
143
182
184
186
222
228
236
268
274
278
299
305
310
350
357
361
389
397
402
430
438
443
Appendix
Full Load Currents

The full load currents listed below are average values for kW rated motors of several manufacturers at the more common
rated voltages and speeds. These average values should be used only as a guide for selecting suitable components for the
motor branch circuit. The rated full load current, shown on the motor nameplate, may vary considerably from the listed
value, depending on the specific motor design.
IMPORTANT: The motor nameplate full load current always should be used in determining the rating of the devices
used for motor running overcurrent protection.
Full Load Currents of 3 Phase, 50 Hertz AC Induction Motors
kW
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
150
160
185
200
220
250
220V
1.40
2.10
2.75
3.50
4.40
6.00
8.70
14
20
27
39
52
64
75
103
126
147
182
239
295
356
425
484
520
580
640
710
Full Load Current (Amperes)

Average Values for 4-Pole (1500rpm) Motors
380V
230V [1]
400V [1]
1.34
0.88
0.83
2.00
1.20
1.18
2.60
1.50
1.47
3.30
2.10
2.00
4.20
2.60
2.50
5.70
3.50
3.30
8.30
5.00
4.80
13.4
8.20
7.80
19.1
11.5
10.9
25.8
15.5
14.8
37.3
22
21.1
50
30
29
61
37
36
72
44
42
99
60
57
121
72.5
69
141
85
82
174
105
100
229
138
136
282
170
167
341
205
202
407
245
236
463
280
269
497
300
286
555
340
324
612
370
353
679
408
395
475
461
3
4
415V
0.80
1.16
1.45
1.90
2.40
3.20
4.60
7.50
10.5
14.2
20.5
28
35
40
55
66
80
96
135
165
200
230
260
275
312
340
385
450
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
[1] These values are calculated.
16
17
18
19
20
245
Appendix
2
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) or Solid State Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings
(rms Symmetrical Amperes)
380V
208V
415V
230V
600V
240V
480V
18kA
14kA
14kA
65kA
35kA
18kA
100kA
65kA
25kA
100kA
100kA
35kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
65kA
25kA
65kA
35kA
18kA
100kA
100kA
35kA
100kA
65kA
35kA
65kA
35kA
25kA
100kA
100kA
50kA
65kA
35kA
25kA
100kA
65kA
35kA
100kA
100kA
50kA
65kA
50kA
25kA
100kA
65kA
35kA
100kA
100kA
50kA
65kA
50kA
25kA
100kA
65kA
35kA
100kA
100kA
50kA
100kA
65kA
50kA
Breaker Type
3
4
5
9
10
11
Circuit Breaker
Frame Type
Circuit Breaker
Suffix
FDB (150A)
FD (150A)
HFD (150A)
FDC (150A)
FDB-LFD (150A)
HJD (250A)
JD (250A)
JDC (250A)
HKD (400A)
KD (400A)
KDC (400A)
LD, LDG (600A)
HLD, HLDG (600A)
LDC, LDCG (600A)
MDL, MDLG (800A)
HMDL, HMDLG (800A)
NDC, NDCG (800A)
ND, NDG (1200A)
HND, HNDG (1200A)
NDC, NDCG (1200A)
RD, RDG (2000A)
CT
CB
CM
CX
CD
CM
CT
CX
CM
CT
CX
CT, CTG
CM, CMG
CX, CXG
CT, CTG
CM, CMG
CX, CXG
CT, CTG
CM, CMG
CX, CXG
CM, CMG

or Solid State
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) or Solid State
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) or Solid State
Solid State
Solid State
Solid State
Solid State
Solid State
Solid State
Solid State
3-Pole Inverse Time Circuit Breaker Characteristics for Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Units
12
Rating
(Amperes) Frame Type
13
14
15
16
17
18
Thermal Magnetic Trip Units

Inter- changeable Non-inter-changeable
STD
[3]
STD
Electronic Trip Units (with interchangeable rated plugs) [1]

Digitrip OPTIM 550
Digitrip RMS 310 [2]
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
150
225
F
J
400
STD
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
STD
[3]
STD
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
STD
[3]
STD
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
600 [4]
M,N
[3]
STD
[3]
1200 [4]
STD
[3]
2000 [4]
STD
800
[4]
STD
[1] Definitions are as follows:

LS: standard trip unit that includes adjustable short time current pickup settings that encompass an I2 t ramp function.
LSI: optional trip unit that provides additional flat response short time delay adjustments with an instantaneous setting.
LSG: standard LS unit with ground fault protection and adjustable pickup current.
LSIG: optional LSI unit with ground fault protection and adjustable pickup current and time delay.
LSIA: optional LSI unit with ground fault alarm and adjustable pickup current and time delay.
[2] The Digitrip RMS 310 electronic trip unit provides true RMS sensing, permitting increased accuracy. True RMS sensing is not susceptible to nuisance tripping when wave forms
containing high harmonic currents are present.
[3] Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for availability.
[4] Sealed to be suitable for reverse-fed applications. Trip units are not interchangeable. Rating plugs are interchangeable.
Trip units are provided with test points for functional field testing with a portable electronic test set. These trip units incorporate a powered thermal memory that recalls near trip
conditions and automatically imposes a shorter time delay, thereby preventing system damage from cumulative overheating. These units also incorporate an unpowered thermal
memory feature that remembers a trip has occurred and will protect against repeated overload conditions if the CB is re-closed before a sufficient cool down period has elapsed.
19
20
246
Appendix
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Fusible Disconnect Units
Fuse Class
CC
Device/Bulletin
Size/Rating
2102L
2106, 2112, 2122, 2126
2106, 2112 Space Saving NEMA-Rated
2102L
2102L
2106, 2112, 2122, 2126
2106, 2112, 2122
30A
#1
#1
30A-100A
200A-300A
#1-3
#4-5
#6
2112
2172
J, R
2196
2102L
2102L
2106, 2112, 2122, 2126
2106, 2112, 2122
2112
2196
2106, 2112, 2122, 2126
100kA [1]
100kA
100kA
100kA
#1-3
100kA [1]
2106, 2112, 2122
#4-5
100kA [1]
#1
100kA [1]
#6
100kA [1]
200A, 350A, 450A Vacuum
100kA [1]
#2-3
100kA [1]
#4-6
#6
100kA [1]
100kA

2112
2172
L
30A-100A
200A- 300A
#1-3
#4-5
#1
#6
2112, 2172
3
4
5
6
7
10kA [1]
5kA
10kA
10kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
200A, 350A, 450A Vacuum [1]

#2-3
#4-6
2172
HRCII-C
200A, 350A, 450A Vacuum [1]

#2-3
#4-6
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings

(Amperes rms Symmetrical)
UL/cUL/CSA
(except where noted)
600V or less
100kA
100kA
100kA
5kA
10kA
5kA
10kA
10kA
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
[1] NOT UL listed.
15
16
17
18
19
20
247
Appendix
2
3
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Circuit Breaker Units
Circuit
Breaker
Frame
4
5
HMCP
Device/Bulletin
Size/Rating
2107, 2113, 2123, 2127, 2173 [1]

2107, 2113, 2123, 2127, 2173
2107, 2113, 2123, 2173
2113, 2173
#1-3
#1-4
#1-2
#5
#6
200A
350A, 450A
#1-4
30A-100A/
15A-150A
#1-2
#1-3
#1-2
30A-100A/
15A-150A
#1-3
30A-100A/
15A-150A
#1-3
#1-2
30A-100A/
15A-150A
#4-5
200A
350A
200A
#4, #5
200A
350A
200A
#5
350A
300A
#5
350A Vacuum [2]
300A
350A
450A
#6
350A
450A
#6
#6
#6
2113 Vacuum [2]

HMCP w/ ELC 2107, 2113, 2123, 2127, 2173
FD
FDB
2103L, 2197
2107, 2113, 2123, 2127, 2173
2103L, 2197
2107, 2113, 2123, 2127, 2173
10
FDB-LFD
HFD
11
2103L, 2197
2107, 2113, 2123, 2127, 2173
2103L, 2197
2107, 2113, 2123, 2173
JD
12
2113 Vacuum [2]

2103L, 2197
2107, 2113, 2123, 2173
13
HJD
2113 Vacuum [2]

2103L, 2197
2107, 2113, 2123, 2173
14
KD
2113 Vacuum [2]

2103L
2107, 2113, 2123, 2173
HKD
2113 Vacuum [2]

2103L
15
16
LD
2113 Vacuum [2]

2113, 2173
17
HLD
18
MDL
HMDL
19
2113 Vacuum [2]

2113, 2173
2113, 2173
2113, 2173
[1] Circuit breaker suffix CZ.

[2] Not UL Listed.
[3] 480V Only.
20
248
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings (Amperes rms Symmetrical)

UL/cUL/CSA (except where noted)
380V through
208V
240V
600V
480V
25kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
50kA
35kA
65kA [3]
100kA
100kA
100kA
42kA
100kA
100kA
65kA
35kA
100kA
100kA
65kA
25kA
100kA
100kA
65kA
35kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
65kA
65kA
35kA
18kA
18kA
18kA
65kA [3]
14kA
65kA [3]
35kA
14kA
35kA
18kA
18kA
14kA
14kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
65kA [3]
25kA
35kA
100kA
100kA
65kA
25kA
65kA
65kA
65kA
100kA
100kA [2]
100kA
65kA
65kA
65kA
100kA
65kA
65kA
65kA
65kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
65kA
65kA
65kA
100kA
35kA
35kA
35kA
25kA
100kA
65kA
65kA
65kA
35kA
35kA
35kA
100kA
100kA [2]
100kA
65kA
65kA
65kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA [2]
100kA
65kA
65kA
100kA
100kA
65kA
100kA
65kA [2]
65kA
35kA
35kA
65kA
65kA
50kA
65kA
18kA
18kA
18kA
18kA
42kA
25kA
25kA
25kA
25kA
25kA
35kA
35kA
25kA
25kA
25kA
35kA
35kA
35kA
Appendix
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Soft Starter Units (SMCs)
Combination Fusible Disconnect Soft Starter Units for Bulletin 2154G, 2154H and 2154J
240V
480V
600V
100kA
100kA
100kA
Fuse Class
Bulletin Number
SMC Device rating
J, R
J, R, L
Form 101
J
J
L
2154G
24A through 240A
2154G
360A through 500A
100kA
100kA
100kA
2154H
3A through 85A
5A through 361A
480A
100 kA
100 kA
100 kA
100 kA
100 kA
100 kA
100 kA
100 kA
100 kA
2154J
Combination Circuit Breaker Soft Starter Units for Bulletin 2155G, 2155H and 2155J
HMCP
Bulletin
Number
2155G
FD, FDB, HFD

JD, HJD
KD, HKD
KD, HKD
LD
2155G
HLD
MDL
HMDL
HMCP, FD, FDB, HFD, JD, HJD,
KD, HKD, LD, HLD, MDL, HMDL
with Form 101 SCR Fuses
HMCP
FD, FDB, HFD, JD, HJD
HMCP, FD, FDB , HFD, JD or HJD
with Class J fusing
Option 13HIC
FD, FDB, HFD, JD, HJD
HMCP, FD, FDB, HFD, JD, HJD,
KD, HKD, LD, HLD, MDL, HMDL
HMCPP with Option 13HIC
FDB, JD, KD, LD,
MDL with Option 13HIC
FD with Option 13HIC
HFD, HJD, HKD, HLD
HMDL with Option 13HIC
SMC Device rating

24A through 54A
97A through 180A
240A, 360A
500A
24A through 54A
97A
97A through 180A
240A
180A
360A
500A
360A
500A
500A
500A
24A through 500A
2155H
2155J
2155J
2155J

240V
480V
600V
5kA
5kA
5kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
18kA
18kA
18kA
30kA
30kA
30kA
5kA
5kA
5kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
18kA
18kA
18kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
18kA
18kA
18kA
30kA
30kA
25kA
18kA
18kA
18kA
30kA
30kA
30kA
30kA
30kA
25kA
30kA
30kA
30kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
5kA [1]
5kA [1]
5kA [1]
100kA
100kA
100kA
10kA
18kA
30kA
100kA
10kA
18kA
30kA
100kA
10kA
18kA
30kA
100kA
18kA
14kA
14kA
65kA
25kA
18kA
100kA
65kA
25kA
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3A through 85A
5A through 85A
108A through 135A
201A through 480A
5A through 85A
14
15
16
[1] Short circuit withstand (Amperes rms symmetrical) is 10kA for 60A and 85A ratings.
17
18
19
20
249
Appendix
2
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Variable Frequency

AC Drive Combination Fusible Disconnect Units for Bulletins 2162P, 2162Q, 2162R, 2164Q, 2162R, 2162T and 2164R
3
4
CC
Bulletin
Number
2162P
2162P
Type 170M Square Body
2162P
2162Q, 2162R
2164Q, 2162R, 2162T
Fuse Class
Short Circuit Withstand Rating (Amperes (rms Symmetrical)

240V
480V
600V
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
Horsepower
0.5-5
1-5
7.5-30
40-60
75-125
150-250
All ratings
All ratings
AC Drive Combination Circuit Breaker Units for Bulletins 2163P, 2163Q, 2163R, 2163T, 2165Q and 2165R
Circuit Breaker
Frame
Drive Input Fuse

Class
Bulletin Number
Horsepower
HMCP,
FD,
FDB,
HFD
CC
2163P
0.5-5
1-5
7.5-30
40-50
60
9
10
11
12
13
HMCP
HMCP250,
JD,
HJD
HMCP, FD, FDB, HFD
HMCP, FD, FDB, HFD
HMCP, FD, FDB, HFD,
HMCP250, HMCP400,
JDB, HJD, KDB, HKD
60-150 [1]
J
75-125
100kA
2163Q
2165Q, 2163T
All ratings
All ratings
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
2163R, 2165R
All ratings
100kA
100kA
[1] 150HP is for variable torque applications only.
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Programmable Controllers

The following tables show short circuit capabilities for combination units that are UL listed and CSA certified.
Fuse Class
Bulletin
Number
15
CC
2182E
2182J
2182L
16
Circuit
Breaker
Frame Type
Bulletin
Number
17
FDB
18
HFD
14
2163P
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings (Amperes rms

Symmetrical)
240V
480V
600V
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
FDB-LFD
19
20
250
2183E
2183J
2183L
2183E
2183J
2183L
2183E

240V
380-415V
480V
600V
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA

240V
380-415V
480V
600V
18kA
18kA
14kA
14kA
100kA
65kA
65kA
25kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
100kA
Appendix
kW to Catalog HP Code Conversion for

Bulletins 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, 2123, 2126 and 2127
kW
(For ratings other than
those listed, use the next
highest rating shown.)
0.06
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.8
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
6.3
7.5
10
11
13
15
17
18.5
20
Metric
HP
Required
NEMA HP
Rating
Required
Catalog HP
Code
0.08
0.12
0.16
0.24
0.34
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
2.4
3
4
5
5.5
7.5
8.5
10
13.5
15
18
20
23
25
27
0.125
0.125
0.25
0.25
0.33
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
3
5
5
7.5
7.5
10
10
15
15
20
20
25
25
30
30
30
31
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
kW
(For ratings other than
those listed, use the next
highest rating shown.)
22
25
30
32
37
40
45
50
55
63
75
80
90
100
110
125
132
150
160
185
200
220
250
315
2
Metric
HP
Required
NEMA HP
Rating
Required
Catalog HP
Code
30
34
40
43
50
54
60
68
75
85
100
110
125
136
150
169
180
205
220
250
270
300
340
430
30
40
40
50
50
60
60
75
75
100
100
125
125
150
150
200
200
250
250
250
300
300
350
400
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
54
54
56
56
56
57
57
58
59
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
251
Appendix
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Recommended Capacitor Sizes 480V and 600V

This table shows suggested capacitor ratings for T-frame NEMA Design B induction motors when the capacitor and motor
are switched as a unit. It is based on normal starting current and torque.
Horsepower
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
3600 RPM
2 kVAR
2.5 kVAR
4 kVAR
5 kVAR
6 kVAR
7.5 kVAR
8 kVAR
12.5 kVAR
15 kVAR
17.5 kVAR
20 kVAR
22.5 kVAR
25 kVAR
30 kVAR
35 kVAR
40 kVAR
45 kVAR
50 kVAR
75 kVAR
80 kVAR
100 kVAR
1800 RPM
2.5 kVAR
3 kVAR
4 kVAR
5 kVAR
6 kVAR
7.5 kVAR
8 kVAR
15 kVAR
17.5 kVAR
20 kVAR
25 kVAR
30 kVAR
35 kVAR
40 kVAR
50 kVAR
60 kVAR
70 kVAR
75 kVAR
80 kVAR
90 kVAR
120 kVAR
1200 RPM
3 kVAR
4 kVAR
5 kVAR
6 kVAR
7.5 kVAR
8 kVAR
10 kVAR
15 kVAR
20 kVAR
22.5 kVAR
25 kVAR
30 kVAR
35 kVAR
40 kVAR
50 kVAR
60 kVAR
75 kVAR
90 kVAR
100 kVAR
120 kVAR
150 kVAR
900 RPM
4 kVAR
5 kVAR
6 kVAR
7.5 kVAR
9 kVAR
10 kVAR
15 kVAR
17.5 kVAR
22.5 kVAR
25 kVAR
30 kVAR
35 kVAR
40 kVAR
50 kVAR
70 kVAR
80 kVAR
100 kVAR
120 kVAR
130 kVAR
140 kVAR
160 kVAR
This table shows suggested capacitor ratings for U-frame NEMA Design B induction motors when the capacitor and
motor are switched as a unit. It is based on normal starting current and torque.
Horsepower
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
19
20
252
3600 RPM
2 kVAR
2.5 kVAR
3 kVAR
4 kVAR
5 kVAR
6 kVAR
7 kVAR
9 kVAR
12.5 kVAR
15 kVAR
17.5 kVAR
22.5 kVAR
27.5 kVAR
30 kVAR
40 kVAR
50 kVAR
60 kVAR
60 kVAR
75 kVAR
75 kVAR
75 kVAR
1800 RPM
2 kVAR
2.5 kVAR
3 kVAR
4 kVAR
5 kVAR
6 kVAR
7 kVAR
9 kVAR
10 kVAR
15 kVAR
17.5 kVAR
20 kVAR
25 kVAR
30 kVAR
37.5 kVAR
45 kVAR
50 kVAR
60 kVAR
60 kVAR
75 kVAR
75 kVAR
1200 RPM
2 kVAR
3 kVAR
3 kVAR
5 kVAR
6 kVAR
7.5 kVAR
9 kVAR
10 kVAR
12.5 kVAR
15 kVAR
17.5 kVAR
25 kVAR
30 kVAR
35 kVAR
40 kVAR
50 kVAR
60 kVAR
75 kVAR
75 kVAR
80 kVAR
85 kVAR
900 RPM
3 kVAR
4 kVAR
5 kVAR
6 kVAR
7.5 kVAR
9 kVAR
10 kVAR
12.5 kVAR
15 kVAR
17.5 kVAR
20 kVAR
27.5 kVAR
30 kVAR
37.5 kVAR
50 kVAR
60 kVAR
60 kVAR
75 kVAR
85 kVAR
90 kVAR
100 kVAR
Appendix
Horsepower Ratings for Bulletin 2192F, Fusible Disconnect Feeder Switch (FDS) Units
Switch Ratings (Amperes)
30
60
100
200
400
600
Horsepower at Rated Motor Voltage

230V
380-415V
0.125-7.5
0.125-15
10-15
20-30
20-30
40-50
40-60
60-100
75-125
125-250
150-200
300-350
200V
0.125-7.5
10-15
20-25
30-50
60-100
125-150
460V
0.125-15
20-30
40-50
60-125
150-250
300-400
2
575V
0.125-20
25-40
50
60-150
175-350
400
3
4
5
Conductor Size Conversion Chart

Metric Conductor Size to American Wire Gauge Conductor Size
1.0 mm2
American Wire Gauge Size [1]

(actual size in mm2)
#18 (0.823)
1.5 mm2
#16 (1.31)
2.5 mm2
#14 (2.68)
4 mm2
#12 (3.31)
6 mm2
#10 (5.26)
10 mm2
#8 (8.37)
16 mm2
#6 (13.30)
25 mm2
#4 (21.13)
25 mm2
#3 [2] (26.67)
#2 (33.62)
Metric Conductor Size
35 mm2
50 mm2
#1 [2] (44.21)
#1/0 (53.49)
70 mm2
#2/0 (67.43)
95 mm2
#3/0 (85.01)
95 mm2
120 mm2
#4/0 [2] (107.20)

250 kcmil (127.0)
150 mm2
300 kcmil (152.0)
185 mm2
350 kcmil (177.0)
185 mm2
400 kcmil [2] (203.0)
240 mm2
500 kcmil (253.0)
300 mm2
600 kcmil (304.0)
400 mm2
750 kcmil (350.0)
35 mm2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
[1] Reference IEC Standard 60947-1, table I.

[2] This American wire gauge conductor size is the closest equivalent to the metric
conductor size.
16
17
18
19
20
253
Appendix
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
Metric Conversion Table

English
Measurement
(inches)
0.016
0.031
0.063
0.094
0.125
0.156
0.188
0.218
0.250
0.281
0.313
0.375
0.438
0.500
0.563
0.625
0.688
0.750
0.875
0.938
Metric
Equivalent
(millimeter)
0.40
0.79
1.59
2.38
3.18
3.97
4.76
5.56
6.35
7.14
7.94
9.53
11.11
12.70
14.29
15.88
17.46
19.05
22.23
23.81
1 inch = 2.54 centimeters

1 foot = 12 inches
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
254
English
Measurement
(inches)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
200
Metric
Equivalent
(millimeter)
25.40
50.80
76.20
101.60
127.00
152.40
177.80
203.20
228.60
254.00
508.00
762.00
1016.00
1270.00
1524.00
1778.00
2032.00
2286.00
2540.00
5080.00
Appendix
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162P and 2163P

System
Voltage
NEMA
Enclosure
Type
1, 1G
220V-240V
12
1, 1G
Bulletin
2162P and
Bulletin
2163P
Venting
Internal
Circulating Fan(s)
Door Mounted
Exhaust Fan(s)
0.5-1 (0.37-1.1)
1.5- 5 (1.5-3.7)
7.5-30 (5.5-22)
0.5-1 (0.37-1.1)
1.5-5 (1.5-3.7)
7.5-30 (5.5-22)
0.5-2 (0.25-1.5)
3-5 (2.2-3.7)
7.5-20 (5.5-15)
25-60 (18.5-37)
None
None
Yes
None
None
Yes (filtered and gasketed)
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
Yes
Yes
None
Yes
Yes
None
Yes
None
Yes
Yes
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
Yes
Yes
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
75-150 [1] (45-90)

380V-480V
12
1, 1G
600V
12
Horsepower (kW)
150-250 [2] (110-160)

0.5-2 (0.25-1.5)
3-5 (2.2-3.7)
7.5-20 (5.5-15)
25-60 (11-37)
75-150 [1] (45-90)
1-20
25-60
75-125
150-250 [2]
1-15
20-60
75-125
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
[1] 150HP for variable torque application only.

[2] Bulletin 2162P only.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
255
Appendix
2
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q and 2163R

System
Voltage
NEMA
Enclosure
Type
1, 1G
220-240V
12
5
1, 1G
380-415V
12
Bulletins
2162Q and
2163Q
1, 1G
480V
12
10
1, 1G
600V
12
11
1, 1G
12
380-415V
12
13
1, 1G
14
Bulletins
2162R and
2163R
480V
12
15
1, 1G
16
600
12
17
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Venting
Internal
Circulating Fan(s)
Door Mounted
Exhaust Fan(s)
2.2-4.2
6.8-28
2.2
4.2-22
30
1.3 - 5.0
8.7 - 72
1.3 - 22
28
37 - 72
1.1 - 3.4
5.0
8.0 - 65
1.1 - 2.1
3.4 - 22
27
34 - 65
0.9-2.7
3.9-22
0.9-1.7
2.7-17
22
1.3 - 5.0
8.7 - 30
37 - 56
72 - 255
1.3 - 43
56 - 72
105 - 170
1.1 - 5.0
8.0 - 255
1.1 - 34
40 (without reactor)
40 (with reactor)
52 - 65
96 - 180
1.7 - 3.9
6.1 - 144
1.7 - 27
32 (without reactor)
32 (with reactor)
41 - 144
Yes
Yes
None
None
Yes
Yes
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
None
Yes
Yes
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
Yes
Yes
None
None
Yes
Yes
None
None
None
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
Yes
None
Yes
None
None
None
None
Yes
None
Yes
None
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
None
None
Yes
Yes
None
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
None
Yes
None
None
Yes
Yes
None
None
[1] If -14RLX or -14RXL is specified for the 3.9A @ 600V or 5.0A @ 480V unit, the unit door will be supplied with input and exhaust venting.
18
19
20
256
Yes [1]
Yes
None
None
None
Yes [1]
None
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
Yes
None
None
Appendix
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2164Q and 2165Q

System
Voltage
480
Bulletins
2164Q and
2165Q
NEMA
Enclosure
Type
1, 1G
12
1, 1G
600
12
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Venting
Internal
Circulating Fan(s)
Door Mounted
Exhaust Fan(s)
1.1-27
1.1-22
27
0.9-22
0.9-17
22
Yes
None
Yes
None
None
Yes
None
None
Yes
None
Yes
None
Yes
None
NEMA
Enclosure
Type
1, 1G
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Venting
Internal
Circulating Fan(s)
Door Mounted
Exhaust Fan(s)
1.1 - 180
Yes
None
Yes
None
None
Yes
Yes
None
None
Yes
Yes
None
Yes
None
Yes
None
[1]
480
Bulletins
2164R and
2165R
12
1, 1G
600
1.1 - 40
52 - 65
77 - 180
1.7 - 144A
1.7 - 32 [2]
12
41 - 52
62 - 144A
4
5
6
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2164R and 2165R

System
Voltage
7
8
9
10
[1] Door mounted exhaust fan (filtered and gasketed) added when line or load reactor is added to 40A unit.
[2] Door mounted exhaust fan (filtered and gasketed) added when line or load reactor is added to 32A unit.
11
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162T and 2163T

System
Voltage
380-415
Bulletins
2162T and
2163T
NEMA
Enclosure
Type
1, 1G
12
1, 1G
480
12
1, 1G
600
12
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Venting
Internal
Circulating Fan(s)
Door Mounted
Exhaust Fan(s)
1.4 - 24
Yes
None
None
Yes
None
None
Yes
None
None
None
Yes
None
None
Yes
None
None
Yes
None
None
1.4 - 2.3 [1]

4.0 - 24
1.4 - 24
1.4 - 2.3 [1]
4.0 - 24
1.7 - 19
1.7 [2]
3.0 - 19
None [1]
Yes
None
None [1]
Yes
None
None [2]
Yes
12
13
14
15
[1] When line or load reactors are specified in 2.3A drive unit, an internal circulating fan is added.
[2] When line or load reactors are specified in 1.7A drive unit, an internal circulating fan is added.
16
17
18
19
20
257
Appendix
2
Drive Frame Sizes

Bulletins 2162P and 2163P
3
Drive Frame Size
4
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C
D
E
Nominal Horsepower
(Nominal kW)
The limiting factor in the application and use of 1336 PLUS II drives is the output ampere rating.
220-230V
240V
380-415V
480V
480V
600V
Constant Torque
Constant Torque
Constant Torque
Constant Torque
Variable Torque
Constant Torque
(0.37-1.1)
0.5-1
(0.25-1.1)
0.5-1.5
0.5-1.5
(1.5)
1.5-2
(1.5-2.2)
2-3
2-3
(2.2-3.7)
3-5
(3.7)
5
5
(5.5-15)
7.5-20
7.5-20
1-20
(5.5-11)
7.5-15
(18.5-22)
25-30
25-30
(15-22)
20-30
(30-37)
40-60
40-60
25-60
(45-90)
75-125
75-150
75-125
(110-160)
150-250
200-250
150-250
Bulletins 2162Q, 2163Q, 2164Q and 2165Q

Drive Frame
Size
10
B
11
C
12
D
13
E
14
220-240V
2.2
4.2
6.8
9.6
15.3
22
28

380-415V
480V
1.1
2.1
3.4
1.3
5
2.1
8
3.5
8.7
11.5
11
15.4
14
22
22
30
27
37
34
43
40
60
52
72
65
600V
0.9
1.7
2.7
3.9
6.1
9
11
17
22
Bulletins 2162R, 2163R, 2164R and 2165R

Drive Frame
Size
15
0
16
1
17
18
19
20
258
380-415V
1.3
2.1
3.5
5
8.7
11
15
22
30
37
Output Current
480V
1.1
2.1
3.4
5
8
11
14
22
27
34
600V
1.7
2.7
3.9
6.1
9.0
11
17
22
27
Drive Frame
Size
3
4
5
6
9
380-415V
43
56
72
77
105
170
255
Output Current
480V
40
52
65
77
96
125
156
180
255
600V
32
41
52
62
77
125
144
Appendix
Drive Frame Sizes
Bulletins 2162T and 2163T

Drive Frame Size
380-415V
1.4
2.3
4.0
6.0
10.5
12
17
24
Output Current
480V
1.4
2.3
4.0
6.0
10.5
12
17
24
600V
1.7
3.0
4.2
6.6
9.9
12.2
19
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
259
Appendix
2
Control Circuit Transformer Rating Chart for Bulletins 2182E, 2182L, 2183E and 2183L
Power Supply Type
Rack Size
3
(1) 4-slot
(1) 7-slot
(1) 8-slot
(1) 8-slot
(2) 8-slot
(1) 16-slot
(2) 16-slot
(1) 16-slot
(2) 16-slot
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
260
Space Factor
1.5
2.0
3.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
6.0, 25 W
6.0, 25 W
6.0, 35 W
6.0, 35 W
6.0, 40 W
6.0, 40 W
None, 12P4S1, 12P4S2,

12P4R2 or 12PA72
250 VA
250 VA
250 VA
250 VA
250 VA
250 VA
(1) 250 VA
(2) 250 VA
250 VA
(2) 250 VA
250 VA
500 VA
12P2
12P7
12P4R3 or 12P4R4
250 VA
250 VA
(1) 250VA
(2) 250 VA
250 VA
(2) 250 VA
(1) 500VA
(2) 500 VA
500 VA
(2) 500 VA
500 VA
1 kVA
500 VA
(2) 500 VA
500 VA
1 kVA
Index
Numerics
100% Rating of Main Disconnect Switch or Circuit Breaker . . 126
71" High Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
8A Round DeviceNet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Accu-Stop on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . . . 151
Additional Unit Space on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units .
118
American Bureau of Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Analog Interface Board on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Analog Output Isolation on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Automatic Shutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Auxiliary Contacts on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 153
Auxiliary Contacts on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Auxiliary Contacts on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 124,
132
Auxiliary Contacts on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Auxiliary Contacts on SC-I and PE-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
B
Back-to-Back Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Blank Unit Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Blown Fuse Indicator Lights on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Bolt-on Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch Breakers for Lighting
Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Bottom Closing Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 225
Bulletin
2102L, Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2103L, Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Circuit Breaker
(FVLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2106, Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect
Switch (FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2106, Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Reversing Starter
Unit with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVR) . . . . . . 41
2107, Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker
(FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2107, Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Reversing Starter
Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2112 Vacuum, Full Voltage Non-Reversing Vacuum Starter Unit
with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVNR) . . . . . . . 44
2112, Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2112, Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Non-Reversing
Starter Unit with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVNR) 47
2113 Vacuum, Full Voltage Non-Reversing Vacuum Starter Unit
with Circuit Breaker (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2113, Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2113, Space Saving NEMA-Rated Full Voltage Non-Reversing
Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR) . . . . . . 47
2122E, Two Speed 2-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS2W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2122F, Two Speed 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS1W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2123E, Two Speed 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker
(TS2W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2123F, Two Speed 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker
(TS1W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2126E, Two Speed Reversing 2-Winding Starters with Fusible
Disconnect Switch (TSR2W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2126F, Two Speed Reversing 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible
Disconnect Switch (TSR1W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2126J, Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 2-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR2W) 54
2126K, Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR1W) 54
2127E, Two Speed Reversing 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit
Breaker (TSR2W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2127F, Two Speed Reversing 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit
Breaker (TSR1W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2127J, Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR2W) . . . . . . . . 56
2127K, Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR1W) . . . . . . . . 56
2154G, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible
Disconnect Switch (SMC Dialog PLUS) . . . . . . 136
2154H, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible
Disconnect Switch (SMC-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
2154J, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible
Disconnect Switch (SMC-Flex) . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
2155G, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit
Breaker (SMC Dialog PLUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2155H, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit
Breaker (SMC-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
2155J, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit
Breaker (SMC-Flex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2160P, 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Load Reactor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2162P, Combination Bulletin 1336 PLUS II Variable Frequency AC
Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect, 220V-240V (Constant Torque) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 163
Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect, 380V-480V (Constant Torque) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect, 480V (Variable
Torque) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect, 600V (Constant
Torque) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2162Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480V 172
261
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Index
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600V . . . . 173
2162R, Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480VAC .
177, 178, 180
2162T, Combination PowerFlex 40 Variable Frequency AC Drive
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480VAC 182
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600VAC . . 183
Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker, 220V-240V (Constant
Torque) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker, 380V-480V (Constant
Torque) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker, 480V (Variable Torque)
169
Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker, 600V (Constant
Torque) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
2163Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 AC Variable Frequency Drive
(VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 380-480V . . . . 174
2163Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 AC Variable Frequency Drive
(VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 600V . . . . . . . 175
(VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 380-480VAC . 179
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480VAC 184
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600VAC . . 185
(VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 480V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
(VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 600V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
(VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 480VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
(VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 600VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 195
(VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 480V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
(VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 600V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
(VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 480VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
2172, Closed Transition Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Type
Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (RVAT)
58
2173, Closed Transition Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Type
Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (RVAT) . . . . . . . 59
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
262
2180E, 2182E, and 2183E, Bulletin 1771 Programmable Controller

I/O Chassis (PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2180J, 2182J, and 2183J, Bulletin 1746 SLC 500 Programmable
Controller (PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
2180L, 2182L, and 2183L, Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix Programmable Controller (PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
2181B, Marshalling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2190, Metering Compartments (METER) . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 64
2191M and 2191F, Lug CompartmentsProvisions for Basic Sections/Incoming Lines (MLUG) and Outgoing Feeders
(FLUG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2191M, Lug Compartments/Incoming LineDimensions 71, 72
2191M, Lug Compartments/Incoming Lines Metering Options .
70
2192F, Fusible Disconnect SwitchFeeders (FDS) . . . . . . 74
2192M, Fusible Disconnect SwitchMains (MFDS) . . . . . 75
2193F, 3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB) . . . . . . 78, 79, 80
2193LE, Frame-Mounted Lighting Panel for Bolt-on Branch Circuit
Breakers (LPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2193M, 3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB) . . . 81, 82, 83, 84
2193PP, Plug-in Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN)
89
2195, Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 94
2196, Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96, 97, 98
2197, Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker
(XFMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 100, 101, 102
Bus Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Bus Stab Isolation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
C
Capacitor Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Cardholder for Unit Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
CE Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Circuit Breaker Characteristics for Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Units
246
Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Circuit Breaker on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . 126
Circuit Breaker Suffix Letter Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
for Bulletin 2113 Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
for Bulletins 2107, 2113, 2123, 2127, and 2173 . . . . . . . . 223
for Bulletins 2163N, 2163P, and 2163Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
for Horsepower and kW Rated Units for Bulletins 2155E, 2155F,
and 2155G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Solid State) Circuit Breaker
Options for Bulletin 2103L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Options for Bulletin 2197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Communication Module on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
148
Communication Modules on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Conductor Size Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Contactors and Starters
Catalog Number Explanations 35, 61, 66, 73, 77, 86, 88, 92,
Index
103, 138, 141, 213
Control Circuit Fuse on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 118
Control Circuit Lugs on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Control Circuit Ring Lugs on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
154
Control Circuit Spade Lugs on Combination Soft Starter Controller
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Control Circuit Transformer on Combination Variable Frequency AC
Motor Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Control Circuit Transformer on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 130
Control Circuit Transformer Rating Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Control Circuit Wiring on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
154
Control Circuit Wiring on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Control Circuit Wiring on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units
126
Control Logic Interface Board on Combination Variable Frequency AC
Control Station Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Control Station Housing on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
145
Control Station Housing on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
111
Control Station Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Control Terminal Block on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
154
Control Terminal Block on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
125
Control Voltage Type
for Bulletins 2102, 2103, 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, 2123,
2126, 2127, 2172, and 2173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
for Bulletins 2154 and 2155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
for Bulletins 2162, 2163, 2164, and 2165 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Control Wire Markers on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
154
Control Wire Markers on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Control Wire Markers on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
126
ControlLogix Communication Modules on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ControlLogix Processor on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ControlLogix Programming Cable on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ControlNet to DeviceNet Linking Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ControlNet T-Tap on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Converter Module on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 147
Corner Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CSA Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
C-UL Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Current Sensors on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Current Transducers on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
D
Delivery Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DeviceNet
and IntelliCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cabling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Hardware and Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Miscellaneous Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Motor Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DeviceNet Communication Module on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
DeviceNet Communication Module with Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Communication Modules on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
DeviceNet Connection Cover Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Field Support Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Scanner Module on Marshalling Panels and Programmable
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
DeviceNet Scanner Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary on Combination Soft Starter Controller
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
DeviceNet Terminating Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Trunk Line Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Unit Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Door Hardware Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Door Hinge Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Door Mounted Speed Potentiometer on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Door, Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Drip Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 225
Drive Frame Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 259
E
E3 Solid-State Overload Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Elapsed Time Meter on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Empty Unit Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Empty Unit Insert with Disconnecting Means . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
End Closing Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Ethernet to DeviceNet Linking Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Export Packing Below Deck for Sections on SC-I and PE-I . . . . . 23
Export Packing Below Deck on Combination Soft Starter Controller
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Export Packing Below Deck on Combination Variable Frequency AC
263
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Index
2
3
4
5
6
7

Export Packing Below Deck on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Export Packing Below Deck on Marshalling Panels and Programmable
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Extended Reset Button Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
External Auxiliary Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
External Auxiliary Contact Adapter Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 230
External Auxiliary Contact Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
External DeviceNet Connector Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
External DeviceNet Connector with 120VAC Receptacle on Contactors
and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power
Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
External Mounting Channel Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
F
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Fan(s) and Ventilation

in Bulletins 2162P and 2163P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, and 2163R . . . . . . . . 256
in Bulletins 2164Q and 2165Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
in Bulletins 2164R and 2165R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Field-Mounted Equipment Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Filters for Door Vents on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
French Legend Plates on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units .
154
French Legend Plates on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
French Legend Plates on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Full Load Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 245
Fuse Clip Designator Selection and Power Fuse Selection
for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F, and 2192M . . . . . . . . 220
for Bulletins 2106, 2112, 2122, 2126, 2127, and 2172 . . . 219
for Bulletins 2154F and 2154G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
G
Gasketing Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Ground Detection Lights on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
120
Ground Fault Protection on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
120
Ground Lug, Outgoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Grounded Unit Door on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . .
152
Grounded Unit Door on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Grounded Unit Door on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Grounded Unit Door on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Grounded Unit Door on SC-I and PE-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
H
Hardware and Kits
8A Round DeviceNet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
264
Bolt-on Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch Breakers for

Lighting Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Bottom Closing Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Bus Stab Isolation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Cardholder for Unit Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Control Station Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Control Station Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
DeviceNet Communication Module with Inputs . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Connection Cover Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Field Support Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Scanner Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Terminating Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Trunk Line Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DeviceNet Unit Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Door Hardware Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Door Hinge Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Drip Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
End Closing Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Extended Reset Button Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
External Auxiliary Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
External Auxiliary Contact Adapter Kits . . . . . . . . . . 229, 230
External Auxiliary Contact Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
External Mounting Channel Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Gasketing Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Horizontal Power Bus Splice Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Horizontal Wireway Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Incoming Line Lug Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch Breakers for Panel Board
Plug-In Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Line Terminal Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Lugs for Incoming Line Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
MCC DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Neutral Connection Plate Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
NO-OX-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Plug-In Unit Retrofit Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Pull-Apart Terminal Bocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Pullbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Round DeviceNet Cable with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Space Heater Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Touch-Up Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Unit Door Grounding Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Unit Door Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Unit Insert Extension Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Unit Isolating Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Unit Operating Handle Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Unit Support Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Vertical Ground Bus Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Vertical Wireway Tie Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Wiring Diagram Holder Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Heater Element Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Heater Element Selection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241, 244
Horizontal Ground Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Index
Horizontal Power Bus on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Horizontal Power Bus Splice Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Horizontal Wireway Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Horsepower Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Horsepower Ratings for All Bulletins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Human Interface Module (HIM) on Combination Soft Starter Controller
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Human Interface Module (HIM) on Combination Variable Frequency AC
I
I/O Control Voltage on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
IEC 60439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Incoming Line Lug Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Incoming Lug Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Incoming Neutral Bus on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Incoming Neutral Connection Plate on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
IntelliCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
IntelliCENTER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Interposing Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch Breakers for Panel Board
Plug-In Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
ISO 9001 Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Isolation Contactor on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 149
K
Key-interlock Mounting Provision on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
kW Ratings for Bulletins 2154, 2155, 2162, 2163, 2164, and 2165 .
218
kW to Catalog Hp Code Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
L
Light and Door Switch on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Line or Load Reactors on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Line Reactor Space Factor Adders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 204, 205
Line Terminal Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Lug Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69, 87, 94
Lugs for Incoming Line Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
M
Manual Shutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Master Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
MCC DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Meter Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64
Metric Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Miscellaneous DeviceNet Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Miscellaneous Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 109
Motor Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
N
NEMA
Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Enclosure Type Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Type 1 with gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Type 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Type 3R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Type 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NEMA-Rated Bulletin 2106 and 2107, Full Voltage Reversing Starters
(FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
NEMA-Rated Bulletin 2112 and 2113, Full Voltage Non-Reversing
Starters (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Neutral Connection Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Neutral Connection Plate Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Neutral Connection Plate Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NO-OX-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
O
O/L Contact on Left Side of Circuit on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Options for Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
Accu-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Add Isolation Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Add SCR Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Auxiliary Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Control Circuit Ring Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Control Circuit Spade Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Control Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Control Wire Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Converter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
DeviceNet Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Export Packing Below Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
French Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Ground Fault Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Grounded Unit Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
High Interrupting Capacity Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Human Interface Module (HIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Omit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Preset Slow Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Protective Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Slow Speed with Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
SMB Smart Motor Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Soft Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Surge Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
T-Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Unit Ground Stab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
265
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Index
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Unit Load Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Unwired Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Options for Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
Analog Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Analog Output Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Control Circuit Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Control Logic Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Control Wire Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
DeviceNet Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Door Mounted Speed Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Export Packing Below Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Human Interface Module (HIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
I/O Control Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Line or Load Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Push Buttons and Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
T-Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Unit Ground Stab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Options for Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units
100% Rating of Main Disconnect Switch or Circuit Breaker 126
480V and 600V Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . 119
Additional Unit Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Blown Fuse Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Control Circuit Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Control Circuit Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Control Circuit Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Control Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Current Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
E3 Solid-State Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Elapsed Time Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
External DeviceNet Connector with 120VAC Receptacle . 127
Filters for Door Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Ground Detection Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Incoming Neutral Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Incoming Neutral Connection Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Interposing Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
21
266
Key-interlock Mounting Provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

O/L Contact on Left Side of Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Omission of Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Omission of Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Omit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Overload Relay Auxiliary Contact (Eutectic Alloy) . . . . . . 118
Overload Relay Heater Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 113
Provision for Field Installed SMP-1 Solid State Overload Relay
115
Provision for Field Installed SMP-2 Solid State Overload Relay
115
Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Push Buttons and Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
SMP-1 Solid State Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
SMP-2 Solid State Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Surge Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
T-Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Thermistor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Unit Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Unit Ground Stab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Unit Load Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Unwired Pull-Apart Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Unwired Timer Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Options for Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers
ControlLogix Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ControlLogix Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ControlLogix Programming Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ControlNet T-Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
DeviceNet Scanner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Export Packing Below Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Light and Door Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Omit Horizontal Power Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
T-Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Unit Ground Stab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Options for SC-I and PE-I Sections
Auxiliary Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Export Packing Below Deck for Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Grounded Unit Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
T-Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Options for Space Saving NEMA-Rated Starter Units
Additional Unit Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Control Circuit Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Control Circuit Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Index
E1 Plus Electronic Overload Rela . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
E3 Electronic Overload Rela . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Elapsed Time Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Omit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Push Buttons and Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Surge Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
T-Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Unit Door Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Unit Ground Stab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Outgoing Lug Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Overload Relay Auxiliary Contact (Eutectic Alloy) on Contactors and
Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels,
and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Overload Relay Class Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Overload Relay Heater Elements on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
P
Parts Illustrations
Typical 15" Deep Section Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Pilot Lights on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . . . 146
Pilot Lights on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
197
Pilot Lights on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 112, 113, 129
Plug-In Unit Retrofit Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Power Factor Correction Capacitors on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Power Supply on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers
215
Power Terminal Blocks on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
125
Preset Slow Speed on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 151
Primary Voltage Code for Bulletins 2195, 2196, and 2197 . . . . 217
Protective Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Protective Modules on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 147
Provision for Field Installed SMP-1 Solid State Overload Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and
Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Provision for Field Installed SMP-2 Solid State Overload Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and
Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Publication Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Pull-Apart Terminal Bocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Pullbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Pump Control on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . 151
Push Buttons and Selector Switch on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Push Buttons on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . 145
Push Buttons on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
197
Push Buttons on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . 111
2
3
4
5
R
6
Round DeviceNet Cable with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
S
SCR Fuses on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . . . 149
Section Modification
SC and PE-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SC-II and PE-II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 25, 26, 27, 28
Seismic Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Selector Switch on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . 145
Selector Switch on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Selector Switch on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Serial Number Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Series Letter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Service and Storage Conditions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Circuit Breaker Units
248
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Fusible Disconnect
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Soft Starter Controller
Units (SMCs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Variable Frequency
AC Motor Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Programmable Controllers 250
Shunt Trip on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . . . 154
Shunt Trip on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . 126
Shunt Trip on SC-I and PE-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Shutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Slow Speed with Braking on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
151
SMB Smart Motor Braking on Combination Soft Starter Controller
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Smoke Detector Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
SMP-1 Solid State Overload Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
SMP-2 Solid State Overload Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Soft Stater Controller (SMC) Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Soft Stop on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . . . . 151
Space Heater Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Space Saving NEMA-Rated Bulletin 2106 and 2107, Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Space Saving NEMA-Rated Bulletin 2112 and 2113, Full Voltage
267
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Index
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Non-Reversing Starters (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Combination Variable Frequency
AC Motor Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Suffix Letter Designation
Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Surge Protective Device Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Surge Suppressor on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 152
Surge Suppressor on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
T
9
10
11
12
13
Terminal Blocks on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers

216
T-Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
T-Handle on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . . . . 154
T-Handle on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
205
T-Handle on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders,
T-Handle on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers 216
T-Handle on SC-I and PE-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Thermistor Protection Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Touch-Up Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Trip Current for Bulletin 2103L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Type 2 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
14 U
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
UL/cUL/CSA Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Unit Ammeter on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . 120
Unit Door Grounding Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Unit Door Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Unit Door Nameplates on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
154
Unit Door Nameplates on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Unit Door Nameplates on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
127
Unit Door Nameplates on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Unit Ground Stab on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 152
Unit Ground Stab on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Unit Ground Stab on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Unit Ground Stab on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers
268
215
Unit Insert Extension Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Unit Insert, Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Unit Isolating Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 226
Unit Load Connector on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units .
152
Unit Load Connector on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Drive Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Unit Load Connector on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Unit Operating Handle Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Unit Support Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Units and Sections
Series Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Unwired Control Relay on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
152
Unwired Control Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
123
Unwired Pull-Apart Terminal Blocks on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Unwired Timer Auxiliary on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
120
V
Vertical Ground Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Vertical Ground Bus Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Vertical Section Catalog Numbers
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Vertical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Catalog Number Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Vertical Wireway Tie Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
W
Weights of CENTERLINE Motor Control Center Sections . . . . . 238
Wire Markers, Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Wiring Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Wiring Diagram Holder Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Wiring on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units . . . . . . . . 152
Wiring on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Wiring Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Enclosed Assemblies from Rockwell Automation

For More Information:
visit www.ab.com/mvb
The reputation for mechanical safety, simplicity and durability now integrated with the
or
intelligence of solid state technology.
Contact your authorized
Allen-Bradley distributor
The Allen-Bradley IntelliCENTER Medium Voltage Motor Control Center provides users with an integrated hardware, software and
communications solution. The IntelliCENTER features pre-configured software which shows real-time data, trending, component
history, wiring diagrams, user manuals and spare parts.
Our wide range of full voltage controllers, mechanical or solid-state reduce voltage controllers and variable frequency AC drives
are available in voltage ratings from 2,400 to 6,900 volts and can be applied to motors ranging in size from 75 kW (100 hp)
to 7,500 kW (10,000 hp).
CENTERLINE Medium Voltage Motor Control
A Complete Line of Induction and Synchronous Controllers Also Available.
Full Voltage Non-Reversing

Two-Speed
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer
Reduced Voltage Reactor
Brush Type Synchronous
Brushless Synchronous
Incoming Line Units
Solid State Soft Starters
Fused & Non-Fused Load Break
Switches
Local Drive Solutions

Global Solutions, Locally Delivered
Application-Matched Drive Packaging
Regional manufacturing locations provide drive packaging for the toughest applications. From
special enclosures such as NEMA 4X and explosion proof through higher volume and pre-engineering OEM packaging; Local Drive Solutions has the flexibility and responsiveness to keep you
competitive. Local Drive Solutions also provides system upgrades that allow you to enjoy the
benefits of the latest technology through turnkey solutions.
High Density Drive Packaging
To Learn More about our Services visit:

http://www.automation.rockwell.com/gds/
Value-Added Panel Solutions

One-of-a-kind application? Unique configuration? Only need one? We can help!
Well known for expertise in special orders - using optimal technology for each application and drawing from
Rockwell Automations extensive products and complementary products from other suppliers to meet your needs.
Outsourced Panel Manufacturing
Focus on your core business. Let Engineered Solutions Business provide your turnkey control panel, helping to get
your products to market faster - through innovation, cutting purchasing, material handling, design
cycle and implementation times. Lowering your total costs of Control Programs, UL & CSA
Authorized Panel Facilities, Competitive Pricing, High Volume Assembly Capabilities and Global
Project Coordination.
ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System, Bulletin 2030
For More Information:

Introducing a new standard for hazardous energy isolation
Contact your authorized Rock Greatly eases the task of machine operator or maintenace personnel to properly
well Automation Sales Office
perform lockout/tagout procedures - greater assurance of compliance with the added
or Allen-Bradley distributor
value of improved productivity.
As standard, ElectroGuard includes low voltage remote lockout stations with a power panel, factory sealed modules,
certification to safety Category 4 - with available options to provide the complete solution in a flexible maintanable,
cost-effective system.

Allen Bradley

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Allen Bradley

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Allen Bradley

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product Catalogues

Motor Control Centers

Publication 2100-CA001C-EN-P August, 2005

Motor Control Centers

New Products in this Catalog

Contactor and Starter Units

Main and Feeder Units

Lighting and Power Panel Units

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Contactors and Starters, Metering,

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Space Saving NEMA-Rated Starter

Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC)

Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Variable Frequency

Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling Panels

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Programmable Controllers and

Hardware and Kits

Contactor and Starter Units

Main and Feeder Units

Lighting and Power Panel Units

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Contactors and Starters, Metering,

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Space Saving NEMA-Rated Starter

Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC)

Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Variable Frequency

Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling Panels

Hardware and Kits

CENTERLINE Motor Control Center

ISO 9001 Certification

Other Catalogs for CENTERLINE Motor

IntelliCENTER Motor Control Center

[1] Publication numbers of this format contain a revision character (e.g.,

The facilities that develop and manufacture CENTERLINE

Other Resource Publications for

Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales

American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)

NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison

NEMA Enclosure Type Descriptions

Delivery Program Indications

Service and Storage Conditions

DeviceNet Products DeviceNet

Look for the DeviceNet logo throughout this publication to find

Post Shipment Support

General Terms and Conditions of Sale

Serial Number and Series Letter Information

From 1980 to 1996, only numbers 600000 to 999999 were used.

Factory Order No.

[1] Prefix letters I, O, Q, S, U and V are not used.

Series Identification for Sections

Changed terminal blocks

Elimination of external mounting channels

Reverse fed 2192 and 2193

42K bracingincorporates new bus support and cover

65K bracingincorporates new bus support and cover

New hinge design

Date Implemented in U.S.

Section Nameplate Data

Unit Label Data

Series Identification for Units